diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'old/files/LatinBegin1.html')
| -rw-r--r-- | old/files/LatinBegin1.html | 18731 |
1 files changed, 18731 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/old/files/LatinBegin1.html b/old/files/LatinBegin1.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d3e0b42 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/files/LatinBegin1.html @@ -0,0 +1,18731 @@ + +<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> +<html> +<head> +<title>Latin for Beginners (Lessons)</title> +<meta http-equiv = "Content-Type" content = "text/html; charset=UTF-8"> + +<link rel = "stylesheet" type = "text/css" href = "latinstyles.css"> + +</head> + +<body> + +<span class = "pagenum">viii</span> +<h4>CONTENTS</h4> + +<table> +<tr> +<td class = "number smaller">LESSON</td> +<td></td> +<td class = "number smaller">PAGE</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td> +<div class = "plainnote"> +<a href = "../index.html#pagev">Preface</a> +</div> +<div class = "plainnote"> +<a href = "../index.html#display">Display Problems</a></div> +</td> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td><span class = "smallcaps"> +To the Student</span>—By way of Introduction</td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page1">1-4</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan = "3"> +<h5>PART I. THE PRONUNCIATION OF LATIN</h5> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td><p class = "hanging smallcaps"> +Alphabet, Sounds of the Letters, Syllables, Quantity, Accent, How to +Read Latin</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page5">5-11</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan = "3"> +<h5>PART II. WORDS AND FORMS</h5> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">I-VI.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">First Principles</span>—<i>Subject and +Predicate, Inflection, Number, Nominative Subject, Possessive Genitive, +Agreement of Verb, Direct Object, Indirect Object, etc.</i>—<span +class = "smallcaps">Dialogue</span> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page12">12-24</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">VII-VIII.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">First or +<i>Ā</i>-Declension</span>—<i>Gender, Agreement of Adjectives, +Word Order</i> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page25">25-30</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">IX-X.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Second or <i>O</i>-Declension—General +Rules for Declension</span>—<i>Predicate Noun, +Apposition</i>—<span class = "smallcaps">Dialogue</span> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page31">31-35</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XI.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Adjectives of the First and Second +Declensions</span> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page36">36-37</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XII.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Nouns in</span> <b>-ius</b> <span class = +"smallcaps">and</span> <b>-ium</b>—<span class = +"smallcaps">Germānia</span> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page38">38-39</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XIII.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Second Declension</span> +(<i>Continued</i>)—Nouns in <b>-er</b> and <b>-ir</b>—<span +class = "smallcaps">Italia</span>—<span class = +"smallcaps">Dialogue</span> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page39">39-41</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XIV.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Possessive Adjective Pronouns</span> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page42">42-43</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XV.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Ablative Denoting With</span>—<i>Cause, +Means, Accompaniment, Manner</i>—<span class = "smallcaps">The +Romans Prepare for War</span> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page44">44-46</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XVI.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">The Nine Irregular Adjectives</span> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page46">46-47</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XVII.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">The Demonstrative</span> <b>is</b>, <b>ea</b>, +<b>id</b>—<span class = "smallcaps">Dialogue</span> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page48">48-50</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XVIII.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Conjugation</span>—Present, Imperfect, +and Future of <b>sum</b>—<span class = "smallcaps">Dialogue</span> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page51">51-53</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XIX.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Present Active Indicative of</span> <b>amō</b> +<span class = "smallcaps">and</span> <b>moneō</b> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page54">54-56</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XX.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Imperfect Active Indicative of</span> +<b>amō</b> <span class = "smallcaps">and</span> +<b>moneō</b>—<i>Meaning of the Imperfect</i>—<span class = +"smallcaps">Niobe and her Children</span> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page56">56-57</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XXI.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Future Active Indicative of</span> <b>amō</b> +<span class = "smallcaps">and</span> <b>moneō</b>—<span class = +"smallcaps">Niobe and her Children</span> (<i>Concluded</i>) +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page58">58-59</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XXII.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Review of Verbs</span>—<i>The Dative +with Adjectives</i>—<span class = "smallcaps">Cornelia and her +Jewels</span> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page59">59-61</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class = "number">XXIII.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "pagenum">ix</span> +<span class = "smallcaps">Present Active Indicative of</span> +<b>regō</b> <span class = "smallcaps">and</span> +<b>audiō</b>—<span class = "smallcaps">Cornelia and her +Jewels</span> (<i>Concluded</i>) +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page61">61-63</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XXIV.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Imperfect Active Indicative of</span> +<b>regō</b> <span class = "smallcaps">and</span> +<b>audiō</b>—<i>The Dative with Special Intransitive Verbs</i> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page63">63-65</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XXV.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Future Active Indicative of</span> <b>regō</b> +<span class = "smallcaps">and</span> <b>audiō</b> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page65">65-66</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XXVI.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Verbs in</span> <b>-iō</b>—Present, +Imperfect, and Future Active Indicative of <b>capiō</b>—<i>The +Imperative</i> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page66">66-68</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XXVII.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Passive Voice</span>—Present, Imperfect, +and Future Indicative of <b>amō</b> and <b>moneō</b>—<span class = +"smallcaps">Perseus and Andromeda</span> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page68">68-71</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XXVIII.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Present, Imperfect, and Future Indicative +Passive of</span> <b>regō</b> <span class = "smallcaps">and</span> +<b>audiō</b>—<span class = "smallcaps">Perseus and +Andromeda</span> (<i>Continued</i>) +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page72">72-73</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XXIX.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Present, Imperfect, and Future Indicative +Passive of</span> <b>-iō</b> <span class = +"smallcaps">Verbs—Present Passive Infinitive and Imperative</span> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page73">73-75</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XXX.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Synopses in the Four Conjugations—The +Ablative Denoting From</span>—<i>Place from Which, Separation, +Personal Agent</i> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page75">75-78</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XXXI.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Perfect, Pluperfect and Future Perfect +of</span> <b>sum</b>—<span class = "smallcaps">Dialogue</span> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page79">79-81</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XXXII.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Perfect Active Indicative of the Four Regular +Conjugations</span>—<i>Meanings of the Perfect</i>—<span +class = "smallcaps">Perseus and Andromeda</span> (<i>Continued</i>) +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page81">81-83</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XXXIII.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Pluperfect and Future Perfect Active +Indicative—Perfect Active Infinitive</span> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page84">84-85</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XXXIV.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Review of the Active Voice—Perseus and +Andromeda</span> (<i>Concluded</i>) +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page86">86-87</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XXXV.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Passive Perfects of the +Indicative—Perfect Passive and Future Active Infinitive</span> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page88">88-90</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XXXVI.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Review of Principal +Parts</span>—<i>Prepositions, Yes-or-No Questions</i> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page90">90-93</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XXXVII.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Conjugation of</span> +<b>possum</b>—<i>The Infinitive used as in +English</i>—<i>Accusative Subject of an Infinitive</i>—<span +class = "smallcaps">The Faithless Tarpeia</span> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page93">93-96</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XXXVIII.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">The Relative Pronoun and the Interrogative +Pronoun</span>—<i>Agreement of the Relative</i>—<span class += "smallcaps">The Faithless Tarpeia</span> (<i>Concluded</i>) +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page97">97-101</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XXXIX-XLI.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">The Third Declension</span>—Consonant +Stems +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page101">101-106</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XLII.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Review Lesson—Terror Cimbricus</span> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page107">107</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XLIII.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Third Declension</span>—<i>I</i>-Stems +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page108">108-110</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class = "number">XLIV.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "pagenum">x</span> +<span class = "smallcaps">Irregular Nouns of the Third +Declension—Gender in the Third Declension—The First Bridge +over the Rhine</span> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page111">111-112</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XLV.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Adjectives of the Third Declension—The +Romans Invade the Enemy’s Country</span> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page113">113-115</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XLVI.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">The Fourth or</span> <i>U</i>-<span class = +"smallcaps">Declension</span> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page116">116-117</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XLVII.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Expressions of Place</span>—<i>Place to +Which, Place from Which, Place at or in Which, the +Locative</i>—Declension of <b>domus</b>—<span class = +"smallcaps">Dædalus and Icarus</span> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page117">117-121</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XLVIII.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">The Fifth or</span> <i>Ē</i>-<span class = +"smallcaps">Declension</span>—<i>Ablative of Time</i>—<span +class = "smallcaps">Dædalus and Icarus</span> (<i>Continued</i>) +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page121">121-123</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">XLIX.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Pronouns</span>—Personal and Reflexive +Pronouns—<span class = "smallcaps">Dædalus and Icarus</span> +(<i>Concluded</i>) +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page123">123-126</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">L.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">The Intensive Pronoun</span> <b>ipse</b> <span +class = "smallcaps">and the Demonstrative</span> <b>īdem</b>—<span +class = "smallcaps">How Horatius Held the Bridge</span> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page126">126-127</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">LI.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">The Demonstratives</span> <b>hic</b>, +<b>iste</b>, <b>ille</b>—<span class = "smallcaps">A German +Chieftain Addresses his Followers—How Horatius Held the +Bridge</span> (<i>Continued</i>) +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page128">128-130</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">LII.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">The Indefinite Pronouns—How Horatius +Held the Bridge</span> (<i>Concluded</i>) +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page130">130-132</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">LIII.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Regular Comparison of Adjectives</span> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page133">133-135</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">LIV.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Irregular Comparison of +Adjectives</span>—<i>Ablative with Comparatives</i> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page135">135-136</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">LV.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Irregular Comparison of Adjectives</span> +(<i>Continued</i>)—Declension of <b>plūs</b> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page137">137-138</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">LVI.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Irregular Comparison of Adjectives</span> +(<i>Concluded</i>)—<i>Ablative of the Measure of Difference</i> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page138">138-139</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">LVII.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Formation and Comparison of Adverbs</span> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page140">140-142</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">LVIII.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Numerals</span>—<i>Partitive +Genitive</i> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page142">142-144</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">LIX.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Numerals</span> +(<i>Continued</i>)—<i>Accusative of Extent</i>—<span class = +"smallcaps">Cæsar in Gaul</span> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page144">144-146</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">LX.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Deponent Verbs</span>—<i>Prepositions +with the Accusative</i> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page146">146-147</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan = "3"> +<h5>PART III. CONSTRUCTIONS</h5> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">LXI.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">The Subjunctive Mood</span>—Inflection +of the Present—<i>Indicative and Subjunctive Compared</i> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page148">148-152</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">LXII.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">The Subjunctive of Purpose</span> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page152">152-153</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">LXIII.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Inflection of the Imperfect +Subjunctive</span>—<i>Sequence of Tenses</i> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page153">153-155</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">LXIV.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Inflection of the Perfect and Pluperfect +Subjunctive</span>—<i>Substantive Clauses of Purpose</i> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page156">156-159</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">LXV.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "pagenum">xi</span> +<span class = "smallcaps">Subjunctive of</span> +<b>possum</b>—<i>Verbs of Fearing</i> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page160">160-161</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">LXVI.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">The Participles</span>—Tenses and +Declension +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page161">161-164</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">LXVII.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">The Irregular Verbs</span> <b>volō</b>, +<b>nōlō</b>, <b>mālō</b>—<i>Ablative Absolute</i> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page164">164-166</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">LXVIII.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">The Irregular Verb</span> +<b>fīō</b>—<i>Subjunctive of Result</i> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page167">167-168</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">LXIX.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Subjunctive of +Characteristic</span>—<i>Predicate Accusative</i> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page169">169-171</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">LXX.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Constructions with</span> +<b>cum</b>—<i>Ablative of Specification</i> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page171">171-173</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">LXXI.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Vocabulary Review</span>—<i>Gerund and +Gerundive</i>—<i>Predicate Genitive</i> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page173">173-177</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">LXXII.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">The Irregular Verb</span> +<b>eō</b>—<i>Indirect Statements</i> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page177">177-180</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">LXXIII.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Vocabulary Review—The Irregular +Verb</span> <b>ferō</b>—<i>Dative with Compounds</i> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page181">181-183</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">LXXIV.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Vocabulary Review</span>—<i>Subjunctive +in Indirect Questions</i> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page183">183-185</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">LXXV.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Vocabulary Review</span>—<i>Dative of +Purpose or End for Which</i> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page185">185-186</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">LXXVI.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Vocabulary Review</span>—<i>Genitive and +Ablative of Quality or Description</i> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page186">186-188</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">LXXVII.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Review of Agreement</span>—<i>Review of +the Genitive, Dative, and Accusative</i> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page189">189-190</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">LXXVIII.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Review of the Ablative</span> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page191">191-192</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">LXXIX.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Review of the Syntax of Verbs</span> +</p></td> +<td class = "number"> +<a class = "page" href = "#page192">192-193</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td></td> +<td><div class = "plainnote"> +<a href = "LatinBegin2.html#page194">Readings</a> +</div></td> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td><div class = "plainnote"> +<a href = "LatinBegin2.html#page226">Tables of Inflections</a> +</div></td> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td><div class = "plainnote"> +<a href = "LatinBegin2.html#page299">Latin-English Vocabulary</a> +</div></td> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td><div class = "plainnote"> +<a href = "LatinBegin2.html#page332">English-Latin Vocabulary</a> +</div></td> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td><div class = "plainnote"> +<a href = "LatinBegin2.html#page344">Index</a> +</div></td> +<td></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<!-- <span class = "pagenum">xii</span> +<a name = "pagexii"> </a> +[**map of Italy on this page not included in textkit scan] + +<hr> + +--> +<hr> + +<span class = "pagenum">1</span> +<a name = "page1"> </a> +<h3>LATIN FOR BEGINNERS</h3> + + +<h4>TO THE STUDENT—BY WAY OF INTRODUCTION</h4> + +<p><b>What is Latin?</b> +If you will look at the map of Italy on the opposite page, you will find +near the middle of the peninsula and facing the west coast a district +called Latium,<span class = "tag">1</span> and Rome its capital. The +Latin language, meaning the language of Latium, was spoken by the +ancient Romans and other inhabitants of Latium, and Latin was the name +applied to it after the armies of Rome had carried the knowledge of her +language far beyond its original boundaries. As the English of to-day is +not quite the same as that spoken two or three hundred years ago, so +Latin was not always the same at all times, but changed more or less in +the course of centuries. The sort of Latin you are going to learn was in +use about two thousand years ago. And that period has been selected +because the language was then at its best and the greatest works of +Roman literature were being produced. This period, because of its +supreme excellence, is called the Golden Age of Roman letters.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. Pronounce <i>Lā´shĭ-ŭm</i>.</div> + +<p><b>The Spread of Latin.</b> +For some centuries after Rome was founded, the Romans were a feeble and +insignificant people, their territory was limited to Latium, and their +existence constantly threatened by warlike neighbors. But after the +third century before Christ, Rome’s power grew rapidly. She conquered +all Italy, then reached out for the lands across the sea and beyond the +Alps, and finally ruled over the whole ancient world. The empire thus +established lasted for more than four +<span class = "pagenum">2</span> +<a name = "page2"> </a> +hundred years. The importance of Latin increased with the growth of +Roman power, and what had been a dialect spoken by a single tribe became +the universal language. Gradually the language changed somewhat, +developing differently in different countries. In Italy it has become +Italian, in Spain Spanish, and in France French. All these nations, +therefore, are speaking a modernized form of Latin.</p> + +<p><b>The Romans and the Greeks.</b> +In their career of conquest the Romans came into conflict with the +Greeks. The Greeks were inferior to the Romans in military power, but +far superior to them in culture. They excelled in art, literature, +music, science, and philosophy. Of all these pursuits the Romans were +ignorant until contact with Greece revealed to them the value of +education and filled them with the thirst for knowledge. And so it came +about that while Rome conquered Greece by force of arms, Greece +conquered Rome by force of her intellectual superiority and became her +schoolmaster. It was soon the established custom for young Romans to go +to Athens and to other centers of Greek learning to finish their +training, and the knowledge of the Greek language among the educated +classes became universal. At the same time many cultured +Greeks—poets, artists, orators, and philosophers—flocked to +Rome, opened schools, and taught their arts. Indeed, the preëminence of +Greek culture became so great that Rome almost lost her ambition to be +original, and her writers vied with each other in their efforts to +reproduce in Latin what was choicest in Greek literature. As a +consequence of all this, the civilization and national life of Rome +became largely Grecian, and to Greece she owed her literature and her art.</p> + +<p><b>Rome and the Modern World.</b> +After conquering the world, Rome impressed her language, laws, customs +of living, and modes of thinking upon the subject nations, and they +became Roman; and the world has remained largely Roman ever since. Latin +continued to live, and the knowledge of Latin was the only light of +learning that burned steadily through the dark ages that followed the +downfall of the Roman Empire. Latin was the common language of scholars +and remained so even down to the days of Shakespeare. Even yet it is +<span class = "pagenum">3</span> +<a name = "page3"> </a> +more nearly than any other tongue the universal language of the learned. +The life of to-day is much nearer the life of ancient Rome than the +lapse of centuries would lead one to suppose. You and I are Romans still +in many ways, and if Cæsar and Cicero should appear among us, we should +not find them, except for dress and language, much unlike men of +to-day.</p> + +<p><b>Latin and English.</b> +Do you know that more than half of the words in the English dictionary +are Latin, and that you are speaking more or less Latin every day? How +has this come about? In the year 1066 William the Conqueror invaded +England with an army of Normans. The Normans spoke French—which, +you remember, is descended from Latin—and spread their language to +a considerable extent over England, and so Norman-French played an +important part in the formation of English and forms a large proportion +of our vocabulary. Furthermore, great numbers of almost pure Latin words +have been brought into English through the writings of scholars, and +every new scientific discovery is marked by the addition of new terms of +Latin derivation. Hence, while the simpler and commoner words of our +mother tongue are Anglo-Saxon, and Anglo-Saxon forms the staple of our +colloquial language, yet in the realms of literature, and especially in +poetry, words of Latin derivation are very abundant. Also in the learned +professions, as in law, medicine, and engineering, a knowledge of Latin +is necessary for the successful interpretation of technical and +scientific terms.</p> + +<p><b>Why study Latin?</b> +The foregoing paragraphs make it clear why Latin forms so important a +part of modern education. We have seen that our civilization rests upon +that of Greece and Rome, and that we must look to the past if we would +understand the present. It is obvious, too, that the knowledge of Latin +not only leads to a more exact and effective use of our own language, +but that it is of vital importance and of great practical value to any +one preparing for a literary or professional career. To this it may be +added that the study of Latin throws a flood of light upon the structure +of language in general and lays an excellent foundation for all +grammatical study. +<span class = "pagenum">4</span> +<a name = "page4"> </a> +Finally, it has been abundantly proved that there is no more effective +means of strengthening the mind than by the earnest pursuit of this +branch of learning.</p> + +<p><b>Review Questions</b>. +Whence does Latin get its name? Where is Latium? Where is Rome? Was +Latin always the same? What sort of Latin are we to study? Describe the +growth of Rome’s power and the spread of Latin. What can you say of the +origin of Italian, French, and Spanish? How did the ancient Greeks and +Romans compare? How did Greece influence Rome? How did Rome influence +the world? In what sense are we Romans still? What did Latin have to do +with the formation of English? What proportion of English words are of +Latin origin, and what kind of words are they? Why should we study +Latin?</p> + +<hr class = "mid"> + +<span class = "pagenum">5</span> +<a name = "page5"> </a> +<h3><a name = "latin_text">PART I</a></h3> + +<h4>THE PRONUNCIATION OF LATIN</h4> + +<h5>THE ALPHABET</h5> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec1"><b>1.</b></a> +The Latin alphabet contains the same letters as the English except that +it has no <i>w</i> and no <i>j</i>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec2"><b>2.</b></a> +The vowels, as in English, are <i>a, e, i, o, u, y</i>. The other +letters are consonants.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec3"><b>3.</b></a> +<i>I</i> is used both as a vowel and as a consonant. Before a vowel in +the same syllable it has the value of a consonant and is called <i>I +consonant</i>.</p> + +<p>Thus in Iū-li-us the first <i>i</i> is a consonant, the second a +vowel.</p> + + +<h5>SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS<span class = "tag">1</span></h5> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. N.B. The sounds of the letters are best learned by hearing them +correctly pronounced. The matter in this section is, therefore, intended +for reference rather than for assignment as a lesson. As a first step it +is suggested that the teacher pronounce the examples in class, the +pupils following.</div> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec4"><b>4.</b></a> +Latin was not pronounced like English. The Romans at the beginning of +the Christian era pronounced their language substantially as described +below.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec5"><b>5.</b></a> +The vowels have the following sounds:</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<th>Vowels<span class = "tag">2</span></th> +<th>Latin Examples</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +ā as in <i>father</i> +<p class = "hanging"> +ă like the first <i>a</i> in <i>aha´</i>, never as in <i>hat</i></p> +</td> +<td class = "examples"> +hāc, stās<br> +ă´-măt, că-nās +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +ē as in <i>they</i><br> +ĕ as in <i>met</i> +</td> +<td class = "examples"> +tē´-lă, mē´-tă<br> +tĕ´-nĕt, mĕr´-cēs +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +ī as in <i>machine</i><br> +<span class = "pagenum">6</span> +<a name = "page6"> </a> +ĭ as in <i>bit</i> +</td> +<td class = "examples"> +sĕr´-tī, prā´-tī<br> +sĭ´-tĭs, bĭ´-bī +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +ō as in <i>holy</i><br> +ŏ as in <i>wholly</i>, never as in <i>hot</i> +</td> +<td class = "examples"> +Rō´-mă, ō´-rĭs<br> +mŏ´-dŏ, bŏ´-nōs +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +ū as in <i>rude</i>, or as <i>oo</i> in <i>boot</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +ŭ as in <i>full</i>, or as <i>oo</i> in <i>foot</i></p> +</td> +<td class = "examples"> +ū´-mŏr, tū´-bĕr<br> +ŭt, tū´-tŭs +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. Long vowels are marked ¯, short ones ˘.</div> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Note.</span> It is to be observed that there +is a decided difference in sound, except in the case of <i>a</i>, +between the long and the short vowels. It is not merely a matter of +<i>quantity</i> but also of <i>quality</i>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec6"><b>6.</b></a> +In <b>diphthongs</b> (two-vowel sounds) both vowels are heard in a +single syllable.</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<th>Diphthongs</th> +<th>Latin Examples</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +<b>ae</b> as <i>ai</i> in <i>aisle</i><br> +<b>au</b> as <i>ou</i> in <i>out</i> +</td> +<td class = "examples"> +tae´-dae<br> +gau´-dĕt +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +<b>ei</b> as <i>ei</i> in <i>eight</i> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>eu</b> as <i>ĕ´o͝o</i> (a short <i>e</i> followed by a short <i>u</i> +in one syllable)</p> +</td> +<td class = "examples"> +dein´-dĕ<br> +seu +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +<b>oe</b> like <i>oi</i> in <i>toil</i> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>ui</b> like <i>o͝o´ĭ</i> (a short <i>u</i> followed by a short +<i>i</i> in one syllable. Cf. English <i>we</i>)</p> +</td> +<td class = "examples"> +foe´-dŭs<br> +cui, huic +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Note.</span> Give all the vowels and +diphthongs their proper sounds and do not slur over them in unaccented +syllables, as is done in English.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec7"><b>7.</b></a> +<b>Consonants</b> are pronounced as in English, except that</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<th>Consonants</th> +<th>Latin Examples</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>c</b> is always like <i>c</i> in <i>cat</i>, never as in +<i>cent</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>g</b> is always like <i>g</i> in <i>get</i>, never as in +<i>gem</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>i consonant</b> is always like <i>y</i> in <i>yes</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>n</b> before <i>c, qu</i>, or <i>g</i> is like <i>ng</i> in +<i>sing</i> (compare the sound of <i>n</i> in <i>anchor</i>)</p> +</td> +<td class = "examples"> +că´-dō, cĭ´-bŭs, cē´-nă<br> +gĕ´-mō, gĭg´-nō<br> +iăm, iŏ´-cŭs<br> +ăn´-cŏ-ră <span class = "plain">(ang´-ko-ra)</span> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>qu</b>, <b>gu</b>, and sometimes <b>su</b> before a vowel have the +sound of <i>qw, gw</i>, and <i>sw</i>. Here <i>u</i> has the value of +consonant <i>v</i> and is not counted a vowel</p> +</td> +<td class = "examples"> +<p class = "hanging"> +ĭn´-quĭt, quī, lĭn´-guă, săn´-guĭs, suā´-dĕ-ō</p> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +<b>s</b> is like <i>s</i> in <i>sea</i>, never as in <i>ease</i> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>t</b> is always like <i>t</i> in <i>native</i>, never as in +<i>nation</i></p> +</td> +<td class = "examples"> +rŏ´-să, ĭs<br> +ră´-tĭ-ō, nā´-tĭ-ō +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +<span class = "pagenum">7</span> +<a name = "page7"> </a> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>v</b> is like <i>w</i> in <i>wine</i>, never as in <i>vine</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>x</b> has the value of two consonants (<i>cs</i> or <i>gs</i>) and is +like <i>x</i> in <i>extract</i>, not as in <i>exact</i></p> +</td> +<td class = "examples"> +vī´-nŭm, vĭr<br> +ĕx´-trā, ĕx-āc´-tŭs +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>bs</b> is like <i>ps</i> and <b>bt</b> like <i>pt</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>ch</b>, <b>ph</b>, and <b>th</b> are like <i>c</i>, <i>p</i>, +<i>t</i></p> +</td> +<td class = "examples"> +ŭrbs, ŏb-tĭ´-nĕ-ō<br> +<p class = "hanging"> +pŭl´-chĕr, Phoe´-bē, thĕ-ā´-trŭm</p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> In combinations of consonants give each its distinct sound. +Doubled consonants should be pronounced with a slight pause between the +two sounds. Thus pronounce <i>tt</i> as in <i>rat-trap</i>, not as in +<i>rattle</i>; <i>pp</i> as in <i>hop-pole</i>, not as in <i>upper</i>. +Examples, <b>mĭt´-tō</b>, <b>Ăp´pĭ-ŭs</b>, <b>bĕl´-lŭm.</b></p> + + +<h5>SYLLABLES</h5> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec8"><b>8.</b></a> +A Latin word has as many syllables as it has vowels and diphthongs. Thus +<b>aes-tā´-tĕ</b> has three syllables, <b>au-dĭ-ĕn´-dŭs</b> has +four.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Two vowels with a consonant between them never make one +syllable, as is so often the case in English. Compare English +<i>inside</i> with Latin īn-sī´-dĕ.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec9"><b>9.</b></a> +Words are divided into syllables as follows:</p> + +<p>1. A single consonant between two vowels goes with the second. Thus +<b>ă-mā´-bĭ-lĭs</b>, <b>mĕ-mŏ´-rĭ-ă</b>, <b>ĭn-tĕ´-rĕ-ā</b>, +<b>ă´-bĕst</b>, <b>pĕ-rē´-gĭt</b>.<span class = "tag">3</span></p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. In writing and printing it is customary to divide the parts of a +compound, as <b>inter-eā</b>, <b>ab-est</b>, <b>sub-āctus</b>, +<b>per-ēgit</b>, contrary to the correct phonetic rule.</div> + +<p>2. Combinations of two or more consonants:</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> A consonant followed by <i>l</i> or <i>r</i> goes with the +<i>l</i> or <i>r</i>. Thus <b>pū´-blĭ-cŭs</b>, <b>ă´-grī</b>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Exception.</span> Prepositional compounds of +this nature, as also <i>ll</i> and <i>rr</i>, follow rule <i>b</i>. Thus +<b>ăb´-lŭ-ō</b>, <b>ăb-rŭm´-pō</b>, <b>ĭl´-lĕ</b>, <b>fĕr´-rŭm</b>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> In all other combinations of consonants the first consonant +goes with the preceding vowel.<span class = "tag">4</span> Thus +<b>măg´-nŭs</b>, <b>ĕ-gĕs´-tās</b>, <b>vĭc-tō´-rĭ-ă</b>, +<b>hŏs´-pĕs</b>, <b>ăn´-nŭs</b>, <b>sŭ-bāc´-tŭs</b>.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +4. The combination <b>nct</b> is divided <b>nc-t</b>, as <b>fūnc-tŭs, +sānc-tŭs</b>.</div> + +<p>3. The last syllable of a word is called the <i>ul´-ti-ma</i>; the +one next to the last, the <i>pe-nult´</i>; the one before the penult, +the <i>an´-te-pe-nult´</i>.</p> + +<p><span class = "pagenum">8</span> +<a name = "page8"> </a> +<a name = "sec10"><b>10.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISE</span></p> + +<p>Divide the words in the following passage into syllables and +pronounce them, placing the accent as indicated:</p> + +<p>Vā́dĕ ăd fŏrmī́căm, Ō pĭ́gĕr, ĕt cōnsī́dĕrā vĭ́ās ĕ́iŭs ĕt dĭ́scĕ +săpĭĕ́ntĭăm: quae cŭm nōn hắbĕăt dŭ́cĕm nĕc praecĕptṓrĕm nĕc +prī́ncĭpĕm, pắrăt ĭn aestā́tĕ cĭ́bŭm sĭ́bĭ ĕt cŏ́ngrĕgăt ĭn mĕ́ssĕ quŏd +cŏ́mĕdăt.</p> + +<p>[Go to the ant, thou sluggard; consider her ways, and be wise: which, +having no guide, overseer, or ruler, provideth her meat in the summer +and gathereth her food in the harvest.]</p> + + +<h5>QUANTITY</h5> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec11"><b>11.</b></a> +The quantity of a vowel or a syllable is the time it takes to pronounce +it. Correct pronunciation and accent depend upon the proper observance +of quantity.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec12"><b>12.</b></a> +<b>Quantity of Vowels.</b> Vowels are either long (¯) or short (˘). In +this book the long vowels are marked. Unmarked vowels are to be +considered short.</p> + +<p>1. A vowel is short before another vowel or <i>h</i>; as +<b>pŏ-ē´-ta</b>, <b>tră´-hō</b>.</p> + +<p>2. A vowel is short before <i>nt</i> and <i>nd</i>, before final +<i>m</i> or <i>t</i>, and, except in words of one syllable, before final +<i>l</i> or <i>r</i>. Thus <b>a´-mănt</b>, <b>a-măn´-dus</b>, +<b>a-mā´-băm</b>, <b>a-mā´-băt</b>, <b>a´-ni-măl</b>, <b>a´-mŏr</b>.</p> + +<p>3. A vowel is long before <i>nf</i>, <i>ns</i>, <i>nx</i>, and +<i>nct</i>. Thus <b>īn´-fe-rō</b>, <b>re´-gēns</b>, <b>sān´-xī</b>, +<b>sānc´-tus</b>.</p> + +<p>4. Diphthongs are always long, and are not marked.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec13"><b>13.</b></a> +<b>Quantity of Syllables.</b> Syllables are either long or short, and +their quantity must be carefully distinguished from that of vowels.</p> + +<p>1. <b>A syllable is short</b>,</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> If it ends in a short vowel; as <b>ă´-mō</b>, +<b>pĭ´-grĭ</b>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Note.</span> In final syllables the short +vowel may be followed by a final consonant. Thus the word +<b>mĕ-mŏ´-rĭ-ăm</b> contains four short syllables. In the first three a +short vowel ends the syllable, in the last the short vowel is followed +by a final consonant.</p> + +<p><span class = "pagenum">9</span> +<a name = "page9"> </a> +2. <b>A syllable is long</b>,</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> If it contains a long vowel or a diphthong, as <b>cū´-rō</b>, +<b>poe´-nae</b>, <b>aes-tā´-te</b>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> If it ends in a consonant which is followed by another +consonant, as <b>cor´-pus</b>, <b>mag´-nus</b>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Note.</span> The vowel in a long syllable may +be either long or short, and should be pronounced accordingly. Thus in +<b>ter´-ra</b>, <b>in´-ter</b>, the first syllable is long, but the +vowel in each case is short and should be given the short sound. In +words like <b>saxum</b> the first syllable is long because <i>x</i> has +the value of two consonants (<i>cs</i> or <i>gs</i>).</p> + +<p>3. In determining quantity <i>h</i> is not counted a consonant.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Note.</span> Give about twice as much time to +the long syllables as to the short ones. It takes about as long to +pronounce a short vowel plus a consonant as it does to pronounce a long +vowel or a diphthong, and so these quantities are considered equally +long. For example, it takes about as long to say <b>cŭr´-rō</b> as it +does <b>cū´-rō</b>, and so each of these first syllables is long. +Compare <b>mŏl´-lis</b> and <b>mō´-lis</b>, <b>ā-mĭs´-sī</b> and +<b>ā-mi´-sī</b>.</p> + + +<h5>ACCENT</h5> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec14"><b>14.</b></a> +Words of two syllables are accented on the first, as <b>mēn´-sa</b>, +<b>Cae´-sar</b>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec15"><b>15.</b></a> +Words of more than two syllables are accented on the penult if the +penult is long. If the penult is short, accent the antepenult. Thus +<b>mo-nē´-mus</b>, <b>re´-gi-tur</b>, <b>a-gri´-co-la</b>, +<b>a-man´-dus</b>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Note.</span> Observe that the position of the +accent is determined by the length of the <i>syllable</i> and not by the +length of the vowel in the syllable. (Cf. <a href = +"#sec13">§ 13. 2</a>, Note.)</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec16"><b>16.</b></a> +Certain little words called <i>enclit´ics</i><span class = +"tag">5</span> which have no separate existence, are added to and +pronounced with a preceding word. The most common are <b>-que</b>, +<i>and</i>; <b>-ve</b>, <i>or</i>; and <b>-ne</b>, the question sign. +The syllable before an enclitic takes the accent, regardless of its +quantity. Thus <b>populus´que</b>, <b>dea´que</b>, <b>rēgna´ve</b>, +<b>audit´ne</b>.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +5. Enclitic means <i>leaning back</i>, and that is, as you see, just +what these little words do. They cannot stand alone and so they lean +back for support upon the preceding word.</div> + + +<span class = "pagenum">10</span> +<a name = "page10"> </a> +<h5>HOW TO READ LATIN</h5> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec17"><b>17.</b></a> +To read Latin well is not so difficult, if you begin right. Correct +habits of reading should be formed now. Notice the quantities carefully, +especially the quantity of the penult, to insure your getting the accent +on the right syllable. (Cf. <a href = "#sec15">§ 15</a>.) Give +every vowel its proper sound and every syllable its proper length. Then +bear in mind that we should read Latin as we read English, in phrases +rather than in separate words. Group together words that are closely +connected in thought. No good reader halts at the end of each word.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec18"><b>18.</b></a> +Read the stanzas of the following poem by Longfellow, one at a time, +first the English and then the Latin version. The syllables inclosed in +parentheses are to be slurred or omitted to secure smoothness of +meter.</p> + +<h5>EXCELSIOR [HIGHER]! <span class = "tag">6</span></h5> + +<table> +<tr> +<td> +The shades of night were falling fast,<br> +As through an Alpine village passed<br> +A youth, who bore, ’mid snow and ice,<br> +A banner with the strange device,<br> +<span class = "inset">Excelsior!</span> +</td> +<td> +Cadēbant noctis umbrae, dum<br> +Ibat per vīcum Alpicum<br> +Gelū nivequ(e) adolēscēns,<br> +Vēxillum cum signō ferēns,<br> +<span class = "inset">Excelsior!</span> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +His brow was sad; his eye beneath,<br> +Flashed like a falchion from its sheath,<br> +And like a silver clarion rung<br> +The accents of that unknown tongue,<br> +<span class = "inset">Excelsior!</span> +</td> +<td> +Frōns trīstis, micat oculus<br> +Velut ē vāgīnā gladius;<br> +Sonantque similēs tubae<br> +Accentūs lingu(ae) incognitae,<br> +<span class = "inset">Excelsior!</span> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +In happy homes he saw the light<br> +Of household fires gleam warm and bright;<br> +Above, the spectral glaciers shone,<br> +And from his lips escaped a groan,<br> +<span class = "inset">Excelsior!</span> +</td> +<td> +In domibus videt clārās<br> +Focōrum lūcēs calidās;<br> +Relucet glaciēs ācris,<br> +Et rumpit gemitūs labrīs,<br> +<span class = "inset">Excelsior!</span> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +“Try not the Pass!” the old man said;<br> +“Dark lowers the tempest overhead,<br> +<span class = "pagenum">11</span> +<a name = "page11"> </a> +The roaring torrent is deep and wide!”<br> +And loud that clarion voice replied,<br> +<span class = "inset">Excelsior!</span> +</td> +<td> +Dīcit senex, “Nē trānseās!<br> +Suprā nigrēscit tempestās;<br> +Lātus et altus est torrēns.”<br> +Clāra vēnit vōx respondēns,<br> +<span class = "inset">Excelsior!</span> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +At break of day, as heavenward<br> +The pious monks of Saint Bernard<br> +Uttered the oft-repeated prayer,<br> +A voice cried through the startled air,<br> +<span class = "inset">Excelsior!</span> +</td> +<td> +Iam lūcēscēbat, et frātrēs<br> +Sānctī Bernardī vigilēs<br> +Ōrābant precēs solitās,<br> +Cum vōx clāmāvit per aurās,<br> +<span class = "inset">Excelsior!</span> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +A traveler, by the faithful hound,<br> +Half-buried in the snow was found,<br> +Still grasping in his hand of ice<br> +That banner with the strange device,<br> +<span class = "inset">Excelsior!</span> +</td> +<td> +Sēmi-sepultus viātor<br> +Can(e) ā fīdō reperītur,<br> +Comprēndēns pugnō gelidō<br> +Illud vēxillum cum signō,<br> +<span class = "inset">Excelsior!</span> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +There in the twilight cold and gray,<br> +Lifeless, but beautiful, he lay,<br> +And from the sky, serene and far,<br> +A voice fell, like a falling star,<br> +<span class = "inset">Excelsior!</span> +</td> +<td> +Iacet corpus exanimum<br> +Sed lūce frīgidā pulchrum;<br> +Et caelō procul exiēns<br> +Cadit vōx, ut Stella cadēns,<br> +<span class = "inset">Excelsior!</span> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<div class = "footnote"> +6. Translation by C. W. Goodchild in <i>Praeco Latinus</i>, October, +1898.</div> + + +<hr class = "mid"> + +<span class = "pagenum">12</span> +<a name = "page12"> </a> +<h3>PART II</h3> + +<h4>WORDS AND FORMS</h4> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_I"> +LESSON I</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">FIRST PRINCIPLES</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec19"><b>19.</b></a> +<b>Subject and Predicate.</b> 1. Latin, like English, expresses thoughts +by means of sentences. A sentence is a combination of words that +expresses a thought, and in its simplest form is the statement of a +single fact. Thus,</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td class = "rightpad"> +<i>Galba is a farmer</i><br> +<b>Galba est agricola</b> +</td> +<td> +<i>The sailor fights</i><br> +<b>Nauta pugnat</b> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>In each of these sentences there are two parts:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead">Subject</td> +<td> +<i>Galba</i><br> +<b>Galba</b><br> +<br> +<i>The sailor</i><br> +<b>Nauta</b> +</td> +<td class = "sidehead">Predicate</td> +<td> +<i>is a farmer</i><br> +<b>est agricola</b><br> +<br> +<i>fights</i><br> +<b>pugnat</b> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>2. The subject is that person, place, or thing about which something +is said, and is therefore a <i>noun</i> or some word which can serve the +same purpose.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Pronouns, as their name implies (<i>pro</i>, “instead of,” and +<i>noun</i>), often take the place of nouns, usually to save repeating +the same noun, as, <i>Galba is a farmer; <b>he</b> is a sturdy +fellow</i>.</p> + +<p>3. The predicate is that which is said about the subject, and +consists of a verb with or without modifiers.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> A verb is a word which asserts something (usually an act) +concerning a person, place, or thing.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">13</span> +<a name = "page13"> </a> +<a name = "sec20"><b>20.</b></a> +<b>The Object.</b> In the two sentences, <i>The boy hit the ball</i> and +<i>The ball hit the boy</i>, the same words are used, but the meaning is +different, and depends upon the order of the words. The <b>doer</b> of +the act, that about which something is said, is, as we have seen above, +the <b>subject</b>. <b>That to which something is done</b> is the +<b>direct object</b> of the verb. <i>The boy hit the ball</i> is +therefore analyzed as follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th>Subject</th> +<th>Predicate</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td align = "center"><i>The boy</i></td> +<td align = "center"> +<i>hit the ball</i><br> +<span class = "smallhead">(verb) (direct object)</span> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> A verb whose action passes over to the object directly, as in +the sentence above, is called a <b>transitive verb</b>. A verb which +does not admit of a direct object is called <b>intransitive</b>, as, +<i>I walk, he comes</i>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec21"><b>21.</b></a> +<b>The Copula.</b> The verb <i>to be</i> in its different +forms—<i>are</i>, <i>is</i>, <i>was</i>, etc.—does not tell +us anything about the subject; neither does it govern an object. It +simply connects the subject with the word or words in the predicate that +possess a distinct meaning. Hence it is called the <b>copula</b>, that +is, <i>the joiner</i> or <i>link</i>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec22"><b>22.</b></a> +In the following sentences pronounce the Latin and name the <i>nouns, +verbs, subjects, objects, predicates, copulas</i>:</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<td class = "number close">1.</td> +<td> +<b>America est patria mea</b><br> +<i>America is fatherland my</i> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number close">2.</td> +<td> +<b>Agricola fīliam amat</b><br> +<i>(The) farmer (his) daughter loves</i> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number close">3.</td> +<td> +<b>Fīlia est Iūlia</b><br> +<i>(His) daughter is Julia</i> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number close">4.</td> +<td> +<b>Iūlia et agricola sunt in īnsulā</b><br> +<i>Julia and (the) farmer are on (the) island</i> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number close">5.</td> +<td> +<b>Iūlia aquam portat</b><br> +<i>Julia water carries</i> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number close">6.</td> +<td> +<b>Rosam in comīs habet</b><br> +<i>(A) rose in (her) hair (she) has</i> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number close">7.</td> +<td> +<b>Iūlia est puella pulchra</b><br> +<i>Julia is (a) girl pretty</i> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number close">8.</td> +<td> +<b>Domina fīliam pulchram habet</b><br> +<i>(The) lady (a) daughter beautiful has</i> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> The sentences above show that Latin does not express some +words which are necessary in English. First of all, <i>Latin has no +article <b>the</b> or <b>a</b></i>; thus <i><b>agricola</b></i> may mean +<i>the farmer, a farmer</i>, or simply <i>farmer</i>. Then, too, the +personal pronouns, <i>I, you, he, she</i>, etc., and the possessive +pronouns, <i>my, your, his, her</i>, etc., are not expressed if the +meaning of the sentence is clear without them.</p> + + +<span class = "pagenum">14</span> +<a name = "page14"> </a> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_II"> +LESSON II</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">FIRST PRINCIPLES (<i>Continued</i>)</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec23"><b>23.</b></a> +<b>Inflection.</b> Words may change their forms to indicate some change +in sense or use, as, <i>is, are; was, were; who, whose, whom; farmer, +farmer’s; woman, women</i>. This is called <b>inflection</b>. The +inflection of a noun, adjective, or pronoun is called its +<b>declension</b>, that of a verb its <b>conjugation</b>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec24"><b>24.</b></a> +<b>Number.</b> Latin, like English, has two numbers, singular and +plural. In English we usually form the plural by adding <i>-s</i> or +<i>-es</i> to the singular. So Latin changes the singular to the plural +by changing the ending of the word. Compare</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td class = "rightpad"> +<b>Naut-a pugnat</b><br> +<i>The sailor fights</i> +</td> +<td> +<b>Naut-ae pugnant</b><br> +<i>The sailors fight</i> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec25"><b>25.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <i>Nouns that end in <b>-a</b> in +the singular end in <b>-ae</b> in the plural</i>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec26"><b>26.</b></a> +Learn the following nouns so that you can give the English for the Latin +or the Latin for the English. Write the plural of each.</p> + +<table class = "vocab"> +<tr> +<td class = "half"> +<b>agri´cola</b>, <i>farmer</i> (agriculture)<span class = +"tag">1</span><br> +<b>aqua</b>, <i>water</i> (aquarium)<br> +<b>causa</b>, <i>cause, reason</i> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>do´mina</b>, <i>lady of the house, mistress</i> (dominate)</p> +<b>filia</b>, <i>daughter</i> (filial)<br> +<b>fortū´na</b>, <i>fortune</i> +</td> +<td> +<b>fuga</b>, <i>flight</i> (fugitive)<br> +<b>iniū´ria</b>, <i>wrong, injury</i><br> +<b>lūna</b>, <i>moon</i> (lunar)<br> +<b>nauta</b>, <i>sailor</i> (nautical)<br> +<b>puel´la</b>, <i>girl</i><br> +<b>silva</b>, forest (silvan)<br> +<b>terra</b>, <i>land</i> (terrace) +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. The words in parentheses are English words related to the Latin. When +the words are practically identical, as <b>causa</b>, <i>cause</i>, no +comparison is needed.</div> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec27"><b>27.</b></a> +Compare again the sentences</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td class = "rightpad"> +<b>Nauta pugna-t</b><br> +<i>The sailor fights</i> +</td> +<td> +<b>Nautae pugna-nt</b><br> +<i>The sailors fight</i> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>In the first sentence the verb <b>pugna-t</b> is in the third person +singular, in the second sentence <b>pugna-nt</b> is in the third person +plural.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">15</span> +<a name = "page15"> </a> +<a name = "sec28"><b>28.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Agreement of Verb.</b> <i>A +finite verb must always be in the same person and number as its +subject.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec29"><b>29.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <i>In the conjugation of the +Latin verb the third person singular active ends in <b>-t</b>, the third +person plural in <b>-nt</b>. The endings which show the person and +number of the verb are called <b>personal endings</b>.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec30"><b>30.</b></a> +Learn the following verbs and write the plural of each. The personal +pronouns <i>he</i>, <i>she</i>, <i>it</i>, etc., which are necessary in +the inflection of the English verb, are not needed in the Latin, because +the personal endings take their place. Of course, if the verb’s subject +is expressed we do not translate the personal ending by a pronoun; thus +<b>nauta pugnat</b> is translated <i>the sailor fights</i>, not <i>the +sailor he fights</i>.</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<td><b>ama-t</b></td> +<td><i>he (she, it)</i></td> +<td><i>loves, is loving, does love</i> (amity, amiable)</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>labō´ra-t</b></td> +<td align = "center">“ “ “</td> +<td><i>labors, is laboring, does labor</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>nūntia-t</b><span class = "tag">2</span></td> +<td align = "center">“ “ “</td> +<td><i>announces, is announcing, does announce</i></td> +<tr> +<td><b>porta-t</b></td> +<td align = "center">“ “ “</td> +<td><i>carries, is carrying, does carry</i> (porter)</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>pugna-t</b></td> +<td align = "center">“ “ “</td> +<td><i>fights, is fighting, does fight</i> (pugnacious)</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. The <i>u</i> in <b>nūntiō</b> is long by exception. (Cf. <a href = +"#sec12">§ 12. 2</a>.)</div> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec31"><b>31.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>I. 1. The daughter loves, the daughters love. 2. The sailor is +carrying, the sailors carry. 3. The farmer does labor, the farmers +labor. 4. The girl is announcing, the girls do announce. +5. The ladies are carrying, the lady carries.</p> + +<p>II. 1. Nauta pugnat, nautae pugnant. 2. Puella amat, puellae +amant. 3. Agricola portat, agricolae portant. 4. Fīlia +labōrat, fīliae labōrant. 5. Nauta nūntiat, nautae nūntiant. +6. Dominae amant, domina amat.</p> + + +<p class = "illustration"> +<img src = "../images/pic015.png" width = "130" height = "122" +alt = "seated lady"><br> +<span class = "caption"> +DOMINA</span></p> + + +<span class = "pagenum">16</span> +<a name = "page16"> </a> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_III"> +LESSON III</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">FIRST PRINCIPLES (<i>Continued</i>)</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec32"><b>32.</b></a> +<b>Declension of Nouns.</b> We learned above (<a href = +"#sec19">§§ 19</a>, <a href = "#sec20">20</a>) the difference +between the subject and object, and that in English they may be +distinguished by the order of the words. Sometimes, however, the order +is such that we are left in doubt. For example, the sentence <i>The lady +her daughter loves</i> might mean either that the lady loves her +daughter, or that the daughter loves the lady.</p> + +<p>1. If the sentence were in Latin, no doubt could arise, because the +subject and the object are distinguished, not by the order of the words, +but by the endings of the words themselves. Compare the following +sentences:</p> + +<table class = "lines"> +<tr> +<td> +<b>Domina fīliam amat</b><br> +<b>Fīliam domina amat</b><br> +<b>Amat fīliam domina</b><br> +<b>Domina amat fīliam</b> +</td> +<td class = "middle left ital"> +The lady loves her daughter +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +<b>Fīlia dominam amat</b><br> +<b>Dominam fīlia amat</b><br> +<b>Amat dominam fīlia</b><br> +<b>Fīlia amat dominam</b> +</td> +<td class = "middle left ital"> +The daughter loves the lady +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Observe that in each case the subject of the sentence ends in +<b>-a</b> and the object in <b>-am</b>. The <i>form</i> of the noun +shows how it is used in the sentence, and the order of the words has no +effect on the essential meaning.</p> + +<p>2. As stated above (<a href = "#sec23">§ 23</a>), this change of +ending is called <b>declension</b>, and each different ending produces +what is called a <b>case</b>. When we decline a noun, we give all its +different cases, or changes of endings. In English we have three +cases,—nominative, possessive, and objective; but, in nouns, the +nominative and objective have the same form, and only the possessive +case shows a change of ending, by adding <i>’s</i> or the apostrophe. +The interrogative pronoun, however, has the fuller declension, +<i>who?</i> <i>whose?</i> <i>whom?</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">17</span> +<a name = "page17"> </a> +<a name = "sec33"><b>33.</b></a> +The following table shows a comparison between English and Latin +declension forms, and should be thoroughly memorized:</p> + +<table class = "boxes"> +<tr> +<th class = "box all" colspan = "3">English Cases</th> +<th class = "box all" colspan = "2">Latin Cases</th> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class = "center box all" colspan = "2"> +Declension of <i>who?</i></td> +<td class = "center box all"> +Name of case and use</td> +<td class = "center box all"> +Declension of <b>domina</b> and translation</td> +<td class = "center box all"> +Name of case and use</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead box all" rowspan = "3"> +S<br> +i<br> +n<br> +g<br> +u<br> +l<br> +a<br> +r +</td> +<td class = "box upper">Who?</td> +<td class = "box upper"> +<p class = "hanging">Nominative—<br> +case of the subject</p></td> +<td class = "box upper"> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>do´min-a</b><br> +<i>the lady</i></p></td> +<td class = "box upper"> +<p class = "hanging">Nominative—<br> +case of the subject</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "box">Whose?</td> +<td class = "box"> +<p class = "hanging">Possessive—<br> +case of the possessor</p></td> +<td class = "box"> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>domin-ae</b><br> +<i>the lady’s</i></p> +</td> +<td class = "box"> +<p class = "hanging">Genitive—<br> +case of the possessor +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "box lower">Whom?</td> +<td class = "box lower"> +<p class = "hanging">Objective—<br> +case of the object +</p></td> +<td class = "box lower"> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>domin-am</b><br> +<i>the lady</i> +</p></td> +<td class = "box lower"> +<p class = "hanging">Accusative—<br> +case of the direct object</p> +</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead box all" rowspan = "3"> +P<br> +l<br> +u<br> +r<br> +a<br> +l +</td> +<td class = "box upper">Who?</td> +<td class = "box upper"> +<p class = "hanging">Nominative—<br> +case of the subject +</p></td> +<td class = "box upper"> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>domin-ae</b><br> +<i>the ladies</i></p> +</td> +<td class = "box upper"> +<p class = "hanging">Nominative—<br> +case of the subject +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "box">Whose?</td> +<td class = "box"> +<p class = "hanging">Possessive—<br> +case of the possessor +</p></td> +<td class = "box"> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>domin-ā´rum</b><br> +<i>the ladies’</i><br> +<i>of the ladies</i></p> +</td> +<td class = "box"> +<p class = "hanging">Genitive—<br> +case of the possessor +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "box lower">Whom?</td> +<td class = "box lower"> +<p class = "hanging">Objective—<br> +case of the object</p> +</td> +<td class = "box lower"> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>domin-ās</b><br> +<i>the ladies</i></p></td> +<td class = "box lower"> +<p class = "hanging">Accusative—<br> +case of the direct object</p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>When the nominative singular of a noun ends in <b>-a</b>, observe +that</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> The nominative plural ends in <b>-ae</b>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> The genitive singular ends in <b>-ae</b> and the genitive +plural in <b>-ārum</b>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>c.</i> The accusative singular ends in <b>-am</b> and the accusative +plural in <b>-ās</b>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>d.</i> The genitive singular and the nominative plural have the same +ending.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec34"><b>34.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISE</span></p> + +<p>Pronounce the following words and give their general meaning. Then +give the number and case, and the use of each form. Where the same form +stands for more than one case, give all the possible cases and uses.</p> + +<p>1. Silva, silvās, silvam. 2. Fugam, fugae, fuga. 3. Terrārum, +terrae, terrās. 4. Aquās, causam, lūnās. 5. Fīliae, fortūnae, +lūnae. 6. Iniūriās, agricolārum, aquārum. 7. Iniūriārum, +agricolae, puellās. 8. Nautam, agricolās, nautās. +9. Agricolam, puellam, silvārum.</p> + + +<span class = "pagenum">18</span> +<a name = "page18"> </a> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_IV"> +LESSON IV</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">FIRST PRINCIPLES (<i>Continued</i>)</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec35"><b>35.</b></a> +We learned from the table (<a href = "#sec33">§ 33</a>) that the +Latin nominative, genitive, and accusative correspond, in general, to +the nominative, possessive, and objective in English, and that they are +used in the same way. This will be made even clearer by the following +sentence:</p> + +<p class = "center"> +<b>Fīlia agricolae nautam amat</b>,<br> +<i>the farmer’s daughter</i> (or <i>the daughter of the farmer</i>) +<i>loves the sailor</i> +</p> + +<p>What is the subject? the direct object? What case is used for the +subject? for the direct object? What word denotes the possessor? In what +case is it?</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec36"><b>36.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Nominative Subject.</b> <i>The +subject of a finite verb is in the Nominative and answers the question +Who? or What?</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec37"><b>37.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Accusative Object.</b> <i>The +direct object of a transitive verb is in the Accusative and answers the +question Whom? or What?</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec38"><b>38.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Genitive of the Possessor.</b> +<i>The word denoting the owner or possessor of something is in the +Genitive and answers the question Whose?</i></p> + +<p class = "illustration"> +<img src = "../images/pic018.png" width = "347" height = "239" +alt = "Diana shoots an arrow at a bear"><br> +<span class = "caption"> +DIANA SAGITTAS PORTAT ET FERAS NECAT</span></p> + +<p><span class = "pagenum">19</span> +<a name = "page19"> </a> +<a name = "sec39"><b>39.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec39vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 283.</p> + +<p>I. 1. Diāna est dea. 2. Lātōna est dea. 3. Diāna et Lātōna sunt +deae. 4. Diāna est dea lūnae. 5. Diāna est fīlia Lātōnae. +6. Lātōna Diānam amat. 7. Diāna est dea silvārum. +8. Diāna silvam amat. 9. Diāna sagittās portat. 10. Diāna +ferās silvae necat. 11. Ferae terrārum pugnant.</p> + +<p>For the order of words imitate the Latin above.</p> + +<p>II. 1. The daughter of Latona does love the forests. 2. Latona’s +daughter carries arrows. 3. The farmers’ daughters do labor. +4. The farmer’s daughter loves the waters of the forest. +5. The sailor is announcing the girls’ flight. 6. The girls +announce the sailors’ wrongs. 7. The farmer’s daughter labors. +8. Diana’s arrows are killing the wild beasts of the land.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec40"><b>40.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">CONVERSATION</span></p> + +<p>Translate the questions and answer them in Latin. The answers may be +found in the exercises preceding.</p> + +<p class = "inset"> +1. Quis est Diāna?<br> +2. Cuius fīlia est Diāna?<br> +3. Quis Diānam amat?<br> +4. Quis silvam amat?<br> +5. Quis sagittās portat?<br> +6. Cuius fīliae labōrant? +</p> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_V"> +LESSON V</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">FIRST PRINCIPLES (<i>Continued</i>)</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec41"><b>41.</b></a> +<b>The Dative Case.</b> In addition to the relationships between words +expressed by the nominative, genitive (possessive), and accusative +(objective) cases, there are other relationships, to express which in +English we use such words as <i>from</i>, <i>with</i>, <i>by</i>, +<i>to</i>, <i>for</i>, <i>in</i>, <i>at</i>.<span class = +"tag">1</span></p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. Words like <i>to</i>, <i>for</i>, <i>by</i>, <i>from</i>, <i>in</i>, +etc., which define the relationship between words, are called +<b>prepositions</b>.</div> + +<p>Latin, too, makes frequent use of such prepositions; but often it +expresses these relations without them by means of case forms which +<span class = "pagenum">20</span> +<a name = "page20"> </a> +English does not possess. One of the cases found in the Latin declension +and lacking in English is called the <i>dative</i>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec42"><b>42.</b></a> +When the nominative singular ends in <b>-a</b>, the dative singular ends +in <b>-ae</b> and the dative plural in <b>-īs</b>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Note.</span> Observe that the <i>genitive +singular</i>, the <i>dative singular</i>, and the <i>nominative +plural</i> all have the same ending, <b>-ae</b>; but the uses of the +three cases are entirely different. The general meaning of the sentence +usually makes clear which case is intended.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Form the dative singular and plural of the following nouns: +<b>fuga</b>, <b>causa</b>, <b>fortūna</b>, <b>terra</b>, <b>aqua</b>, +<b>puella</b>, <b>agricola</b>, <b>nauta</b>, <b>domina</b>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec43"><b>43.</b></a> +<b>The Dative Relation.</b> The dative case is used to express the +relations conveyed in English by the prepositions <i>to</i>, +<i>towards</i>, <i>for</i>.</p> + +<p>These prepositions are often used in English in expressions of +motion, such as <i>She went to town</i>, <i>He ran towards the +horse</i>, <i>Columbus sailed for America</i>. In such cases the dative +is not used in Latin, as <i>motion through space</i> is foreign to the +dative relation. But the dative is used to denote that <i>to</i> or +<i>towards which</i> a benefit, injury, purpose, feeling, or quality is +directed, or that <i>for which</i> something serves or exists.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> What dative relations do you discover in the following?</p> + +<p>The teacher gave a prize to John because he replied so promptly to +all her questions—a good example for the rest of us. It is a +pleasure to us to hear him recite. Latin is easy for him, but it is very +hard for me. Some are fitted for one thing and others for another.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec44"><b>44.</b></a> +<b>The Indirect Object.</b> Examine the sentence</p> + +<p class = "center"> +<b>Nauta fugam nūntiat</b>, +<i>the sailor announces the flight</i></p> + +<p>Here the verb, <b>nūntiat</b>, governs the direct object, +<b>fugam</b>, in the accusative case. If, however, we wish to mention +the persons <b>to whom</b> the sailor announces the flight, as, <i>The +sailor announces the flight <b>to the farmers</b></i>, the verb will +have two objects:</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +1. Its direct object, <i>flight</i> (<b>fugam</b>)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +2. Its indirect object, <i>farmers</i></p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>According to the preceding section, <i>to the farmers</i> is a +relation covered by the dative case, and we are prepared for the +following rule:</p> + +<p><span class = "pagenum">21</span> +<a name = "page21"> </a> +<a name = "sec45"><b>45.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Dative Indirect Object.</b> +<i>The indirect object of a verb is in the Dative.</i></p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> The indirect object usually stands before the direct +object.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec46"><b>46.</b></a> +We may now complete the translation of the sentence <i>The sailor +announces the flight to the farmers</i>, and we have</p> + +<p class = "center"> +<b>Nauta agricolīs fugam nūntiat</b></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec47"><b>47.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec47vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 283.</p> + +<p><i>Point out the direct and indirect objects and the genitive of the +possessor.</i></p> + +<p>I. 1. Quis nautīs pecūniam dat? 2. Fīliae agricolae nautīs pecūniam +dant. 3. Quis fortūnam pugnae nūntiat? 4. Galba agricolīs +fortunam pugnae nūntiat. 5. Cui domina fābulam nārrat? +6. Fīliae agricolae domina fābulam nārrat. 7. Quis Diānae +corōnam dat? 8. Puella Diānae corōnam dat quia Diānam amat. +9. Dea lūnae sagittās portat et ferās silvārum necat. +10. Cuius victōriam Galba nūntiat? 11. Nautae victōriam Galba +nūntiat.</p> + +<p>Imitate the word order of the preceding exercise.</p> + +<p>II. 1. To whom do the girls give a wreath? 2. The girls give a +wreath to Julia, because Julia loves wreaths. 3. The sailors tell +the ladies<span class = "tag">2</span> a story, because the ladies love +stories. 4. The farmer gives his (<a href = +"#sec22">§ 22. <i>a</i></a>) daughter water. 5. Galba +announces the cause of the battle to the sailor. 6. The goddess of +the moon loves the waters of the forest. 7. Whose wreath is Latona +carrying? Diana’s.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. Observe that in English the indirect object often stands without a +preposition <i>to</i> to mark it, especially when it precedes the direct +object.</div> + + +<span class = "pagenum">22</span> +<a name = "page22"> </a> + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_VI"> +LESSON VI</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">FIRST PRINCIPLES (<i>Continued</i>)</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec48"><b>48.</b></a> +<b>The Ablative Case.</b> Another case, lacking in English but found in +the fuller Latin declension, is the <i>ab´la-tive.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec49"><b>49.</b></a> +When the nominative singular ends in <b>-a</b>, the ablative singular +ends in <b>-ā</b> and the ablative plural in <b>-īs</b>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Observe that the final -ă of the nominative is short, while +the final -ā of the ablative is long, as,</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td class = "rightpad"> +<i>Nom.</i> <b>fīliă</b></td> +<td> +<i>Abl.</i> <b>fīliā</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> Observe that the ablative plural is like the dative +plural.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>c.</i> Form the ablative singular and plural of the following nouns: +<b>fuga</b>, <b>causa</b>, <b>fortūna</b>, <b>terra</b>, <b>aqua</b>, +<b>puella</b>, <b>agricola</b>, <b>nauta</b>, <b>domina</b>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec50"><b>50.</b></a> +<b>The Ablative Relation.</b> The ablative case is used to express the +relations conveyed in English by the prepositions <i>from</i>, +<i>with</i>, <i>by</i>, <i>at</i>, <i>in</i>. It denotes</p> + +<p>1. That from which something is separated, from which it starts, or +of which it is deprived—generally translated by <i>from</i>.</p> + +<p>2. That with which something is associated or by means of which it is +done—translated by <i>with</i> or <i>by</i>.</p> + +<p>3. The place where or the time when something +happens—translated by <i>in</i> or <i>at</i>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> What ablative relations do you discover in the following?</p> + +<p>In our class there are twenty boys and girls. Daily at eight o’clock +they come from home with their books, and while they are at school they +study Latin with great zeal. In a short time they will be able to read +with ease the books written by the Romans. By patience and perseverance +all things in this world can be overcome.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec51"><b>51.</b></a> +<b>Prepositions.</b> While, as stated above (<a href = +"#sec41">§ 41</a>), many relations expressed in English by +prepositions are in Latin expressed by case forms, still prepositions +are of frequent occurrence, but only with the accusative or +ablative.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">23</span> +<a name = "page23"> </a> +<a name = "sec52"><b>52.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Object of a Preposition.</b> +<i>A noun governed by a preposition must be in the Accusative or +Ablative case.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec53"><b>53.</b></a> +Prepositions denoting the ablative relations <i>from, with, in, on</i>, +are naturally followed by the ablative case. Among these are</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>ā</b><span class = "tag">1</span> or <b>ab</b>, <i>from, away +from</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>dē</b>, <i>from, down from</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>ē</b><span class = "tag">1</span> or <b>ex</b>, <i>from, out from, +out of</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>cum</b>, <i>with</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>in</b>, <i>in, on</i></p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. <b>ā</b> and <b>ē</b> are used only before words beginning with a +consonant; <b>ab</b> and <b>ex</b> are used before either vowels or +consonants.</div> + +<p>1. <i>Translate into Latin, using prepositions.</i> In the water, on +the land, down from the forest, with the fortune, out of the forests, +from the victory, out of the waters, with the sailors, down from the +moon.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec54"><b>54.</b></a> +<b>Adjectives.</b> Examine the sentence</p> + +<p class = "center"> +<b>Puella parva bonam deam amat</b>, <i>the little girl loves the good +goddess</i></p> + +<p>In this sentence <b>parva</b> (<i>little</i>) and <b>bonam</b> +(<i>good</i>) are not nouns, but are descriptive words expressing +quality. Such words are called <i>adjectives</i>,<span class = +"tag">2</span> and they are said to belong to the noun which they +describe.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. <i>Pick out the adjectives in the following:</i> “When I was a little +boy, I remember that one cold winter’s morning I was accosted by a +smiling man with an ax on his shoulder. ‘My pretty boy,’ said he, ‘has +your father a grindstone?’ ‘Yes, sir,’ said I. ‘You are a fine little +fellow,’ said he. ‘Will you let me grind my ax on it?’”</div> + +<p>You can tell by its ending to which noun an adjective belongs. The +ending of <b>parva</b> shows that it belongs to <b>puella</b>, and the +ending of <b>bonam</b> that it belongs to <b>deam</b>. Words that belong +together are said to agree, and the belonging-together is called +<i>agreement</i>. Observe that <i>the adjective and its noun agree in +number and case</i>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec55"><b>55.</b></a> +Examine the sentences</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Puella est parva</b>, <i>the girl is little</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Puella parva bonam deam amat</b>, <i>the little girl loves the good +goddess</i></p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>In the first sentence the adjective <b>parva</b> is separated from +its noun by the verb and stands in the predicate. It is therefore called +a <i>predicate adjective</i>. In the second sentence the adjectives +<b>parva</b> and +<span class = "pagenum">24</span> +<a name = "page24"> </a> +<b>bonam</b> are closely attached to the nouns <b>puella</b> and +<b>deam</b> respectively, and are called <i>attributive +adjectives.</i></p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Pick out the attributive and the predicate adjectives in the +following:</p> + +<p class = "note"> +Do you think Latin is hard? Hard studies make strong brains. Lazy +students dislike hard studies. We are not lazy.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec56"><b>56.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">DIALOGUE</span></p> + +<h5 class = "smallcaps">Julia and Galba</h5> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec56vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 283.</p> + +<p class = "inset"> +I. Quis, Galba, est Diāna?<br> +G. Diāna, Iūlia, est pulchra dea lūnae et silvārum.<br> +I. Cuius fīlia, Galba, est Diāna?<br> +G. Lātōnae fīlia, Iūlia, est Diāna.<br> +I. Quid Diāna portat?<br> +G. Sagittās Diāna portat.<br> +I. Cūr Diāna sagittās portat?<br> +G. Diāna sagittās portat, Iūlia, quod malās ferās silvae magnae +necat.<br> +I. Amatne Lātōna fīliam?<br> +G. Amat, et fīlia Lātōnam amat.<br> +I. Quid fīlia tua parva portat?<br> +G. Corōnās pulchrās fīlia mea parva portat.<br> +I. Cui fīlia tua corōnās pulchrās dat?<br> +G. Diānae corōnās dat.<br> +I. Quis est cum fīliā tuā? Estne sōla?<br> +G. Sōla nōn est; fīlia mea parva est cum ancillā meā. +</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> When a person is called or addressed, the case used is called +the <i>voc´ative</i> (Latin <i>vocāre</i>, “to call”). <i>In form the +vocative is regularly like the nominative</i>. In English the name of +the person addressed usually stands first in the sentence. <i>The Latin +vocative rarely stands first</i>. Point out five examples of the +vocative in this dialogue.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> Observe that questions answered by <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i> in +English are answered in Latin by repeating the verb. Thus, if you wished +to answer in Latin the question <i>Is the sailor fighting?</i> +<b>Pugnatne nauta?</b> you would say <b>Pugnat</b>, <i>he is +fighting</i>, or <b>Nōn pugnat</b>, <i>he is not fighting.</i></p> + + +<span class = "pagenum">25</span> +<a name = "page25"> </a> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_VII"> +LESSON VII</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">THE FIRST OR <i>Ā</i>-DECLENSION</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec57"><b>57.</b></a> +In the preceding lessons we have now gone over all the cases, singular +and plural, of nouns whose nominative singular ends in <b>-a</b>. All +Latin nouns whose nominative singular ends in <b>-a</b> belong to the +First Declension. It is also called the <i>Ā</i>-Declension because of +the prominent part which the vowel <b>a</b> plays in the formation of +the cases. We have also learned what relations are expressed by each +case. These results are summarized in the following table:</p> + +<table class = "boxes"> +<tr> +<th class = "box all">Case</th> +<th class = "box all">Noun</th> +<th class = "box all">Translation</th> +<th class = "box all">Use and General Meaning of Each Case</th> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class = "box"></td> +<td class = "box"></td> +<th class = "box">Singular</th> +<td class = "box"></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "box upper"><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td class = "box upper">do´min<b>-a</b></td> +<td class = "box upper"><i>the lady</i></td> +<td class = "box upper">The subject</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "box"><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td class = "box">domin<b>-ae</b></td> +<td class = "box"><p class = "hanging"> +<i>of the lady</i>, or <i>the lady’s</i></p></td> +<td class = "box"><p class = "hanging"> +The possessor of something</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "box"><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td class = "box">domin<b>-ae</b></td> +<td class = "box"><p class = "hanging"> +<i>to</i> or <i>for the lady</i></p></td> +<td class = "box"><p class = "hanging"> +Expressing the relation <i>to</i> or <i>for</i>, +especially the indirect object</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "box"><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td class = "box">domin<b>-am</b></td> +<td class = "box"><i>the lady</i></td> +<td class = "box">The direct object</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "box lower"><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td class = "box lower">domin<b>-ā</b></td> +<td class = "box lower"><p class = "hanging"> +<i>from, with, by, in, the lady</i></p></td> +<td class = "box lower"><p class = "hanging"> +Separation (<i>from</i>), association or means (<i>with, by</i>), +place where or time when (<i>in, at</i>)</p></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class = "box"></td> +<td class = "box"></td> +<th class = "box">Plural</th> +<td class = "box"></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "box upper"><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td class = "box upper">domin<b>-ae</b></td> +<td class = "box upper"><i>the ladies</i></td> +<td class = "middle box all" rowspan = "5">The same as the singular</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "box"><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td class = "box">domin<b>-ā´rum</b></td> +<td class = "box"><p class = "hanging"> +<i>of the ladies</i>, or <i>the ladies’</i></p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "box"><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td class = "box">domin<b>-īs</b></td> +<td class = "box"><p class = "hanging"> +<i>to</i> or <i>for the ladies</i></p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "box"><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td class = "box">domin<b>-ās</b></td> +<td class = "box"><i>the ladies</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "box lower"><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td class = "box lower">domin<b>-īs</b></td> +<td class = "box lower"><p class = "hanging"> +<i>from, with, by, in, the ladies</i></p></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec58"><b>58.</b></a> +<b>The Base.</b> That part of a word which remains unchanged in +inflection and to which the terminations are added is called the +<b>base</b>.</p> + +<p> +Thus, in the declension above, <b>domin-</b> is the base and <b>-a</b> +is the termination of the nominative singular.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">26</span> +<a name = "page26"> </a> +<a name = "sec59"><b>59.</b></a> +Write the declension of the following nouns, separating the base from +the termination by a hyphen. Also give them orally.</p> + +<p class = "center"> +<b>pugna, terra, lūna, ancil´la, corō´na, īn´sula, silva</b></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec60"><b>60.</b></a> +<b>Gender.</b> In English, names of living beings are either masculine +or feminine, and names of things without life are neuter. This is called +<b>natural gender</b>. Yet in English there are some names of things to +which we refer as if they were feminine; as, “Have you seen my yacht? +<i>She</i> is a beauty.” And there are some names of living beings to +which we refer as if they were neuter; as, “Is the baby here? No, the +nurse has taken <i>it</i> home.” Some words, then, have a gender quite +apart from sex or real gender, and this is called <b>grammatical +gender</b>.</p> + +<p>Latin, like English, has three genders. Names of males are usually +masculine and of females feminine, but <i>names of things have +grammatical gender and may be either masculine, feminine, or neuter</i>. +Thus we have in Latin the three words, <b>lapis</b>, <i>a stone</i>; +<b>rūpēs</b>, <i>a cliff</i>; and <b>saxum</b>, <i>a rock</i>. +<b>Lapis</b> is <i>masculine</i>, <b>rūpēs</b> <i>feminine</i>, and +<b>saxum</b> <i>neuter</i>. The gender can usually be determined by the +ending of the word, and <i>must always be learned</i>, for without +knowing the gender it is impossible to write correct Latin.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec61"><b>61.</b></a> +<b>Gender of First-Declension Nouns.</b> Nouns of the first declension +are feminine unless they denote males. Thus <b>silva</b> is feminine, +but <b>nauta</b>, <i>sailor</i>, and <b>agricola</b>, <i>farmer</i>, are +masculine.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec62"><b>62.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec62vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 284.</p> + +<p>I. 1. Agricola cum fīliā in casā habitat. 2. Bona fīlia +agricolae cēnam parat. 3. Cēna est grāta agricolae<span class = +"tag">1</span> et agricola bonam fīliam laudat. 4. Deinde fīlia +agricolae gallīnās ad cēnam vocat. 5. Gallīnae fīliam agricolae +amant. 6. Malae fīliae bonās cēnās nōn parant. 7. Fīlia +agricolae est grāta dominae. 8. Domina in īnsulā magnā habitat. +9. Domina bonae puellae parvae pecūniam dat.</p> + +<p> +<span class = "pagenum">27</span> +<a name = "page27"> </a> +II. 1. Where does the farmer live? 2. The farmer lives in the small +cottage. 3. Who lives with the farmer? 4. (His) little +daughter lives with the farmer. 5. (His) daughter is getting +(<b>parat</b>) a good dinner for the farmer. 6. The farmer praises +the good dinner. 7. The daughter’s good dinner is pleasing to the +farmer.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. Note that the relation expressed by the dative case covers that <i>to +which a feeling is directed.</i> (Cf. <a href = +"#sec43">§ 43</a>.)</div> + +<p class = "illustration"> +<img src = "../images/pic027.png" width = "531" height = "337" +alt = "In front of a farmhouse: daughter feeding chickens, father +holding a bowl, mother standing"> +</p> + +<p>What Latin words are suggested by this picture?</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec63"><b>63.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">CONVERSATION</span></p> + +<p>Answer the questions in Latin.</p> + +<p class = "inset"> +1. Quis cum agricolā in casā habitat?<br> +2. Quid bona fīlia agricolae parat?<br> +3. Quem agricola laudat?<br> +4. Vocatne fīlia agricolae gallīnās ad cēnam?<br> +5. Cuius fīlia est grāta dominae?<br> +6. Cui domina pecūniam dat? +</p> + + +<span class = "pagenum">28</span> +<a name = "page28"> </a> + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_VIII"> +LESSON VIII</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">FIRST DECLENSION (<i>Continued</i>)</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec64"><b>64.</b></a> +We have for some time now been using adjectives and nouns together and +you have noticed an agreement between them in <i>case</i> and in +<i>number</i> (<a href = "#sec54">§ 54</a>). They agree also in +<i>gender</i>. In the phrase <b>silva magna</b>, we have a feminine +adjective in <b>-a</b> agreeing with a feminine noun in <b>-a</b>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec65"><b>65.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Agreement of Adjectives.</b> +<i>Adjectives agree with their nouns in gender, number, and +case.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec66"><b>66.</b></a> +Feminine adjectives in <b>-a</b> are declined like feminine nouns in +<b>-a</b>, and you should learn to decline them together as follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th colspan = "2">Noun</th> +<th colspan = "2">Adjective</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "center" colspan = "2"> +<b>domina</b> (base <b>domin-</b>), f., <i>lady</i></td> +<td class = "center" colspan = "2"> +<b>bona</b> (base <b>bon-</b>), <i>good</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "2">Singular</th> +<td class = "smallest">TERMINATIONS</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>do´min<b>a</b></td> +<td>bon<b>a</b></td> +<td><b>-a</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>domin<b>ae</b></td> +<td>bon<b>ae</b></td> +<td><b>-ae</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>domin<b>ae</b></td> +<td>bon<b>ae</b></td> +<td><b>-ae</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>domin<b>am</b></td> +<td>bon<b>am</b></td> +<td><b>-am</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>domin<b>ā</b></td> +<td>bon<b>ā</b></td> +<td><b>-ā</b></td> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "2">Plural</th> +<td class = "smallest">TERMINATIONS</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>domin<b>ae</b></td> +<td>bon<b>ae</b></td> +<td><b>-ae</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>domin<b>ā´rum</b></td> +<td>bon<b>ā´rum</b></td> +<td><b>-ārum</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>domin<b>īs</b></td> +<td>bon<b>īs</b></td> +<td><b>-īs</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>domin<b>ās</b></td> +<td>bon<b>ās</b></td> +<td><b>-ās</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>domin<b>īs</b></td> +<td>bon<b>īs</b></td> +<td><b>-īs</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> In the same way decline together <b>puella mala</b>, <i>the +bad girl</i>; <b>ancil´la parva</b>, <i>the little maid</i>; <b>fortū´na +magna</b>, <i>great fortune.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec67"><b>67.</b></a> +The words <b>dea</b>, <i>goddess</i>, and <b>fīlia</b>, <i>daughter</i>, +take the ending <b>-ābus</b> instead of <b>-īs</b> in the <i>dative and +ablative plural.</i> Note the <i>dative and ablative plural</i> in the +following declension:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td class = "center" colspan = "3"> +<span class = "pagenum">29</span> +<a name = "page29"> </a> +<b>dea bona</b> (bases <b>de-</b> <b>bon-</b>)</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th class = "rightpad">Singular</th> +<th>Plural</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>de<b>a</b> bon<b>a</b></td> +<td>de<b>ae</b> bon<b>ae</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>de<b>ae</b> bon<b>ae</b></td> +<td>de<b>ā´rum</b> bon<b>ā´rum</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>de<b>ae</b> bon<b>ae</b></td> +<td>de<b>ā´bus</b> bon<b>īs</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>de<b>am</b> bon<b>am</b></td> +<td>de<b>ās</b> bon<b>ās</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>de<b>ā</b> bon<b>ā</b></td> +<td>de<b>a´bus</b> bon<b>īs</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> In the same way decline together <b>fīlīa parva</b>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec68"><b>68.</b></a> +<b>Latin Word Order.</b> The order of words in English and in Latin +sentences is not the same.</p> + +<p>In English we arrange words in a fairly fixed order. Thus, in the +sentence <i>My daughter is getting dinner for the farmers</i>, we cannot +alter the order of the words without spoiling the sentence. We can, +however, throw emphasis on different words by speaking them with more +force. Try the effect of reading the sentence by putting special force +on <i>my, daughter, dinner, farmers</i>.</p> + +<p>In Latin, where the office of the word in the sentence is shown by +its <i>ending</i> (cf. <a href = "#sec32">§ 32. 1</a>), and +not by its <i>position</i>, the order of words is more free, and +position is used to secure the same effect that in English is secured by +emphasis of voice. To a limited extent we can alter the order of words +in English, too, for the same purpose. Compare the sentences</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>I saw a game of football at Chicago last November</i> (normal +order)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i><b>Last November</b> I saw a game of football at Chicago</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>At Chicago, last November, I saw a game of <b>football</b></i> +</p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>1. In a Latin sentence the most emphatic place is the <i>first</i>; +next in importance is the <i>last</i>; the weakest point is the +<i>middle</i>. Generally the <i>subject</i> is the most important word, +and is placed <i>first</i>; usually the <i>verb</i> is the next in +importance, and is placed <i>last</i>. The other words of the sentence +stand between these two in the order of their importance. Hence the +normal order of words—that is, where no unusual emphasis is +expressed—is as follows:</p> + +<p class = "center"> +<b><i>subject</i>—<i>modifiers of the +subject</i>—<i>indirect object</i>—<i>direct +object</i>—<i>adverb</i>—<i>verb</i></b></p> + +<p>Changes from the normal order are frequent, and are due to the desire +for throwing emphasis upon some word or phrase. <i>Notice the order of +the</i> +<span class = "pagenum">30</span> +<a name = "page30"> </a> +<i>Latin words when you are translating, and imitate it when you are +turning English into Latin.</i></p> + +<p>2. Possessive pronouns and modifying genitives normally stand after +their nouns. When placed before their nouns they are emphatic, as +<b>fīlia mea</b>, <i>my daughter</i>; <b>mea fīlia</b>, <i><b>my</b> +daughter</i>; <b>casa Galbae</b>, <i>Galba’s cottage</i>; <b>Galbae +casa</b>, <i><b>Galba’s</b> cottage</i>.</p> + +<p>Notice the variety of emphasis produced by writing the following +sentence in different ways:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Fīlia mea agricolīs cēnam parat</b> (normal order)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Mea fīlia agricolīs parat cēnam</b> (<b>mea</b> and <b>cēnam</b> +emphatic)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Agricolīs fīlia mea cēnam parat</b> (<b>agricolīs</b> emphatic)</p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>3. An adjective placed before its noun is more emphatic than when it +follows. When great emphasis is desired, the adjective is separated from +its noun by other words.</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Fīlia mea casam parvam nōn amat</b> (<b>parvam</b> not emphatic)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Fīlia mea parvam casam nōn amat</b> (<b>parvam</b> more emphatic)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Parvam fīlia mea casam nōn amat</b> (<b>parvam</b> very emphatic)</p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>4. Interrogative words usually stand first, the same as in +English.</p> + +<p>5. The copula (as <b>est</b>, <b>sunt</b>) is of so little importance +that it frequently does not stand last, but may be placed wherever it +sounds well.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec69"><b>69.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISE</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec69vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 284.</p> + +<p><i>Note the order of the words in these sentences and pick out those +that are emphatic.</i></p> + +<p>1. Longae nōn sunt tuae viae. 2. Suntne tubae novae in meā casā? +Nōn sunt. 3. Quis lātā in silvā habitat? Diāna, lūnae clārae +pulchra dea, lātā in silvā habitat. 4. Nautae altās et lātās amant +aquās. 5. Quid ancilla tua portat? Ancilla mea tubam novam portat. +6. Ubi sunt Lesbia et Iūlia? In tuā casa est Lesbia et Iūlia est in +meā. 7. Estne Italia lāta terra? Longa est Italia, nōn lāta. +8. Cui Galba agricola fābulam novam nārrat? Fīliābus dominae clārae +fābulam novam nārrat. 9. Clāra est īnsula Sicilia. 10. Quem +laudat Lātōna? Lātōna laudat fīliam.</p> + + +<hr class = "tiny"> +<span class = "pagenum">31</span> +<a name = "page31"> </a> + +<h5 class = "boldf"> +<a class = "page" href = "LatinBegin2.html#review_I"> +First Review of Vocabulary and Grammar, §§ 502-505</a></h5> + +<hr class = "tiny"> + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_IX"> +LESSON IX</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">THE SECOND OR <i>O</i>-DECLENSION</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec70"><b>70.</b></a> +Latin nouns are divided into five declensions.</p> + +<p> +The declension to which a noun belongs is shown by the ending of the +genitive singular. This should always be learned along with the +nominative and the gender.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec71"><b>71.</b></a> +The nominative singular of nouns of the Second or <i>O</i>-Declension +ends in <b>-us</b>, <b>-er</b>, <b>-ir</b>, or <b>-um</b>. The genitive +singular ends in <b>-ī</b>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec72"><b>72.</b></a> +<b>Gender.</b> Nouns in <b>-um</b> are neuter. The others are regularly +masculine.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec73"><b>73.</b></a> +<b>Declension of nouns in -<i>us</i> and -<i>um</i>.</b> Masculines in +<b>-us</b> and neuters in <b>-um</b> are declined as follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td colspan = "2"> +<b>dominus</b> (base <b>domin-</b>), m., <i>master</i></td> +<td colspan = "2"> +<b>pīlum</b> (base <b>pīl-</b>), n., <i>spear</i></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "4">Singular</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td><td></td> +<td class = "smallest">TERMINATIONS</td> +<td></td> +<td class = "smallest">TERMINATIONS</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>do´min<b>us</b><span class = "tag">1</span></td> +<td><b>-us</b></td> +<td>pīl<b>um</b></td> +<td><b>-um</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>domin<b>ī</b></td> +<td><b>-ī</b></td> +<td>pīl<b>ī</b></td> +<td><b>-ī</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>domin<b>ō</b></td> +<td><b>-ō</b></td> +<td>pīl<b>ō</b></td> +<td><b>-ō</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>domin<b>um</b></td> +<td><b>-um</b></td> +<td>pīl<b>um</b></td> +<td><b>-um</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>domin<b>ō</b></td> +<td><b>-ō</b></td> +<td>pīl<b>ō</b></td> +<td><b>-ō</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Voc.</i></td> +<td>domin<b>e</b></td> +<td><b>-e</b></td> +<td>pīl<b>um</b></td> +<td><b>-um</b></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "4">Plural</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>domin<b>ī</b></td> +<td><b>-ī</b></td> +<td>pīl<b>a</b></td> +<td><b>-a</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>domin<b>ō´rum</b></td> +<td><b>-ōrum</b></td> +<td>pīl<b>ō´rum</b></td> +<td><b>-ōrum</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>domin<b>īs</b></td> +<td><b>-īs</b></td> +<td>pīl<b>īs</b></td> +<td><b>-īs</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>domin<b>ōs</b></td> +<td><b>-ōs</b></td> +<td>pīl<b>a</b></td> +<td><b>-a</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>domin<b>īs</b></td> +<td><b>-īs</b></td> +<td>pīl<b>īs</b></td> +<td><b>-īs</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. Compare the declension of <b>domina</b> and of <b>dominus</b>.</div> + +<span class = "pagenum">32</span> +<a name = "page32"> </a> +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Observe that the masculines and the neuters have the same +terminations excepting in the nominative singular and the nominative and +accusative plural.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> The vocative singular of words of the second declension in +<b>-us</b> ends in <b>-ĕ</b>, as <b>domine</b>, <i>O master</i>; +<b>serve</b>, <i>O slave</i>. This is the most important exception to +the rule in <a href = "#sec56">§ 56. <i>a</i></a>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec74"><b>74.</b></a> +Write side by side the declension of <b>domina</b>, <b>dominus</b>, and +<b>pīlum</b>. A comparison of the forms will lead to the following +rules, which are of great importance because they apply to all five +declensions:</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> The vocative, with a single exception (see <a href = +"#sec73">§ 73. <i>b</i></a>), is like the nominative. That is, +the vocative singular is like the nominative singular, and the vocative +plural is like the nominative plural.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> The nominative, accusative, and vocative of neuter nouns are +alike, and in the plural end in <b>-a</b>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>c.</i> The accusative singular of masculines and feminines ends in +<b>-m</b> and the accusative plural in <b>-s</b>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>d.</i> The dative and ablative plural are always alike.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>e.</i> Final <b>-i</b> and <b>-o</b> are always <i>long</i>; final +<b>-a</b> is <i>short</i>, except in the ablative singular of the first +declension.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec75"><b>75.</b></a> +Observe the sentences</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Lesbia est bona</b>, <i>Lesbia is good</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Lesbia est ancilla</b>, <i>Lesbia is a maidservant</i></p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>We have learned (<a href = "#sec55">§ 55</a>) that <b>bona</b>, +when used, as here, in the predicate to describe the subject, is called +a <i>predicate adjective</i>. Similarly a <i>noun</i>, as +<b>ancilla</b>, used in the <i>predicate</i> to define the subject is +called a <b>predicate noun</b>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec76"><b>76.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Predicate Noun.</b> <i>A +predicate noun agrees in case with the subject of the verb.</i></p> + +<p class = "illustration"> +<img src = "../images/pic032.png" width = "352" height = "37" +alt = "spears"><br> +<span class = "caption"> +PILA</span></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">33</span> +<a name = "page33"> </a> +<a name = "sec77"><b>77.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">DIALOGUE</span></p> + +<p> +<img src = "../images/pic033upper.png" width = "354" height = "44" +alt = "officer with spear and trumpet"></p> +<p class = "floatleft nospace"> +<img src = "../images/pic033lower.png" width = "270" height = "422" +alt = "officer with spear and trumpet"><br> +<span class = "caption"> +LEGATUS CUM PILO ET TUBA</span></p> + +<h5 class = "smallcaps">Galba and Marcus</h5> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec77vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 285.</p> + +<p class = "inset"> +G. Quis, Mārce, est lēgātus cum pīlō et tubā?<br> +M. Lēgātus, Galba, est Sextus.<br> +G. Ubi Sextus habitat?<span class = "tag">2</span><br> +M. In oppidō Sextus cum fīliābus habitat.<br> +G. Amantne oppidānī Sextum?<br> +M. Amant oppidānī Sextum et laudant, quod magnā cum cōnstantiā +pugnat.<br> +G. Ubi, Mārce, est ancilla tua? Cūr nōn cēnam parat?<br> +M. Ancilla mea, Galba, equō lēgātī aquam et frūmentum dat.<br> +G. Cūr nōn servus Sextī equum dominī cūrat?<br> +M. Sextus et servus ad mūrum oppidī properant. +Oppidānī bellum parant.<span class = "tag">3</span></p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +<a name = "note33_1">2.</a> <b>habitat</b> is here translated <i>does +live</i>. Note the <i>three</i> possible translations of the Latin +present tense:</div> + +<table class = "nospace"> +<tr> +<td class = "smaller"><br> +<b>habitat</b> +</td> +<td class = "middle left ital smaller"> +he lives<br> +he is living<br> +he does live</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<div class = "footnote nospace"> +Always choose the translation which makes the best sense.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. Observe that the verb <b>parō</b> means not only <i>to prepare</i> +but also <i>to prepare for</i>, and governs the accusative case.</div> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">34</span> +<a name = "page34"> </a> +<a name = "sec78"><b>78.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">CONVERSATION</span></p> + +<p>Translate the questions and answer them in Latin.</p> + +<p class = "inset"> +1. Ubi fīliae Sextī habitant?<br> +2. Quem oppidānī amant et laudant?<br> +3. Quid ancilla equō lēgātī dat?<br> +4. Cuius equum ancilla cūrat?<br> +5. Quis ad mūrum cum Sextō properat?<br> +6. Quid oppidānī parant? +</p> + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_X"> +LESSON X</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">SECOND DECLENSION (<i>Continued</i>)</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec79"><b>79.</b></a> +We have been freely using feminine adjectives, like <b>bona</b>, in +agreement with feminine nouns of the first declension and declined like +them. <i>Masculine</i> adjectives of this class are declined like +<b>dominus</b>, and <i>neuters</i> like pīlum. The adjective and noun, +masculine and neuter, are therefore declined as follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th colspan = "3"> +Masculine Noun and Adjective</th> +<th colspan = "2"> +Neuter Noun and Adjective</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "center" colspan = "3"> +<b>dominus bonus</b>, <i>the good master</i></td> +<td class = "center" colspan = "2"> +<b>pīlum bonum</b>, <i>the good spear</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "center" colspan = "3"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Bases</span> <b>domin- bon-</b></td> +<td class = "center" colspan = "2"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Bases</span> <b>pīl- bon-</b></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "4">Singular</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td><td></td> +<td class = "smallest">TERMINATIONS</td> +<td></td> +<td class = "smallest">TERMINATIONS</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>do´min<b>us</b> bon<b>us</b></td> +<td><b>-us</b></td> +<td>pīl<b>um</b> bon<b>um</b></td> +<td><b>-um</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>domin<b>ī</b> bon<b>ī</b></td> +<td><b>-ī</b></td> +<td>pīl<b>ī</b> bon<b>ī</b></td> +<td><b>-ī</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>domin<b>ō</b> bon<b>ō</b></td> +<td><b>-ō</b></td> +<td>pīl<b>ō</b> bon<b>ō</b></td> +<td><b>-ō</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>domin<b>um</b> bon<b>um</b></td> +<td><b>-um</b></td> +<td>pīl<b>um</b> bon<b>um</b></td> +<td><b>-um</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>domin<b>ō</b> bon<b>ō</b></td> +<td><b>-ō</b></td> +<td>pīl<b>ō</b> bon<b>ō</b></td> +<td><b>-ō</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Voc.</i></td> +<td>domin<b>e</b> bon<b>e</b></td> +<td><b>-e</b></td> +<td>pīl<b>um</b> bon<b>um</b></td> +<td><b>-um</b></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "4">Plural</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>domin<b>ī</b> bon<b>ī</b></td> +<td><b>-ī</b></td> +<td>pīl<b>a</b> bon<b>a</b></td> +<td><b>-a</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>domin<b>ō´rum</b> bon<b>ō´rum</b></td> +<td><b>-ōrum</b></td> +<td>pīl<b>ō´rum</b> bon<b>ō´rum</b></td> +<td><b>-ōrum</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>domin<b>īs</b> bon<b>īs</b></td> +<td><b>-is</b></td> +<td>pīl<b>īs</b> bon<b>īs</b></td> +<td><b>-īs</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>domin<b>ōs</b> bon<b>ōs</b></td> +<td><b>-ōs</b></td> +<td>pīl<b>a</b> bon<b>a</b></td> +<td><b>-a</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>domin<b>īs</b> bon<b>īs</b></td> +<td><b>-īs</b></td> +<td>pīl<b>īs</b> bon<b>īs</b></td> +<td><b>-īs</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p> +<span class = "pagenum">35</span> +<a name = "page35"> </a> +Decline together <b>bellum longum, equus parvus, servus malus, mūrus +altus, frūmentum novum</b>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec80"><b>80.</b></a> +Observe the sentences</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Lesbia ancilla est bona</b>, <i>Lesbia, the maidservant, is +good</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Fīlia Lesbiae ancillae est bona</b>, <i>the daughter of Lesbia, the +maidservant, is good</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Servus Lesbiam ancillam amat</b>, <i>the slave loves Lesbia, the +maidservant</i></p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>In these sentences <b>ancilla</b>, <b>ancillae</b>, and +<b>ancillam</b> denote the class of persons to which <i>Lesbia</i> +belongs and explain who she is. Nouns so related that the second is only +another name for the first and explains it are said to be in apposition, +and are always in the same case.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec81"><b>81.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Apposition.</b> <i>An +appositive agrees in case with the noun which it explains.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec82"><b>82.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec82vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 285.</p> + +<p>I. 1. Patria servī bonī, vīcus servōrum bonōrum, bone popule. +2. Populus oppidī magnī, in oppidō magnō, in oppidīs magnīs. +3. Cum pīlīs longīs, ad pīla longa, ad mūrōs lātōs. 4. Lēgāte +male, amīcī legātī malī, cēna grāta dominō bonō. 5. Frūmentum +equōrum parvōrum, domine bone, ad lēgātōs clārōs. 6. Rhēnus est in +Germāniā, patriā meā. 7. Sextus lēgātus pīlum longum portat. +8. Oppidānī bonī Sextō lēgātō clārā pecūniam dant. 9. Malī +servī equum bonum Mārcī dominī necant. 10. Galba agricola et Iūlia +fīlia bona labōrant. 11. Mārcus nauta in īnsulā Siciliā +habitat.</p> + +<p>II. 1. Wicked slave, who is your friend? Why does he not praise +Galba, your master? 2. My friend is from (<b>ex</b>) a village of +Germany, my fatherland. 3. My friend does not love the people of +Italy. 4. Who is caring for<span class = "tag">1</span> the good +horse of Galba, the farmer? 5. Mark, where is Lesbia, the +maidservant? 6. She is hastening<span class = "tag">1</span> to the +little cottage<span class = "tag">2</span> of Julia, the farmer’s +daughter.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. See <a href = "#note33_1">footnote</a> 1, p. 33. Remember that +<b>cūrat</b> is transitive and governs a direct object.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. Not the dative. (Cf. <a href = "#sec43">§ 43</a>.)</div> + + +<span class = "pagenum">36</span> +<a name = "page36"> </a> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XI"> +LESSON XI</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec83"><b>83.</b></a> +Adjectives of the first and second declensions are declined in the three +genders as follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "3">Singular</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "smallhead">MASCULINE</td> +<td class = "smallhead">FEMININE</td> +<td class = "smallhead">NEUTER</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>bon<b>us</b></td> +<td>bon<b>a</b></td> +<td>bon<b>um</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>bon<b>ī</b></td> +<td>bon<b>ae</b></td> +<td>bon<b>ī</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>bon<b>ō</b></td> +<td>bon<b>ae</b></td> +<td>bon<b>ō</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>bon<b>um</b></td> +<td>bon<b>am</b></td> +<td>bon<b>um</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>bon<b>ō</b></td> +<td>bon<b>ā</b></td> +<td>bon<b>ō</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Voc.</i></td> +<td>bon<b>e</b></td> +<td>bon<b>a</b></td> +<td>bon<b>um</b></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "3">Plural</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>bon<b>ī</b></td> +<td>bon<b>ae</b></td> +<td>bon<b>a</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>bon<b>ōrum</b></td> +<td>bon<b>ārum</b></td> +<td>bon<b>ōrum</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>bon<b>īs</b></td> +<td>bon<b>īs</b></td> +<td>bon<b>īs</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>bon<b>ōs</b></td> +<td>bon<b>ās</b></td> +<td>bon<b>a</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>bon<b>īs</b></td> +<td>bon<b>īs</b></td> +<td>bon<b>īs</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Write the declension and give it orally <i>across the +page</i>, thus giving the three genders for each case.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> Decline <b>grātus, -a, -um</b>; <b>malus, -a, -um</b>; +<b>altus, -a, -um</b>; <b>parvus, -a, -um</b>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec84"><b>84.</b></a> +Thus far the adjectives have had the same terminations as the nouns. +However, the agreement between the adjective and its noun does +<i>not</i> mean that they must have the same termination. If the +adjective and the noun belong to different declensions, the terminations +will, in many cases, not be the same. For example, <b>nauta</b>, +<i>sailor</i>, is masculine and belongs to the first declension. The +masculine form of the adjective <b>bonus</b> is of the second +declension. Consequently, <i>a good sailor</i> is <b>nauta bonus</b>. +So, <i>the wicked farmer</i> is <b>agricola malus</b>. Learn the +following declensions:</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">37</span> +<a name = "page37"> </a> +<a name = "sec85"><b>85.</b></a> +<span class = "midplain"><b>nauta bonus</b> (bases <b>naut- bon-</b>), +m., <i>the good sailor</i> +</span></p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th colspan = "3">Singular</th> +<th colspan = "2">Plural</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>naut<b>a</b></td> +<td class = "rightpad">bon<b>us</b></td> +<td>naut<b>ae</b></td> +<td>bon<b>ī</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>naut<b>ae</b></td> +<td>bon<b>ī</b></td> +<td>naut<b>ārum</b></td> +<td>bon<b>ōrum</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>naut<b>ae</b></td> +<td>bon<b>ō</b></td> +<td>naut<b>īs</b></td> +<td>bon<b>īs</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>naut<b>am</b></td> +<td>bon<b>um</b></td> +<td>naut<b>ās</b></td> +<td>bon<b>ōs</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>naut<b>ā</b></td> +<td>bon<b>ō</b></td> +<td>naut<b>īs</b></td> +<td>bon<b>īs</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Voc.</i></td> +<td>naut<b>a</b></td> +<td>bon<b>e</b></td> +<td>naut<b>ae</b></td> +<td>bon<b>ī</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec86"><b>86.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec86vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 285.</p> + +<p>I. 1. Est<span class = "tag">1</span> in vīcō nauta bonus. +2. Sextus est amīcus nautae bonī. 3. Sextus nautae bonō galeam +dat. 4. Populus Rōmānus nautam bonum laudat. 5. Sextus cum +nautā bonō praedam portat. 6. Ubi, nauta bone, sunt anna et tēla +lēgātī Rōmānī? 7. Nautae bonī ad bellum properant. 8. Fāma +nautārum bonōrum est clāra. 9. Pugnae sunt grātae nautīs bonīs. +10. Oppidānī nautās bonōs cūrant. 11. Cūr, nautae bonī, malī +agricolae ad Rhēnum properant? 12. Malī agricolae cum bonīs nautīs +pugnant.</p> + +<p>II. 1. The wicked farmer is hastening to the village with (his) +booty. 2. The reputation of the wicked farmer is not good. +3. Why does Galba’s daughter give arms and weapons to the wicked +farmer? 4. Lesbia invites the good sailor to dinner. 5. Why is +Lesbia with the good sailor hastening from the cottage? 6. Sextus, +where is my helmet? 7. The good sailors are hastening to the +toilsome battle. 8. The horses of the wicked farmers are small. +9. The Roman people give money to the good sailors. +10. Friends care for the good sailors. 11. Whose friends are +fighting with the wicked farmers?</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. <b>Est</b>, beginning a declarative sentence, <i>there is.</i></div> + +<p class = "illustration"> +<img src = "../images/pic037.png" width = "265" height = "130" +alt = "helmets"><br> +<span class = "caption"> +GALEAE</span></p> + + +<span class = "pagenum">38</span> +<a name = "page38"> </a> +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XII"> +LESSON XII</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">NOUNS IN <i>-IUS</i> AND <i>-IUM</i></h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec87"><b>87.</b></a> +Nouns of the second declension in <b>-ius</b> and <b>-ium</b> end in +<b>-ī</b> in the genitive singular, <i>not</i> in <b>-iī</b>, and the +accent rests on the penult; as, <b>fīlī</b> from <b>fīlius</b> +(<i>son</i>), <b>praesi´dī</b> from <b>praesi´dium</b> +(<i>garrison</i>).</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec88"><b>88.</b></a> +Proper names of persons in <b>-ius</b>, and <b>fīlius</b>, end in +<b>-ī</b> in the vocative singular, <i>not</i> in <b>-ĕ</b>, and the +accent rests on the penult; as, <b>Vergi´lī</b>, <i>O Vergil</i>; +<b>fīlī</b>, <i>O son.</i></p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Observe that in these words the vocative and the genitive are +alike.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec89"><b>89.</b></a> +<span class = "midplain"><b>praesidium</b> (base <b>praesidi-</b>), n., +<i>garrison</i></span> +<span class = "inset"><b>fīlius</b> (base <b>fīli-</b>), m., +<i>son</i></span></p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th colspan = "4">Singular</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td class = "rightpad">praesidi<b>um</b></td> +<td>fīli<b>us</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>praesi´d<b>ī</b></td> +<td>fīl<b>ī</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>praesidi<b>ō</b></td> +<td>fīli<b>ō</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>praesidi<b>um</b></td> +<td>fīli<b>um</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>praesidi<b>ō</b></td> +<td>fīli<b>ō</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Voc</i>.</td> +<td>praesidi<b>um</b></td> +<td>fīl<b>ī</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>The plural is regular. Note that the <b>-i-</b> of the base is lost +only in the genitive singular, and in the vocative of words like +<b>fīlius</b>.</p> + +<p>Decline together <b>praesidium parvum</b>; <b>fīlius bonus</b>; +<b>fluvius longus</b>, <i>the long river</i>; <b>proelium clārum</b>, +<i>the famous battle.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec90"><b>90.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec90vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 285.</p> + +<p>I. 1. Frūmentum bonae terrae, gladī malī, bellī longī. +2. Cōnstantia magna, praesidia magna, clāre Vergi´lī. 3. Male +serve, Ō clārum oppidum, male fīlī, fīliī malī, fīlī malī. 4. Fluvī +longī, fluviī longī, fluviōrum longōrum, fāma praesi´dī magnī. +5. Cum gladiīs parvīs, cum deābus clārīs, ad nautās clārōs. +6. Multōrum proeliōrum, praedae magnae, ad proelia dūra.</p> + +<span class = "pagenum">39</span> +<a name = "page39"> </a> +<h5 class = "smallcaps">Germānia</h5> + +<p>II. Germānia, patria Germānōrum, est clāra terra. In Germāniā sunt +fluviī multī. Rhēnus magnus et lātus fluvius Germāniae est. In silvīs +lātīs Germāniae sunt ferae multae. Multi Germānii in oppidīs magnis et +in vīcīs parvīs habitant et multī sunt agricolae bonī. Bella Germānōrum +sunt magna et clāra. Populus Germāniae bellum et proelia amat et saepe +cum finitimīs pugnat. Fluvius Rhēnus est fīnitimus oppidīs<span class = +"tag">1</span> multīs et clārīs.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. Dative with <b>fīnitimus</b>. (See <a href = +"#sec43">§ 43</a>.)</div> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XIII"> +LESSON XIII</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">SECOND DECLENSION (<i>Continued</i>)</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec91"><b>91.</b></a> +<b>Declension of Nouns in <i>-er</i> and <i>-ir</i>.</b> In early Latin +all the masculine nouns of the second declension ended in <b>-os</b>. +This <b>-os</b> later became <b>-us</b> in words like <b>servus</b>, and +was dropped entirely in words with bases ending in <b>-r</b>, like +<b>puer</b>, <i>boy</i>; <b>ager</b>, <i>field</i>; and <b>vir</b>, +<i>man</i>. These words are therefore declined as follows:</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec92"><b>92.</b></a> +<span class = "midplain"><b>puer</b>, m., <i>boy</i></span> +<span class = "inset"><b>ager</b>, m., <i>field</i></span> +<span class = "inset"><b>vir</b>, m., <i>man</i></span> +</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td> +<span class = "smallcaps">Base</span> <b>puer-</b></td> +<td> +<span class = "smallcaps">Base</span> <b>agr-</b></td> +<td> +<span class = "smallcaps">Base</span> <b>vir-</b></td> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "3">Singular</th> +<td class = "smallest">TERMINATIONS</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>puer</td> +<td>ager</td> +<td>vir</td> +<td>——</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>puer<b>ī</b></td> +<td>agr<b>ī</b></td> +<td>vir<b>ī</b></td> +<td><b>-ī</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>puer<b>ō</b></td> +<td>agr<b>ō</b></td> +<td>vir<b>ō</b></td> +<td><b>-ō</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>puer<b>um</b></td> +<td>agr<b>um</b></td> +<td>vir<b>um</b></td> +<td><b>-um</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>puer<b>ō</b></td> +<td>agr<b>ō</b></td> +<td>vir<b>ō</b></td> +<td><b>-ō</b></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "3">Plural</th> +<td></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>puer<b>ī</b></td> +<td>agr<b>ī</b></td> +<td>vir<b>ī</b></td> +<td><b>-ī</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td class = "rightpad">puer<b>ōrum</b></td> +<td class = "rightpad">agr<b>ōrum</b></td> +<td class = "rightpad">vir<b>ōrum</b></td> +<td><b>-ōrum</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>puer<b>īs</b></td> +<td>agr<b>īs</b></td> +<td>vir<b>īs</b></td> +<td><b>-īs</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>puer<b>ōs</b></td> +<td>agr<b>ōs</b></td> +<td>vir<b>ōs</b></td> +<td><b>-ōs</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>puer<b>īs</b></td> +<td>agr<b>īs</b></td> +<td>vir<b>īs</b></td> +<td><b>-īs</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "pagenum">40</span> +<a name = "page40"> </a> +<i>a.</i> The vocative case of these words is like the nominative, +following the general rule (<a href = +"#sec74">§ 74. <i>a</i></a>).</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> The declension differs from that of <b>servus</b> only in the +nominative and vocative singular.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>c.</i> Note that in <b>puer</b> the <b>e</b> remains all the way +through, while in <b>ager</b> it is present only in the nominative. In +<b>puer</b> the <b>e</b> belongs to the base, but in <b>ager</b> (base +<b>agr-</b>) it does not, and was inserted in the nominative to make it +easier to pronounce. Most words in <b>-er</b> are declined like +<b>ager</b>. <i>The genitive shows whether you are to follow</i> +<b>puer</b> <i>or</i> <b>ager</b>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec93"><b>93.</b></a> +Masculine adjectives in <b>-er</b> of the second declension are declined +like nouns in <b>-er</b>. A few of them are declined like <b>puer</b>, +but most of them like <b>ager</b>. The feminine and neuter nominatives +show which form to follow, thus,</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th>Masc.</th> +<th>Fem.</th> +<th>Neut.</th> +<td></td> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>līber</b></td> +<td><b>lībera</b></td> +<td><b>līberum</b></td> +<td>(<i>free</i>)</td> +<td>is like <b>puer</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>pulcher</b></td> +<td><b>pulchra</b></td> +<td><b>pulchrum</b></td> +<td>(<i>pretty</i>)</td> +<td>is like <b>ager</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>For the full declension in the three genders, see <a href = +"LatinBegin2.html#sec469">§ 469</a>. <i>b.</i> <i>c.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec94"><b>94.</b></a> +Decline together the words <b>vir līber</b>, <b>terra lībera</b>, +<b>frūmentum līberum</b>, <b>puer pulcher</b>, <b>puella pulchra</b>, +<b>oppidum pulchrum</b></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec95"><b>95.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps inset">Italia<span class = +"tag">1</span></span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec95vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 286.</p> + +<p>Magna est Italiae fāma, patriae Rōmānōrum, et clāra est Rōma, domina +orbis terrārum.<span class = "tag">2</span> Tiberim,<span class = +"tag">3</span> fluvium Rōmānum, quis nōn laudat et pulchrōs fluviō +fīnitimōs agrōs? Altōs mūrōs, longa et dūra bella, clārās victōriās quis +nōn laudat? Pulchra est terra Italia. Agrī bonī agricolīs praemia dant +magna, et equī agricolārum cōpiam frūmentī ad oppida et vīcōs portant. +In agrīs populī Rōmānī labōrant multī servī. Viae Italiae sunt longae et +lātae. Fīnitima Italiae est īnsula Sicilia.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. In this selection note especially the emphasis as shown by the order +of the words.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. <b>orbis terrārum</b>, <i>of the world</i>.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. <b>Tiberim</b>, <i>the Tiber</i>, accusative case.</div> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">41</span> +<a name = "page41"> </a> +<a name = "sec96"><b>96.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">DIALOGUE</span></p> + +<h5 class = "smallcaps">Marcus and Cornelius</h5> + +<p class = "illustration floatleft"> +<img src = "../images/pic041.png" width = "303" height = "434" +alt = "legionary"><br> +<span class = "caption"> +LEGIONARIUS</span></p> + +<p class = "inset"> +C. Ubi est, Mārce, fīlius tuus? Estne in pulchrā terrā Italiā?<br> +M. Nōn est, Cornēlī, in Italiā. Ad fluvium Rhēnum properat cum cōpiīs +Rōmānīs quia est<span class = "tag">4</span> fāma Novī bellī cum +Germānīs. Līber Germāniae populus Rōmānōs Nōn amat.<br> +C. Estne fīlius tuus copiārum Rōmānārum lēgātus?<br> +M. Lēgātus nōn est, sed est apud legiōnāriōs.<br> +C. Quae<span class = "tag">5</span> arma portat<span class = +"tag">6</span>?<br> +M. Scūtum magnum et lōrīcam dūram et galeam pulchram portat.<br> +C. Quae tēla portat?<br> +M. Gladium et pīlum longum portat.<br> +C. Amatne lēgātus fīlium tuum?<br> +M. Amat, et saepe fīliō meō praemia pulchra et praedam multam dat.<br> +C. Ubi est terra Germānōrum?<br> +M. Terra Germānōrum, Cornēlī est fīnitima Rhēnō, fluviō magnō et altō. +</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +4. <b>est</b>, before its subject, <i>there is</i>; so <b>sunt</b>, +<i>there are.</i></div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +5. <b>Quae</b>, <i>what kind of</i>, an interrogative adjective +pronoun.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +6. What are the three possible translations of the present tense?</div> + + +<span class = "pagenum">42</span> +<a name = "page42"> </a> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XIV"> +LESSON XIV</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">THE POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec97"><b>97.</b></a> +Observe the sentences</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>This is my shield</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>This shield is mine</i></p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>In the first sentence <i>my</i> is a possessive adjective; in the +second <i>mine</i> is a possessive pronoun, for it takes the place of a +noun, <i>this shield is mine</i> being equivalent to <i>this shield is +my shield</i>. Similarly, in Latin the possessives are sometimes +<i>adjectives</i> and sometimes <i>pronouns</i>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec98"><b>98.</b></a> +The possessives <i>my, mine, your, yours</i>, etc. are declined like +adjectives of the first and second declensions.</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "2">Singular</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>1st Pers.</i></td> +<td><b>meus, mea, meum</b></td> +<td><i>my, mine</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>2d Pers.</i></td> +<td><b>tuus, tua, tuum</b></td> +<td><i>your, yours</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>3d Pers.</i></td> +<td><b>suus, sua, suum</b></td> +<td><i>his (own), her (own), its (own)</i></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "2">Plural</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>1st Pers.</i></td> +<td><b>noster, nostra, nostrum</b></td> +<td><i>our, ours</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>2d Pers.</i></td> +<td><b>vester, vestra, vestrum</b></td> +<td><i>your, yours</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>3d Pers.</i></td> +<td><b>suus, sua, suum</b></td> +<td><i>their (own), theirs</i></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Note.</span> <b>Meus</b> has the irregular +vocative singular masculine <b>mī</b>, as <b>mī fīlī</b>, <i>O my +son</i>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> The possessives agree with the name of the <i>thing +possessed</i> in gender, number, and case. Compare the English and Latin +in</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>Sextus is calling <b>his</b> boy</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>Julia is calling <b>her</b> boy</i></p> +</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Sextus</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Iūlia</b></p> +</td> +<td class = "middle left boldf">suum puerum vocat</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +Observe that <b>suum</b> agrees with <b>puerum</b>, and is unaffected by +the gender of Sextus or Julia.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> When <i>your, yours</i>, refers to <i>one</i> person, use +<b>tuus</b>; when to <i>more than one</i>, <b>vester</b>; as,</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td> +<i>Lesbia, your wreaths are pretty<br> +Girls, your wreaths are pretty</i> +</td> +<td> +<b>Corōnae tuae, Lesbia, sunt pulchrae<br> +Corōnae vestrae, puellae, sunt pulchrae</b> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "pagenum">43</span> +<a name = "page43"> </a> +<i>c.</i> <b>Suus</b> is a <i>reflexive</i> possessive, that is, it +usually stands in the predicate and regularly refers back to the +<i>subject</i>. Thus, <b>Vir suōs servōs vocat</b> means <i>The man +calls his (own) slaves.</i> Here <i>his</i> (<b>suōs</b>) refers to +<i>man</i> (<b>vir</b>), and could not refer to any one else.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>d.</i> Possessives are used much less frequently than in English, +being omitted whenever the meaning is clear without them. (Cf. <a href = +"#sec22">§ 22</a>. a.) This is especially true of <b>suus, -a, +-um</b>, which, when inserted, is more or less emphatic, like our <i>his +own, her own</i>, etc.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec99"><b>99.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec99vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 286.</p> + +<p>I. 1. Mārcus amīcō Sextō cōnsilium suum nūntiat 2. Est cōpia frūmentī +in agrīs nostrīs. 3. Amīcī meī bonam cēnam ancillae vestrae laudant +4. Tua lōrīca, mī fīlī, est dūra. 5. Scūta nostra et tēla, mī +amīce, in castrls Rōmānīs sunt. 6. Suntne virī patriae tuae līberī? +Sunt. 7. Ubi, Cornēlī, est tua galea pulchra? 8. Mea galea, +Sexte, est in casā meā. 9. Pīlum longum est tuum, sed gladius est +meus. 10. Iūlia gallīnās suās pulchrās amat et gallīnae dominam +suam amant. 11. Nostra castra sunt vestra. 12. Est cōpia +praedae in castrīs vestrīs. 13. Amīcī tuī miserīs et aegrīs cibum +et pecūniam saepe dant.</p> + +<p>II. 1. Our teacher praises Mark’s industry. 2. My son Sextus is +carrying his booty to the Roman camp.<span class = "tag">1</span> +3. Your good girls are giving aid to the sick and wretched.<span +class = "tag">2</span> 4. There are <span class = "tag">3</span> +frequent battles in our villages. 5. My son, where is the +lieutenant’s food? 6. The camp is mine, but the weapons are +yours.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. Not the dative. Why?</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. Here the adjectives <i>sick</i> and <i>wretched</i> are used like +nouns.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. Where should <b>sunt</b> stand? Cf. I. 2 above.</div> + +<p class = "illustration"> +<img src = "../images/pic043.png" width = "230" height = "151" +alt = "a farmer plowing with oxen"><br> +<span class = "caption"> +AGRICOLA ARAT</span></p> + + +<span class = "pagenum">44</span> +<a name = "page44"> </a> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XV"> +LESSON XV</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">THE ABLATIVE DENOTING <i>WITH</i></h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec100"><b>100.</b></a> +Of the various relations denoted by the ablative case (<a href = +"#sec50">§ 50</a>) there is none more important than that expressed +in English by the preposition <i>with</i>. This little word is not so +simple as it looks. It does not always convey the same meaning, nor is +it always to be translated by <b>cum</b>. This will become clear from +the following sentences:</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>a.</i> Mark is feeble <i>with</i> (<i>for</i> or <i>because of</i>) +want of food</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>b.</i> Diana kills the beasts <i>with</i> (or <i>by</i>) her +arrows</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>c.</i> Julia is <i>with</i> Sextus</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>d.</i> The men fight <i>with</i> great steadiness</p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> In sentence <i>a</i>, <i>with want</i> (<i>of food</i>) gives +the cause of Mark’s feebleness. This idea is expressed in Latin by the +ablative without a preposition, and the construction is called the +<b>ablative of cause</b>:</p> + +<p class = "center"> +<b>Mārcus est īnfīrmus inopiā cibī</b></p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> In sentence <i>b</i>, <i>with</i> (or <i>by</i>) <i>her +arrows</i> tells <b>by means of what</b> Diana kills the beasts. This +idea is expressed in Latin by the ablative without a preposition, and +the construction is called the <b>ablative of means</b>:</p> + +<p class = "center"> +<b>Diāna sagittīs suīs ferās necat</b></p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>c.</i> In sentence <i>c</i> we are told that Julia is not alone, but +<b>in company with</b> Sextus. This idea is expressed in Latin by the +ablative with the preposition <b>cum</b>, and the construction is called +the <b>ablative of accompaniment</b>:</p> + +<p class = "center"> +<b>Iūlia est cum Sextō</b></p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>d.</i> In sentence <i>d</i> we are told how the men fight. The idea +is one of <b>manner</b>. This is expressed in Latin by the ablative with +<b>cum</b>, unless there is a modifying adjective present, in which case +<b>cum</b> may be omitted. This construction is called the <b>ablative +of manner</b>:</p> + +<p class = "center"> +<b>Virī (cum) cōnstantiā magnā pugnant</b></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec101"><b>101.</b></a> +You are now able to form four important rules for the ablative denoting +<i>with</i>:</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">45</span> +<a name = "page45"> </a> +<a name = "sec102"><b>102.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Ablative of Cause.</b> +<i>Cause is denoted by the ablative without a preposition. This answers +the question Because of what?</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec103"><b>103.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Ablative of Means.</b> +<i>Means is denoted by the ablative without a preposition. This answers +the question By means of what? With what?</i></p> + +<p class = "note"> +N.B. <b>Cum</b> must never be used with the ablative expressing cause or +means.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec104"><b>104.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Ablative of Accompaniment.</b> +<i>Accompaniment is denoted by the ablative with <b>cum</b>. This +answers the question With whom?</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec105"><b>105.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Ablative of Manner.</b> <i>The +ablative with <b>cum</b> is used to denote the manner of an action. +<b>Cum</b> may be omitted, if an adjective is used with the ablative. +This answers the question How? In what manner?</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec106"><b>106.</b></a> +What uses of the ablative do you discover in the following passage, and +what question does each answer?</p> + +<p>The soldiers marched to the fort with great speed and broke down the +gate with blows of their muskets. The inhabitants, terrified by the din, +attempted to cross the river with their wives and children, but the +stream was swollen with (<i>or</i> by) the rain. Because of this many +were swept away by the waters and only a few, almost overcome with +fatigue, with great difficulty succeeded in gaining the farther +shore.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec107"><b>107.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec107vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 286.</p> + +<p>I. <i>The Romans prepare for War.</i> Rōmānī, clārus Italiae populus, +bellum parant. Ex agrīs suīs, vicīs, oppidīsque magnō studiō virī validī +ad arma properant. Iam lēgatī cum legiōnariīs ex Italiā ad Rhēnum, +fluvium Germāniae altum et lātum, properant, et servī equīs et carrīs +cibum frūmentumque ad castra Rōmāna portant. Inopiā bonōrum tēlōrum +īnfirmī sunt Germānī, sed Rōmānī armāti galeīs, lōrīcīs, scūtīs, +gladiīs, pīlīsque sunt validī.</p> + +<p> +<span class = "pagenum">46</span> +<a name = "page46"> </a> +II. 1. The sturdy farmers of Italy labor in the fields with great +diligence. 2. Sextus, the lieutenant, and (his) son Mark are +fighting with the Germans. 3. The Roman legionaries are armed with +long spears. 4. Where is Lesbia, your maid, Sextus? Lesbia is with +my friends in Galba’s cottage. 5. Many are sick because of bad +water and for lack of food. 6. The Germans, with (their) sons and +daughters, are hastening with horses and wagons.</p> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XVI"> +LESSON XVI</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">THE NINE IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec108"><b>108.</b></a> +There are nine irregular adjectives of the first and second declensions +which have a peculiar termination in the genitive and dative singular of +all genders:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th>Masc.</th> +<th>Fem.</th> +<th>Neut.</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td><b>-īus</b></td> +<td><b>-īus</b></td> +<td><b>-īus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td><b>-ī</b></td> +<td><b>-ī</b></td> +<td><b>-ī</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>Otherwise they are declined like <b>bonus, -a, -um</b>. Learn the +list +and the meaning of each:</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>alius, alia, aliud</b>, <i>other, another</i> (of several)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>alter, altera, alterum</b>, <i>the one, the other</i> (of two)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>ūnus, -a, -um</b>, <i>one, alone</i>; (in the plural) <i>only</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>ūllus, -a, -um</b>, <i>any</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>nūllus, -a, -um</b>, <i>none, no</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>sōlus, -a, -um</b>, <i>alone</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>tōtus, -a, -um</b>, <i>all, whole, entire</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>uter, utra, utrum</b>, <i>which?</i> (of two)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>neuter, neutra, neutrum</b>, <i>neither</i> (of two) +</p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec109"><b>109.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">PARADIGMS</span></p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "6">Singular</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "smaller">MASC.</td> +<td class = "smaller">FEM.</td> +<td class = "smaller">NEUT.</td> +<td class = "smaller">MASC.</td> +<td class = "smaller">FEM.</td> +<td class = "smaller">NEUT.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>nūll<b>us</b></td> +<td>nūll<b>a</b></td> +<td>nūll<b>um</b></td> +<td>ali<b>us</b></td> +<td>ali<b>a</b></td> +<td>ali<b>ud</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>nūll<b>ī´us</b></td> +<td>nūll<b>ī´us</b></td> +<td class = "rightpad">nūll<b>ī´us</b></td> +<td>alī´<b>us</b></td> +<td>alī´<b>us</b></td> +<td>alī´<b>us</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>nūll<b>ī</b></td> +<td>nūll<b>ī</b></td> +<td>nūll<b>ī</b></td> +<td>ali<b>ī</b></td> +<td>ali<b>ī</b></td> +<td>ali<b>ī</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>nūll<b>um</b></td> +<td>nūll<b>am</b></td> +<td>nūll<b>um</b></td> +<td>ali<b>um</b></td> +<td>ali<b>am</b></td> +<td>ali<b>ud</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>nūll<b>ō</b></td> +<td>nūll<b>ā</b></td> +<td>nūll<b>ō</b></td> +<td>ali<b>ō</b></td> +<td>ali<b>ā</b></td> +<td>ali<b>ō</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "6">The Plural is Regular</th> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "pagenum">47</span> +<a name = "page47"> </a> +<i>a.</i> Note the peculiar neuter singular ending in <b>-d</b> of +<b>alius</b>. The genitive <b>alīus</b> is rare. Instead of it use +<b>alterīus</b>, the genitive of <b>alter</b>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> These peculiar case endings are found also in the declension +of pronouns (see <a href = "#sec114">§ 114</a>). For this reason +these adjectives are sometimes called the <b>pronominal +adjectives</b>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec110"><b>110.</b></a> +Learn the following idioms:</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>alter, -era, -erum</b> ... <b>alter, -era, -erum</b>, <i>the one ... +the other</i> (of two)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>alius, -a, -ud</b> ... <b>alius, -a, -ud</b>, <i>one ... another </i> +(of any number)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>aliī, -ae, -a</b> ... <b>aliī, -ae, -a</b>, <i>some ... +others</i></p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<h6 class = "boldf">EXAMPLES</h6> + +<p>1. <b>Alterum oppidum est magnum, alterum parvum</b>, <i>the one town +is large, the other small</i> (of two towns).</p> + +<p>2. <b>Aliud oppidum est validum, aliud īnfīrmum</b>, <i>one town is +strong, another weak</i> (of towns in general).</p> + +<p>3. <b>Aliī gladiōs, aliī scūta portant</b>, <i>some carry swords, +others shields.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec111"><b>111.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>I. 1. In utrā casā est Iūlia? Iūlia est in neutrā casā. 2. Nūllī malō +puerō praemium dat magister. 3. Alter puer est nauta, alter +agricola. 4. Aliī virī aquam, aliī terram amant. 5. Galba ūnus +(<i>or</i> sōlus) cum studiō labōrat. 6. Estne ūllus carrus in agrō +meō? 7. Lesbia est ancilla alterīus dominī, Tullia alterīus. +8. Lesbia sōla cēnam parat. 9. Cēna nūllīus alterīus ancillae +est bona. 10. Lesbia nūllī aliī virō cēnam dat.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Note.</span> The pronominal adjectives, as you +observe, regularly stand before and not after their nouns.</p> + +<p>II. 1. The men of all Germany are preparing for war. 2. Some +towns are great and others are small. 3. One boy likes chickens, +another horses. 4. Already the booty of one town is in our fort. +5. Our whole village is suffering for (i.e. <i>weak because of</i>) +lack of food. 6. The people are already hastening to the other +town. 7. Among the Romans (there) is no lack of grain.</p> + + +<span class = "pagenum">48</span> +<a name = "page48"> </a> +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XVII"> +LESSON XVII</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">THE DEMONSTRATIVE <i>IS, EA, ID</i></h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec112"><b>112.</b></a> +A demonstrative is a word that points out an object definitely, as +<i>this, that, these, those</i>. Sometimes these words are pronouns, as, +<i>Do you hear these?</i> and sometimes adjectives, as, <i>Do you hear +these men?</i> In the former case they are called <b>demonstrative +pronouns</b>, in the latter <b>demonstrative adjectives</b>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec113"><b>113.</b></a> +Demonstratives are similarly used in Latin both as <i>pronouns</i> and +as <i>adjectives</i>. The one used most is</p> + +<p class = "center"> +<b>is</b>, masculine; <b>ea</b>, feminine; <b>id</b>, neuter +</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead">Singular</td> +<td> +<i>this<br> +that</i></td> +<td class = "sidehead">Plural</td> +<td> +<i>these<br> +those</i></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec114"><b>114.</b></a> +<b>Is</b> is declined as follows. Compare its declension with that of +<b>alius</b>, <a href = "#sec109">§ 109</a>.</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td class = "center" colspan = "7"><span class = "smallcaps">Base</span> +<b>e-</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th class = "rightpad" colspan = "3">Singular</th> +<th colspan = "3">Plural</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "smaller">MASC.</td> +<td class = "smaller">FEM.</td> +<td class = "smaller">NEUT.</td> +<td class = "smaller">MASC.</td> +<td class = "smaller">FEM.</td> +<td class = "smaller">NEUT.</td> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>is</td> +<td>ea</td> +<td>id</td> +<td>eī (<i>or</i> iī)</td> +<td>eae</td> +<td>ea</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>eius</td> +<td>eius</td> +<td>eius</td> +<td>eōrum</td> +<td>eārum</td> +<td>eōrum</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>eī</td> +<td>eī</td> +<td>eī</td> +<td>eīs (<i>or</i> iīs)</td> +<td>eīs (<i>or</i> iīs)</td> +<td>eīs (<i>or</i> iīs)</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>eum</td> +<td>eam</td> +<td>id</td> +<td>eōs</td> +<td>eās</td> +<td>ea</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>eō</td> +<td>eā</td> +<td>eō</td> +<td>eīs (<i>or</i> iīs)</td> +<td>eīs (<i>or</i> iīs)</td> +<td>eīs (<i>or</i> iīs)</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +Note that the base <b>e-</b> changes to <b>i-</b> in a few cases. The +genitive singular <b>eius</b> is pronounced <i>eh´yus</i>. In the plural +the forms with two <b>i</b>’s are preferred and the two <b>i</b>’s are +pronounced as one. Hence, pronounce <b>iī</b> as <b>ī</b> and <b>iīs</b> +as <b>īs</b>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec115"><b>115.</b></a> +Besides being used as demonstrative pronouns and adjectives the Latin +demonstratives are regularly used for the personal pronoun <i>he, she, +it</i>. As a personal pronoun, then, <b>is</b> would have the following +meanings:</p> + +<table class = "lines"> +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead" rowspan = "5"> +Sing. +</td> +<td> +<span class = "pagenum">49</span> +<a name = "page49"> </a> +<i>Nom.</i></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>is</b>, <i>he</i>; <b>ea</b>, <i>she</i>; <b>id</b>, <i>it</i> +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>eius</b>, <i>of him</i> or <i>his</i>; <b>eius</b>, <i>of her, +her</i>, or <i>hers</i>; <b>eius</b>, <i>of it</i> or <i>its</i> +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>eī</b>, <i>to</i> or <i>for him</i>; <b>eī</b>, <i>to</i> or <i>for +her</i>; <b>eī</b>, <i>to</i> or <i>for it</i> +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>eum</b>, <i>him</i>; <b>eam</b>, <i>her</i>; <b>id</b>, <i>it</i> +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>eō</b>, <i>with, from</i>, etc., <i>him</i>; <b>eā</b>, <i>with, +from</i>, etc., <i>her</i>; <b>eō</b>, <i>with, from</i>, etc., +<i>it</i> +</p></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead" rowspan = "5"> +Plur. +</td> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>eī</b> or <b>iī</b>, <b>eae</b>, <b>ea</b>, <i>they</i> +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>eōrum, eārum, eōrum</b>, <i>of them, their</i> +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>eīs</b> or <b>iīs</b>, <b>eīs</b> or <b>iīs</b>, <b>eīs</b> or +<b>iīs</b>, <i>to</i> or <i>for them</i> +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>eōs, eās, ea</b>, <i>them</i> +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>eīs</b> or <b>iīs</b>, <b>eīs</b> or <b>iīs</b>, <b>eīs</b> or +<b>iīs</b>, <i>with, from</i>, etc., <i>them</i> +</p></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec116"><b>116.</b></a> +<b>Comparison between <i>suus</i> and <i>is</i>.</b> We learned above +(<a href = "#sec98">§ 98. <i>c</i></a>) that <b>suus</b> is a +<i>reflexive</i> possessive. When <i>his, her</i> (poss.), <i>its, +their</i>, do not refer to the subject of the sentence, we express +<i>his, her, its</i> by <b>eius</b>, the genitive singular of <b>is</b>, +<b>ea</b>, <b>id</b>; and <i>their</i> by the genitive plural, using +<b>eōrum</b> to refer to a masculine or neuter antecedent noun and +<b>eārum</b> to refer to a feminine one.</p> + +<h6 class = "boldf">EXAMPLES</h6> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>Galba calls his</i> (own) <i>son</i>, <b>Galba suum fīlium +vocat</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>Galba calls his son</i> (not his own, but another’s), <b>Galba eius +fīlium vocat</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>Julia calls her</i> (own) <i>children</i>, <b>Iūlia suōs līberōs +vocat</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>Julia calls her children</i> (not her own, but another’s), <b>Iūlia +eius līberōs vocat</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>The men praise their</i> (own) <i>boys</i>, <b>virī suōs puerōs +laudant</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>The men praise their boys</i> (not their own, but others’), <b>virī +eōrum puerōs laudant</b></p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec117"><b>117.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec117vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 287.</p> + +<p>1. He praises her, him, it, them. 2. This cart, that report, +these teachers, those women, that abode, these abodes. 3. That +strong garrison, among those weak and sick women, that want of firmness, +those frequent plans.</p> + +<p> +4. The other woman is calling her chickens (<i>her own</i>). +5. Another woman is calling her chickens (<i>not her own</i>). +6. The Gaul praises +<span class = "pagenum">50</span> +<a name = "page50"> </a> +his arms (<i>his own</i>). 7. The Gaul praises his arms (<i>not his +own</i>). 8. This farmer often plows their fields. 9. Those +wretched slaves long for their master (<i>their own</i>). 10. Those +wretched slaves long for their master (<i>not their own</i>). +11. Free men love their own fatherland. 12. They love its +villages and towns.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec118"><b>118.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">DIALOGUE</span><span class = "tag">1</span></p> + +<h5 class = "smallcaps">Cornelius and Marcus</h5> + +<p class = "inset"> +M. Quis est vir, Cornēlī, cum puerō parvō? Estne Rōmānus et līber?<br> +C. Rōmānus nōn est, Mārce. Is vir est servus et eius domicilium est in +silvīs Galliae.<br> +M. Estne puer fīlius eius servī an alterīus?<br> +C. Neutrīus fīlius est puer. Is est fīlius lēgātī Sextī.<br> +M. Quō puer cum eō servō properat?<br> +C. Is cum servō properat ad lātōs Sextī agrōs.<span class = +"tag">2</span> Tōtum frūmentum est iam mātūrum et magnus servōrum +numerus in Italiae<span class = "tag">3</span> agrīs labōrat.<br> +M. Agricolaene sunt Gallī et patriae suae agrōs arant?<br> +C. Nōn agricolae sunt. Bellum amant Gallī, nōn agrī cultūram. Apud eōs +virī pugnant et fēminae auxiliō līberōrum agrōs arant parantque +cibum.<br> +M. Magister noster puerīs puellīsque grātās Gallōrum fābulās saepe +nārrat et laudat eōs saepe.<br> +C. Mala est fortūna eōrum et saepe miserī servī multīs cum lacrimīs +patriam suam dēsīderant. +</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. There are a number of departures from the normal order in this +dialogue. Find them, and give the reason.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. When a noun is modified by both a genitive and an adjective, a +favorite order of words is <i>adjective, genitive, noun</i>.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. A modifying genitive often stands between a preposition and its +object.</div> + + +<hr class = "tiny"> + +<h5 class = "boldf"> +<a class = "page" href = "LatinBegin2.html#review_II"> +Second Review, Lessons IX-XVII, §§ 506-509</a></h5> + +<hr class = "tiny"> + + +<span class = "pagenum">51</span> +<a name = "page51"> </a> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XVIII"> +LESSON XVIII</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">CONJUGATION</h6> +<h6>THE PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND FUTURE TENSES OF <b>SUM</b></h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec119"><b>119.</b></a> +The inflection of a verb is called its <i>conjugation</i> (cf. <a href = +"#sec23">§ 23</a>). In English the verb has but few changes in +form, the different meanings being expressed by the use of personal +pronouns and auxiliaries, as, <i>I am carried, we have carried, they +shall have carried</i>, etc. In Latin, on the other hand, instead of +using personal pronouns and auxiliary verbs, the form changes with the +meaning. In this way the Romans expressed differences in <i>tense, mood, +voice, person</i>, and <i>number</i>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec120"><b>120.</b></a> +<b>The Tenses.</b> The different forms of a verb referring to different +times are called its <i>tenses</i>. The chief distinctions of time are +present, past, and future:</p> + +<table class = "lines"> +<tr> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +1. <b>The present</b>, that is, <i>what is happening now</i>, or <i>what +usually happens</i>, is expressed by +</p></td> +<td class = "middle left smallcaps"> +the Present Tense +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +2. <b>The past</b>, that is, <i>what was happening, used to happen, +happened, has happened</i>, or <i>had happened</i>, is expressed by +</p></td> +<td class = "middle left smallcaps"> +the Imperfect, Perfect, and Pluperfect Tenses +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +3. <b>The future</b>, that is, <i>what is going to happen</i>, is +expressed by +</p></td> +<td class = "middle left smallcaps"> +the Future and Future Perfect Tenses +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec121"><b>121.</b></a> +<b>The Moods.</b> Verbs have inflection of <i>mood</i> to indicate the +manner in which they express action. The moods of the Latin verb are the +<i>indicative, subjunctive, imperative</i>, and <i>infinitive</i>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> A verb is in the <i>indicative</i> mood when it makes a +statement or asks a question about something assumed as a fact. All the +verbs we have used thus far are in the present indicative.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec122"><b>122.</b></a> +<b>The Persons.</b> There are three persons, as in English. The first +person is the person speaking (<i>I sing</i>); the second person the +person spoken to (<i>you sing</i>); the third person the person spoken +of +<span class = "pagenum">52</span> +<a name = "page52"> </a> +(<i>he sings</i>). Instead of using personal pronouns for the different +persons in the two numbers, singular and plural, the Latin verb uses the +personal endings (cf. <a href = "#sec22">§ 22 <i>a</i></a>; <a +href = "#sec29">29</a>). We have already learned that <b>-t</b> is the +ending of the third person singular in the active voice and <b>-nt</b> +of the third person plural. The complete list of personal endings of the +active voice is as follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "2">Singular</th> +<th colspan = "2">Plural</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>1st Pers.</i></td> +<td><i>I</i></td> +<td><b>-m</b> or <b>-ō</b></td> +<td><i>we</i></td> +<td><b>-mus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>2d Pers.</i></td> +<td><i>thou</i> or <i>you</i></td> +<td><b>-s</b></td> +<td><i>you</i></td> +<td><b>-tis</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>3d Pers.</i></td> +<td><i>he, she, it</i></td> +<td><b>-t</b></td> +<td><i>they</i></td> +<td><b>-nt</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec123"><b>123.</b></a> +Most verbs form their moods and tenses after a regular plan and are +called <i>regular</i> verbs. Verbs that depart from this plan are called +<i>irregular</i>. The verb <i>to be</i> is irregular in Latin as in +English. The present, imperfect, and future tenses of the indicative are +inflected as follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th colspan = "3">Present Indicative</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "smallhead">SINGULAR</td> +<td class = "smallhead">PLURAL</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>1st Pers.</i></td> +<td>su-<b>m</b>, <i>I am</i></td> +<td>su-<b>mus</b>, <i>we are</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>2d Pers.</i></td> +<td>e-<b>s</b>, <i>you<span class = "tag">1</span> are</i></td> +<td>es-<b>tis</b>, <i>you<span class = "tag">1</span> are</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>3d Pers.</i></td> +<td>es-<b>t</b>, <i>he, she</i>, or <i>it is</i></td> +<td>su-<b>nt</b>, <i>they are</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<th colspan = "3">Imperfect Indicative</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>1st Pers.</i></td> +<td>er-a-<b>m</b>, <i>I was</i></td> +<td>er-ā´-<b>mus</b>, <i>we were</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>2d Pers.</i></td> +<td>er-ā-<b>s</b>, <i>you were</i></td> +<td>er-ā´-<b>tis</b>, <i>you were</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>3d Pers.</i></td> +<td class = "rightpad"> +er-a-<b>t</b>, <i>he, she</i>, or <i>it was</i></td> +<td>er-ā-<b>nt</b>, <i>they were</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<th colspan = "3">Future Indicative</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>1st Pers.</i></td> +<td>er-<b>ō</b>, <i>I shall be</i></td> +<td>er´-i-<b>mus</b>, <i>we shall be</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>2d Pers.</i></td> +<td>er-i-<b>s</b>, <i>you will be</i></td> +<td>er´-i-<b>tis</b>, <i>you will be</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>3d Pers.</i></td> +<td>er-i-<b>t</b>, <i>he will be</i></td> +<td>er-u-<b>nt</b>, <i>they will be</i></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Be careful about vowel quantity and accent in these forms, and +consult <a href = "#sec12">§§ 12.2</a>; <a href = "#sec14">14</a>; +<a href = "#sec15">15</a>.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. Observe that in English <i>you are</i>, <i>you were</i>, etc. may be +either singular or plural. In Latin the singular and plural forms are +never the same.</div> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">53</span> +<a name = "page53"> </a> +<a name = "sec124"><b>124.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">DIALOGUE</span></p> + +<h5 class = "smallcaps">The Boys Sextus and Marcus</h5> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec124vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 287.</p> + +<p class = "inset"> +S. Ubi es, Mārce? Ubi est Quīntus? Ubi estis, amīcī?<br> +M. Cum Quīntō, Sexte, in silvā sum. Nōn sōlī sumus; sunt in silvā multī +aliī puerī.<br> +S. Nunc laetus es, sed nūper nōn laetus erās. Cūr miser erās?<br> +M. Miser eram quia amīcī meī erant in aliō vicō et eram sōlus. Nunc sum +apud sociōs meōs. Nunc laetī sumus et erimus.<br> +S. Erātisne in lūdo hodiē?<br> +M. Hodiē nōn erāmus in lūdō, quod magister erat aeger.<br> +S. Eritisne mox in lūdō?<br> +M. Amīcī meī ibi erunt, sed ego (<i>I</i>) nōn erō.<br> +S. Cūr nōn ibi eris? Magister, saepe irātus, inopiam tuam studī +dīligentiaeque nōn laudat.<br> +M. Nūper aeger eram et nunc īnfīrmus sum. +</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec125"><b>125.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISE</span></p> + +<p>1. You are, you were, you will be<ins class = "correction" title = +"punctuation as in original">, (</ins><i>sing. and plur.</i>). 2. I +am, I was, I shall be. 3. He is, he was, he will be. 4. We +are, we were, we shall be. 5. They are, they were, they will be.</p> + +<p>6. Why were you not in school to-day? I was sick. 7. Lately he +was a sailor, now he is a farmer, soon he will be a teacher. +8. To-day I am happy, but lately I was wretched. 9. The +teachers were happy because of the boys’ industry.</p> + +<p class = "illustration"> +<img src = "../images/pic053.png" width = "206" height = "155" +alt = "Roman boys in school"><br> +<span class = "caption"> +PUERI ROMANI IN LUDO</span></p> + + +<span class = "pagenum">54</span> +<a name = "page54"> </a> +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XIX"> +LESSON XIX</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">THE FOUR REGULAR CONJUGATIONS · PRESENT ACTIVE +INDICATIVE OF <i>AMŌ</i> AND <i>MONEŌ</i></h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec126"><b>126.</b></a> +There are four conjugations of the regular verbs. These conjugations are +distinguished from each other by the final vowel of the present +conjugation-stem.<span class = "tag">1</span> This vowel is called the +<i>distinguishing vowel</i>, and is best seen in the present +infinitive.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. The <i>stem</i> is the body of a word to which the terminations are +attached. It is often identical with the base (cf. <a href = +"#sec58">§ 58</a>). If, however, the stem ends in a vowel, the +latter does not appear in the base, but is variously combined with the +inflectional terminations. This point is further explained in <a href = +"#sec230">§ 230</a>.</div> + +<p>Below is given the <i>present infinitive</i> of a verb of each +conjugation, the <i>present stem</i>, and the <i>distinguishing +vowel.</i></p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th>Conjugation</th> +<th>Pres. Infin.</th> +<th>Pres. Stem</th> +<td class = "smallest"> +DISTINGUISHING<br> +VOWEL</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">I.</td> +<td><b>amā´re</b>, <i>to love</i></td> +<td><b>amā-</b></td> +<td><b>ā</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">II.</td> +<td class = "rightpad"><b>monē´re</b>, <i>to advise</i></td> +<td><b>monē-</b></td> +<td><b>ē</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">III.</td> +<td><b>re´gĕre</b>, <i>to rule</i></td> +<td><b>regĕ-</b></td> +<td><b>ĕ</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">IV.</td> +<td><b>audī´re</b>, <i>to hear</i></td> +<td><b>audi-</b></td> +<td><b>ī</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Note that the present stem of each conjugation is found by +dropping <b>-re</b>, the ending of the present infinitive.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Note.</span> The present infinitive of +<b>sum</b> is <b>esse</b>, and <b>es-</b> is the present stem.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec127"><b>127.</b></a> +From the present stem are formed the <i>present</i>, <i>imperfect</i>, +and <i>future</i> tenses.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec128"><b>128.</b></a> +The inflection of the Present Active Indicative of the first and of the +second conjugation is as follows:</p> + +<table class = "lines"> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "center"> +<b>a´mō, amā´re</b> (<i>love</i>)</td> +<td class = "center"> +<b>mo´neō, monē´re</b> (<i>advise</i>)</td> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "center"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Pres. Stem</span> <b>amā-</b></td> +<td class = "center"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Pres. Stem</span> <b>monē-</b></td> +<td class = "smallest"> +PERSONAL<br> +ENDINGS</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead" rowspan = "3"> +Sing. +</td> +<td>1. a´m<b>ō</b>, <i>I love</i></td> +<td>mo´ne<b>ō</b>, <i>I advise</i></td> +<td><b>-ō</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. a´mā<b>s</b>, <i>you love</i></td> +<td>mo´nē<b>s</b>, <i>you advise</i></td> +<td><b>-s</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "rightpad">3. a´ma<b>t</b>, <i>he (she, it) loves</i></td> +<td>mo´ne<b>t</b>, <i>he (she, it) advises</i></td> +<td><b>-t</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead" rowspan = "3"> +Plur. +</td> +<td>1. amā´<b>mus</b>, <i>we love</i></td> +<td>monē´<b>mus</b>, <i>we advise</i></td> +<td><b>-mus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. amā´<b>tis</b>, <i>you love</i></td> +<td>monē´<b>tis</b>, <i>you advise</i></td> +<td><b>-tis</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. a´ma<b>nt</b>, <i>they love</i></td> +<td>mo´ne<b>nt</b>, <i>they advise</i></td> +<td><b>-nt</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p><span class = "pagenum">55</span> +<a name = "page55"> </a> +1. The present tense is inflected by adding the personal endings to the +present stem, and its first person uses <b>-o</b> and not <b>-m</b>. The +form <b>amō</b> is for <b>amā-ō</b>, the two vowels <b>ā-ō</b> +contracting to <b>ō</b>. In <b>moneō</b> there is no contraction. +<i>Nearly all regular verbs ending in <b>-eo</b> belong to the second +conjugation.</i></p> + +<p>2. Note that the long final vowel of the stem is shortened before +another vowel (<b>monē-ō</b> = <b>mo´nĕō</b>), and before final +<b>-t</b> (<b>amăt</b>, <b>monĕt</b>) and <b>-nt</b> (<b>amănt</b>, +<b>monĕnt</b>). Compare <a href = "#sec12">§ 12. 2</a>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec129"><b>129.</b></a> +Like <b>amō</b> and <b>moneō</b> inflect the present active indicative +of the following verbs<span class = "tag">2</span>:</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. The only new verbs in this list are the five of the second +conjugation which are starred. Learn their meanings.</div> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<th>Indicative Present</th> +<th>Infinitive Present</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "half"><b>a´rō</b>, <i>I plow</i></td> +<td><b>arā´re</b>, <i>to plow</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>cū´rō</b>, <i>I care for</i></td> +<td><b>cūrā´re</b>, <i>to care for</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "backspace">*<b>dē´leō</b>, <i>I destroy</i></td> +<td><b>dēlē´re</b>, <i>to destroy</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>dēsī´derō</b>, <i>I long for</i></td> +<td><b>dēsīderā´re</b>, <i>to long for</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>dō</b>,<span class = "tag">3</span> <i>I give</i></td> +<td><b>da´re</b>, <i>to give</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "backspace">*<b>ha´beō</b>, <i>I have</i></td> +<td><b>habē´re</b>, <i>to have</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>ha´bitō</b>, <i>I live, I dwell</i></td> +<td><b>habitā´re</b>, <i>to live, to dwell</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "backspace">*<b>iu´beō</b>, <i>I order</i></td> +<td><b>iubē´re</b>, <i>to order</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>labō´rō</b>, <i>I labor</i></td> +<td><b>labōrā´re</b>, <i>to labor</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>lau´dō</b>, <i>I praise</i></td> +<td><b>laudā´re</b>, <i>to praise</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>mātū´rō</b>, <i>I hasten</i></td> +<td><b>mātūrā´re</b>, <i>to hasten</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "backspace">*<b>mo´veō</b>, <i>I move</i></td> +<td><b>movē´re</b>, <i>to move</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>nār´rō</b>, <i>I tell</i></td> +<td><b>nārrā´re</b>, <i>to tell</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>ne´cō</b>, <i>I kill</i></td> +<td><b>necā´re</b>, <i>to kill</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>nūn´tiō</b>, <i>I announce</i></td> +<td><b>nūntiā´re</b>, <i>to announce</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>pa´rō</b>, <i>I prepare</i></td> +<td><b>parā´re</b>, <i>to prepare</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>por´tō</b>, <i>I carry</i></td> +<td><b>portā´re</b>, <i>to carry</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>pro´perō</b>, <i>I hasten</i></td> +<td><b>properā´re</b>, <i>to hasten</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>pug´nō</b>, <i>I fight</i></td> +<td><b>pugnā´re</b>, <i>to fight</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "backspace">*<b>vi´deō</b>, <i>I see</i></td> +<td><b>vidē´re</b>, <i>to see</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>vo´cō</b>, <i>I call</i></td> +<td><b>vocā´re</b>, <i>to call</i></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. Observe that in <b>dō, dăre</b>, the <b>a</b> is <i>short</i>, and +that the present stem is <b>dă-</b> and not <b>dā-</b>. The only forms +of <b>dō</b> that have a long are <b>dās</b> (pres. indic.), <b>dā</b> +(pres. imv.), and <b>dāns</b> (pres. part.).</div> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec130"><b>130.</b></a> +<b>The Translation of the Present.</b> In English there are three ways +of expressing present action. We may say, for example, <i>I live, I am +living</i>, or <i>I do live</i>. In Latin the one expression +<b>habitō</b> covers all three of these expressions.</p> + +<p> +<span class = "pagenum">56</span> +<a name = "page56"> </a> +<a name = "sec131"><b>131.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>Give the <i>voice</i>, <i>mood</i>, <i>tense</i>, <i>person</i>, and +<i>number</i> of each form.</p> + +<p>I. 1. Vocāmus, properātis, iubent. 2. Movētis, laudās, vidēs. +3. Dēlētis, habētis, dant. 4. Mātūrās, dēsīderat, vidēmus. +5. Iubet, movent, necat. 6. Nārrāmus, movēs, vident. +7. Labōrātis, properant, portās, parant. 8. Dēlet, habētis, +iubēmus, dās.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +N.B. Observe that the personal ending is of prime importance in +translating a Latin verb form. Give that your first attention.</p> + +<p>II. 1. We plow, we are plowing, we do plow. 2. They care for, +they are caring for, they do care for. 3. You give, you are having, +you do have (<i>sing</i>.). 4. We destroy, I do long for, they are +living. 5. He calls, they see, we are telling. 6. We do fight, +we order, he is moving, he prepares. 7. They are laboring, we kill, +you announce.</p> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XX"> +LESSON XX</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">IMPERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF <i>AMŌ</i> AND +<i>MONEŌ</i></h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec132"><b>132.</b></a> +<b>Tense Signs.</b> Instead of using auxiliary verbs to express +differences in tense, like <i>was</i>, <i>shall</i>, <i>will</i>, etc., +Latin adds to the verb stem certain elements that have the force of +auxiliary verbs. These are called <i>tense signs</i>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec133"><b>133.</b></a> +<b>Formation and Inflection of the Imperfect.</b> The tense sign of the +imperfect is <b>-bā-</b>, which is added to the present stem. The +imperfect consists, therefore, of three parts:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th>Present Stem</th> +<th>Tense Sign</th> +<td class = "smallest">PERSONAL<br> +ENDING</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>amā-</b></td> +<td><b>ba-</b></td> +<td><b>m</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>loving</i></td> +<td><i>was</i></td> +<td><i>I</i></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>The inflection is as follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th>Conjugation I</th> +<th>Conjugation II</th> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallhead" colspan = "2"> +SINGULAR +</td> +<td class = "smallest"> +PERSONAL<br> +ENDINGS +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1. amā´<b>bam</b>, <i>I was loving</i></td> +<td>monē´<b>bam</b>, <i>I was advising</i></td> +<td><b>-m</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. amā´<b>bās</b>, <i>you were loving</i></td> +<td>monē´<b>bās</b>, <i>you were advising</i></td> +<td><b>-s</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. amā´<b>bat</b>, <i>he was loving</i></td> +<td>monē´<b>bat</b>, <i>he was advising</i></td> +<td><b>-t</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallhead" colspan = "2"> +PLURAL +</td> +<td> +<span class = "pagenum">57</span> +<a name = "page57"> </a> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1. amā<b>bā´mus</b>, <i>we were loving</i></td> +<td>monē<b>bā´mus</b>, <i>we were advising</i></td> +<td><b>-mus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. amā<b>bā´tis</b>, <i>you were loving</i></td> +<td>monē<b>bā´tis</b>, <i>you were advising</i></td> +<td><b>-tis</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. amā´<b>bant</b>, <i>they were loving</i></td> +<td>monē´<b>bant</b>, <i>they were advising</i></td> +<td><b>-nt</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Note that the <b>ā</b> of the tense sign <b>-bā-</b> is +shortened before <b>-nt</b>, and before <b>m</b> and <b>t</b> when +final. (Cf. <a href = "#sec12">§ 12. 2</a>.)</p> + +<p>In a similar manner inflect the verbs given in <a href = +"#sec129">§ 129</a>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec134"><b>134.</b></a> +<b>Meaning of the Imperfect.</b> The Latin imperfect describes an act as +<i>going on</i> or <i>progressing in past time</i>, like the English +past-progressive tense (as, <i>I was walking</i>). It is the regular +tense used to describe a past situation or condition of affairs.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec135"><b>135.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>I. 1. Vidēbāmus, dēsīderābat, mātūrābās. 2. Dabant, vocābātis, +dēlēbāmus. 3. Pugnant, laudābās, movēbātis. 4. Iubēbant, +properābātis, portābāmus. 5. Dabās, nārrābant, labōrābātis. +6. Vidēbant, movēbās, nūntiābāmus. 7. Necābat, movēbam, +habēbat, parābātis.</p> + +<p>II. 1. You were having (<i>sing. and plur.</i>), we were killing, +they were laboring. 2. He was moving, we were ordering, we were +fighting. 3. We were telling, they were seeing, he was calling. +4. They were living, I was longing for, we were destroying. +5. You were giving, you were moving, you were announcing, (<i>sing. +and plur.</i>). 6. They were caring for, he was plowing, we were +praising.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec136"><b>136.</b></a> +<span class = "midcaps">Ni´obe and her Children</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec136vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 287.</p> + +<p>Niobē, rēgina Thēbānōrum, erat pulchra fēmina sed superba. Erat +superba nōn sōlum fōrmā<span class = "tag">1</span> suā marītīque +potentiā<span class = "tag">1</span> sed etiam magnō līberōrum +numerō.<span class = "tag">1</span> Nam habēbat<span class = +"tag">2</span> septem fīliōs et septem fīliās. Sed ea superbia erat +rēgīnae<span class = "tag">3</span> causa magnae trīstitiae et +līberīs<span class = "tag">3</span> causa dūrae poenae.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Note.</span> The words <b>Niobē</b>, +<b>Thēbānōrum</b>, and <b>marītī</b> will be found in the general +vocabulary. Translate the selection without looking up any other +words.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. Ablative of cause.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. Translate <i>had</i>; it denotes a past situation. (See <a href = +"#sec134">§ 134</a>.)</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. Dative, cf. <a href = "#sec43">§ 43</a>.</div> + + +<span class = "pagenum">58</span> +<a name = "page58"> </a> +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XXI"> +LESSON XXI</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">FUTURE ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF <i>AMŌ</i> AND +<i>MONEŌ</i></h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec137"><b>137.</b></a> +The tense sign of the Future Indicative in the first and second +conjugations is <b>-bi-</b>. This is joined to the present stem of the +verb and followed by the personal ending, as follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th>Present Stem</th> +<th>Tense Sign</th> +<td class = "smallest"> +PERSONAL<br> +ENDING</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>amā-</b></td> +<td><b>bi-</b></td> +<td><b>s</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>love</i></td> +<td><i>will</i></td> +<td><i>you</i></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec138"><b>138.</b></a> +The Future Active Indicative is inflected as follows.</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th>Conjugation I</th> +<th>Conjugation II</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallhead" colspan = "2"> +SINGULAR</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1. amā´<b>bō</b>, <i>I shall love</i></td> +<td>monē´<b>bō</b>, <i>I shall advise</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. amā´<b>bis</b>, <i>you will love</i></td> +<td>monē´<b>bis</b>, <i>you will advise</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. amā´<b>bit</b>, <i>he will love</i></td> +<td>monē´<b>bit</b>, <i>he will advise</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallhead" colspan = "2"> +PLURAL</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1. amā´<b>bimus</b>, <i>we shall love</i></td> +<td>monē´<b>bimus</b>, <i>we shall advise</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. amā´<b>bitis</b> <i>will love</i></td> +<td>monē´<b>bitis</b>, <i>you will advise</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. amā´<b>bunt</b>, <i>they will love</i></td> +<td>monē´<b>bunt</b>, <i>they will advise</i></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> The personal endings are as in the present. The ending +<b>-bō</b> in the first person singular is contracted from <b>-bi-ō</b>. +The <b>-bi-</b> appears as <b>-bu-</b> in the third person plural. Note +that the inflection is like that of <b>erō</b>, the future of +<b>sum</b>. <i>Pay especial attention to the accent.</i></p> + +<p>In a similar manner inflect the verbs given in <a href = +"#sec129">§ 129</a>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec139"><b>139.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>I. 1. Movēbitis, laudābis, arābō. 2. Dēlēbitis, vocābitis, dabunt. +3. Mātūrābis, dēsīderābit, vidēbimus. 4. Habēbit, movēbunt, +necābit. 5. Nārrābimus, monēbis, vidēbunt. 6. Labōrābitis, +cūrābunt, dabis. 7. Habitābimus, properābitis, iubēbunt, parābit. +8. Nūntiābō, portābimus, iubēbō.</p> + +<p>II. 1. We shall announce, we shall see, I shall hasten. 2. I +shall carry, he will plow, they will care for. 3. You will +announce, you will +<span class = "pagenum">59</span> +<a name = "page59"> </a> +move, you will give, (<i>sing. and plur.</i>). 4. We shall fight, +we shall destroy, I shall long for. 5. He will call, they will see, +you will tell (<i>plur.</i>). 6. They will dwell, we shall order, +he will praise. 7. They will labor, we shall kill, you will have +(<i>sing. and plur.</i>), he will destroy.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec140"><b>140.</b></a> +<span class = "midcaps">Niobe and her Children</span> +(<i>Concluded</i>)</p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec140vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 288.</p> + +<p>Apollō et Diāna erant līberī Lātōnae. Iīs Thēbānī sacra crēbra +parābant.<span class = "tag">1</span> Oppidānī amābant Lātōnam et +līberōs eius. Id superbae rēgīnae erat molestum. “Cūr,” inquit, “Lātōnae +et līberīs sacra parātis? Duōs līberōs habet Lātōna; quattuordecim habeō +ego. Ubi sunt mea sacra?” Lātōna iīs verbīs<span class = "tag">2</span> +īrāta līberōs suōs vocat. Ad eam volant Apollō Diānaque et sagittīs<span +class = "tag">3</span> suīs miserōs līberōs rēgīnae superbae dēlent. +Niobē, nūper laeta, nunc misera, sedet apud līberōs interfectōs et cum +perpetuīs lacrimīs<span class = "tag">4</span> eōs dēsīderat.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Note.</span> Consult the general vocabulary +for <b>Apollō</b>, <b>inquit</b>, <b>duōs</b>, and <b>quattuordecim</b>. +Try to remember the meaning of all the other words.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. Observe the force of the imperfect here, <i>used to prepare</i>, +<i>were in the habit of preparing</i>; so <b>amābant</b> denotes a past +situation of affairs. (See <a href = "#sec134">§ 134</a>.)</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. Ablative of cause.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. Ablative of means.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +4. This may be either manner or accompaniment. It is often impossible to +draw a sharp line between means, manner, and accompaniment. The Romans +themselves drew no sharp distinction. It was enough for them if the +general idea demanded the ablative case.</div> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XXII"> +LESSON XXII</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">REVIEW OF VERBS · THE DATIVE WITH ADJECTIVES</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec141"><b>141.</b></a> +Review the present, imperfect, and future active indicative, both orally +and in writing, of <b>sum</b> and the verbs in <a href = +"#sec129">§ 129</a>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec142"><b>142.</b></a> +We learned in <a href = "#sec43">§ 43</a> for what sort of +expressions we may expect the dative, and in <a href = +"#sec44">§ 44</a> that one of its commonest uses is with +<i>verbs</i> to express the indirect object. It is also very common with +<i>adjectives</i> to express the object toward which the quality denoted +by the adjective is directed. We have already had a number of cases +<span class = "pagenum">60</span> +<a name = "page60"> </a> +where <b>grātus</b>, <i>agreeable to</i>, was so followed by a dative; +and in the last lesson we had <b>molestus</b>, <i>annoying to</i>, +followed by that case. The usage may be more explicitly stated by the +following rule:</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec143"><b>143.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Dative with Adjectives.</b> +<i>The dative is used with adjectives to denote the object toward which +the given quality is directed. Such are, especially, those meaning +<b>near</b>, also <b>fit</b>, <b>friendly</b>, <b>pleasing</b>, +<b>like</b>, and their opposites.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec144"><b>144.</b></a> +Among such adjectives memorize the following:</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>idōneus, -a, -um</b>, <i>fit, suitable</i> (for)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>amīcus, -a, -um</b>, <i>friendly</i> (to)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>inimicus, -a, -um</b>, <i>hostile</i> (to)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>grātus, -a, -um</b>, <i>pleasing</i> (to), <i>agreeable</i> (to)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>molestus, -a, -um</b>, <i>annoying</i> (to), +<i>troublesome</i> (to)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>fīnitimus, -a, -um</b>, <i>neighboring</i> (to)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>proximus, -a, -um</b>, <i>nearest, next</i> (to)</p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec145"><b>145.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>I. 1. Rōmānī terram idōneam agrī cultūrae habent. 2. Gallī cōpiīs +Rōmānīs inimīcī erant. 3. Cui dea Lātōna amīca non erat? +4. Dea Lātōna superbae rēgīnae amīca nōn erat. 5. Cibus +noster, Mārce, erit armātīs virīs grātus. 6. Quid erat molestum +populīs Italiae? 7. Bella longa cum Gallīs erant molesta populīs +Italiae. 8. Agrī Germānōrum fluviō Rhēnō fīnitimī erant. +9. Rōmānī ad silvam oppidō proximam castra movēbant. 10. Nōn +sōlum fōrma sed etiam superbia rēgīnae erat magna. 11. Mox rēgīna +pulchra erit aegra trīstitiā. 12. Cūr erat Niobē, rēgīna +Thēbānōrum, laeta? Laeta erat Niobē multīs fīliīs et fīliābus.</p> + +<p>II. 1. The sacrifices of the people will be annoying to the haughty +queen. 2. The sacrifices were pleasing not only to Latona but also +to Diana. 3. Diana will destroy those hostile to Latona. +4. The punishment of the haughty queen was pleasing to the goddess +Diana. 5. The Romans will move their forces to a large field<span +class = "tag">1</span> suitable for a camp. 6. Some of the allies +were friendly to the Romans, others to the Gauls.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. Why not the dative?</div> + +<span class = "pagenum">61</span> +<a name = "page61"> </a> +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec146"><b>146.</b></a> +<span class = "midcaps">Cornelia and her Jewels</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec146vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 288.</p> + +<p>Apud antīquās dominās, Cornēlia, Āfricānī fīlia, erat<span class = +"tag">2</span> maximē clāra. Fīliī eius erant Tiberius Gracchus et Gāius +Gracchus. Iī puerī cum Cornēliā in oppidō Rōmā, clārō Italiae oppidō, +habitābant. Ibi eōs cūrābat Cornēlia et ibi magnō cum studiō eōs +docēbat. Bona fēmina erat Cornēlia et bonam disciplīnam maximē +amābat.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Note.</span> Can you translate the paragraph +above? There are no new words.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. Observe that all the imperfects denote continued or progressive +action, or describe a state of affairs. (Cf. <a href = +"#sec134">§ 134</a>.)</div> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XXIII"> +LESSON XXIII</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">PRESENT ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF <i>REGŌ</i> AND +<i>AUDIŌ</i></h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec147"><b>147.</b></a> +As we learned in <a href = "#sec126">§ 126</a>, the present stem of +the third conjugation ends in <b>-ĕ</b>, and of the fourth in <b>-ī</b>. +The inflection of the Present Indicative is as follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th>Conjugation III</th> +<th>Conjugation IV</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "center"> +<b>re´gō, re´gere</b> (<i>rule</i>)</td> +<td class = "center"> +<b>au´dio, audī´re</b> (<i>hear</i>)</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "center"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Pres. Stem</span> <b>regĕ-</b></td> +<td class = "center"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Pres. Stem</span> <b>audī-</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallhead" colspan = "2">SINGULAR</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1. re´g<b>ō</b>, <i>I rule</i></td> +<td>au´di<b>ō</b>, <i>I hear</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. re´gi<b>s</b>, <i>you rule</i></td> +<td>au´dī<b>s</b>, <i>you hear</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "rightpad">3. re´gi<b>t</b>, <i>he (she, it) rules</i></td> +<td>au´di<b>t</b>, <i>he (she, it) hears</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallhead" colspan = "2">PLURAL</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1. re´gi<b>mus</b>, <i>we rule</i></td> +<td>audī´<b>mus</b>, <i>we hear</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. re´gi<b>tis</b>, <i>you rule</i></td> +<td>audī´<b>tis</b>, <i>you hear</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. re´g<b>unt</b>, <i>they rule</i></td> +<td>au´di<b>unt</b>, <i>they hear</i></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>1. The personal endings are the same as before.</p> + +<p>2. The final short <b>-e-</b> of the stem <b>regĕ-</b> combines with +the <b>-ō</b> in the first person, becomes <b>-u-</b> in the third +person plural, and becomes <b>-ĭ-</b> elsewhere. The inflection is like +that of <b>erō</b>, the future of <b>sum</b>.</p> + +<p><span class = "pagenum">62</span> +<a name = "page62"> </a> +3. In <b>audiō</b> the personal endings are added regularly to the stem +<b>audī-</b>. In the third person plural <b>-u-</b> is inserted between +the stem and the personal ending, as <b>audi-u-nt</b>. Note that the +long vowel of the stem is shortened before final <b>-t</b> just as in +<b>amō</b> and <b>moneō</b>. (Cf. <a href = +"#sec12">§ 12. 2</a>.)</p> + +<p>Note that <b>-i-</b> is always short in the third conjugation and +long in the fourth, excepting where long vowels are regularly shortened. +(Cf. <a href = "#sec12">§ 12. 1, 2</a>.)</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec148"><b>148.</b></a> +Like <b>regō</b> and <b>audiō</b> inflect the present active indicative +of the following verbs:</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<th>Indicative Present</th> +<th>Infinitive Present</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>agō</b>, <i>I drive</i></td> +<td><b>agere</b>, <i>to drive</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>dīcō</b>, <i>I say</i></td> +<td><b>dīcere</b>, <i>to say</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>dūcō</b>, <i>I lead</i></td> +<td><b>dūcere</b>, <i>to lead</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>mittō</b>, <i>I send</i></td> +<td><b>mittere</b>, <i>to send</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>mūniō</b>, <i>I fortify</i></td> +<td><b>mūnīre</b>, <i>to fortify</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>reperiō</b>, <i>I find</i></td> +<td><b>reperīre</b>, <i>to find</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>veniō</b>, <i>I come</i></td> +<td><b>venīre</b>, <i>to come</i></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec149"><b>149.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>I. 1. Quis agit? Cūr venit? Quem mittit? Quem dūcis? 2. Quid +mittunt? Ad quem veniunt? Cuius castra mūniunt? 3. Quem agunt? +Venīmus. Quid puer reperit? 4. Quem mittimus? Cuius equum dūcitis? +Quid dīcunt? 5. Mūnīmus, venītis, dīcit. 6. Agimus, reperītis, +mūnīs. 7. Reperis, ducitis, dīcis. 8. Agitis, audimus, +regimus.</p> + +<p>II. 1. What do they find? Whom do they hear? Why does he come? +2. Whose camp are we fortifying? To whom does he say? What are we +saying? 3. I am driving, you are leading, they are hearing. +4. You send, he says, you fortify (<i>sing. and plur.</i>). +5. I am coming, we find, they send. 6. They lead, you drive, +he does fortify. 7. You lead, you find, you rule, (<i>all +plur.</i>).</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec150"><b>150.</b></a> +<span class = "midcaps">Cornelia and her Jewels</span> +(<i>Concluded</i>)</p> + +<p>Proximum domicīliō Cornēliae erat pulchrae Campānae domicilium. +Campāna erat superba nōn sōlum fōrmā suā sed maximē ōrnāmentīs suīs. +Ea<span class = "tag">1</span> laudābat semper. “Habēsne tū ūlla +ornāmenta, Cornēlia?” +<span class = "pagenum">63</span> +<a name = "page63"> </a> +inquit. “Ubi sunt tua ōrnāmenta?” Deinde Cornēlia fīliōs suōs Tiberium +et Gāium vocat. “Puerī meī,” inquit, “sunt mea ōrnāmenta. Nam bonī +līberī sunt semper bonae fēminae ōrnāmenta maximē clāra.”</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Note.</span> The only new words here are +<b>Campāna</b>, <b>semper</b>, and <b>tū</b>.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. <b>Ea</b>, accusative plural neuter.</div> + +<p class = "illustration"> +<img src = "../images/pic063.png" width = "437" height = "310" +alt = "Cornelia with her sons"><br> +<span class = "caption"> +“PUERI MEI SUNT MEA ORNAMENTA”</span></p> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XXIV"> +LESSON XXIV</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">IMPERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF <i>REGŌ</i> AND +<i>AUDIŌ</i> · THE DATIVE WITH SPECIAL INTRANSITIVE VERBS</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec151"><b>151.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">PARADIGMS</span></p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th>Conjugation III</th> +<th>Conjugation IV</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallhead" colspan = "2">SINGULAR</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1. regē´<b>bam</b>, <i>I was ruling</i></td> +<td>audiē´<b>bam</b>, <i>I was hearing</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. regē´<b>bās</b>, <i>you were riding</i></td> +<td>audiē´<b>bās</b>, <i>you were hearing</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. regē´<b>bat</b>, <i>he was ruling</i></td> +<td>audiē´<b>bat</b>, <i>he was hearing</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallhead" colspan = "2">PLURAL</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "rightpad">1. regē<b>bā´mus</b>, <i>we were ruling</i></td> +<td>audiē<b>bā´mus</b>, <i>we were hearing</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. regē<b>bā´tis</b>, <i>you were ruling</i></td> +<td>audiē<b>bā´tis</b>, <i>you were hearing</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. regē´<b>bant</b>, <i>they were ruling</i></td> +<td>audiē´<b>bant</b>, <i>they were hearing</i></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p><span class = "pagenum">64</span> +<a name = "page64"> </a> +1. The tense sign is <b>-bā-</b>, as in the first two conjugations.</p> + +<p>2. Observe that the final <b>-ĕ-</b> of the stem is lengthened before +the tense sign <b>-bā-</b>. This makes the imperfect of the third +conjugation just like the imperfect of the second (cf. <b>monēbam</b> +and <b>regēbam</b>).</p> + +<p>3. In the fourth conjugation <b>-ē-</b> is inserted between the stem +and the tense sign <b>-bā-</b> (<b>audi-ē-ba-m</b>).</p> + +<p>4. In a similar manner inflect the verbs given in <a href = +"#sec148">§ 148</a>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec152"><b>152.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>I. 1. Agēbat, veniēbat, mittēbat, dūcēbant. 2. Agēbant, +mittēbant, dūcēbas, mūniēbant. 3. Mittēbāmus, dūcēbātis, dīcēbant. +4. Mūniēbāmus, veniēbātis, dīcēbās. 5. Mittēbās, veniēbāmus, +reperiēbat. 6. Reperiēbās, veniēbās, audiēbātis. 7. Agēbāmus, +reperiēbātis, mūniēbat. 8. Agēbātis, dīcēbam, mūniēbam.</p> + +<p>II. 1. They were leading, you were driving (<i>sing. and plur.</i>), +he was fortifying. 2. They were sending, we were finding, I was +coming. 3. You were sending, you were fortifying, (<i>sing. and +plur.</i>), he was saying. 4. They were hearing, you were leading +(<i>sing. and plur.</i>), I was driving. 5. We were saying, he was +sending, I was fortifying. 6. They were coming, he was hearing, I +was finding. 7. You were ruling (<i>sing. and plur.</i>), we were +coming, they were ruling.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec153"><b>153.</b></a> +<b>The Dative with Special Intransitive Verbs.</b> We learned above (<a +href = "#sec20">§ 20. <i>a</i></a>) that a verb which does not +admit of a direct object is called an <i>intransitive</i> verb. Many +such verbs, however, are of such meaning that they can govern an +indirect object, which will, of course, be in the dative case (<a href = +"#sec45">§ 45</a>). Learn the following list of intransitive verbs +with their meanings. In each case the dative indirect object is the +person or thing to which a benefit, injury, or feeling is directed. (Cf. +<a href = "#sec43">§ 43</a>.)</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr><td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>crēdō, crēdere</b>, <i>believe</i> (give belief to)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>faveō, favēre</b>, <i>favor</i> (show favor to)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>noceō, nocēre</b>, <i>injure</i> (do harm to)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>pāreō, pārēre</b>, <i>obey</i> (give obedience to)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>persuādeō, persuādēre</b>, <i>persuade</i> (offer persuasion to)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>resistō, resistere</b>, <i>resist</i> (offer resistance to)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>studeō, studēre</b>, <i>be eager for</i> (give attention to)</p> +</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">65</span> +<a name = "page65"> </a> +<a name = "sec154"><b>154.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Dative with Intransitive +Verbs.</b> <i>The dative of the indirect object is used with the +intransitive verbs <b>crēdō</b>, <b>faveō</b>, <b>noceō</b>, +<b>pāreō</b>, <b>persuādeō</b>, <b>resistō</b>, <b>studeō</b>, and +others of like meaning.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec155"><b>155.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISE</span></p> + +<p> +1. Crēdisne verbīs sociōrum? Multī verbīs eōrum nōn crēdunt. 2. Meī +fīnitimī cōnsiliō tuō nōn favēbunt, quod bellō student. 3. Tiberius +et Gāius disciplīnae dūrae nōn resistēbant et Cornēliae pārēbant. +4. Dea erat inimīca septem fīliābus rēgīnae. 5. Dūra poena et +perpetua trīstitia rēgīnae nōn persuādēbunt. 6. Nūper ea resistēbat +et nunc resistit potentiae Lātōnae. 7. Mox sagittae volābunt et +līberīs miserīs nocēbunt.</p> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XXV"> +LESSON XXV</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">FUTURE ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF <i>REGŌ</i> AND +<i>AUDIŌ</i></h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec156"><b>156.</b></a> +In the future tense of the third and fourth conjugations we meet with a +new tense sign. Instead of using <b>-bi-</b>, as in the first and second +conjugations, we use <b>-ā-</b><span class = "tag">1</span> in the first +person singular and <b>-ē-</b> in the rest of the tense. In the third +conjugation the final <b>-ĕ-</b> of the stem is dropped before this +tense sign; in the fourth conjugation the final <b>-ī-</b> of the stem +is retained.<span class = "tag">2</span></p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. The <b>-ā-</b> is shortened before <b>-m</b> final, and <b>-ē-</b> +before <b>-t</b> final and before <b>-nt</b>. (Cf. <a href = +"#sec12">§ 12. 2</a>.)</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. The <b>-ī-</b> is, of course, shortened, being before another vowel. +(Cf. <a href = "#sec12">§ 12. 1</a>.)</div> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec157"><b>157.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">PARADIGMS</span></p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th>Conjugation III</th> +<th>Conjugation IV</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallhead" colspan = "2">SINGULAR</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1. re´g<b>am</b>, <i>I shall rule</i></td> +<td>au´di<b>am</b>, <i>I shall hear</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. re´g<b>ēs</b>, <i>you will rule</i></td> +<td>au´di<b>ēs</b>, <i>you will hear</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. re´g<b>et</b>, <i>he will rule</i></td> +<td>au´di<b>et</b>, <i>he will hear</i></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class = "smallhead" colspan = "2">PLURAL</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "rightpad">1. reg<b>ē´mus</b>, <i>we shall rule</i></td> +<td>audi<b>ē´mus</b>, <i>we shall hear</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. reg<b>ē´tis</b>, <i>you will rule</i></td> +<td>audi<b>ē´tis</b>, <i>you will hear</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. re´g<b>ent</b>, <i>they will rule</i></td> +<td>au´di<b>ent</b>, <i>they will hear</i></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<span class = "pagenum">66</span> +<a name = "page66"> </a> +<p>1. Observe that the future of the third conjugation is like the +present of the second, excepting in the first person singular.</p> + +<p>2. In the same manner inflect the verbs given in <a href = +"#sec148">§ 148</a>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec158"><b>158.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>I. 1. Dīcet, dūcētis, mūniēmus. 2. Dīcent, dīcētis, mittēmus. +3. Mūnient, venient, mittent, agent. 4. Dūcet, mittēs, veniet, +aget. 5. Mūniet, reperiētis, agēmus. 6. Mittam, veniēmus, +regent. 7. Audiētis, veniēs, reperiēs. 8. Reperiet, agam, +dūcēmus, mittet. 9. Vidēbitis, sedēbō, vocābimus.</p> + +<p>II. 1. I shall find, he will hear, they will come. 2. I shall +fortify, he will send, we shall say. 3. I shall drive, you will +lead, they will hear. 4. You will send, you will fortify, (<i>sing. +and plur.</i>), he will say. 5. I shall come, we shall find, they +will send.</p> + +<p> +6. Who<span class = "tag">3</span> will believe the story? I<span class += "tag">4</span> shall believe the story. 7. Whose friends do you +favor? We favor our friends. 8. Who will resist our weapons? Sextus +will resist your weapons. 9. Who will persuade him? They will +persuade him. 10. Why were you injuring my horse? I was not +injuring your horse. 11. Whom does a good slave obey? A good slave +obeys his master. 12. Our men were eager for another battle.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. Remember that <b>quis</b>, <i>who</i>, is singular in number.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +4. Express by <b>ego</b>, because it is emphatic.</div> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XXVI"> +LESSON XXVI</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">VERBS IN <i>-IŌ</i> OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION · THE +IMPERATIVE MOOD</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec159"><b>159.</b></a> +There are a few common verbs ending in <b>-iō</b> which do not belong to +the fourth conjugation, as you might infer, but to the third. The fact +that they belong to the third conjugation is shown by the ending of the +infinitive. (Cf. <a href = "#sec126">§ 126</a>.) Compare</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>audiō, audī´re</b> (<i>hear</i>), fourth conjugation</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>capiō, ca´pere</b> (<i>take</i>), third conjugation</p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">67</span> +<a name = "page67"> </a> +<a name = "sec160"><b>160.</b></a> +The present, imperfect, and future active indicative of <b>capiō</b> are +inflected as follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td class = "center" colspan = "3"> +<b>capiō, capere</b>, <i>take</i> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "center" colspan = "3"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Pres. Stem</span> <b>cape-</b> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<th>Present</th> +<th>Imperfect</th> +<th>Future</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallhead" colspan = "3">SINGULAR</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1. ca´pi<b>ō</b></td> +<td>capi<b>ē´bam</b></td> +<td>ca´pi<b>am</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. ca´pi<b>s</b></td> +<td>capi<b>ē´bās</b></td> +<td>ca´pi<b>ēs</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. ca´pi<b>t</b></td> +<td>capi<b>ē´bat</b></td> +<td>ca´pi<b>et</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallhead" colspan = "3">PLURAL</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1. ca´pi<b>mus</b></td> +<td>capi<b>ēbā´mus</b></td> +<td>capi<b>ē´mus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. ca´pi<b>tis</b></td> +<td>capi<b>ēbā´tis</b></td> +<td>capi<b>ē´tis</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. ca´pi<b>unt</b></td> +<td>capi<b>ē´bant</b></td> +<td>ca´pi<b>ent</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>1. Observe that <b>capiō</b> and the other <b>-iō</b> verbs follow +the fourth conjugation wherever in the fourth conjugation <i>two vowels +occur in succession.</i> (Cf. capiō, audiō; capiunt, audiunt; and all +the imperfect and future.) All other forms are like the third +conjugation. (Cf. capis, regis; capit, regit; etc.)</p> + +<p>2. Like <b>capiō</b>, inflect</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>faciō, facere</b>, <i>make, do</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>fugiō, fugere</b>, <i>flee</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>iaciō, iacere</b>, <i>hurl</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>rapiō, rapere</b>, <i>seize</i></p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec161"><b>161.</b></a> +<b>The Imperative Mood.</b> The imperative mood expresses a command; as, +<i>come!</i> <i>send!</i> The present tense of the imperative is used +only in the second person, singular and plural. <i>The singular in the +active voice is regularly the same in form as the present stem. The +plural is formed by adding <b>-te</b> to the singular.</i></p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th colspan = "2">Conjugation</th> +<th>Singular</th> +<th>Plural</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number close">I.</td> +<td></td> +<td><b>amā</b>, <i>love thou</i></td> +<td><b>amā´te</b>, <i>love ye</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number close">II.</td> +<td></td> +<td><b>monē</b>, <i>advise thou</i></td> +<td><b>monē´te</b>, <i>advise ye</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number close">III.</td> +<td>(<i>a</i>)</td> +<td><b>rege</b>, <i>rule thou</i></td> +<td><b>re´gite</b>, <i>rule ye</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td>(<i>b</i>)</td> +<td><b>cape</b>, <i>take thou</i></td> +<td><b>ca´pite</b>, <i>take ye</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number close">IV.</td> +<td></td> +<td><b>audī</b>, <i>hear thou</i></td> +<td><b>audī´te</b>, <i>hear ye</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "center" colspan = "2"><b>sum</b> (irregular)</td> +<td><b>es</b>, <i>be thou</i></td> +<td><b>este</b>, <i>be ye</i></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>1. In the third conjugation the final -ĕ- of the stem becomes -ĭ- in +the plural.</p> + +<p><span class = "pagenum">68</span> +<a name = "page68"> </a> +2. The verbs <b>dīcō</b>, <i>say</i>; <b>dūcō</b>, <i>lead</i>; and +<b>faciō</b>, <i>make</i>, have the irregular forms <b>dīc</b>, +<b>dūc</b>, and <b>fac</b> in the singular.</p> + +<p>3. Give the present active imperative, singular and plural, of +<b>veniō</b>, <b>dūcō</b>, <b>vocō</b>, <b>doceō</b>, <b>laudō</b>, +<b>dīcō</b>, <b>sedeō</b>, <b>agō</b>, <b>faciō</b>, <b>mūniō</b>, +<b>mittō</b>, <b>rapiō</b>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec162"><b>162.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>I. 1. Fugient, faciunt, iaciēbat. 2. Dēlē, nūntiāte, fugiunt. +3. Venīte, dīc, faciētis. 4. Dūcite, iaciam, fugiēbant. +5. Fac, iaciēbāmus, fugimus, rapite. 6. Sedēte, reperī, +docēte. 7. Fugiēmus, iacient, rapiēs. 8. Reperient, +rapiēbātis, nocent. 9. Favēte, resistē, pārēbitis.</p> + +<p> +10. Volā ad multās terrās et dā auxilium. 11. Ego tēla mea capiam +et multās ferās dēlēbō. 12. Quis fābulae tuae crēdet? 13. Este +bonī, puerī, et audīte verba grāta magistrī.</p> + +<p>II. 1. The goddess will seize her arms and will hurl her weapons. +2. With her weapons she will destroy many beasts. 3. She will +give aid to the weak.<span class = "tag">1</span> 4. She will fly +to many lands and the beasts will flee. 5. Romans, tell<span class += "tag">2</span> the famous story to your children.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. Plural. An adjective used as a noun. (Cf. <a href = +"#sec99">§ 99</a>. II. 3.)</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. Imperative. The imperative generally stands first, as in +English.</div> + + +<hr class = "tiny"> + +<h5 class = "boldf"> +<a class = "page" href = "LatinBegin2.html#review_III"> +Third Review, Lessons XVIII-XXVI, §§ 510-512</a></h5> + +<hr class = "tiny"> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XXVII"> +LESSON XXVII</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">THE PASSIVE VOICE · PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND FUTURE +INDICATIVE OF <i>AMŌ</i> AND <i>MONEŌ</i></h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec163"><b>163.</b></a> +<b>The Voices.</b> Thus far the verb forms have been in the <i>active +voice</i>; that is, they have represented the subject as +<i>performing</i> an action; as,</p> + +<p class = "center"> +The lion——> <i>killed</i>——> the hunter +</p> + +<p>A verb is said to be in the <i>passive voice</i> when it represents +its subject as <i>receiving</i> an action; as,</p> + +<p class = "center"> +The lion <—— <i>was killed</i> <—— by the +hunter +</p> + +<p>Note the direction of the arrows.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">69</span> +<a name = "page69"> </a> +<a name = "sec164"><b>164.</b></a> +<b>Passive Personal Endings.</b> In the passive voice we use a different +set of personal endings. They are as follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead" rowspan = "3"> +Sing.</td> +<td>1. <b>-r</b>, <i>I</i></td> +<td class = "sidehead" rowspan = "3"> +Plur.</td> +<td>1. <b>-mur</b>, <i>we</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. <b>-ris</b>, <b>-re</b>, <i>you</i></td> +<td>2. <b>-minī</b>, <i>you</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "rightpad">3. <b>-tur</b>, <i>he, she, it</i></td> +<td>3. <b>-ntur</b>, <i>they</i></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Observe that the letter <b>-r</b> appears somewhere in all but +one of the endings. This is sometimes called the <i>passive +sign</i>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec165"><b>165.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">PARADIGMS</span> + +<table class = "lines"> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "center"><b>amō, amāre</b></td> +<td class = "center"><b>monēo, monēre</b></td> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "center"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Pres. Stem</span> <b>amā-</b></td> +<td class = "center"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Pres. Stem</span> <b>monē-</b></td> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "2">Present Indicative</th> +<td class = "smallest"> +PERSONAL<br> +ENDINGS</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead" rowspan = "3">Sing.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +a´m<b>or</b>, <i>I am loved</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +mo´ne<b>or</b>, <i>I am advised</i> +</p></td> +<td><b>-or</b><span class = "tag">1</span></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +amā´<b>ris</b> or amā´<b>re</b>, <i>you are loved</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +monē´<b>ris</b> or monē´<b>re</b>, <i>you are advised</i> +</p></td> +<td><b>-ris</b> or <b>-re</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +amā´<b>tur</b>, <i>he is loved</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +monē´<b>tur</b>, <i>he is advised</i> +</p></td> +<td><b>-tur</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead" rowspan = "3">Plur.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +amā´<b>mur</b>, <i>we are loved</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +monē´<b>mur</b>, <i>we are advised</i> +</p></td> +<td><b>-mur</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +amā´<b>minī</b>, <i>you are loved</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +monē´<b>minī</b>, <i>you are advised</i> +</p></td> +<td><b>-mini</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +ama<b>n´tur</b>, <i>they are loved</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +mone<b>n´tur</b>, <i>they are advised</i> +</p></td> +<td><b>-ntur</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan = "4"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "center" colspan = "2"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Imperfect Indicative +(Tense Sign</span> <b>-bā-</b>)</td> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead" rowspan = "3">Sing.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +amā´<b>bar</b>, <i>I was being loved</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +monē´<b>bar</b>, <i>I was being advised</i> +</p></td> +<td><b>-r</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +amā<b>bā´ris</b> or amā<b>bā´re</b>, <i>you were being loved</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +monē<b>bā´ris</b> or monē<b>bā´re</b>, <i>you were being advised</i> +</p></td> +<td><b>-ris</b> or <b>-re</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +amā<b>bā´tur</b>, <i>he was being loved</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +monē<b>bā´tur</b>, <i>he was being advised</i> +</p></td> +<td><b>-tur</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead" rowspan = "3">Plur.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +amā<b>bā´mur</b>, <i>we were being loved</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +monē<b>bā´mur</b>, <i>we were being advised</i> +</p></td> +<td><b>-mur</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +amā<b>bā´minī</b>, <i>you were being loved</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +monē<b>bā´minī</b>, <i>you were being advised</i> +</p></td> +<td><b>-minī</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +amā<b>ban´tur</b>, <i>they were being loved</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +monē<b>ban´tur</b>, <i>they were being advised</i> +</p></td> +<td><b>-ntur</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan = "4"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +<span class = "pagenum">70</span> +<a name = "page70"> </a> +</td> +<td class = "center" colspan = "2"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Future +(Tense Sign</span> <b>-bi-</b>)</td> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead" rowspan = "3">Sing.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +amā´<b>bor</b>, <i>I shall be loved</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +monē´<b>bor</b>, <i>I shall be advised</i> +</p></td> +<td><b>-r</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +amā´<b>beris</b> <i>or</i> amā´<b>bere</b>, <i>you will be loved</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +monē´<b>beris</b> <i>or</i> monē´<b>bere</b>, <i>you will be advised</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>-ris</b> or <b>-re</b> +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +amā´<b>bitur</b>, <i>he will be loved</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +monē´<b>bitur</b>, <i>he will be advised</i> +</p></td> +<td><b>-tur</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead" rowspan = "3">Plur.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +amā´<b>bimur</b>, <i>we shall be loved</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +monē´<b>bimur</b>, <i>we shall be advised</i> +</p></td> +<td><b>-mur</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +amā<b>bi´minī</b>, <i>you will be loved</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +monē<b>bi´minī</b>, <i>you will be advised</i> +</p></td> +<td><b>-minī</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +amā<b>bun´tur</b>, <i>they will be loved</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +monē<b>bun´tur</b>, <i>they will be advised</i> +</p></td> +<td><b>-ntur</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. In the present the personal ending of the first person singular is +<b>-or</b>.</div> + +<p>1. The tense sign and the personal endings are added as in the +active.</p> + +<p>2. In the future the tense sign <b>-bi-</b> appears as <b>-bo-</b> in +the first person, <b>-be-</b> in the second, singular number, and as +<b>-bu-</b> in the third person plural.</p> + +<p>3. Inflect <b>laudō</b>, <b>necō</b>, <b>portō</b>, <b>moveō</b>, +<b>dēleō</b>, <b>iubeō</b>, in the present, imperfect, and future +indicative, active and passive.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec166"><b>166.</b></a> +Intransitive verbs, such as <b>mātūrō</b>, <i>I hasten</i>; +<b>habitō</b>, <i>I dwell</i>, do not have a passive voice with a +personal subject.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec167"><b>167.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>I. 1. Laudāris <i>or</i> laudāre, laudās, datur, dat. +2. Dabitur, dabit, vidēminī, vidētis. 3. Vocābat, vocābātur, +dēlēbitis, dēlēbiminī. 4. Parābātur, parābat, cūrās, cūrāris +<i>or</i> cūrāre. 5. Portābantur, portābant, vidēbimur, vidēbimus. +6. Iubēris <i>or</i> iubēre, iubēs, laudābāris <i>or</i> laudābāre, +laudābās. 7. Movēberis or movēbere, movēbis, dabantur, dabant. +8. Dēlentur, dēlent, parābāmur, parābāmus.</p> + +<p>II. 1. We prepare, we are prepared, I shall be called, I shall call, +you were carrying, you were being carried. 2. I see, I am seen, it +was being announced, he was announcing, they will order, they will be +ordered. 3. You will be killed, you will kill, you move, you are +moved, we are praising, we are being praised. 4. I am called, I +call, +<span class = "pagenum">71</span> +<a name = "page71"> </a> +you will have, you are cared for. 5. They are seen, they see, we were +teaching, we were being taught, they will move, they will be moved.</p> + +<p class = "illustration"> +<img src = "../images/pic071.png" width = "436" height = "443" +alt = "Perseus saves Andromeda"><br> +<span class = "caption"> +PERSEUS ANDROMEDAM SERVAT</span></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec168"><b>168.</b></a> +<span class = "midcaps">Per´seus and Androm´eda</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec168vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 288.</p> + +<p>Perseus fīlius erat Iovis,<span class = "tag">2</span> maximī<span +class = "tag">3</span> deōrum. Dē eō multās fabulās nārrant poētae. Eī +favent deī, eī magica arma et ālās dant. Eīs tēlīs armātus et ālīs +frētus ad multās terrās volābat et mōnstra saeva dēlēbat et miserīs +īnfīrmīsque auxilium dabat. +<span class = "pagenum">72</span> +<a name = "page72"> </a> +Aethiopia est terra Āfricae. Eam terram Cēpheus<span class = +"tag">5</span> regēbat. Eī<span class = "tag">6</span> +Neptūnus, maximus aquārum deus, erat īrātus et mittit<span class = +"tag">7</span> mōnstrum saevum ad Aethiopiam. Ibi mōnstrum nōn sōlum +lātīs pulchrīsque Aethiopiae agrīs nocēbat sed etiam domicilia +agricolārum dēlēbat, et multōs virōs, fēminās, līberōsque necābat. +Populus ex agrīs fugiēbat et oppida mūrīs validīs mūniēbat. Tum Cēpheus +magnā trīstitiā commōtus ad Iovis ōrāculum properat et ita dīcit: “Amīcī +meī necantur; agrī meī vāstantur. Audī verba mea, Iuppiter. Dā miserīs +auxilium. Age mōnstrum saevum ex patriā.”</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. <b>Iovis</b>, the genitive of <b>Iuppiter</b>.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. Used substantively, <i>the greatest</i>. So below, l. 4, +<b>miserīs</b> and <b>īnfīrmīs</b> are used substantively.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +4. Pronounce in two syllables, <i>Ce´pheus</i>.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +5. <b>Eī</b>, <i>at him</i>, dative with <b>īrātus</b>.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +6. The present is often used, as in English, in speaking of a past +action, in order to make the story more vivid and exciting.</div> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XXVIII"> +LESSON XXVIII</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND FUTURE INDICATIVE PASSIVE OF +<i>REGŌ</i> AND <i>AUDIŌ</i></h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec169"><b>169.</b></a> +Review the present, imperfect, and future indicative active of +<b>regō</b> and <b>audiō</b>, and learn the passive of the same tenses +(<a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec490">§§ 490</a>, <a href = +"LatinBegin2.html#sec491">491</a>).</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Observe that the tense signs of the imperfect and future are +the same as in the active voice, and that the passive personal endings +(<a href = "#sec164">§ 164</a>) are added instead of the active +ones.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> Note the slight irregularity in the second person singular +present of the third conjugation. There the final <b>-e-</b> of the stem +is not changed to <b>-i-</b>, as it is in the active. We therefore have +<b>re´geris</b> or <b>re´gere</b>, <i>not</i> <b>re´giris</b>, +<b>re´gire</b>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>c.</i> Inflect <b>agō</b>, <b>dīcō</b>, <b>dūcō</b>, <b>mūniō</b>, +<b>reperiō</b>, in the present, imperfect, and future indicative, active +and passive.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec170"><b>170.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>I. 1. Agēbat, agēbātur, mittēbat, mittēbātur, dūcēbat. 2. Agunt, +aguntur, mittuntur, mittunt, mūniunt. 3. Mittor, mittar, mittam, +dūcēre, dūcere. 4. Dīcēmur, dīcimus, dīcēmus, dīcimur, mūniēbaminī. +5. Dūcitur, dūciminī, reperīmur, reperiar, agitur. +6. Agēbāmus, agēbāmur, reperīris, reperiēminī. 7. Mūnīminī, +veniēbam, dūcēbar, +<span class = "pagenum">73</span> +<a name = "page73"> </a> +dīcētur. 8. Mittiminī, mittitis, mittēris, mitteris, agēbāminī. +9. Dīcitur, dīcit, mūniuntur, reperient, audientur.</p> + +<p>II. 1. I was being driven, I was driving, we were leading, we were +being led, he says, it is said. 2. I shall send, I shall be sent, +you will find, you will be found, they lead, they are led. 3. I am +found, we are led, they are driven, you were being led (<i>sing. and +plur.</i>). 4. We shall drive, we shall be driven, he leads, he is +being led, they will come, they will be fortified. 5. They were +ruling, they were being ruled, you will send, you will be sent, you are +sent, (<i>sing. and plur.</i>). 6. He was being led, he will come, +you are said (<i>sing. and plur.</i>).</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec171"><b>171.</b></a> +<span class = "midcaps">Perseus and Andromeda</span> +(<i>Continued</i>)</p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec171vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 288.</p> + +<p>Tum ōrāculum ita respondet: “Mala est fortūna tua. Neptūnus, magnus +aquārum deus, terrae Aethiopiae inimīcus, eās poenās mittit. Sed parā +īrātō deō sacrum idōneum et mōnstrum saevum ex patriā tuā agētur. +Andromeda fīlia tua est mōnstrō grāta. Dā eam mōnstrō. Servā cāram +patriam et vītam populī tuī.” Andromeda autem erat puella pulchra. Eam +amābat Cēpheus maximē.</p> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XXIX"> +LESSON XXIX</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND FUTURE INDICATIVE PASSIVE OF +<i>-IŌ</i> VERBS · PRESENT PASSIVE INFINITIVE AND IMPERATIVE</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec172"><b>172.</b></a> +Review the active voice of <b>capiō</b>, present, imperfect, and future, +and learn the passive of the same tenses (<a href = +"LatinBegin2.html#sec492">§ 492</a>).</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> The present forms <b>capior</b> and <b>capiuntur</b> are like +<b>audior, audiuntur</b>, and the rest of the tense is like +<b>regor</b>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> In like manner inflect the passive of <b>iaciō</b> and +<b>rapiō</b>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec173"><b>173.</b></a> +<b>The Infinitive.</b> The infinitive mood gives the general meaning of +the verb without person or number; as, <b>amāre</b>, <i>to love</i>. +Infinitive means <i>unlimited</i>. The forms of the other moods, being +limited by person and number, are called the <i>finite</i>, or limited, +verb forms.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">74</span> +<a name = "page74"> </a> +<a name = "sec174"><b>174.</b></a> +The forms of the Present Infinitive, active and passive, are as +follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th>Conj.</th> +<th>Pres. Stem</th> +<th>Pres. Infinitive Active</th> +<th>Pres. Infinitive Passive</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number rightpad">I.</td> +<td><b>amā-</b></td> +<td>amā´<b>re</b>, <i>to love</i></td> +<td>amā´<b>rī</b>, <i>to be loved</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number rightpad">II.</td> +<td><b>monē-</b></td> +<td>monē´<b>re</b>, <i>to advise</i></td> +<td>monē´<b>rī</b>, <i>to be advised</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number rightpad">III.</td> +<td><b>rege-</b></td> +<td>re´ge<b>re</b>, <i>to rule</i></td> +<td>re´g<b>ī</b>, <i>to be ruled</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td><b>cape-</b></td> +<td>ca´pe<b>re</b>, <i>to take</i></td> +<td>ca´p<b>ī</b>, <i>to be taken</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number rightpad">IV.</td> +<td><b>audī-</b></td> +<td>audī´<b>re</b>, <i>to hear</i></td> +<td>audī<b>rī</b>, <i>to be heard</i></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>1. Observe that to form the present active infinitive we add +<b>-re</b> to the present stem.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> The present infinitive of <b>sum</b> is <b>esse</b>. There is +no passive.</p> + +<p>2. Observe that the present passive infinitive is formed from the +active by changing final <b>-e</b> to <b>-ī</b>, except in the third +conjugation, which changes final <b>-ere</b> to <b>-ī</b>.</p> + +<p>3. Give the active and passive present infinitives of <b>doceō</b>, +<b>sedeō</b>, <b>volō</b>, <b>cūrō</b>, <b>mittō</b>, <b>dūcō</b>, +<b>mūniō</b>, <b>reperiō</b>, <b>iaciō</b>, <b>rapiō.</b></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec175"><b>175.</b></a> +The forms of the Present Imperative, active and passive, are as +follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "2">Active<span class = "tag">1</span></th> +<th colspan = "2">Passive</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallhead">CONJ.</td> +<td class = "smallhead">SING.</td> +<td class = "smallhead">PLUR.</td> +<td class = "smallhead">SING.</td> +<td class = "smallhead">PLUR.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number rightpad">I.</td> +<td>a´mā</td> +<td>amā´<b>te</b></td> +<td>amā´<b>re</b>, <i>be thou loved</i></td> +<td>amā´<b>minī</b>, <i>be ye loved</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number rightpad">II.</td> +<td>mo´nē</td> +<td>monē´<b>te</b></td> +<td>monē´<b>re</b>, <i>be thou advised</i></td> +<td>monē´<b>minī</b>, <i>be ye advised</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number rightpad">III.</td> +<td>re´ge</td> +<td>re´gi<b>te</b></td> +<td>re´ge<b>re</b>, <i>be thou ruled </i></td> +<td>regi´<b>minī</b>, <i>be ye ruled</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td>ca´pe</td> +<td>ca´pi<b>te</b></td> +<td>ca´pe<b>re</b>, <i>be thou taken</i></td> +<td>capi´<b>minī</b>, <i>be ye taken</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number rightpad">IV.</td> +<td>au´dī</td> +<td>audī´<b>te</b></td> +<td>audī´<b>re</b>, <i>be thou heard</i></td> +<td>audī´<b>minī</b>, <i>be ye heard</i></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>1. Observe that the second person singular of the present passive +imperative is like the present active infinitive, and that both singular +and plural are like the second person singular<span class = +"tag">2</span> and plural, respectively, of the present passive +indicative.</p> + +<p>2. Give the present imperative, both active and passive, of the verbs +in <a href = "#sec174">§ 174. 3</a>.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. For the sake of comparison the active is repeated from <a href = +"#sec161">§ 161</a>.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. That is, using the personal ending <b>-re</b>. A form like +<b>amāre</b> may be either <i>indicative</i>, <i>infinitive</i>, or +<i>imperative</i>.</div> + +<p><span class = "pagenum">75</span> +<a name = "page75"> </a> +<a name = "sec176"><b>176.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec176vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 289.</p> + +<p>I. 1. Tum Perseus ālīs ad terrās multās volabit. 2. Mōnstrum saevum +per aquās properat et mox agrōs nostrōs vāstābit. 3. Sī autem +Cēpheus ad ōrāculum properābit, ōrāculum ita respondēbit. 4. Quis +tēlīs Perseī superābitur? Multa mōnstra tēlīs eius superābuntur. +5. Cum cūrīs magnīs et lacrimīs multīs agricolae ex domiciliīs +cārīs aguntur. 6. Multa loca vāstābantur et multa oppida +dēlēbantur. 7. Mōnstrum est validum, tamen superābitur. +8. Crēdēsne semper verbīs ōrāculī? Ego iīs non semper crēdam. +9. Pārēbitne Cēpheus ōrāculō? Verba ōrāculī eī persuādēbunt. +10. Si nōn fugiēmus, oppidum capiētur et oppidānī necābuntur. +11. Vocāte puerōs et nārrāte fābulam clāram dē mōnstrō saevō.</p> + +<p>II. 1. Fly thou, to be cared for, be ye sent, lead thou. 2. To +lead, to be led, be ye seized, fortify thou. 3. To be hurled, to +fly, send thou, to be found. 4. To be sent, be ye led, to hurl, to +be taken. 5. Find thou, hear ye, be ye ruled, to be fortified.</p> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XXX"> +LESSON XXX</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">SYNOPSES IN THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS · THE ABLATIVE +DENOTING <i>FROM</i></h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec177"><b>177.</b></a> +You should learn to give rapidly synopses of the verbs you have had, as +follows:<span class = "tag">1</span></p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "2">Conjugation I</th> +<th colspan = "2">Conjugation II</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "4">Indicative</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "smallhead">ACTIVE</td> +<td class = "smallhead">PASSIVE</td> +<td class = "smallhead">ACTIVE</td> +<td class = "smallhead">PASSIVE</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Pres.</i></td> +<td>a´m<b>ō</b></td> +<td>a´m<b>or</b></td> +<td>mo´ne<b>ō</b></td> +<td>mo´ne<b>or</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Imperf.</i></td> +<td>amā´<b>bam</b></td> +<td class = "rightpad">amā´<b>bar</b></td> +<td>monē´<b>bam</b></td> +<td>monē´<b>bar</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Fut.</i></td> +<td>amā´<b>bo</b></td> +<td>amā´<b>bor</b></td> +<td>monē´<b>bo</b></td> +<td>monē´<b>bor</b></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td> +<span class = "pagenum">76</span> +<a name = "page76"> </a> +</td> +<th colspan = "4">Imperative</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Pres.</i></td> +<td>a´m<b>ā</b></td> +<td>amā´<b>re</b></td> +<td>mo´n<b>ē</b></td> +<td>monē´<b>re</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "4">Infinitive</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Pres.</i></td> +<td>amā´<b>re</b></td> +<td>amā´<b>rī</b></td> +<td>monē´<b>re</b></td> +<td>monē´<b>rī</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan = "4"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "2">Conjugation III</th> +<td class = "center" colspan = "2"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Conjugation III</span><br> +(<b>-iō</b> verbs) +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "4">Indicative</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "smallhead">ACTIVE</td> +<td class = "smallhead">PASSIVE</td> +<td class = "smallhead">ACTIVE</td> +<td class = "smallhead">PASSIVE</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Pres.</i></td> +<td>re´g<b>ō</b></td> +<td>re´g<b>or</b></td> +<td>ca´pi<b>ō</b></td> +<td>ca´pi<b>or</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Imperf.</i></td> +<td>regē´<b>bam</b></td> +<td class = "rightpad">regē´<b>bar</b></td> +<td>capi<b>ē´bam</b></td> +<td>capi<b>ē´bar</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Fut.</i></td> +<td>re´g<b>am</b></td> +<td>re´g<b>ar</b></td> +<td>ca´pi<b>am</b></td> +<td>ca´pi<b>ar</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "4">Imperative</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Pres.</i></td> +<td>re´g<b>e</b></td> +<td>re´ge<b>re</b></td> +<td>ca´p<b>e</b></td> +<td>ca´pe<b>re</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "4">Infinitive</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Pres.</i></td> +<td>re´ge<b>re</b></td> +<td>re´g<b>ī</b></td> +<td>ca´pe<b>re</b></td> +<td>ca´p<b>ī</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan = "4"> </td> +</tr> +</table> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "2">Conjugation IV</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "2">Indicative</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "smallhead">ACTIVE</td> +<td class = "smallhead">PASSIVE</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Pres.</i></td> +<td>au´d<b>iō</b></td> +<td>au´d<b>ior</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Imperf.</i></td> +<td class = "rightpad">aud<b>iē´bam</b></td> +<td>aud<b>iē´bar</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Fut.</i></td> +<td>au´d<b>iam</b></td> +<td>au´d<b>iar</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "2">Imperative</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Pres.</i></td> +<td>au´d<b>ī</b></td> +<td>aud<b>ī´re</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "2">Infinitive</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Pres.</i></td> +<td>aud<b>ī´re</b></td> +<td>aud<b>ī´rī</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. Synopses should be given not only in the first person, but in other +persons as well, particularly in the third singular and plural.</div> + +<p>1. Give the synopsis of <b>rapiō</b>, <b>mūniō</b>, <b>reperiō</b>, +<b>doceō</b>, <b>videō</b>, <b>dīcō</b>, <b>agō</b>, <b>laudō</b>, +<b>portō</b>, and vary the person and number.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec178"><b>178.</b></a> +We learned in <a href = "#sec50">§ 50</a> that one of the three +relations covered by the ablative case is expressed in English by the +preposition <i>from.</i> This is sometimes called the <i>separative +ablative</i>, and it has a number of special uses. You have already +grown familiar with the first mentioned below.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">77</span> +<a name = "page77"> </a> +<a name = "sec179"><b>179.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Ablative of the Place +From.</b> <i>The place from which is expressed by the ablative with the +prepositions <b>ā</b> or <b>ab</b>, <b>dē</b>, <b>ē</b> or +<b>ex</b>.</i></p> + +<p class = "center"> +<b>Agricolae ex agrīs veniunt</b>, <i>the farmers come from the +fields</i></p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> <b>ā</b> or <b>ab</b> denotes <i>from near</i> a place; +<b>ē</b> or <b>ex</b>, <i>out from</i> it; and <b>dē</b>, <i>down +from</i> it. This may be represented graphically as follows:</p> + +<p class = "illustration"> +<img src = "../images/chart077.png" width = "227" height = "104" +alt = "(see end of file for text diagram)"> +</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec180"><b>180.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Ablative of Separation.</b> +<i>Words expressing separation or deprivation require an ablative to +complete their meaning.</i></p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> If the separation is <i>actual</i> and <i>literal</i> of one +material thing from another, the preposition <b>ā</b> or <b>ab</b>, +<b>ē</b> or <b>ex</b>, or <b>dē</b> is generally used. If no actual +motion takes place of one thing from another, no preposition is +necessary.</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<td>(<i>a</i>)</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>Perseus terram ā mōnstrīs līberat</b> +</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>Perseus frees the land from monsters</i> +(literal separation— actual motion is expressed) +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>(<i>b</i>)</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>Perseus terram trīstitiā līberat</b> +</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>Perseus frees the land from sorrow</i> +(figurative separation— no actual motion is expressed) +</p></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec181"><b>181.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Ablative of the Personal +Agent.</b> <i>The word expressing the person from whom an action starts, +when not the subject, is put in the ablative with the preposition +<b>ā</b> or <b>ab.</b></i></p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> In this construction the English translation of <b>ā</b>, +<b>ab</b> is <i>by</i> rather than <i>from</i>. This ablative is +regularly used with passive verbs to indicate the <i>person by whom</i> +the act was performed.</p> + +<p class = "center"> +<b>Mōnstrum ā Perseō necātur</b>, <i>the monster is being slain by</i> +(lit. <i>from</i>) <i>Perseus</i></p> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "pagenum">78</span> +<a name = "page78"> </a> +<i>b.</i> Note that the active form of the above sentence would be +<b>Perseus monstrum necat</b>, <i>Perseus is slaying the monster</i>. In +the passive the <i>object</i> of the active verb becomes the +<i>subject</i>, and the <i>subject</i> of the active verb becomes the +<i>ablative of the personal agent</i>, with <b>ā</b> or <b>ab</b>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>c.</i> Distinguish carefully between the ablative of means and the +ablative of the personal agent. Both are often translated into English +by the preposition <i>by</i>. (Cf. <a href = "#sec100">§ 100</a>. +<i>b.</i>) <i>Means is a <b>thing</b>; the agent or actor is a +<b>person</b></i>. The ablative of means has no preposition. The +ablative of the personal agent has <b>ā</b> or <b>ab</b>. Compare</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Fera sagittā necātur</b>, <i>the wild beast is killed by an +arrow</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Fera ā Diānā necātur</b>, <i>the wild beast is killed by +Diana</i></p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<b>Sagittā</b>, in the first sentence, is the ablative of means; <b>ā +Diānā</b>, in the second, is the ablative of the personal agent.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec182"><b>182.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec182vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 289.</p> + +<p>I. 1. Viri inopiā cibī dēfessī ab eō locō discēdent. 2. Gerinānī +castrīs Rōmānīs adpropinquābant, tamen lēgātus cōpiās ā proeliō +continēbat. 3. Multa Gallōrum oppida ab Rōmanīs capientur. +4. Tum Rōmānī tōtum populum eōrum oppidōrum gladiīs pīlīsque +interficient. 5. Oppidānī Rōmānīs resistent, sed defessī longō +proelīo fugient. 6. Multī ex Galliā fugiēbant et in Germānōrum +vicīs habitābant. 7. Miserī nautae vulnerantur ab inimīcīs<span +class = "tag">2</span> saevīs et cibō egent. 8. Discēdite et date +virīs frūmentum et cōpiam vīnī. 9. Cōpiae nostrae ā proeliō +continēbantur ab Sextō lēgatō. 10. Id oppidum ab prōvinciā Rōmānā +longē aberat.</p> + +<p>II. 1. The weary sailors were approaching a place dear to the goddess +Diana. 2. They were without food and without wine. 3. Then +Galba and seven other men are sent to the ancient island by Sextus. +4. Already they are not far away from the land, and they see armed +men on a high place. 5. They are kept from the land by the men with +spears and arrows. 6. The men kept hurling their weapons down from +the high place with great eagerness.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. <b>inimīcīs</b>, here used as a noun. See vocabulary.</div> + + +<span class = "pagenum">79</span> +<a name = "page79"> </a> +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XXXI"> +LESSON XXXI</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">PERFECT, PLUPERFECT, AND FUTURE PERFECT OF +<i>SUM</i></h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec183"><b>183.</b></a> +<b>Principal Parts.</b> There are certain parts of the verb that are of +so much consequence in tense formation that we call them the +<i>principal parts.</i></p> + +<p>The principal parts of the Latin verb are the present, the past, and +the past participle; as <i>go, went, gone; see, saw, seen</i>, etc.</p> + +<p>The principal parts of the Latin verb are the <i>first person +singular of the present indicative</i>, the <i>present infinitive</i>, +the <i>first person singular of the perfect indicative</i>, and <i>the +perfect passive participle.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec184"><b>184.</b></a> +<b>Conjugation Stems.</b> From the principal parts we get three +conjugation stems, from which are formed the entire conjugation. We have +already learned about the <b>present stem</b>, which is found from the +present infinitive (cf. <a href = +"#sec126">§ 126. <i>a</i></a>). The other two stems are the +<b>perfect stem</b> and the <b>participial stem</b>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec185"><b>185.</b></a> +<b>The Perfect Stem.</b> The perfect stem of the verb is formed in +various ways, but may always be <i>found by dropping <b>-ī</b> from the +first person singular of the perfect</i>, the third of the principal +parts. From the perfect stem are formed the following tenses:</p> + +<p class = "inset"> +<span class = "smallcaps"> +The Perfect Active Indicative<br> +The Pluperfect Active Indicative (English Past Perfect)<br> +The Future Perfect Active Indicative</span> +</p> + +<p>All these tenses express completed action in present, past, or future +time respectively.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec186"><b>186.</b></a> +<b>The Endings of the Perfect.</b> The perfect active indicative is +inflected by adding the endings of the perfect to the perfect stem. +These endings are different from those found in any other tense, and are +as follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead" rowspan = "3">Sing.</td> +<td>1. <b>-ī</b>, <i>I</i></td> +<td class = "sidehead" rowspan = "3">Plur.</td> +<td>1. <b>-imus</b>, <i>we</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. <b>-istī</b>, <i>you</i></td> +<td>2. <b>-istis</b>, <i>you</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "rightpad">3. <b>-it</b>, <i>he, she, it</i></td> +<td>3. <b>-ērunt</b> or <b>-ēre</b>, <i>they</i></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">80</span> +<a name = "page80"> </a> +<a name = "sec187"><b>187.</b></a> +Inflection of <b>sum</b> in the perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect +indicative:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th class = "rightpad">Pres. Indic.</th> +<th class = "rightpad">Pres. Infin.</th> +<th>Perf. Indic.</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "rightpad"><span class = "smallcaps">Prin. Parts</span> +<b>sum</b></td> +<td class = "center rightpad"><b>esse</b></td> +<td class = "center"><b>fuī</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<table> +<tr> +<td class = "center" colspan = "2"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Perfect Stem</span> <b>fu-</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<th colspan = "2">Perfect</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallhead">SINGULAR</td> +<td class = "smallhead">PLURAL</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>fu´<b>ī</b>, <i>I have been, I was</i></td> +<td>fu´<b>imus</b>, <i>we have been, we were</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>fuis´<b>tī</b>, <i>you have been, you were</i></td> +<td>fuis´<b>tis</b>, <i>you have been, you were</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>fu´<b>it</b>, <i>he has been, he was</i></td> +<td>fuē´<b>runt</b> <i>or</i> fuē´<b>re</b>, <i>they have been, they +were</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "center" colspan = "2"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Pluperfect (Tense Sign</span> +<b>-erā-</b>)</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>fu´<b>eram</b>, <i>I had been</i></td> +<td>fuerā´<b>mus</b>, <i>we had been</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>fu´<b>erās</b>, <i>you had been</i></td> +<td>fuerā´<b>tis</b>, <i>you had been</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>fu´<b>erat</b>, <i>he had been</i></td> +<td>fu´<b>erant</b>, <i>they had been</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "center" colspan = "2"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Future Perfect (Tense Sign</span> +<b>-erā-</b>)</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>fu´<b>erō</b>, <i>I shall have been</i></td> +<td>fue´<b>rimus</b>, <i>we shall have been</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>fu´<b>eris</b>, <i>you will have been</i></td> +<td>fue´<b>ritis</b>, <i>you will have been</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>fu´<b>erit</b>, <i>he will have been</i></td> +<td>fu´<b>erint</b>, <i>they will have been</i></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>1. Note carefully the changing accent in the perfect.</p> + +<p>2. Observe that the pluperfect may be formed by adding <b>eram</b>, +the imperfect of <b>sum</b>, to the perfect stem. The tense sign is +<b>-erā-</b>.</p> + +<p>3. Observe that the future perfect may be formed by adding +<b>erō</b>, the future of <b>sum</b>, to the perfect stem. But the third +person plural ends in <b>-erint</b>, not in <b>-erunt</b>. The tense +sign is <b>-eri-</b>.</p> + +<p>4. All active perfects, pluperfects, and future perfects are formed +on the perfect stem and inflected in the same way.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec188"><b>188.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">DIALOGUE</span></p> + +<h5 class = "smallcaps">The Boys Titus, Marcus, and Quintus</h5> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec188vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 289.</p> + +<p class = "inset"> +M. Ubi fuistis, Tite et Quīnte?<br> +T. Ego in meō lūdō fuī et Quīntus in suō lūdō fuit. Bonī puerī fuimus. +Fuitne Sextus in vīcō hodiē?<br> +M. Fuit. Nūper per agrōs proximōs fluviō properābat. Ibi is et Cornēlius +habent nāvigium.<br> +<span class = "pagenum">81</span> +<a name = "page81"> </a> +T. <i>Nāvigium</i> dīcis? Aliī<span class = "tag">1</span> nārrā eam +fābulam!<br> +M. Vērō (<i>Yes, truly</i>), pulchrum et novum nāvigium!<br> +Q. Cuius pecūniā<span class = "tag">2</span> Sextus et Cornēlius id +nāvigium parant? Quis iīs pecūniam dat?<br> +M. Amīcī Cornēlī multum habent aurum et puer pecūniā nōn eget.<br> +T. Quō puerī nāvigābunt? Nāvigābuntne longē ā terrā?<br> +M. Dubia sunt cōnsilia eōrum. Sed hodiē, crēdō, sī ventus erit idōneus, +ad maximam īnsulam nāvigābunt. Iam anteā ibi fuērunt. Tum autem ventus +erat perfidus et puerī magnō in perīculō erant.<br> +Q. Aqua ventō commōta est inimīca nautīs semper, et saepe perfidus +ventus nāvigia rapit, agit, dēletque. Iī puerī, sī nōn fuerint maximē +attentī, īrātā aquā et validō ventō superābuntur et ita interficientur. +</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. Dative case. (Cf. <a href = "#sec109">§ 109</a>.)</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. Ablative of means.</div> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec189"><b>189.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISE</span></p> + +<p>1. Where had the boys been before? They had been in school. +2. Where had Sextus been? He had been in a field next to the river. +3. Who has been with Sextus to-day? Cornelius has been with him. +4. Who says so? Marcus. 5. If the wind has been suitable, the +boys have been in the boat. 6. Soon we shall sail with the boys. +7. There<span class = "tag">3</span> will be no danger, if we are +(shall have been) careful.<span class = "tag">4</span></p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. The expletive <i>there</i> is not expressed, but the verb will +precede the subject, as in English.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +4. This predicate adjective must be nominative plural to agree with +<i>we</i>.</div> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XXXII"> +LESSON XXXII</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">THE PERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF THE FOUR REGULAR +CONJUGATIONS</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec190"><b>190.</b></a> +<b>Meanings of the Perfect.</b> The perfect tense has two distinct +meanings. The first of these is equivalent to the English present +perfect, or perfect with <i>have</i>, and denotes that the action of the +verb is complete at the time of speaking; as, <i>I have finished my +work</i>. As this denotes completed action at a definite time, it is +called the <b>perfect definite</b>.</p> + +<p> +<span class = "pagenum">82</span> +<a name = "page82"> </a> +The perfect is also used to denote an action that happened <i>sometime +in the past</i>; as, <i>I finished my work.</i> As no definite time is +specified, this is called the <b>perfect indefinite</b>. It corresponds +to the ordinary use of the English past tense.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Note carefully the difference between the following +tenses:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td class = "middle"><i>I</i></td> +<td class = "middle left ital">was finishing<br> +used to finish</td> +<td class = "middle leftline"><i>my work</i> +(imperfect, <a href = "#sec134">§ 134</a>)</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan = "3"> +<i>I finished my work</i> (perfect indefinite) +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan = "3"> +<i>I have finished my work</i> (perfect definite) +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>When telling a story the Latin uses the <i>perfect indefinite</i> to +mark the different <i>forward steps</i> of the narrative, and the +<i>imperfect</i> to <i>describe situations and circumstances</i> that +attend these steps. If the following sentences were Latin, what tenses +would be used?</p> + +<p>“Last week I went to Boston. I was trying to find an old friend of +mine, but he was out of the city. Yesterday I returned home.”</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec191"><b>191.</b></a> +<b>Inflection of the Perfect.</b> We learned in <a href = +"#sec186">§ 186</a> that any perfect is inflected by adding the +endings of the perfect to the perfect stem. The inflection in the four +regular conjugations is then as follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th>Conj. I</th> +<th>Conj. II</th> +<th colspan = "2">Conj. III</th> +<th>Conj. IV</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>amāvī</b></td> +<td><b>monuī</b></td> +<td><b>rēxī</b></td> +<td><b>cēpī</b></td> +<td><b>audīvī</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<i>I have loved<br> +I loved</i> or <i>did love</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<i>I have advised<br> +I advised</i> or <i>did advise</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<i>I have ruled<br> +I ruled</i> or <i>did rule</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<i>I have taken<br> +I took</i> or <i>did take</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<i>I have heard<br> +I heard</i> or <i>did hear</i> +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<th colspan = "5">Perfect Stems</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>amāv-</b></td> +<td><b>monu-</b></td> +<td><b>rēx-</b></td> +<td><b>cēp-</b></td> +<td><b>audīv-</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<th colspan = "5">Singular</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1. amā´v<b>ī</b></td> +<td>mo´nu<b>ī</b></td> +<td>rē´x<b>ī</b></td> +<td>cē´p<b>ī</b></td> +<td>audī´v<b>ī</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. amāvis´<b>tī</b></td> +<td>monuis´<b>tī</b></td> +<td>rēxis´<b>tī</b></td> +<td>cēpis´<b>tī</b></td> +<td>audīvis´<b>tī</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. amā´v<b>it</b></td> +<td>mo´nu<b>it</b></td> +<td>rē´x<b>it</b></td> +<td>cē´p<b>it</b></td> +<td>audī´v<b>it</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<th colspan = "5">Plural</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1. amā´v<b>imus</b></td> +<td>monu´<b>imus</b></td> +<td>rē´x<b>imus</b></td> +<td>cē´p<b>imus</b></td> +<td>audī´v<b>imus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. amāv<b>is´tis</b></td> +<td>monu<b>is´tis</b></td> +<td>rēx<b>is´tis</b></td> +<td>cēp<b>is´tis</b></td> +<td>audīv<b>is´tis</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +3. amāv<b>ē´runt</b> <i>or</i> amāv<b>ē´re</b> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +monu<b>ē´runt</b> <i>or</i> monu<b>ē´re</b> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +rēx<b>ē´runt</b> <i>or</i> rēx<b>ē´re</b> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +cēp<b>ē´runt</b> <i>or</i> cēp<b>ē´re</b> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +audīv<b>ē´runt</b> <i>or</i> audīv<b>ē´re</b> +</p></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p><span class = "pagenum">83</span> +<a name = "page83"> </a> +1. The first person of the perfect is always given as the third of the +principal parts. From this we get the perfect stem. <i>This shows the +absolute necessity of learning the principal parts thoroughly.</i></p> + +<p>2. Nearly all perfects of the first conjugation are formed by adding +<b>-vī</b> to the present stem. Like <b>amāvī</b> inflect <b>parāvī</b>, +<b>vocāvī</b>, <b>cūrāvī</b>, <b>laudāvī</b>.</p> + +<p>3. Note carefully the changing accent in the perfect. Drill on +it.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec192"><b>192.</b></a> +Learn the principal parts and inflect the perfects:</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<th>Pres. Indic.</th> +<th>Pres. Infin.</th> +<th>Perf. Indic.</th> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>dō</b></td> +<td><b>dăre</b></td> +<td><b>dedī</b></td> +<td><i>give</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>dēleō</b></td> +<td><b>dēlēre</b></td> +<td><b>dēlēvī</b></td> +<td><i>destroy</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>habeō</b></td> +<td><b>habēre</b></td> +<td><b>habuī</b></td> +<td><i>have</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>moveō</b></td> +<td><b>movēre</b></td> +<td><b>mōvī</b></td> +<td><i>move</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>pāreō</b></td> +<td><b>pārēre</b></td> +<td><b>pāruī</b></td> +<td><i>obey</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>prohibeō</b></td> +<td><b>prohibēre</b></td> +<td><b>prohībuī</b></td> +<td><i>restrain, keep from</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>videō</b></td> +<td><b>vidēre</b></td> +<td><b>vīdī</b></td> +<td><i>see</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>dīcō</b></td> +<td><b>dīcere</b></td> +<td><b>dīxī</b></td> +<td><i>say</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>discēdō</b></td> +<td><b>discēdere</b></td> +<td><b>discessī</b></td> +<td><i>depart</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>dūcō</b></td> +<td><b>dūcere</b></td> +<td><b>dūxī</b></td> +<td><i>lead</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>faciō</b></td> +<td><b>facere</b></td> +<td><b>fēcī</b></td> +<td><i>make, do</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>mittō</b></td> +<td><b>mittere</b></td> +<td><b>mīsī</b></td> +<td><i>send</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>mūniō</b></td> +<td><b>mūnīre</b></td> +<td><b>mūnīvī</b></td> +<td><i>fortify</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>veniō</b></td> +<td><b>venīre</b></td> +<td><b>vēnī</b></td> +<td><i>come</i></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec193"><b>193.</b></a> +<span class = "midcaps">Perseus and Andromeda</span> +(<i>Continued</i>)</p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec193vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 290.</p> + +<p>Cēpheus, adversā fortūnā maximē commōtus, discessit et multīs cum +lacrimīs populō Aethiopiae verba ōrāculī nārrāvit. Fāta Andromedae, +puellae pulchrae, ā tōtō populō dēplōrābantur, tamen nūllum erat +auxilium. Deinde Cēpheus cum plēnō trīstitiae animō cāram suam fīliam ex +oppidī portā ad aquam dūxit et bracchia eius ad saxa dūra revīnxit. Tum +amīcī puellae miserae longē discessērunt et diū mōnstrum saevum +exspectāvērunt.</p> + +<p>Tum forte Perseus, ālīs frētus, super Aethiopiam volābat. Vīdit +populum, Andromedam, lacrimās, et, magnopere attonitus, ad terram +dēscendit. Tum Cēpheus eī tōtās cūrās nārrāvit et ita dīxit: “Pārēbō +verbīs ōrāculī, et prō patriā fīliam meam dabō; sed sī id mōnstrum +interficiēs et Andromedam servābis, tibi (<i>to you</i>) eam dabō.”</p> + + +<span class = "pagenum">84</span> +<a name = "page84"> </a> +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XXXIII"> +LESSON XXXIII</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">PLUPERFECT AND FUTURE PERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE · +PERFECT ACTIVE INFINITIVE</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec194"><b>194.</b></a> +</p> + +<table class = "nospace"> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th>Conj. I</th> +<th>Conj. II</th> +<th colspan = "2">Conj. III</th> +<th>Conj. IV</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td><b>amō</b></td> +<td><b>moneō</b></td> +<td><b>regō</b></td> +<td><b>capiō</b></td> +<td><b>audiō</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallcaps">Perfect Stems</td> +<td><b>amāv-</b></td> +<td><b>monu-</b></td> +<td><b>rēx-</b></td> +<td><b>cēp-</b></td> +<td><b>audīv-</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<table> +<tr> +<th colspan = "5"> +Pluperfect Indicative Active +</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "center" colspan = "5"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Tense Sign</span> <b>-erā-</b> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallhead" colspan = "5">SINGULAR</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>I had loved</i></td> +<td><i>I had advised</i></td> +<td><i>I had ruled</i></td> +<td><i>I had taken</i></td> +<td><i>I had heard</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1. amā´v<b>eram</b></td> +<td>monu´<b>eram</b></td> +<td>rē´x<b>eram</b></td> +<td>cē´p<b>eram</b></td> +<td>audī´v<b>eram</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. amā´v<b>erās</b></td> +<td>monu´<b>erās</b></td> +<td>rē´x<b>erās</b></td> +<td>cē´p<b>erās</b></td> +<td>audī´v<b>erās</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. amā´v<b>erat</b></td> +<td>monu´<b>erat</b></td> +<td>rē´x<b>erat</b></td> +<td>cē´p<b>erat</b></td> +<td>audī´v<b>erat</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallhead" colspan = "5">PLURAL</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1. amāv<b>erā´mus</b></td> +<td>monu<b>erā´mus</b></td> +<td>rēx<b>erā´mus</b></td> +<td>cēp<b>erā´mus</b></td> +<td>audīv<b>erā´mus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. amāv<b>erā´tis</b></td> +<td>monuer<b>ā´tis</b></td> +<td>rēxer<b>ā´tis</b></td> +<td>cēp<b>erā´tis</b></td> +<td>audīv<b>erā´tis</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. ama´v<b>erant</b></td> +<td>monu´<b>erant</b></td> +<td>rē´x<b>erant</b></td> +<td>cē´p<b>erant</b></td> +<td>audī´v<b>erant</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan = "5"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<th colspan = "5"> +Future Perfect Indicative Active +</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "center" colspan = "5"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Tense Sign</span> <b>-eri-</b> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallhead" colspan = "5">SINGULAR</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><p class = "hanging ital"> +I shall have loved +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging ital"> +I shall have advised +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging ital"> +I shall have ruled +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging ital"> +I shall have taken +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging ital"> +I shall have heard +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1. amā´v<b>erō</b></td> +<td>monu´<b>erō</b></td> +<td>rē´x<b>erō</b></td> +<td>cē´p<b>erō</b></td> +<td>audī´v<b>erō</b> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. amā´v<b>eris</b></td> +<td>monu´<b>eris</b></td> +<td>rē´x<b>eris</b></td> +<td>cē´p<b>eris</b></td> +<td>audī´v<b>eris</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. amā´v<b>erit</b></td> +<td>monu´<b>erit</b></td> +<td>rē´x<b>erit</b></td> +<td>cē´p<b>erit</b></td> +<td>audī´v<b>erit</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallhead" colspan = "5">PLURAL</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1. amāv<b>e´rimus</b></td> +<td>monu<b>e´rimus</b></td> +<td>rēx<b>e´rimus</b></td> +<td>cēp<b>e´rimus</b></td> +<td>audīv<b>e´rimus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. amāv<b>e´ritis</b></td> +<td>monu<b>e´ritis</b></td> +<td>rēx<b>e´ritis</b></td> +<td>cēp<b>e´ritis</b></td> +<td>audīv<b>e´ritis</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. amā´v<b>erint</b></td> +<td>monu´<b>erint</b></td> +<td>rē´x<b>erint</b></td> +<td>cē´p<b>erint</b></td> +<td>audī´v<b>erint</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>1. Observe that these are all inflected alike and the rules for +formation given in <a href = "#sec187">§ 187. 2-4</a> hold +good here.</p> + +<p>2. In like manner inflect the pluperfect and future perfect +indicative active of <b>dō</b>, <b>portō</b>, <b>dēleō</b>, +<b>moveō</b>, <b>habeō</b>, <b>dīcō</b>, <b>discēdō</b>, <b>faciō</b>, +<b>veniō</b>, <b>mūniō.</b></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">85</span> +<a name = "page85"> </a> +<a name = "sec195"><b>195.</b></a> +<b>The Perfect Active Infinitive.</b> The perfect active infinitive is +formed by adding <b>-isse</b> to the perfect stem.</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th colspan = "2">Conj.</th> +<th>Perfect Stem</th> +<th>Perfect Infinitive</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number close">I.</td> +<td></td> +<td><b>amāv-</b></td> +<td>amāv<b>is´se</b>, <i>to have loved</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number close">II.</td> +<td></td> +<td><b>monu-</b></td> +<td>monu<b>is´se</b>, <i>to have advised</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number close">III.</td> +<td>(<i>a</i>)</td> +<td><b>rēx-</b></td> +<td>rēx<b>is´se</b>, <i>to have ruled</i> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td>(<i>b</i>)</td> +<td><b>cēp-</b></td> +<td>cēp<b>is´se</b>, <i>to have taken</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number close">IV.</td> +<td></td> +<td><b>audīv-</b></td> +<td>audīv<b>is´se</b>, <i>to have heard</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan = "2"><b>sum</b></td> +<td><b>fu-</b></td> +<td>fu<b>is´se</b>, <i>to have been</i></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>1. In like manner give the perfect infinitive active of <b>dō</b>, +<b>portō</b>, <b>dēleō</b>, <b>moveō</b>, <b>habeō</b>, <b>dīcō</b>, +<b>discēdō</b>, <b>faciō</b>, <b>veniō</b>, <b>mūniō</b>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec196"><b>196.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>I. 1. Habuistī, mōvērunt, miserant. 2. Vīdit, dīxeris, dūxisse. +3. Mīsistis, pāruērunt, discesserāmus. 4. Mūnīvit, dederam, +mīserō. 5. Habuerimus, dēlēvī, pāruit, fuisse. 6. Dederās, +mūnīveritis, vēnerātis, mīsisse. 7. Vēnerās, fēcisse, dederātis, +portāveris.</p> + +<p>8. Quem verba ōrāculī mōverant? Populum verba ōrāculī mōverant. +9. Cui Cēpheus verba ōrāculī nārrāverit? Perseō Cēpheus verba +ōrāculī nārrāverit. 10. Amīcī ab Andromedā discesserint. +11. Mōnstrum saevum domicilia multa dēlēverat. 12. Ubi +mōnstrum vīdistis? Id in aquā vīdimus. 13. Quid mōnstrum faciet? +Mōnstrum Andromedam interficiet.</p> + +<p>II. 1. They have obeyed, we have destroyed, I shall have had. +2. We shall have sent, I had come, they have fortified. 3. I +had departed, he has obeyed, you have sent (<i>sing. and plur.</i>). +4. To have destroyed, to have seen, he will have given, they have +carried. 5. He had destroyed, he has moved, you have had (<i>sing. +and plur.</i>). 6. I have given, you had moved (<i>sing. and +plur.</i>), we had said. 7. You will have made (<i>sing. and +plur.</i>), they will have led, to have given.</p> + +<p>8. Who had seen the monster? Andromeda had seen it. 9. Why had +the men departed from<span class = "tag">1</span> the towns? They had +departed because the monster had come. 10. Did Cepheus obey<span +class = "tag">2</span> the oracle<span class = "tag">3</span>? He did.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. <b>ex</b>. What would <b>ab</b> mean?</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. <i>Did ... obey</i>, perfect tense.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. What case?</div> + + +<span class = "pagenum">86</span> +<a name = "page86"> </a> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XXXIV"> +LESSON XXXIV</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">REVIEW OF THE ACTIVE VOICE</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec197"><b>197.</b></a> +A review of the tenses of the indicative active shows the following +formation:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead smaller" rowspan = "6"> +TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE +</td> +<td colspan = "2"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Present</span> += First of the principal parts +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan = "2"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Imperfect</span> += Present stem + <b>-ba-m</b> +</td> +<td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "middle"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Future</span> += Present stem + +</td> +<td class = "middle leftline"> +<b>-bō</b>, Conj. I and II<br> +<b>-a-m</b>, Conj. III and IV +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan = "2"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Perfect</span> += Third of the principal parts +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan = "2"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Pluperfect</span> += Perfect stem + <b>-era-m</b> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan = "2"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Future Perfect</span> += Perfect stem + <b>-erō</b> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec198"><b>198.</b></a> +The synopsis of the active voice of <b>amō</b>, as far as we have +learned the conjugation, is as follows:</p> + +<p class = "center"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Principal Parts</span> +<b>amō, amāre, amāvī</b> +</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td class = "center" colspan = "2"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Pres. Stem</span> +<b>amā-</b> +</td> +<td class = "center" colspan = "2"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Perf. Stem</span> +<b>amāv-</b> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead" rowspan = "3"> +Indic. +</td> +<td><i>Pres.</i> am<b>ō</b></td> +<td class = "sidehead" rowspan = "3"> +Indic. +</td> +<td><i>Perf.</i> amāv<b>ī</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "rightpad"><i>Imperf.</i> am<b>ābam</b></td> +<td><i>Pluperf.</i> amāv<b>eram</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Fut.</i> amā<b>bō</b> +<td><i>Fut. perf.</i> amāv<b>erō</b> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan = "2"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Pres. Imv.</span> am<b>ā</b> +<td colspan = "2"></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan = "2"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Pres. Infin.</span> amā<b>re</b> +</td> +<td colspan = "2"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Perf. Infin.</span> amāv<b>isse</b> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>1. Learn to write in the same form and to give rapidly the principal +parts and synopsis of <b>parō</b>, <b>dō</b>, <b>laudō</b>, +<b>dēleō</b>, <b>habeō</b>, <b>moveō</b>, <b>pāreō</b>, <b>videō</b>, +<b>dīcō</b>, <b>discēdō</b>, <b>dūcō</b>, <b>mittō</b>, <b>capiō</b>, +<b>muniō</b>, <b>veniō</b>.<span class = "tag">1</span></p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. Learn to give synopses rapidly, and not only in the first person +singular but in any person of either number.</div> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec199"><b>199.</b></a> +Learn the following principal parts:<span class = "tag">2</span></p> + +<table class = "lines"> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th>Pres. Indic.</th> +<th>Pres. Infin.</th> +<th>Perf. Indic.</th> +<td></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead"> +Irregular<br> +Verbs +</td> +<td><p class = "nospace"> +<b>sum</b><br> +<b>ab´sum</b><br> +<b>dō</b> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "nospace"> +<b>esse</b><br> +<b>abes´se</b><br> +<b>dare</b> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "nospace"> +<b>fuī</b><br> +<b>ā´fuī</b><br> +<b>dedī</b> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "nospace"> +<i>be</i><br> +<i>be away</i><br> +<i>give</i> +</p></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead"> +<span class = "pagenum">87</span> +<a name = "page87"> </a> +Conjugation<br> +II</td> +<td><p class = "nospace"> +<b>contineō</b><br> +<b>doceō</b><br> +<b>egeō</b><br> +<b>faveō</b><br> +<b>iubeō</b><br> +<b>noceō</b><br> +<b>persuādeō</b><br> +<b>respondeō</b><br> +<b>sedeō</b><br> +<b>studeō</b> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "nospace"> +<b>continēre</b><br> +<b>docēre</b><br> +<b>egēre</b><br> +<b>favēre</b><br> +<b>iubēre</b><br> +<b>nocēre</b><br> +<b>persuādēre</b><br> +<b>respondēre</b><br> +<b>sedēre</b><br> +<b>studēre</b> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "nospace"> +<b>continuī</b><br> +<b>docuī</b><br> +<b>eguī</b><br> +<b>fāvī</b><br> +<b>iussī</b><br> +<b>nocuī</b><br> +<b>persuāsī</b><br> +<b>respondī</b><br> +<b>sēdī</b><br> +<b>studuī</b> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "nospace"> +<i>hold in, keep</i><br> +<i>teach</i><br> +<i>need</i><br> +<i>favor</i><br> +<i>order</i><br> +<i>injure</i><br> +<i>persuade</i><br> +<i>reply</i><br> +<i>sit</i><br> +<i>be eager</i> +</p></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead">Conjugation<br> +III</td> +<td><p class = "nospace"> +<b>agō</b><br> +<b>crēdō</b><br> +<b>fugiō</b><br> +<b>iaciō</b><br> +<b>interficiō</b><br> +<b>rapiō</b><br> +<b>resis´tō</b> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "nospace"> +<b>agere</b><br> +<b>crēdere</b><br> +<b>fugere</b><br> +<b>iacere</b><br> +<b>interficere</b><br> +<b>rapere</b><br> +<b>resis´tere</b> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "nospace"> +<b>ēgī</b><br> +<b>crēdidī</b><br> +<b>fūgī</b><br> +<b>iēcī</b><br> +<b>interfēcī</b><br> +<b>rapuī</b><br> +<b>re´stitī</b> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "nospace"> +<i>drive</i><br> +<i>believe</i><br> +<i>flee</i><br> +<i>hurl</i><br> +<i>kill</i><br> +<i>seize</i><br> +<i>resist</i></p> +</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead">Conjugation<br> +IV</td> +<td><b>repe´riō</b></td> +<td><b>reperī´re</b></td> +<td><b>rep´perī</b></td> +<td><i>find</i></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. These are all verbs that you have had before, and the perfect is the +only new form to be learned.</div> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec200"><b>200.</b></a> +<span class = "midcaps">Perseus and Andromeda</span> +(<i>Concluded</i>)</p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec200vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 290. Read the whole story.</p> + +<p>Perseus semper proeliō studēbat<span class = "tag">3</span> et +respondit,<span class = "tag">3</span> “Verba tua sunt maximē grāta,” et +laetus arma sua magica parāvit.<span class = "tag">3</span> Subitō +mōnstrum vidētur; celeriter per aquam properat et Andromedae +adpropinquat. Eius amīcī longē absunt et misera puella est sōla. Perseus +autem sine morā super aquam volāvit.<span class = "tag">3</span> Subitō +dēscendit<span class = "tag">3</span> et dūrō gladiō saevum mōnstrum +graviter vulnerāvit.<span class = "tag">3</span> Diū pugnātur,<span +class = "tag">4</span> diū proelium est dubium. Dēnique autem Perseus +mōnstrum interfēcit<span class = "tag">3</span> et victōriam +reportāvit.<span class = "tag">3</span> Tum ad saxum vēnit<span class = +"tag">3</span> et Andromedam līberāvit<span class = "tag">3</span> et +eam ad Cēpheum dūxit.<span class = "tag">3</span> Is, nūper miser, nunc +laetus, ita dīxit<span class = "tag">3</span>: “Tuō auxiliō, mī amīce, +cāra fīlia mea est lībera; tua est Andromeda.” Diū Perseus cum Andromedā +ibi habitābat<span class = "tag">3</span> et magnopere ā tōtō populō +amābātur.<span class = "tag">3</span></p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. See if you can explain the use of the perfects and imperfects in this +passage.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +4. The verb pugnātur means, literally, <i>it is fought</i>; translate +freely, <i>the battle is fought</i>, or <i>the contest rages</i>. The +verb pugnō in Latin is intransitive, and so does not have a personal +subject in the passive. A verb with an indeterminate subject, designated +in English by <i>it</i>, is called impersonal.</div> + + +<span class = "pagenum">88</span> +<a name = "page88"> </a> + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XXXV"> +LESSON XXXV</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">THE PASSIVE PERFECTS OF THE INDICATIVE · THE PERFECT +PASSIVE AND FUTURE ACTIVE INFINITIVE</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec201"><b>201.</b></a> +The fourth and last of the principal parts (<a href = +"#sec183">§ 183</a>) is the <b>perfect passive participle</b>. +<i>From it we get the participial stem on which are formed the future +active infinitive and all the passive perfects.</i></p> + +<p>1. Learn the following principal parts, which are for the first time +given in full:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th>Conj.</th> +<th>Pres. Indic.</th> +<th>Pres. Infin.</th> +<th>Perf. Indic.</th> +<th>Perf. Pass. Part</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number rightpad">I.</td> +<td><b>amō</b></td> +<td><b>amā´-re</b></td> +<td><b>amā´v-ī</b></td> +<td><b>amā´t-us</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan = "5"> +This is the model for all regular verbs of the first conjugation. +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number rightpad">II.</td> +<td><b>mo´neō</b></td> +<td><b>monē´-re</b></td> +<td><b>mo´nu-ī</b></td> +<td><b>mo´nit-us</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number rightpad">III.</td> +<td><b>regō</b></td> +<td><b>re´ge-re</b></td> +<td><b>rēx-ī</b></td> +<td><b>rēct-us</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td><b>ca´piō</b></td> +<td><b>ca´pe-re</b></td> +<td><b>cēp-ī</b></td> +<td><b>capt-us</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number rightpad">IV.</td> +<td><b>au´diō</b></td> +<td><b>audī´-re</b></td> +<td><b>audī´v-ī</b></td> +<td><b>audī´t-us</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>2. The base of the participial stem is found by dropping <b>-us</b> +from the perfect passive participle.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec202"><b>202.</b></a> +In English the perfect, past perfect, and future perfect tenses of the +indicative passive are made up of forms of the auxiliary verb <i>to +be</i> and the past participle; as, <i>I have been loved</i>, <i>I had +been loved</i>, <i>I shall have been loved.</i></p> + +<p>Very similarly, in Latin, the perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect +passive tenses use respectively the present, imperfect, and future of +<b>sum</b> as an auxiliary verb with the perfect passive participle, +as</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +Perfect passive, <b>amā´tus sum</b>, <i>I have been</i> or <i>was +loved</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +Pluperfect passive, <b>amā´tus eram</b>, <i>I had been loved</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +Future perfect passive, <b>amā´tus erō</b>, <i>I shall have been +loved</i></p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>1. In the same way give the synopsis of the corresponding tenses of +<b>moneō</b>, <b>regō</b>, <b>capiō</b>, and <b>audiō</b>, and give the +English meanings.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec203"><b>203.</b></a> +<b>Nature of the Participle.</b> A participle is partly verb and partly +adjective. As a verb it possesses tense and voice. As an adjective it +<span class = "pagenum">89</span> +<a name = "page89"> </a> +is declined and agrees with the word it modifies in gender, number, and +case.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec204"><b>204.</b></a> +The perfect passive participle is declined like <b>bonus, bona, +bonum</b>, and in the compound tenses (<a href = +"#sec202">§ 202</a>) it agrees as a predicate adjective with the +subject of the verb.</p> + +<table class = "lines"> +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead"> +Examples in<br> +Singular +</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>Vir laudātus est</b>, <i>the man was praised</i>, or <i>has been +praised</i> +</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Puella laudāta est</b>, <i>the girl was praised</i>, or <i>has been +praised</i> +</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Cōnsilium laudātum est</b>, <i>the plan was praised</i>, or <i>has +been praised</i> +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead"> +Examples in<br> +Plural +</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>Virī laudātī sunt</b>, <i>the men were praised</i>, or <i>have been +praised</i> +</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Puellae laudātae sunt</b>, <i>the girls were praised</i>, or <i>have +been praised</i> +</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Cōnsilia laudāta sunt</b>, <i>the plans were praised</i>, or <i>have +been praised</i> +</p></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>1. Inflect the perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect indicative +passive of <b>amō</b>, <b>moneō</b>, <b>regō</b>, <b>capiō</b>, and +<b>audiō</b> (<a href = +"LatinBegin2.html#sec488">§§ 488-492</a>).</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec205"><b>205.</b></a> +<b>The perfect passive infinitive</b> is formed by adding <b>esse</b>, +the present infinitive of <b>sum</b>, to the perfect passive participle; +as, amā´t<b>-us</b> (<b>-a</b>, <b>-um</b>) <b>esse</b>, <i>to have been +loved</i>; mo´nit<b>-us</b> (<b>-a</b>, <b>-um</b>) <b>esse</b>, <i>to +have been advised</i>.</p> + +<p>1. Form the perfect passive infinitive of <b>regō</b>, <b>capiō</b>, +<b>audiō</b>, and give the English meanings.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec206"><b>206.</b></a> +The future active infinitive is formed by adding <b>esse</b>, the +present infinitive of <b>sum</b>, to the future active participle. This +participle is made by adding <b>-ūrus, -a, -um</b> to the base of the +participial stem. Thus the future active infinitive of <b>amō</b> is +amat<b>-ū´rus</b> (<b>-a</b>, <b>-um</b>) <b>esse</b>, <i>to be about to +love</i>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Note that in forming the three tenses of the active infinitive +we use all three conjugation stems:</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +Present, amā<b>re</b> (present stem), <i>to love</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +Perfect, amāv<b>isse</b> (perfect stem), <i>to have loved</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +Future, amāt<b>ūrus esse</b> (participial stem), <i>to be about to +love</i></p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>1. Give the three tenses of the active infinitive of <b>laudō</b>, +<b>moneō</b>, <b>regō</b>, <b>capiō</b>, <b>audiō</b>, with the English +meanings.</p> + +<p><span class = "pagenum">90</span> +<a name = "page90"> </a> +<a name = "sec207"><b>207.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>I. 1. Fābula Andromedae nārrāta est. 2. Multae fābulae ā +magistrō nārrātae sunt. 3. Ager ab agricolā validō arātus erat. +4. Agrī ab agricolīs validīs arātī erant. 5. Aurum ā servō +perfidō ad domicilium suum portātum erit. 6. Nostra arma ā lēgātō +laudāta sunt. Quis vestra arma laudāvit? 7. Ab ancillā tuā ad cēnam +vocātae sumus. 8. Andromeda mōnstrō nōn data est, quia mōnstrum ā +Perseō necātum erat.</p> + +<p>II. 1. The provinces were laid waste, the field had been laid waste, +the towns will have been laid waste. 2. The oracles were heard, the +oracle was heard, the oracles had been heard. 3. The oracle will +have been heard, the province had been captured, the boats have been +captured. 4. The fields were laid waste, the man was advised, the +girls will have been advised. 5. The towns had been ruled, we shall +have been captured, you will have been heard.</p> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XXXVI"> +LESSON XXXVI</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">REVIEW OF PRINCIPAL PARTS · PREPOSITIONS +<i>YES</i>-OR-<i>NO</i> QUESTIONS</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec208"><b>208.</b></a> +The following list shows the principal parts of all the verbs you have +had excepting those used in the paradigms. The parts you have had before +are given for review, and the perfect participle is the only new form +for you to learn. Sometimes one or more of the principal parts are +lacking, which means that the verb has no forms based on that stem. A +few verbs lack the perfect passive participle but have the future active +participle in <b>-ūrus</b>, which appears in the principal parts +instead.</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th colspan = "5"> +Irregular Verbs +</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><p> +<b>sum</b><br> +<b>absum</b><br> +<b>dō</b><span class = "tag">1</span> +</p></td> + +<td><p> +<b>esse</b><br> +<b>abesse</b><br> +<b>dare</b> +</p></td> + +<td><p> +<b>fuī</b><br> +<b>āfuī</b><br> +<b>dedī</b> +</p></td> + +<td><p> +<b>futūrus</b><br> +<b>āfutūrus</b><br> +<b>datus</b> +</p></td> + +<td><p> +<i>be</i><br> +<i>be away</i><br> +<i>give</i> +</p></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. <b>dō</b> is best classed with the irregular verbs because of the +short <b>a</b> in the present and participial stems.</div> + +<span class = "pagenum">91</span> +<a name = "page91"> </a> + +<table> +<tr> +<th colspan = "5">Conjugation I</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>portō</b></td> +<td><b>portāre</b></td> +<td><b>portāvī</b></td> +<td><b>portātus</b></td> +<td><i>carry</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan = "5"> +So for all verbs of this conjugation thus far used. +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<th colspan = "5">Conjugation II</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><p> +<b>contineō</b><br> +<b>dēleō</b><br> +<b>doceō</b><br> +<b>egeō</b><br> +<b>faveō</b><br> +<b>iubeō</b><br> +<b>moveō</b><br> +<b>noceō</b><br> +<b>pāreō</b><br> +<b>persuādeō</b><br> +<b>prohibeō</b><br> +<b>respondeō</b><br> +<b>sedeō</b><br> +<b>studeō</b><br> +<b>videō</b> +</p></td> + +<td><p> +<b>continēre</b><br> +<b>dēlēre</b><br> +<b>docēre</b><br> +<b>egēre</b><br> +<b>favēre</b><br> +<b>iubēre</b><br> +<b>movēre</b><br> +<b>nocēre</b><br> +<b>pārēre</b><br> +<b>persuādēre</b><br> +<b>prohibēre</b><br> +<b>respondēre</b><br> +<b>sedēre</b><br> +<b>studēre</b><br> +<b>vidēre</b> +</p></td> + +<td><p> +<b>continuī</b><br> +<b>dēlēvī</b><br> +<b>docuī</b><br> +<b>eguī</b><br> +<b>fāvī</b><br> +<b>iussī</b><br> +<b>mōvī</b><br> +<b>nocuī</b><br> +<b>pāruī</b><br> +<b>persuāsī</b><br> +<b>prohibuī</b><br> +<b>respondī</b><br> +<b>sēdī</b><br> +<b>studuī</b><br> +<b>vīdī</b> +</p></td> + +<td><p> +<b>contentus</b><br> +<b>dēlētus</b><br> +<b>doctus</b><br> +——<br> +<b>fautūrus</b><br> +<b>iussus</b><br> +<b>mōtus</b><br> +<b>nocitūrus</b><br> +——<br> +<b>persuāsus</b><br> +<b>prohibitus</b><br> +<b>respōnsus</b><br> +<b>-sessus</b><br> +——<br> +<b>vīsus</b> +</p></td> + +<td><p> +<i>hold in, keep</i><br> +<i>destroy</i><br> +<i>teach</i><br> +<i>lack</i><br> +<i>favor</i><br> +<i>order</i><br> +<i>move</i><br> +<i>injure</i><br> +<i>obey</i><br> +<i>persuade (from)</i><br> +<i>restrain, keep</i><br> +<i>reply</i><br> +<i>sit</i><br> +<i>be eager</i><br> +<i>see</i> +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<th colspan = "5">Conjugation III</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><p> +<b>agō</b><br> +<b>crēdō</b><br> +<b>dīcō</b><br> +<b>discēdō</b><br> +<b>dūcō</b><br> +<b>faciō</b><span class = "tag">2</span><br> +<b>fugiō</b><br> +<b>iaciō</b><br> +<b>interficiō</b><br> +<b>mittō</b><br> +<b>rapiō</b><br> +<b>resistō</b> +</p></td> + +<td><p> +<b>agere</b><br> +<b>crēdere</b><br> +<b>dīcere</b><br> +<b>discēdere</b><br> +<b>dūcere</b><br> +<b>facere</b><br> +<b>fugere</b><br> +<b>iacere</b><br> +<b>interficere</b><br> +<b>mittere</b><br> +<b>rapere</b><br> +<b>resistere</b> +</p></td> + +<td><p> +<b>ēgī</b><br> +<b>crēdidī</b><br> +<b>dīxī</b><br> +<b>discessī</b><br> +<b>dūxī</b><br> +<b>fēcī</b><br> +<b>fūgī</b><br> +<b>iēcī</b><br> +<b>interfēcī</b><br> +<b>mīsī</b><br> +<b>rapuī</b><br> +<b>restitī</b> +</p></td> + +<td><p> +<b>āctus</b><br> +<b>crēditus</b><br> +<b>dictus</b><br> +<b>discessus</b><br> +<b>ductus</b><br> +<b>factus</b><br> +<b>fugitūrus</b><br> +<b>iactus</b><br> +<b>interfectus</b><br> +<b>missus</b><br> +<b>raptus</b><br> +—— +</p></td> + +<td><p> +<i>drive</i><br> +<i>believe</i><br> +<i>say</i><br> +<i>depart</i><br> +<i>lead</i><br> +<i>make</i><br> +<i>flee</i><br> +<i>hurl</i><br> +<i>kill</i><br> +<i>send</i><br> +<i>seize</i><br> +<i>resist</i> +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<th colspan = "5">Conjugation IV</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><p> +<b>mūniō</b><br> +<b>reperiō</b><br> +<b>veniō</b> +</p></td> +<td><p> +<b>mūnīre</b><br> +<b>reperīre</b><br> +<b>venīre</b> +</p></td> +<td><p> +<b>mūnīvī</b><br> +<b>rep´perī</b><br> +<b>vēnī</b> +</p></td> +<td><p> +<b>mūnītus</b><br> +<b>repertus</b><br> +<b>ventus</b> +</p></td> +<td><p> +<i>fortify</i><br> +<i>find</i><br> +<i>come</i> +</p></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. <b>faciō</b> has an irregular passive which will be presented +later.</div> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">92</span> +<a name = "page92"> </a> +<a name = "sec209"><b>209.</b></a> +<b>Prepositions.</b> 1. We learned in <a href = "#sec52">§§ 52</a>, +<a href = "#sec53">53</a> that only the <i>accusative</i> and the +<i>ablative</i> are used with prepositions, and that prepositions +expressing ablative relations govern the ablative case. Those we have +had are here summarized. The table following should be learned.</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"><b>ā</b> or <b>ab</b>, <i>from, by</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"><b>cum</b>, <i>with</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"><b>dē</b>, <i>down from, concerning</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"><b>ē</b> or <b>ex</b>, <i>out from, out of</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"><b>prō</b>, <i>before, in front of; for, in behalf +of</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"><b>sine</b>, <i>without</i></p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>2. Prepositions not expressing ablative relations must govern the +<i>accusative</i> (<a href = "#sec52">§ 52</a>). Of these we have +had the following:</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"><b>ad</b>, <i>to</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"><b>apud</b>, <i>among</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"><b>per</b>, <i>through</i></p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>There are many others which you will meet as we proceed.</p> + +<p>3. The preposition <b>in</b> when meaning <i>in</i> or <i>on</i> +governs the <i>ablative</i>; when meaning <i>to, into, against</i> +(relations foreign to the ablative) <b>in</b> governs the +<i>accusative</i>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec210"><b>210.</b></a> +<b><i>Yes</i>-or-<i>No</i> Questions.</b> Questions not introduced by +some interrogative word like <i>who, why, when</i>, etc., but expecting +the answer <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i>, may take one of three forms:</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging">1. <i>Is he coming?</i> (Asking for information. +Implying nothing as to the answer expected.)</p> +<p class = "hanging">2. <i>Is he not coming?</i> (Expecting the answer +<i>yes</i>.)</p> +<p class = "hanging">3. <i>He isn´t coming, is he?</i> (Expecting the +answer <i>no</i>.)</p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>These three forms are rendered in Latin as follows:</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging">1. <b>Venitne?</b> <i>is he coming?</i></p> +<p class = "hanging">2. <b>Nōnne venit?</b> <i>is he not coming?</i></p> +<p class = "hanging">3. <b>Num venit?</b> <i>he isn´t coming, is +he?</i></p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> <b>-ne</b>, the question sign, is usually added to the verb, +which then stands first.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> We learned in <a href = "#sec56">§ 56. <i>b</i></a> +that <i>yes</i>-or-<i>no</i> questions are usually answered by repeating +the verb, with or without a negative. Instead of this, <b>ita</b>, +<b>vērō</b>, <b>certē</b>, etc. (<i>so, truly, certainly</i>, etc.) may +be used for <i>yes</i>, and <b>nōn</b>, <b>minimē</b>, etc. for +<i>no</i> if the denial is emphatic, as, <i>by no means</i>, <i>not at +all</i>.</p> + +<p><span class = "pagenum">93</span> +<a name = "page93"> </a> +<a name = "sec211"><b>211.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec211vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 290.</p> + +<p>I. 1. Nōnne habēbat Cornēlia ōrnāmenta aurī? Habēbat. 2. Num Sextus +lēgātus scūtum in dextrō bracchiō gerēbat? Nōn in dextrō, sed sinistrō +in bracchiō Sextus scūtum gerēbat. 3. Frūstrā bella multa ab Gallīs +gesta erant. 4. Ubi oppidum ā perfidō Sextō occupātum est, oppidānī +miserī gladiō interfectī sunt. 5. Id oppidum erat plēnum frūmentī. +6. Nōnne Sextus ab oppidānīs frūmentum postulāvit? Vērō, sed iī +recūsāvērunt frūmentum dare. 7. Cūr oppidum ab Sextō dēlētum est? +Quia frūmentum recūsātum est. 8. Ea victōria nōn dubia erat. +9. Oppidānī erant dēfessī et armīs egēbant. 10. Num fugam +temptāvērunt? Minimē.</p> + +<p>II. 1. Where was Julia standing? She was standing where you had +ordered. 2. Was Julia wearing any ornaments? She had many ornaments +of gold. 3. Did she not attempt flight when she saw the danger? She +did. 4. Who captured her? Galba captured her without delay and held +her by the left arm. 5. She didn´t have the lady’s gold, did she? +No, the gold had been taken by a faithless maid and has been brought +back.</p> + + +<hr class = "tiny"> + +<h5 class = "boldf"> +<a class = "page" href = "LatinBegin2.html#review_IV"> +Fourth Review, Lessons XXVII-XXXVI, §§ 513-516</a></h5> + +<hr class = "tiny"> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XXXVII"> +LESSON XXXVII</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">CONJUGATION OF <i>POSSUM</i> · THE INFINITIVE USED +AS IN ENGLISH</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec212"><b>212.</b></a> +Learn the principal parts of <b>possum</b>, <i>I am able</i>, <i>I +can</i>, and its inflection in the indicative and infinitive. (Cf. <a +href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec495">§ 495</a>.)</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> <b>Possum</b>, <i>I can</i>, is a compound of <b>potis</b>, +<i>able</i>, and <b>sum</b>, <i>I am</i>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec213"><b>213.</b></a> +<b>The Infinitive with Subject Accusative.</b> The <i>infinitive</i> +(cf. <a href = "#sec173">§ 173</a>) is a <i>verbal noun</i>. Used +as a noun, it has the constructions of a noun. As a verb it can govern a +case and be modified by an adverb. The uses of the infinitive are much +the same in Latin as in English.</p> + +<p><span class = "pagenum">94</span> +<a name = "page94"> </a> +1. In English certain verbs of <i>wishing, commanding, forbidding</i>, +and the like are used with an object clause consisting of a substantive +in the objective case and an infinitive, as, <i>he commanded the men to +flee</i>. Such object clauses are called infinitive clauses, and the +substantive is said to be the subject of the infinitive.</p> + +<p>Similarly in Latin, some verbs of <i>wishing, commanding, +forbidding</i>, and the like are used with an object clause consisting +of an infinitive with a subject in the accusative case, as, <b>Is virōs +fugere iussit</b>, <i>he commanded the men to flee</i>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec214"><b>214.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Subject of the Infinitive.</b> +<i>The subject of the infinitive is in the accusative.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec215"><b>215.</b></a> +<b>The Complementary Infinitive.</b> In English a verb is often followed +by an infinitive to complete its meaning, as, <i>the Romans are able to +conquer the Gauls</i>. This is called the <i>complementary</i> +infinitive, as the predicate is not <i>complete</i> without the added +infinitive.</p> + +<p>Similarly in Latin, <i>verbs of incomplete predication</i> are +completed by the infinitive. Among such verbs are <b>possum</b>, <i>I am +able, I can</i>; <b>properō</b>, <b>mātūrō</b>, <i>I hasten</i>; +<b>temptō</b>, <i>I attempt</i>; as</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Rōmānī Gallōs superāre possunt</b>, <i>the Romans are able to</i> (or +<i>can</i>) <i>conquer the Gauls</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Bellum gerere mātūrant</b>, <i>they hasten to wage war</i></p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> A predicate adjective completing a complementary infinitive +agrees in gender, number, and case with the subject of the main +verb.</p> + +<p class = "center"> +<b>Malī puerī esse bonī nōn possunt</b>, <i>bad boys are not able to</i> +(or <i>cannot</i>) <i>be good.</i></p> + +<p>Observe that <b>bonī</b> agrees with <b>puerī</b>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec216"><b>216.</b></a> +<b>The Infinitive used as a Noun.</b> In English the infinitive is often +used as a pure noun, as the subject of a sentence, or as a predicate +nominative. For example, <i>To conquer</i> (= conquering) <i>is +pleasing; To see</i> (= seeing) <i>is to believe</i> (= believing). The +same use of the infinitive is found in Latin, especially with +<b>est</b>, as</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Superāre est grātum</b>, <i>to conquer is pleasing</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Vidēre est crēdere</b>, <i>to see is to believe</i></p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "pagenum">95</span> +<a name = "page95"> </a> +<i>a.</i> In the construction above, the infinitive often has a subject, +which must then be in the accusative case, as</p> + +<p class = "center"> +<b>Galbam superāre inimīcōs est grātum multīs</b>,<br> +<i>for Galba to conquer his enemies is pleasing to many</i></p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> An infinitive used as a noun is neuter singular. Thus, in the +sentence <b>superāre est grātum</b>, the predicate adjective +<b>grātum</b> is in the neuter nominative singular to agree with +<b>superāre</b> the subject.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec217"><b>217.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec217vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 291.</p> + +<p>I. 1. Magister lūdī līberōs cum dīligentiā labōrāre iussit. +2. Egēre cibō et vinō est virīs molestum. 3. Virī armātī +vetuērunt Gallōs castra ibi pōnere. 4. Estne lēgātus in castellō an +in mūrō? Is est prō portā. 5. Ubi nostrī<span class = +"tag">1</span> fugere incēpērunt, lēgātus ab vestrīs<span class = +"tag">1</span> captus est. 6. Gallī castellum ibi oppugnāverant ubi +praesidium erat īnfīrmum. 7. Aliī pugnāre temptābant, aliī portās +petēbant. 8. Fēminae prō domiciliīs sedēbant neque resistere +validīs Gallīs poterant. 9. Bellum est saevum, nec īnfīrmīs nec +miserīs favet. 10. Sed virī arma postulābant et studēbant Gallōs dē +mūrīs agere. 11. Id castellum ab Gallīs occupārī Rōmānīs nōn grātum +erit. 12. Gallī ubi ā Rōmānīs victī sunt, esse līberī<span class = +"tag">2</span> cessāvērunt. 13. Diū sine aquā vīvere nōn +potestis.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. Supply <i>men</i>. <b>nostri</b>, <b>vestrī</b>, and <b>suī</b> are +often used as nouns in this way.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. Not <i>children</i>. The Romans used <b>līberī</b> either as an +adjective, meaning <i>free</i>, or as a noun, meaning <i>the free</i>, +thereby signifying their <i>free-born children</i>. The word was never +applied to children of slaves.</div> + +<p>II. 1. The girl began daily to carry water from the river to the +gates. 2. The Gauls had pitched their camp in a place suitable for +a battle. 3. For a long time they tried in vain to seize the +redoubt. 4. Neither did they cease to hurl weapons against<span +class = "tag">3</span> the walls. 5. But they were not able to +(could not) take the town.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. <b>in</b> with the accusative.</div> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec218"><b>218.</b></a> +<span class = "midcaps">The Faithless Tarpe´ia</span></p> + +<p>Sabīnī ōlim cum Rōmānīs bellum gerēbant et multās victōriās +reportāverant. Iam agrōs proximōs mūrīs vāstābant, iam oppidō +adpropinquābant. Rōmānī autem in Capitōlium fūgerant et longē perīculō +<span class = "pagenum">96</span> +<a name = "page96"> </a> +aberant. Mūrīs validīs et saxīs altīs crēdēbant. Frūstrā Sabīnī tēla +iaciēbant, frūstrā portās dūrās petēbant; castellum occupāre nōn +poterant. Deinde novum cōnsilium cēpērunt.<span class = +"tag">4</span></p> + +<p>Tarpēia erat puella Rōmāna pulchra et superba. Cotīdiē aquam cōpiīs +Rōmānīs in Capitōlium portābat. Eī<span class = "tag">5</span> nōn +nocēbant Sabīnī, quod ea sine armīs erat neque Sabīnī bellum cum fēminīs +līberīsque gerēbant. Tarpēia autem maximē amābat ōrnāmenta aurī. Cotīdiē +Sabīnōrum ōrnāmenta vidēbat et mox ea dēsīderāre incipiēbat. Eī ūnus +ex<span class = "tag">6</span> Sabīnīs dīxit, “Dūc cōpiās Sabīnās intrā +portās, Tarpēia, et maxima erunt praemia tua.”</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +4. <b>cōnsilium capere</b>, <i>to make a plan</i>. Why is the +<i>perfect</i> tense used here and the imperfect in the preceding +sentences? Explain the use of tenses in the next paragraph.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +5. Dative with <b>nocēbant</b>. (Cf. <a href = +"#sec154">§ 154</a>.)</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +6. <b>ex</b>, <i>out of</i>, i.e. <i>from the nuumber of</i>; best +translated <i>of</i>.</div> + +<p class = "illustration"> +<img src = "../images/pic096.png" width = "434" height = "279" +alt = "Tarpeia opens the gate for the soldiers"><br> +<span class = "caption"> +TARPEIA PUELLA PERFIDA</span></p> + + +<span class = "pagenum">97</span> +<a name = "page97"> </a> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XXXVIII"> +LESSON XXXVIII</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">THE RELATIVE PRONOUN AND THE INTERROGATIVE +PRONOUN</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec219"><b>219.</b></a> +Sentences are <i>simple, compound</i>, or <i>complex</i>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> A <i>simple sentence</i> is a sentence containing but one +statement, that is, one subject and one predicate: <i>The Romans +approached the town.</i></p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> A <i>compound sentence</i> is a sentence containing two or +more independent statements: <i>The Romans approached the town</i> | and +| <i>the enemy fled.</i></p> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Note.</span> An independent statement is one +that can stand alone; it does not depend upon another statement.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>c.</i> A <i>complex sentence</i> is a sentence containing one +independent statement and one or more dependent statements: <i>When the +Romans approached the town | the enemy fled.</i></p> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Note.</span> A dependent or subordinate +statement is one that depends on or qualifies another statement; thus +<i>the enemy fled</i> is independent, and <i>when the Romans approached +the town</i> is dependent or subordinate.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>d.</i> The separate statements in a compound or complex sentence are +called <i>clauses</i>. In a complex sentence the independent statement +is called the <i>main clause</i> and the dependent statement the +<i>subordinate clause.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec220"><b>220.</b></a> +Examine the complex sentence</p> + +<p class = "center"> +<i>The Romans killed the men who were taken</i></p> + +<p>Here are two clauses:</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> The main clause, <i>The Romans killed the men</i></p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> The subordinate clause, <i>who were taken</i></p> + +<p>The word <i>who</i> is a pronoun, for it takes the place of the noun +<i>men</i>. It also connects the subordinate clause <i>who were +taken</i> with the noun <i>men</i>. Hence the clause is an <i>adjective +clause</i>. A pronoun that connects an <i>adjective clause</i> with a +substantive is called a <i>relative pronoun</i>, and the substantive for +which the relative pronoun stands is called its <i>antecedent</i>. The +relative pronouns in English are <i>who, whose, whom, which, what, +that</i>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">98</span> +<a name = "page98"> </a> +<a name = "sec221"><b>221.</b></a> +The relative pronoun in Latin is <b>quī</b>, <b>quae</b>, <b>quod</b>, +and it is declined as follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "3">Singular</th> +<th colspan = "3">Plural</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "smaller">MASC.</td> +<td class = "smaller">FEM.</td> +<td class = "smaller">NEUT.</td> +<td class = "smaller">MASC.</td> +<td class = "smaller">FEM.</td> +<td class = "smaller">NEUT.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td><b>quī</b></td> +<td><b>quae</b></td> +<td><b>quod</b></td> +<td><b>quī</b></td> +<td><b>quae</b></td> +<td><b>quae</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td><b>cuius</b></td> +<td><b>cuius</b></td> +<td><b>cuius</b></td> +<td><b>quōrum</b></td> +<td><b>quārum</b></td> +<td><b>quōrum</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td><b>cui</b></td> +<td><b>cui</b></td> +<td><b>cui</b></td> +<td><b>quibus</b></td> +<td><b>quibus</b></td> +<td><b>quibus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td><b>quem</b></td> +<td><b>quam</b></td> +<td><b>quod</b></td> +<td><b>quōs</b></td> +<td><b>quās</b></td> +<td><b>quae</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td><b>quō</b></td> +<td><b>quā</b></td> +<td><b>quō</b></td> +<td><b>quibus</b></td> +<td><b>quibus</b></td> +<td><b>quibus</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>1. Review the declension of <b>is</b>, <a href = +"#sec114">§ 114</a>, and note the similarity in the endings. The +forms <b>quī</b>, <b>quae</b>, and <b>quibus</b> are the only forms +showing new endings.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Note.</span> The genitive <b>cuius</b> and the +dative <b>cui</b> are pronounced <i>co͝oi´yo͝os</i> (two syllables) and +<i>co͝oi</i> (one syllable).</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec222"><b>222.</b></a> +<b>The Relative Pronoun is translated as follows:</b><span class = +"tag">1</span></p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th>Masc. and Fem.</th> +<th>Neut.</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td><i>who, that</i></td> +<td><i>which, what, that</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td><i>of whom, whose</i></td> +<td><i>of which, of what, whose</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td><i>to</i> or <i>for whom</i></td> +<td><i>to</i> or <i>for which, to</i> or <i>for what</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td><i>whom, that</i></td> +<td><i>which, what, that</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td class = "rightpad"><i>from</i>, etc., <i>whom</i></td> +<td><i>from</i>, etc., <i>which</i> or <i>what</i></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. This table of meanings need not be memorized. It is inserted for +reference when translating.</div> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> We see from the table above that <b>quī</b>, when it refers to +a person, is translated by some form of <i>who</i> or by <i>that</i>; +and that when it refers to anything else it is translated by <i>which, +what</i>, or <i>that</i>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec223"><b>223.</b></a> +Note the following sentences:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>The Romans killed the men who were taken</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>The Romans killed the woman who was taken</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Rōmānī interfēcērunt virōs quī captī sunt</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Rōmānī interfēcērunt fēminam quae capta est</b></p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>In the first sentence <i>who</i> (<b>quī</b>) refers to the +antecedent <i>men</i> (<b>virōs</b>), and is <i>masculine plural</i>. In +the second, <i>who</i> (<b>quae</b>) refers to <i>woman</i> +(<b>fēminam</b>), and <i>feminine singular</i>. From this we learn that +the relative must agree +<span class = "pagenum">99</span> +<a name = "page99"> </a> +with its antecedent in <i>gender</i> and <i>number</i>. In neither of +the sentences are the antecedents and relatives in the same case. +<b>Virōs</b> and <b>fēminam</b> are accusatives, and <b>quī</b> and +<b>quae</b> are nominatives, being the subjects of the subordinate +clauses. Hence</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec224"><b>224.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Agreement of the Relative.</b> +<i>A relative pronoun must agree with its antecedent in gender and +number; but its case is determined by the way it is used in its own +clause.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec225"><b>225.</b></a> +<b>Interrogative Pronouns.</b> An interrogative pronoun is a pronoun +that asks a question. In English the interrogatives are <i>who?</i> +<i>which?</i> <i>what?</i> In Latin they are <b>quis?</b> <b>quid?</b> +(pronoun) and <b>quī?</b> <b>quae?</b> <b>quod?</b> (adjective).</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec226"><b>226.</b></a> +Examine the sentences</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>a.</i> <i>Who is the man?</i> <b>Quis est vir?</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>b.</i> <i>What man is leading them?</i> <b>Quī vir eōs dūcit?</b></p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>In <i>a</i>, <i>who</i> is an interrogative <i>pronoun</i>. In +<i>b</i>, <i>what</i> is an interrogative <i>adjective</i>. Observe that +in Latin <b>quis</b>, <b>quid</b> is the <i>pronoun</i> and <b>quī</b>, +<b>quae</b>, <b>quod</b> is the <i>adjective</i>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec227"><b>227.</b></a> +1. The interrogative adjective <b>quī</b>, <b>quae</b>, <b>quod</b> is +declined just like the relative pronoun. (See <a href = +"#sec221">§ 221</a>.)</p> + +<p>2. The interrogative pronoun <b>quis</b>, <b>quid</b> is declined +like <b>quī</b>, <b>quae</b>, <b>quod</b> in the plural. In the singular +it is declined as follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th>Masc. and Fem.</th> +<th>Neut.</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td><b>quis</b>, <i>who?</i></td> +<td><b>quid</b>, <i>what? which?</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td><b>cuius</b>, <i>whose?</i></td> +<td><b>cuius</b>, <i>whose?</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td><b>cui</b>, <i>to</i> or <i>for whom?</i></td> +<td><b>cui</b>, <i>to</i> or <i>for what</i> or <i>which?</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td><b>quem</b>, <i>whom?</i></td> +<td><b>quid</b>, <i>what? which?</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td class = "rightpad"><b>quō</b>, <i>from</i>, etc., <i>whom?</i></td> +<td><b>quō</b>, <i>from</i>, etc., <i>which</i> or <i>what?</i> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Note.</span> Observe that the masculine and +feminine are alike and that all the forms are like the corresponding +forms of the relative, excepting quis and quid.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec228"><b>228.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>I. 1. Quis est aeger? Servus quem amō est aeger. 2. Cuius scūtum +habēs? Scūtum habeō quod lēgātus ad castellum mīsit. 3. Cui lēgātus +suum scūtum dabit? Fīliō meō scūtum dabit. 4. Ubi Germānī +<span class = "pagenum">100</span> +<a name = "page100"> </a> +antīquī vīvēbant? In terrā quae est proxima Rhēnō Germānī vīvēbant. +5. Quibuscum<span class = "tag">2</span> Germānī bellum gerēbant? +Cum Rōmānīs, qui eōs superāre studēbant, Germānī bellum gerēbant. +6. Quī virī castra pōnunt? Iī sunt virī quōrum armīs Germānī victī +sunt. 7. Quibus tēlīs cōpiae nostrae eguērunt? Gladiīs et telīs +nostrae cōpiae eguērunt. 8. Ā quibus porta sinistra tenēbātur? Ā +sociīs porta sinistra tenēbātur. 9. Quae prōvinciae ā Rōmānīs +occupātae sunt? Multae prōvinciae ā Rōmānīs occupātae sunt. +10. Quibus virīs deī favēbunt? Bonīs virīs deī favēbunt.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. <b>cum</b> is added to the ablative of relative, interrogative, and +personal pronouns instead of being placed before them.</div> + +<p class = "illustration"> +<img src = "../images/pic100.png" width = "322" height = "429" +alt = "warriors coming home to Gaul"><br> +<span class = "caption"> +GERMANI ANTIQUI</span></p> + +<p>II. 1. What victory will you announce? 2. I will announce to the +people the victory which the sailors have won. 3. The men who were +pitching camp were eager for battle. 4. Nevertheless they were soon +conquered by the troops which Sextus had sent. 5. They could not +resist our forces, but fled from that place without delay.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec229"><b>229.</b></a> +<span class = "midcaps">The Faithless Tarpeia</span> +(<i>Concluded</i>)<span class = "tag">3</span></p> + +<p>Tarpēia, commōta ōrnamentīs Sabīnōrum pulchrīs, diū resistere nōn +potuit et respondit: “Date mihi<span class = "tag">4</span> ōrnāmenta +quae in sinistrīs bracchīs geritis, et celeriter cōpiās vestrās in +Capitōlium dūcam.” Nec +<span class = "pagenum">101</span> +<a name = "page101"> </a> +Sabīnī recūsāvērunt, sed per dūrās magnāsque castellī portās +properāvērunt quō<span class = "tag">5</span> Tarpēia dūxit et mox intrā +validōs et altōs mūrōs stābant. Tum sine morā in<span class = +"tag">6</span> Tarpēiam scūta graviter iēcērunt; nam scūta quoque in +sinistrīs bracchiīs gerēbant. Ita perfida puella Tarpēia interfecta est; +ita Sabīnī Capitōlium occupāvērunt.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. Explain the use of the tenses in this selection.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +4. <i>to me.</i></div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +5. quō = <i>whither</i>, <i>to the place where</i>. Here <b>quo</b> is +the relative adverb. We have had it used before as the interrogative +adverb, <i>whither?</i> <i>to what place?</i></div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +6. <i>upon</i>.</div> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XXXIX"> +LESSON XXXIX</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">THE THIRD DECLENSION · CONSONANT STEMS</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec230"><b>230.</b></a> +<b>Bases and Stems.</b> In learning the first and second declensions we +saw that the different cases were formed by adding the case terminations +to the part of the word that did not change, which we called the +<b>base</b>. If to the base we add <b>-ā</b> in the first declension, +and <b>-o</b> in the second, we get what is called the <b>stem</b>. Thus +<b>porta</b> has the base <b>port-</b> and the stem <b>portā-</b>; +<b>servus</b> has the base <b>serv-</b> and the stem <b>servo-</b>.</p> + +<p>These stem vowels, <b>-ā-</b> and <b>-o-</b>, play so important a +part in the formation of the case terminations that these declensions +are named from them respectively the <i>Ā</i>- and +<i>O</i>-Declensions.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec231"><b>231.</b></a> +<b>Nouns of the Third Declension.</b> The third declension is called the +Consonant or <i>I</i>-Declension, and its nouns are classified according +to the way the <i>stem</i> ends. If the last letter of the stem is a +consonant, the word is said to have a <i>consonant stem</i>; if the stem +ends in <b>-i-</b>, the word is said to have an <b>i-</b><i>stem</i>. +<i>In consonant stems the stem is the same as the base. In</i> +<b>i-</b><i>stems the stem is formed by adding</i> <b>-i-</b> <i>to the +base.</i> The presence of the <b>i</b> makes a difference in certain of +the cases, so the distinction is a very important one.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec232"><b>232.</b></a> +Consonant stems are divided into two classes:</p> + +<p class = "inset"> +I. Stems that add <b>-s</b> to the base to form the nominative +singular.</p> +<p class = "inset"> +II. Stems that add no termination in the nominative singular.</p> + +<span class = "pagenum">102</span> +<a name = "page102"> </a> +<h5>CLASS I</h5> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec233"><b>233.</b></a> +Stems that add <b>-s</b> to the base in the nominative singular are +either masculine or feminine and are declined as follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td><b>prīnceps</b>, m., <i>chief</i></td> +<td><b>mīles</b>, m., <i>soldier</i></td> +<td><b>lapis</b>, m., <i>stone</i></td> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead smaller">Bases or<br> +Stems</td> +<td class = "middle"><b>prīncip-</b></td> +<td class = "middle"><b>mīlit-</b></td> +<td class = "middle"><b>lapid-</b></td> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "3">Singular</th> +<td class = "smallest">TERMINATIONS<br> +M. AND F.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>prīncep<b>s</b></td> +<td>mīle<b>s</b></td> +<td>lapi<b>s</b></td> +<td><b>-s</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>prīn´cip<b>is</b></td> +<td>mīlit<b>is</b></td> +<td>lapid<b>is</b></td> +<td><b>-is</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>prīn´cip<b>ī</b></td> +<td>mīlit<b>ī</b></td> +<td>lapid<b>ī</b></td> +<td><b>-ī</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>prīn´cip<b>em</b></td> +<td>mīlit<b>em</b></td> +<td>lapid<b>em</b></td> +<td><b>-em</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>prīn´cip<b>e</b></td> +<td>mīlit<b>e</b></td> +<td>lapid<b>e</b></td> +<td><b>-e</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "3">Plural</th> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>prīn´cip<b>ēs</b></td> +<td>mīlit<b>ēs</b></td> +<td>lapid<b>ēs</b></td> +<td><b>-ēs</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>prīn´cip<b>um</b></td> +<td>mīlit<b>um</b></td> +<td>lapid<b>um</b></td> +<td><b>-um</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>prīnci´p<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>mīlit<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>lapid<b>ibus</b></td> +<td><b>-ibus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>prīn´cip<b>ēs</b></td> +<td>mīlit<b>ēs</b></td> +<td>lapid<b>ēs</b></td> +<td><b>-ēs</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>prīnci´p<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>mīlit<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>lapid<b>ibus</b></td> +<td><b>-ibus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan = "5"> <br></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td><b>rēx</b>, m., <i>king</i></td> +<td><b>iūdex</b>, m., <i>judge</i></td> +<td><b>virtūs</b>, f., <i>manliness</i></td> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead smaller">Bases or<br> +Stems</td> +<td class = "middle"><b>rēg-</b></td> +<td class = "middle"><b>iūdic-</b></td> +<td class = "middle"><b>virtūt-</b></td> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>rēx</td> +<td>iūdex</td> +<td>virtū<b>s</b></td> +<td><b>-s</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>rēg<b>is</b></td> +<td>iūdic<b>is</b></td> +<td>virtū´t<b>is</b></td> +<td><b>-is</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>rēg<b>ī</b></td> +<td>iūdic<b>ī</b></td> +<td>virtū´t<b>ī</b></td> +<td><b>-ī</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>rēg<b>em</b></td> +<td>iūdic<b>em</b></td> +<td>virtū´t<b>em</b></td> +<td><b>-em</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>rēg<b>e</b></td> +<td>iūdic<b>e</b></td> +<td>virtū´t<b>e</b></td> +<td><b>-e</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "3">Plural</th> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>rēg<b>ēs</b></td> +<td>iūdic<b>ēs</b></td> +<td>virtū´t<b>ēs</b></td> +<td><b>-ēs</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>rēg<b>um</b></td> +<td>iūdic<b>um</b></td> +<td>virtū´t<b>um</b></td> +<td><b>-um</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>rēg<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>iūdic<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>virtū´t<b>ibus</b></td> +<td><b>-ibus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>rēg<b>ēs</b></td> +<td>iūdic<b>ēs</b></td> +<td>virtū´t<b>ēs</b></td> +<td><b>-ēs</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>rēg<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>iūdic<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>virtū´t<b>ibus</b></td> +<td><b>-ibus</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>1. The base or stem is found by dropping <b>-is</b> in the genitive +singular.</p> + +<p>2. Most nouns of two syllables, like <b>prīnceps</b> +(<b>prīncip-</b>), <b>mīles</b> (<b>mīlit-</b>), <b>iūdex</b> +(<b>iūdic-</b>), have <b>i</b> in the base, but <b>e</b> in the +nominative.</p> + +<span class = "pagenum">103</span> +<a name = "page103"> </a> +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> <b>lapis</b> is an exception to this rule.</p> + +<p>3. Observe the consonant changes of the base or stem in the +nominative:</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> A final <b>-t</b> or <b>-d</b> is dropped before <b>-s</b>; +thus <b>mīles</b> for <b>mīlets</b>, <b>lapis</b> for <b>lapids</b>, +<b>virtūs</b> for <b>virtūts</b>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> A final <b>-c</b> or <b>-g</b> unites with <b>-s</b> and forms +<b>-x</b>; thus <b>iūdec</b> + <b>s</b> = <b>iūdex</b>, <b>rēg</b> + +<b>s</b> = <b>rēx</b>.</p> + +<p>4. Review <a href = "#sec74">§ 74</a> and apply the rules to +this declension.</p> + +<p>In like manner decline <b>dux, ducis</b>, m., <i>leader</i>; +<b>eques, equitis</b>, m., <i>horseman</i>; <b>pedes, peditis</b>, m., +<i>foot soldier</i>; <b>pēs, pedis</b>, m.,<i>foot</i>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec234"><b>234.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec234vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 291.</p> + +<p>I. 1. Neque peditēs neque equitēs occupāre castellum Rōmānum +poterant. 2. Summā virtūte mūrōs altōs cotīdiē oppugnābant. +3. Pedes mīlitum lapidibus quī dē mūrō iaciēbantur saepe +vulnerābantur. 4. Quod novum cōnsilium dux cēpit? 5. Is +perfidam puellam pulchrīs ōrnāmentīs temptāvit. 6. Quid puella +fēcit? 7. Puella commōta aurō mīlitēs per portās dūxit. +8. Tamen praemia quae summō studiō petīverat nōn reportāvit. +9. Apud Rōmānōs antīquōs Tarpēia nōn est laudāta.</p> + +<p>II. 1. What ship is that which I see? That (<b>illud</b>) ship is the +<i>Victory</i>. It is sailing now with a favorable wind and will soon +approach Italy. 2. The judges commanded the savages to be seized +and to be killed. 3. The chiefs of the savages suddenly began to +flee, but were quickly captured by the horsemen. 4. The king led +the foot soldiers to the wall from which the townsmen were hurling +stones with the greatest zeal.</p> + +<p class = "illustration"> +<img src = "../images/pic103.png" width = "189" height = "95" +alt = "ship with oars"><br> +<span class = "caption"> +NAVIGIUM</span></p> + + +<span class = "pagenum">104</span> +<a name = "page104"> </a> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XL"> +LESSON XL</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">THE THIRD DECLENSION · CONSONANT STEMS +(<i>Continued</i>)</h6> + +<h5>CLASS II</h5> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec235"><b>235.</b></a> +Consonant stems that add no termination in the nominative are declined +in the other cases exactly like those that add <b>-s.</b> They may be +masculine, feminine, or neuter.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec236"><b>236.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">PARADIGMS</span></p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "4">Masculines and Feminines</th> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td><b>cōnsul</b>, m., <i>consul</i></td> +<td><b>legiō</b>, f., <i>legion</i></td> +<td><b>ōrdō</b>, m., <i>row</i></td> +<td><b>pater</b>, m., <i>father</i></td> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead smaller">Bases or<br> +Stems</td> +<td class = "middle"><b>cōnsul-</b></td> +<td class = "middle"><b>legiōn-</b></td> +<td class = "middle"><b>ōrdin-</b></td> +<td class = "middle"><b>patr-</b></td> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "4">Singular</th> +<td class = "smallest">TERMINATIONS<br> +M. AND F.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>cōnsul</td> +<td>legiō</td> +<td>ōrdō</td> +<td>pater</td> +<td>—</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>cōnsul<b>is</b></td> +<td>legiōn<b>is</b></td> +<td>ōrdin<b>is</b></td> +<td>patr<b>is</b></td> +<td><b>-is</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>cōnsul<b>ī</b></td> +<td>legiōn<b>ī</b></td> +<td>ōrdin<b>ī</b></td> +<td>patr<b>ī</b></td> +<td><b>-ī</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>cōnsul<b>em</b></td> +<td>legiōn<b>em</b></td> +<td>ōrdin<b>em</b></td> +<td>patr<b>em</b></td> +<td><b>-em</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>cōnsul<b>e</b></td> +<td>legiōn<b>e</b></td> +<td>ōrdin<b>e</b></td> +<td>patr<b>e</b></td> +<td><b>-e</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "4">Plural</th> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>cōnsul<b>ēs</b></td> +<td>legiōn<b>ēs</b></td> +<td>ōrdin<b>ēs</b></td> +<td>patr<b>ēs</b></td> +<td><b>-ēs</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>cōnsul<b>um</b></td> +<td>legiōn<b>um</b></td> +<td>ōrdin<b>um</b></td> +<td>patr<b>um</b></td> +<td><b>-um</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>cōnsul<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>legiōn<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>ōrdin<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>patr<b>ibus</b></td> +<td><b>-ibus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>cōnsul<b>ēs</b></td> +<td>legiōn<b>ēs</b></td> +<td>ōrdin<b>ēs</b></td> +<td>patr<b>ēs</b></td> +<td><b>-ēs</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>cōnsul<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>legiōn<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>ōrdin<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>patr<b>ibus</b></td> +<td><b>-ibus</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>1. With the exception of the nominative, the terminations are exactly +the same as in Class I, and the base or stem is found in the same way.</p> + +<p>2. Masculines and feminines with bases or stems in <b>-in-</b> and +<b>-ōn-</b> drop <b>-n-</b> and end in <b>-ō</b> in the nominative, as +<b>legiō</b> (base or stem <b>legiōn-</b>), <b>ōrdō</b> (base or stem +<b>ōrdin-</b>).</p> + +<p>3. Bases or stems in <b>-tr-</b> have <b>-ter</b> in the nominative, +as <b>pater</b> (base or stem <b>patr-</b>).</p> + +<p>4. Note how the genitive singular gives the clue to the whole +declension. <i>Always learn this with the nominative.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">105</span> +<a name = "page105"> </a> +<a name = "sec237"><b>237.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec237vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 291.</p> + +<p>I. 1. Audīsne tubās, Mārce? Nōn sōlum tubās audiō sed etiam ōrdinēs +militum et carrōs impedīmentōrum plēnōs vidēre possum. 2. Quās +legiōnēs vidēmus? Eae legiōnēs nūper ex Galliā vēnērunt. 3. Quid +ibi fēcērunt? Studēbantne pugnāre an sine virtūte erant? 4. Multa +proelia fēcērunt<span class = "tag">1</span> et magnās victōriās et +multōs captīvōs reportāvērunt. 5. Quis est imperātor eārum +legiōnum? Caesar, summus Rōmānōrum imperātor. 6. Quis est eques quī +pulchram corōnam gerit? Is eques est frāter meus. Eī corōna ā cōnsule +data est quia summā virtūte pugnāverat et ā barbarīs patriam +servāverat.</p> + +<p>II. 1. Who has seen my father to-day? 2. I saw him just now +(<b>nūper</b>). He was hastening to your dwelling with your mother and +sister. 3. When men are far from the fatherland and lack food, they +cannot be restrained<span class = "tag">2</span> from wrong<span class = +"tag">3</span>. 4. The safety of the soldiers is dear to Cæsar, the +general. 5. The chiefs were eager to storm a town full of grain +which was held by the consul. 6. The king forbade the baggage of +the captives to be destroyed.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. <b>proelium facere</b> = <i>to fight a battle.</i></div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. <b>contineō</b>. Cf. <a href = "#sec180">§ 180</a>.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. Abl. iniūriā.</div> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XLI"> +LESSON XLI</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">THE THIRD DECLENSION · CONSONANT STEMS +(<i>Concluded</i>)</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec238"><b>238.</b></a> +Neuter consonant stems add no termination in the nominative and are +declined as follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td><b>flūmen</b>, n., <i>river</i></td> +<td><b>tempus</b>, n., <i>time</i></td> +<td><b>opus</b>, n., <i>work</i></td> +<td><b>caput</b>, n., <i>head</i></td> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead smaller">Bases or<br> +Stems</td> +<td class = "middle"><b>flūmin-</b></td> +<td class = "middle"><b>tempor-</b></td> +<td class = "middle"><b>oper-</b></td> +<td class = "middle"><b>capit-</b></td> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "4">Singular</th> +<td class = "smallest">TERMINATIONS</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>flūmen</td> +<td>tempus</td> +<td>opus</td> +<td>caput</td> +<td>—</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>flūmin<b>is</b></td> +<td>tempor<b>is</b></td> +<td>oper<b>is</b></td> +<td>capit<b>is</b> -is</td> +<td><b>-is</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>flūmin<b>ī</b></td> +<td>tempor<b>ī</b></td> +<td>oper<b>ī</b></td> +<td>capit<b>ī</b></td> +<td><b>-ī</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>flūmen</td> +<td>tempus</td> +<td>opus</td> +<td>caput</td> +<td>—</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>flūmin<b>e</b></td> +<td>tempor<b>e</b></td> +<td>oper<b>e</b></td> +<td>capit<b>e</b></td> +<td><b>-e</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +<span class = "pagenum">106</span> +<a name = "page106"> </a> +</td> +<th colspan = "4">Plural</th> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>flūmin<b>a</b></td> +<td>tempor<b>a</b></td> +<td>oper<b>a</b></td> +<td>capit<b>a</b></td> +<td><b>-a</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>flūmin<b>um</b></td> +<td>tempor<b>um</b></td> +<td>oper<b>um</b></td> +<td>capit<b>um</b></td> +<td><b>-um</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>flūmin<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>tempor<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>oper<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>capit<b>ibus</b></td> +<td><b>-ibus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>flūmin<b>a</b></td> +<td>tempor<b>a</b></td> +<td>oper<b>a</b></td> +<td>capit<b>a</b></td> +<td><b>-a</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>flūmin<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>tempor<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>oper<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>capit<b>ibus</b></td> +<td><b>-ibus</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>1. Review <a href = "#sec74">§ 74</a> and apply the rules to +this declension.</p> + +<p>2. Bases or stems in <b>-in-</b> have <b>-e-</b> instead of +<b>-i-</b> in the nominative, as flūmen, base or stem +<b>flūmin-</b>.</p> + +<p>3. Most bases or stems in <b>-er-</b> and <b>-or-</b> have <b>-us</b> +in the nominative, as <b>opus</b>, base or stem <b>oper-</b>; +<b>tempus</b>, base or stem <b>tempor-</b>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec239"><b>239.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec239vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 292.</p> + +<p>I. 1. Barbarī ubi Rōmam cēpērunt, maxima rēgum opera dēlēvērunt. +2. Rōmānī multās calamitātēs ā barbarīs accēpērunt. 3. Ubi +erat summus terror apud oppidānōs, animī dubiī eōrum ab ōrātōre clarō +cōnfīrmāti sunt. 4. Rōma est in rīpīs fiūminis magnī. 5. Ubi +Caesar imperātor mīlitēs suōs arma capere iussit, iī ā proeliō continērī +nōn potuērunt. 6. Ubi proelium factum est, imperātor reperīrī nōn +potuit. 7. Imperātor sagittā in capite vulnerātus erat et stāre nōn +poterat. 8. Eum magnō labōre pedes ex proeliō portāvit. 9. Is +bracchiīs suīs imperātōrem tenuit et eum ex perīculīs summīs servāvit. +10. Virtūte suā bonus mīles ab imperātōre corōnam accēpit.</p> + +<p>II. 1. The consul placed a crown on the head of the victor. +2. Before the gates he was received by the townsmen. 3. A +famous orator praised him and said, “By your labors you have saved the +fatherland from disaster.” 4. The words of the orator were pleasing +to the victor. 5. To save the fatherland was a great task.</p> + +<p class = "illustration"> +<img src = "../images/pic106.png" width = "125" height = "125" +alt = "garland with text “civis observatos”"><br> +<span class = "caption"> +CORONA</span></p> + + +<span class = "pagenum">107</span> +<a name = "page107"> </a> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XLII"> +LESSON XLII</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">REVIEW LESSON</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec240"><b>240.</b></a> +Review the paradigms in <a href = "#sec233">§§ 233</a>, <a href = +"#sec236">236</a>, <a href = "#sec238">238</a>; and decline all nouns of +the third declension in this selection.</p> + +<h5 class = "smallcaps">Terror Cimbricus<span class = +"tag">1</span></h5> + +<p>Ōlim Cimbrī et Teutonēs, populī Germāniae, cum fēminīs līberīsque +Italiae adpropinquāverant et cōpiās Rōmānās maximō proeliō vīcerant. Ubi +fuga legiōnum nūntiāta est, summus erat terror tōtīus Rōmae, et Rōmānī, +graviter commōtī, sacra crēbra deīs faciēbant et salūtem petēbant.</p> + +<p>Tum Mānlius ōrātor animōs populī ita cōnfīrmāvit:—“Magnam +calamitātem accēpimus. Oppida nostra ā Cimbrīs Teutonibusque capiuntur, +agricolae interficiuntur, agrī vāstantur, cōpiae barbarōrum Rōmae +adpropinquant. Itaque, nisi novīs animīs proelium novum faciēmus et +Germānōs ex patriā nostrā sine morā agēmus, erit nūlla salūs fēminīs +nostrīs līberīsque. Servāte līberōs! Servāte patriam! Anteā superātī +sumus quia imperātōrēs nostrī fuērunt īnfīrmī. Nunc Marius, clārus +imperātor, quī iam multās aliās victōriās reportāvit, legiōnēs dūcet et +animōs nostrōs terrōre Cimbricō līberāre mātūrābit.”</p> + +<p>Marius tum in Āfricā bellum gerēbat. Sine morā ex Āfricā in Italiam +vocātus est. Cōpiās novās nōn sōlum tōtī Italiae sed etiam prōvinciīs +sociōrum imperāvit.<span class = "tag">2</span> Disciplīnā autem dūrā +labōribusque perpetuīs mīlitēs exercuit. Tum cum peditibus equitibusque, +quī iam proeliō studēbant, ad Germānōrum castra celeriter properāvit. +Diū et ācriter pugnātum est.<span class = "tag">3</span> Dēnique barbarī +fūgērunt et multī in fugā ab equitibus sunt interfectī. Marius pater +patriae vocātus est.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. About the year 100 B.C. the Romans were greatly alarmed by an +invasion of barbarians from the north known as Cimbri and Teutons. They +were traveling with wives and children, and had an army of 300,000 +fighting men. Several Roman armies met defeat, and the city was in a +panic. Then the Senate called upon Marius, their greatest general, to +save the country. First he defeated the Teutons in Gaul. Next, returning +to Italy, he met the Cimbri. A terrible battle ensued, in which the +Cimbri were utterly destroyed; but the <i>terror Cimbricus</i> continued +to haunt the Romans for many a year thereafter.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. <i>He made a levy</i> (of troops) <i>upon</i>, <b>imperāvit</b> with +the acc. and the dat.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. Cf. <a href = "#sec200">§ 200</a>. II. 2.</div> + +<span class = "pagenum">108</span> +<a name = "page108"> </a> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XLIII"> +LESSON XLIII</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">THE THIRD DECLENSION · <i>I</i>-STEMS</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec241"><b>241.</b></a> +To decline a noun of the third declension correctly we must know whether +or not it is an <b>i</b>-stem. Nouns with <b>i</b>-stems are</p> + +<p>1. Masculines and feminines:</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Nouns in <b>-ēs</b> and <b>-īs</b> with the same number of +syllables in the genitive as in the nominative. Thus <b>caedēs, +caedis</b>, is an <b>i</b>-stem, but <b>mīles, mīlitis</b>, is a +consonant stem.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> Nouns in <b>-ns</b> and <b>-rs</b>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>c.</i> Nouns of one syllable in <b>-s</b> or <b>-x</b> preceded by a +consonant.</p> + +<p><i>2.</i> Neuters in <b>-e</b>, <b>-al</b>, and <b>-ar</b>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec242"><b>242.</b></a> +The declension of <b>i</b>-stems is nearly the same as that of consonant +stems. Note the following differences:</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Masculines and feminities have <b>-ium</b> in the genitive +plural and <b>-īs</b> or <b>-ēs</b> in the accusative plural.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> Neuters have <b>-ī</b> in the ablative singular, and an +<b>-i-</b> in every form of the plural.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec243"><b>243.</b></a> +<b>Masculine and Feminine <i>I</i>-Stems.</b> Masculine and feminine +<b>i</b>-stems are declined as follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td><b>caedēs</b>, f., <i>slaughter</i></td> +<td><b>hostis</b>, m., <i>enemy</i></td> +<td><b>urbs</b>, f., <i>city</i></td> +<td><b>cliēns</b>, m., <i>retainer</i></td> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<th class = "smaller">Stems</th> +<td><b>caedi-</b></td> +<td><b>hosti-</b></td> +<td><b>urbi-</b></td> +<td><b>clienti-</b></td> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<th class = "smaller">Bases</th> +<td><b>caed-</b></td> +<td><b>host-</b></td> +<td><b>urb-</b></td> +<td><b>client-</b></td> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "4">Singular</th> +<td class = "smallest">TERMINATIONS<br> +M. AND F.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>caed<b>ēs</b></td> +<td>host<b>is</b></td> +<td>urb<b>s</b></td> +<td>cliēn<b>s</b><span class = "tag">1</span></td> +<td><b>-s</b>, <b>-is</b>, <i>or</i> <b>-ēs</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>caed<b>is</b></td> +<td>host<b>is</b></td> +<td>urb<b>is</b></td> +<td>client<b>is</b></td> +<td><b>-is</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>caed<b>ī</b></td> +<td>host<b>ī</b></td> +<td>urb<b>ī</b></td> +<td>client<b>ī</b></td> +<td><b>-ī</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>caed<b>em</b></td> +<td>host<b>em</b></td> +<td>urb<b>em</b></td> +<td>client<b>em</b></td> +<td><b>-em</b> (<b>-im</b>)</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>caed<b>e</b></td> +<td>host<b>e</b></td> +<td>urb<b>e</b></td> +<td>client<b>e</b></td> +<td><b>-e</b> (<b>-ī</b>)</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +<span class = "pagenum">109</span> +<a name = "page109"> </a> +</td> +<th colspan = "4">Plural</th> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>caed<b>ēs</b></td> +<td>host<b>ēs</b></td> +<td>urb<b>ēs</b></td> +<td>client<b>ēs</b></td> +<td><b>-ēs</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>caed<b>ium</b></td> +<td>host<b>ium</b></td> +<td>urb<b>ium</b></td> +<td>client<b>ium</b></td> +<td><b>-ium</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>caed<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>host<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>urb<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>client<b>ibus</b></td> +<td><b>-ibus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>caed<b>īs, -ēs</b></td> +<td>host<b>īs, -ēs</b></td> +<td>urb<b>īs, -ēs</b></td> +<td>client<b>īs, -ēs</b></td> +<td><b>-īs, -ēs</b> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>caed<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>host<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>urb<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>client<b>ibus</b></td> +<td><b>-ibus</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. Observe that the vowel before <b>-ns</b> is long, but that it is +shortened before <b>-nt</b>. Cf. <a href = "#sec12">§ 12. +2, 3</a>.</div> + +<p>1. <b>avis</b>, <b>cīvis</b>, <b>fīnis</b>, <b>ignis</b>, +<b>nāvis</b> have the ablative singular in <b>-ī</b> or <b>-e</b>.</p> + +<p>2. <b>turris</b> has accusative <b>turrim</b> and ablative +<b>turrī</b> or <b>turre</b>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec244"><b>244.</b></a> +<b>Neuter <i>I</i>-Stems.</b> Neuter <b>i</b>-stems are declined as +follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td><b>īnsigne</b>, n., <i>decoration</i></td> +<td><b>animal</b>, n., <i>animal</i></td> +<td><b>calcar</b>, n., <i>spur</i></td> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<th class = "smaller">Stems</th> +<td><b>īnsigni-</b></td> +<td><b>animāli-</b></td> +<td><b>calcāri-</b></td> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<th class = "smaller">Bases</th> +<td><b>īnsign-</b></td> +<td><b>animāl-</b></td> +<td><b>calcār-</b></td> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "3">Singular</th> +<td class = "smallest">TERMINATIONS</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>īnsign<b>e</b></td> +<td>animal</td> +<td>calcar</td> +<td><b>-e</b> <i>or</i>—</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>īnsign<b>is</b></td> +<td>animāl<b>is</b></td> +<td>calcār<b>is</b></td> +<td><b>-is</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>īnsign<b>ī</b></td> +<td>animāl<b>ī</b></td> +<td>calcār<b>ī</b></td> +<td><b>-ī</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>īnsign<b>e</b></td> +<td>animal</td> +<td>calcar</td> +<td><b>-e</b> <i>or</i>—</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>īnsign<b>ī</b></td> +<td>animāl<b>ī</b></td> +<td>calcār<b>ī</b></td> +<td><b>-ī</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "3">Plural</th> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>īnsign<b>ia</b></td> +<td>animāl<b>ia</b></td> +<td>calcār<b>ia</b></td> +<td><b>-ia</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>īnsign<b>ium</b></td> +<td>animāl<b>ium</b></td> +<td>calcār<b>ium</b></td> +<td><b>-ium</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>īnsign<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>animāl<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>calcār<b>ibus</b></td> +<td><b>-ibus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>īnsign<b>ia</b></td> +<td>animāl<b>ia</b></td> +<td>calcār<b>ia</b></td> +<td><b>-ia</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>īnsign<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>animāl<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>calcār<b>ibus</b></td> +<td><b>-ibus</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>1. Review <a href = "#sec74">§ 74</a> and see how it applies to +this declension.</p> + +<p>2. The final <b>-i-</b> of the stem is usually dropped in the +nominative. If not dropped, it is changed to <b>-e</b>.</p> + +<p>3. A long vowel is shortened before final <b>-l</b> or <b>-r</b>. +(Cf. <a href = "#sec12">§ 12. 2</a>.)</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec245"><b>245.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec245vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 292.</p> + +<p>I. 1. Quam urbem vidēmus? Urbs quam vidētis est Rōma. 2. Cīvēs +Rōmānī urbem suam turribus altīs et mūrīs longīs mūnīverant. +3. Ventī nāvīs longās prohibēbant fīnibus hostium adpropinquāre. +4. Imperātor a clientibus suīs calcāria aurī et alia īnsignia +accēpit. 5. Mīlitēs Rōmānī cum hostibus bella saeva gessērunt et +eōs caede +<span class = "pagenum">110</span> +<a name = "page110"> </a> +magnā superāvērunt. 6. Alia animālia terram, alia mare amant. +7. Nāvēs longae quae auxilium ad imperātōrem portābant ignī ab +hostibus dēlētae sunt. 8. In eō marī avis multās vīdimus quae longē +ā terrā volāverant. 9. Nōnne vīdistis nāvīs longās hostium et ignīs +quibus urbs nostra vāstābātur? Certē, sed nec caedem cīvium nec fugam +clientium vīdimus. 10. Avēs et alia animālia, ubi ignem vīdērunt, +salūtem fugā petere celeriter incēpērunt. 11. Num. iūdex in peditum +ōrdinibus stābat? Minimē, iūdex erat apud equitēs et equus eius īnsigne +pulchrum gerēbat.</p> + +<p class = "illustration"> +<img src = "../images/pic110.png" width = "452" height = "407" +alt = "longboats with oars and sails"><br> +<span class = "caption"> +NAVES LONGAE</span></p> + +<p>II. 1. Because of the lack of grain the animals of the village were +not able to live. 2. When the general<span class = "tag">2</span> +heard the rumor, he quickly sent a horseman to the village. 3. The +horseman had a beautiful horse and wore spurs of gold. 4. He said +to the citizens, “Send your retainers with horses and wagons to our +camp, and you will receive an abundance of grain.” 5. With happy +hearts they hastened to obey his words.<span class = "tag">3</span></p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. Place first.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. Not the accusative. Why?</div> + + +<span class = "pagenum">111</span> +<a name = "page111"> </a> + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XLIV"> +LESSON XLIV</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">IRREGULAR NOUNS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION · GENDER IN +THE THIRD DECLENSION</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec246"><b>246.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">PARADIGMS</span></p> + +<div class = "mynote"> +The “Stems” are missing in the printed book. They have been supplied +from the inflectional table in the Appendix. +</div> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td><b>vīs</b>, f., <i>force</i></td> +<td><b>iter</b>, n., <i>march</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<th class = "smaller">Stems</th> +<td><ins class = "correction" title = +"given in original as first of two ‘Bases’"><b>vī-</b></ins> and +<b>vīri-</b></td> +<td><b>iter-</b> and <b>itiner-</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<th class = "smaller">Bases</th> +<td><b>v-</b> and <ins class = "correction" title = +"given in original as second of two ‘Bases’"><b>vīr-</b></ins></td> +<td><b>iter-</b> and <b>itiner-</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<th colspan = "3">Singular</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>vī<b>s</b></td> +<td>iter</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>vīs (rare)</td> +<td>itiner<b>is</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>vī (rare)</td> +<td>itiner<b>ī</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>vi<b>m</b></td> +<td>iter</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>vī</td> +<td>itiner<b>e</b> +</tr> +<tr> +<th colspan = "3">Plural</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>vīr<b>ēs</b></td> +<td>itiner<b>a</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>vīr<b>ium</b></td> +<td>itiner<b>um</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>vīr<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>itiner<b>ibus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td class = "rightpad">vīr<b>īs</b>, or <b>-ēs</b></td> +<td>itiner<b>a</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>vīr<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>itiner<b>ibus</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec247"><b>247.</b></a> +There are no rules for gender in the third declension that do not +present numerous exceptions.<span class = "tag">1</span> The following +rules, however, are of great service, and should be thoroughly +mastered:</p> + +<p>1. <b>Masculine</b> are nouns in <b>-or</b>, <b>-ōs</b>, <b>-er</b>, +<b>-ĕs</b> (gen. <b>-itis</b>).</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> <b>arbor</b>, <i>tree</i>, is feminine; and <b>iter</b>, +<i>march</i>, is neuter.</p> + +<p>2. <b>Feminine</b> are nouns in <b>-ō</b>, <b>-is</b>, <b>-x</b>, and +in <b>-s</b> preceded by a consonant or by any long vowel but +<b>ō</b>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Masculine are <b>collis</b> (<i>hill</i>), <b>lapis</b>, +<b>mēnsis</b> (<i>month</i>), <b>ōrdō</b>, <b>pēs</b>, and nouns in +<b>-nis</b> and <b>-guis</b>—as <b>ignis</b>, <b>sanguis</b> +(<i>blood</i>)—and the four monosyllables</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr><td> +<p> +<b>dēns</b>, <i>a tooth</i><br> +<b>mōns</b>, <i>a mountain</i><br> +<b>pōns</b>, <i>a bridge</i><br> +<b>fōns</b>, <i>a fountain</i></p> +</td></tr> +</table> + +<p>3. <b>Neuters</b> are nouns in <b>-e</b>, <b>-al</b>, <b>-ar</b>, +<b>-n</b>, <b>-ur</b>, <b>-ŭs</b>, and <b>caput</b>.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. Review <a href = "#sec60">§ 60</a>. Words denoting males are, of +course, masculine, and those denoting females, feminine.</div> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">112</span> +<a name = "page112"> </a> +<a name = "sec248"><b>248.</b></a> +Give the gender of the following nouns and the rule by which it is +determined:</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<td><b>animal</b></td> +<td><b>calamitās</b></td> +<td><b>flūmen</b></td> +<td><b>lapis</b></td> +<td><b>nāvis</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>avis</b></td> +<td><b>caput</b></td> +<td><b>ignis</b></td> +<td><b>legiō</b></td> +<td><b>opus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>caedēs</b></td> +<td><b>eques</b></td> +<td><b>īnsigne</b></td> +<td><b>mare</b></td> +<td><b>salūs</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>calcar</b></td> +<td><b>fīnis</b></td> +<td><b>labor</b></td> +<td><b>mīles</b></td> +<td><b>urbs</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec249"><b>249.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec249vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 292.</p> + +<p>I. <i>The First Bridge over the Rhine.</i> Salūs sociōrum erat semper +cāra Rōmānīs. Ōlim Gallī, amīcī Rōmānōrum, multās iniūriās ab Germānīs +quī trāns flūmen Rhēnum vivēbant accēperant. Ubi lēgātī ab iīs ad +Caesarem imperātōrem Rōmānum vēnērunt et auxilium postulāvērunt, Rōmānī +magnīs itineribus ad hostium fīnīs properāvērunt. Mox ad rīpās magnī +flūminis vēnērunt. Imperātor studēbat cōpiās suās trāns fluvium dūcere, +sed nūllā viā<span class = "tag">2</span> poterat. Nūllās nāvīs habēbat. +Alta erat aqua. Imperātor autem, vir clārus, numquam adversā fortūnā +commōtus, novum cōnsilium cēpit. Iussit suōs<span class = "tag">3</span> +in<span class = "tag">4</span> lātō flūmine facere pontem. Numquam anteā +pōns in Rhēnō vīsus erat. Hostēs ubi pontem quem Rōmānī fēcerant +vīdērunt, summō terrōre commōtī, sine morā fugam parāre incēpērunt.</p> + +<p>II. 1. The enemy had taken (possession of) the top of the mountain. +2. There were many trees on the opposite hills. 3. We pitched +our camp near (<b>ad</b>) a beautiful spring. 4. A march through +the enemies’ country is never without danger. 5. The time of the +month was suitable for the march. 6. The teeth of the monster were +long. 7. When the foot soldiers<span class = "tag">4</span> saw the +blood of the captives, they began to assail the fortifications with the +greatest violence.<span class = "tag">5</span></p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. Abl. of manner.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. <b>suōs</b>, used as a noun, <i>his men</i>.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +4. We say <i>build a bridge over</i>; the Romans, <i>make a bridge +on</i>.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +5. Place first.</div> + + +<hr class = "tiny"> + +<h5 class = "boldf"> +<a class = "page" href = "LatinBegin2.html#review_V"> +Fifth Review, Lessons XXXVII-XLIV, §§ 517-520</a></h5> + +<hr class = "tiny"> + + +<span class = "pagenum">113</span> +<a name = "page113"> </a> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XLV"> +LESSON XLV</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION · +<i>I</i>-STEMS</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec250"><b>250.</b></a> +Adjectives are either of the first and second declensions (like +<b>bonus</b>, <b>aeger</b>, or <b>līber</b>), or they are of the third +declension.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec251"><b>251.</b></a> +Nearly all adjectives of the third declension have +<b>i</b>-<i>stems</i>, and they are declined almost like nouns with +<b>i</b>-stems.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec252"><b>252.</b></a> +Adjectives learned thus far have had a different form in the nominative +for each gender, as, <b>bonus</b>, m.; <b>bona</b>, f.; <b>bonum</b>, n. +Such an adjective is called an <i>adjective of three endings</i>. +Adjectives of the third declension are of the following classes:</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<td class = "number">I.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +Adjectives of three endings—<br> +a different form in the nominative for each gender. +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">II.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +Adjectives of two endings—<br> +masculine and feminine nominative alike, the neuter different. +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number">III.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +Adjectives of one ending—<br> +masculine, feminine, and neuter nominative all alike. +</p></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec253"><b>253.</b></a> +Adjectives of the third declension in <b>-er</b> have three endings; +those in <b>-is</b> have two endings; the others have one ending.</p> + +<h5>CLASS I</h5> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec254"><b>254.</b></a> +Adjectives of Three Endings are declined as follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "center" colspan = "6"> +<b>ācer, ācris, ācre</b>, <i>keen, eager</i> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan = "2"></td> +<td class = "center" colspan = "2"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Stem</span> <b>ācri-</b></td> +<td class = "center" colspan = "2"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Base</span> <b>ācr-</b></td> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "3">Singular</th> +<th colspan = "3">Plural</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "smaller">MASC.</td> +<td class = "smaller">FEM.</td> +<td class = "smaller">NEUT.</td> +<td class = "smaller">MASC.</td> +<td class = "smaller">FEM.</td> +<td class = "smaller">NEUT.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>āce<b>r</b></td> +<td>ācr<b>is</b></td> +<td>ācr<b>e</b></td> +<td>ācr<b>ēs</b></td> +<td>ācr<b>ēs</b></td> +<td>ācr<b>ia</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>ācr<b>is</b></td> +<td>ācr<b>is</b></td> +<td class = "rightpad">ācr<b>is</b></td> +<td>ācr<b>ium</b></td> +<td>ācr<b>ium</b></td> +<td>ācr<b>ium</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>ācr<b>ī</b></td> +<td>ācr<b>ī</b></td> +<td>ācr<b>ī</b></td> +<td>ācr<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>ācr<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>ācr<b>ibus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>ācr<b>em</b></td> +<td>ācr<b>em</b></td> +<td>ācr<b>e</b></td> +<td>ācr<b>īs, -ēs</b></td> +<td>ācr<b>īs, -ēs</b></td> +<td>ācr<b>ia</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>ācr<b>ī</b></td> +<td>ācr<b>ī</b></td> +<td>ācr<b>ī</b></td> +<td>ācr<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>ācr<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>ācr<b>ibus</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + + +<span class = "pagenum">114</span> +<a name = "page114"> </a> +<h5>CLASS II</h5> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec255"><b>255.</b></a> +Adjectives of Two Endings are declined as follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "center" colspan = "4"> +<b>omnis, omne</b>, <i>every, all</i><span class = "tag">1</span> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "center" colspan = "2"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Stem</span> <b>omni-</b></td> +<td class = "center" colspan = "2"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Base</span> <b>omn-</b></td> +</tr> + + +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "2">Singular</th> +<th colspan = "2">Plural</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "smaller">MASC. AND FEM.</td> +<td class = "smaller">NEUT.</td> +<td class = "smaller">MASC. AND FEM.</td> +<td class = "smaller">NEUT.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>omn<b>is</b></td> +<td>omn<b>e</b></td> +<td>omn<b>ēs</b></td> +<td>omn<b>ia</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>omn<b>is</b></td> +<td class = "rightpad">omn<b>is</b></td> +<td>omn<b>ium</b></td> +<td>omn<b>ium</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>omn<b>ī</b></td> +<td>omn<b>ī</b></td> +<td>omn<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>omn<b>ibus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>omn<b>em</b></td> +<td>omn<b>e</b></td> +<td>omn<b>īs, ēs</b></td> +<td>omn<b>ia</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>omn<b>ī</b></td> +<td>omn<b>ī</b></td> +<td>omn<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>omn<b>ibus</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. <b>omnis</b> is usually translated <i>every</i> in the singular and +<i>all</i> in the plural.</div> + +<h5>CLASS III</h5> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec256"><b>256.</b></a> +Adjectives of One Ending are declined as follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "center" colspan = "4"> +<b>pār</b>, <i>equal</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "center" colspan = "2"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Stem</span> <b>pari-</b></td> +<td class = "center" colspan = "2"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Base</span> <b>par-</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "2">Singular</th> +<th colspan = "2">Plural</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "smaller">MASC. AND FEM.</td> +<td class = "smaller">NEUT.</td> +<td class = "smaller">MASC. AND FEM.</td> +<td class = "smaller">NEUT.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>pār</td> +<td>pār</td> +<td>par<b>ēs</b></td> +<td>par<b>ia</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>par<b>is</b></td> +<td class = "rightpad">par<b>is</b></td> +<td>par<b>ium</b></td> +<td>par<b>ium</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>par<b>ī</b></td> +<td>par<b>ī</b></td> +<td>par<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>par<b>ibus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>par<b>em</b></td> +<td>pār</td> +<td>par<b>īs, ēs</b></td> +<td>par<b>ia</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>par<b>ī</b></td> +<td>par<b>ī</b></td> +<td>par<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>par<b>ibus</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>1. All <b>i</b>-stem adjectives have <b>-ī</b> in the ablative +singular.</p> + +<p>2. Observe that the several cases of adjectives of one ending have +the same form for all genders excepting in the accusative singular and +in the nominative and accusative plural.</p> + +<p>3. Decline <b>vir ācer</b>, <b>legiō ācris</b>, <b>animal ācre</b>, +<b>ager omnis</b>, <b>scūtum omne</b>, <b>proelium pār</b>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec257"><b>257.</b></a> +There are a few adjectives of one ending that have consonant stems. They +are declined exactly like nouns with consonant stems.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">115</span> +<a name = "page115"> </a> +<a name = "sec258"><b>258.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec258vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 293.</p> + +<p>I. <i>The Romans invade the Enemy’s Country.</i> Ōlim peditēs Rōmānī +cum equitibus vēlōcibus in hostium urbem iter faciēbant. Ubi nōn longē +āfuērunt, rapuērunt agricolam, quī eīs viam brevem et facilem +dēmōnstrāvit. Iam Rōmānī moenia alta, turrīs validās aliaque opera urbis +vidēre poterant. In moenibus stābant multī prīncipēs. Prīncipēs ubi +vīdērunt Rōmānōs, iussērunt cīvīs lapidēs aliaque tēla dē mūrīs iacere. +Tum mīlitēs fortēs continērī ā proeliō nōn poterant et ācer imperātor +signum tubā darī iussit. Summā vī omnēs mātūrāvērunt. Imperātor Sextō +lēgātō impedīmenta omnia mandāvit. Sextus impedīmenta in summō colle +conlocāvit. Grave et ācre erat proelium, sed hostēs nōn parēs Rōmānīs +erant. Aliī interfectī, aliī captī sunt. Apud captīvōs erant māter +sororque rēgis. Paucī Rōmānōrum ab hostibus vulnerātī sunt. Secundum +proelium Rōmānīs erat grātum. Fortūna fortibus semper favet.</p> + +<p>II. 1. Some months are short, others are long. 2. To seize the +top of the mountain was difficult. 3. Among the hills of Italy are +many beautiful springs. 4. The soldiers were sitting where the +baggage had been placed because their feet were weary. 5. The city +which the soldiers were eager to storm had been fortified by strong +walls and high towers. 6. Did not the king intrust a heavy crown of +gold and all his money to a faithless slave? Yes, but the slave had +never before been faithless.</p> + +<p class = "illustration"> +<img src = "../images/pic115.png" width = "188" height = "186" +alt = "legionary eagle, SPQR"><br> +<span class = "caption"> +AQUILA LEGIONIS</span></p> + + +<span class = "pagenum">116</span> +<a name = "page116"> </a> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XLVI"> +LESSON XLVI</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">THE FOURTH OR <i>U</i>-DECLENSION</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec259"><b>259.</b></a> +Nouns of the fourth declension are either masculine or neuter.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec260"><b>260.</b></a> +Masculine nouns end in <b>-us</b>, neuters in <b>-ū</b>. The genitive +ends in <b>-ūs</b>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Feminine by exception are <b>domus</b>, <i>house</i>; +<b>manus</b>, <i>hand</i>; and a few others.</p> + +<h6 class = "boldf">PARADIGMS</h6> + +<div class = "mynote"> +The “Stems” are missing in the printed book. They have been supplied +from the inflectional table in the Appendix. +</div> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td><b>adventus</b>, m., <i>arrival</i></td> +<td><b>cornū</b>, n., <i>horn</i></td> +<td colspan = "2"></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallcaps">Stems</td> +<td><b>adventu-</b></td> +<td><b>cornu-</b></td> +<td colspan = "2"></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallcaps">Bases</td> +<td><b>advent-</b></td> +<td><b>corn-</b></td> +<td colspan = "2"></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "2" rowspan = "2">Singular</th> +<td class = "smallest" colspan = "2">TERMINATIONS</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "smallest">MASC.</td> +<td class = "smallest">NEUT.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>advent<b>us</b></td> +<td>corn<b>ū</b></td> +<td><b>-us</b></td> +<td><b>-ū</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>advent<b>ūs</b></td> +<td>corn<b>ūs</b></td> +<td><b>-ūs</b></td> +<td><b>-ūs</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>advent<b>uī</b> (<b>ū</b>)</td> +<td>corn<b>ū</b></td> +<td><b>-uī</b> (<b>ū</b>)</td> +<td><b>-ū</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>advent<b>um</b></td> +<td>corn<b>ū</b></td> +<td><b>-um</b></td> +<td><b>-ū</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>advent<b>ū</b></td> +<td>corn<b>ū</b></td> +<td><b>-ū</b></td> +<td><b>-ū</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "2">Plural</th> +<td colspan = "2"></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>advent<b>ūs</b></td> +<td>corn<b>ua</b></td> +<td><b>-ūs</b></td> +<td><b>-ua</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>advent<b>uum</b></td> +<td>corn<b>uum</b></td> +<td><b>-uum</b></td> +<td><b>-uum</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>advent<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>corn<b>ibus</b></td> +<td><b>-ibus</b></td> +<td><b>-ibus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>advent<b>ūs</b></td> +<td>corn<b>ua</b></td> +<td><b>-ūs</b></td> +<td><b>-ua</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>advent<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>corn<b>ibus</b></td> +<td><b>-ibus</b></td> +<td><b>-ibus</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>1. Observe that the base is found, as in other declensions, by +dropping the ending of the genitive singular.</p> + +<p>2. <b>lacus</b>, <i>lake</i>, has the ending <b>-ubus</b> in the +dative and ablative plural; <b>portus</b>, <i>harbor</i>, has either +<b>-ubus</b> or <b>-ibus</b>.</p> + +<p>3. <b>cornū</b> is the only neuter that is in common use.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec261"><b>261.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec261vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 293.</p> + +<p>I. 1. Ante adventum Caesaris vēlōcēs hostium equitēs ācrem impetum in +castra fēcērunt. 2. Continēre exercitum ā proeliō nōn facile erat. +3. Post adventum suum Caesar iussit legiōnēs ex castrīs +<span class = "pagenum">117</span> +<a name = "page117"> </a> +dūcī. 4. Prō castrīs cum hostium equitātū pugnātum est. 5. Post +tempus breve equitātus trāns flūmen fūgit ubi castra hostium posita +erant. 6. Tum victor imperātor agrōs vāstāvit et vīcōs hostium +cremāvit. 7. Castra autem nōn oppugnāvit quia mīlitēs erant dēfessī +et locus difficilis. 8. Hostēs nōn cessāvērunt iacere tēla, quae +paucīs nocuērunt. 9. Post adversum proelium principēs Gallōrum +lēgātōs ad Caesarem mittere studēbant, sed populō persuādēre nōn +poterant.</p> + +<p>II. 1. Did you see the man-of-war on the lake? 2. I did not see +it (<i>fem</i>.) on the lake, but I saw it in the harbor. +3. Because of the strong wind the sailor forbade his brother to +sail. 4. Cæsar didn´t make an attack on the cavalry on the right +wing, did he? 5. No, he made an attack on the left wing. +6. Who taught your swift horse to obey? 7. I trained my horse +with my (own) hands, nor was the task difficult. 8. He is a +beautiful animal and has great strength.</p> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XLVII"> +LESSON XLVII</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">EXPRESSIONS OF PLACE · THE DECLENSION OF +<i>DOMUS</i></h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec262"><b>262.</b></a> +We have become thoroughly familiar with expressions like the +following:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Galba ad</b> (or <b>in</b>) <b>oppidum properat</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Galba ab</b> (<b>dē</b> or <b>ex</b>) <b>oppidō properat</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Galba in oppidō habitat</b></p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>From these expressions we may deduce the following rules:</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec263"><b>263.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Accusative of the Place +to.</b> <i>The <b>place to which</b> is expressed by <b>ad</b> or +<b>in</b> with the accusative. This answers the question +Whither?</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec264"><b>264.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Ablative of the Place +from.</b> <i>The <b>place from which</b> is expressed by <b>ā</b> or +<b>ab</b>, <b>dē</b>, <b>ē</b> or <b>ex</b>, with the separative +ablative. This answers the question Whence?</i> (Cf. Rule, <a href = +"#sec179">§ 179</a>.)</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec265"><b>265.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Ablative of the Place at or +in.</b> <i>The <b>place at or in which</b> is expressed by the ablative +with <b>in</b>. This answers the question Where?</i></p> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "pagenum">118</span> +<a name = "page118"> </a> +<i>a.</i> The ablative denoting the <i>place where</i> is called the +<i>locative ablative</i> (cf. <b>locus</b>, <i>place</i>).</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec266"><b>266.</b></a> +<b>Exceptions.</b> Names of towns, small islands,<span class = +"tag">1</span> <b>domus</b>, <i>home</i>, <b>rūs</b>, <i>country</i>, +and a few other words in common use omit the prepositions in expressions +of place, as,</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Galba Athēnās properat</b>, <i>Galba hastens to Athens</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Galba Athēnīs properat</b>, <i>Galba hastens from Athens</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Galba Athēnīs habitat</b>, <i>Galba lives at</i> (or <i>in</i>) +<i>Athens</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Galba domum properat</b>, <i>Galba hastens home</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Galba rūs properat</b>, <i>Galba hastens to the country</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Galba domō properat</b>, <i>Galba hastens from home</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Galba rūre properat</b>, <i>Galba hastens from the country</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Galba rūrī</b> (less commonly <b>rūre</b>) <b>habitat</b>, <i>Galba +lives in the country</i></p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Names of <i>countries</i>, like <b>Germānia</b>, +<b>Italia</b>, etc., do not come under these exceptions. <i>With them +prepositions must not be omitted.</i></p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. Small islands are classed with towns because they generally have but +one town, and the name of the town is the same as the name of the +island.</div> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec267"><b>267.</b></a> +<b>The Locative Case.</b> We saw above that the place-relation expressed +by <i>at</i> or <i>in</i> is regularly covered by the locative ablative. +However, Latin originally expressed this relation by a separate form +known as the <i>locative case</i>. This case has been everywhere merged +in the ablative excepting in the singular number of the first and second +declensions. The form of the locative in these declensions is like the +genitive singular, and its use is limited to names of towns and small +islands, <b>domī</b>, <i>at home</i>, and a few other words.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec268"><b>268.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Locative and Locative +Ablative.</b> <i>To express the <b>place in which</b> with names of +towns and small islands, <b>if they are singular and of the first or +second declension</b>, use the locative; otherwise use the locative +ablative without a preposition; as</i>,</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Galba Rōmae habitat</b>, <i>Galba lives at Rome</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Galba Corinthī habitat</b>, <i>Galba lives at Corinth</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Galba domī habitat</b>, <i>Galba lives at home</i></p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p> +<span class = "pagenum">119</span> +<a name = "page119"> </a> +Here <b>Rōmae</b>, <b>Corinthī</b>, and <b>domī</b> are +<i>locatives</i>, being <i>singular</i> and of the first and second +declensions respectively. But in</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Galba Athēnīs habitat</b>, <i>Galba lives at Athens</i>,</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Galba Pompēiīs habitat</b>, <i>Galba lives at Pompeii</i></p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p><b>Athēnīs</b> and <b>Pompēiīs</b> are locative ablatives. These +words can have no locative case, as the nominatives <b>Athēnae</b> and +<b>Pompēiī</b> are<i>plural</i> and there is no plural locative case +form.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec269"><b>269.</b></a> +The word <b>domus</b>, <i>home, house</i>, has forms of both the second +and the fourth declension. Learn its declension (<a href = +"LatinBegin2.html#sec468">§ 468</a>).</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec270"><b>270.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec270vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 293.</p> + +<p>I. 1. Corinthī omnia īnsignia aurī ā ducibus victōribus rapta erant. +2. Caesar Genāvam exercitum magnīs itineribus dūxit. 3. Quem +pontem hostēs cremāverant? Pontem in Rhēnō hostēs cremāverant. +4. Pompēiīs multās Rōmānōrum domōs vidēre poteritis. 5. Rōmā +cōnsul equō vēlōcī rūs properāvit. 6. Domī cōnsulis hominēs multī +sedēbant. 7. Imperātor iusserat lēgātum Athēnās cum multīs nāvibus +longīs nāvigāre. 8. Ante moenia urbis sunt ōrdinēs arborum altārum. +9. Propter arborēs altās nec lacum nec portum reperīre potuimus. +10. Proeliīs crēbrīs Caesar legiōnēs suās quae erant in Galliā +exercēbat. 11. Cotīdiē in locō idoneō castra pōnēbat et +mūniēbat.</p> + +<p>II. 1. Cæsar, the famous general, when he had departed from Rome, +hastened to the Roman province on a swift horse.<span class = +"tag">2</span> 2. He had heard a rumor concerning the allies at +Geneva. 3. After his arrival Cæsar called the soldiers together and +commanded them to join battle. 4. The enemy hastened to retreat, +some because<span class = "tag">3</span> they were afraid, others +because<span class = "tag">3</span> of wounds. 5. Recently I was at +Athens and saw the place where the judges used to sit.<span class = +"tag">4</span> 6. Marcus and Sextus are my brothers; the one lives +at Rome, the other in the country.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. Latin says “by a swift horse.” What construction?</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. Distinguish between the English conjunction <i>because</i> +(<b>quia</b> or <b>quod</b>) and the preposition <i>because of</i> +(<b>propter</b>).</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +4. <i>used to sit</i>, express by the imperfect.</div> + +<p class = "illustration"> +<span class = "pagenum">120</span> +<a name = "page120"> </a> +<img src = "../images/pic120.png" width = "348" height = "544" +alt = "Daedalus and Icarus"><br> +<span class = "caption"> +DAEDALUS ET ICARUS</span></p> + +<span class = "pagenum">121</span> +<a name = "page121"> </a> +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec271"><b>271.</b></a> +<span class = "midcaps">Daed´alus and Ic´arus</span></p> + +<p>Crēta est īnsula antīqua quae aquā altā magnī maris pulsātur. Ibi +ōlim Mīnōs erat rēx. Ad eum vēnit Daedalus quī ex Graeciā patriā +fugiēbat. Eum Mīnōs rēx benignīs verbīs accēpit et eī domicilium in +Crētā dedit. <span class = "tag">5</span>Quō in locō Daedalus sine cūrā +vīvebat et rēgī multa et clāra opera faciēbat. Post tempus longum autem +Daedalus patriam cāram dēsīderāre incēpit. Domum properāre studēbat, sed +rēgī persuādēre nōn potuit et mare saevum fugam vetābat.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +5. <i>And in this place</i>; <b>quō</b> does not here introduce a +subordinate relative clause, but establishes the connection with the +preceding sentence. Such a relative is called a <i>connecting +relative</i>, and is translated by <i>and</i> and a demonstrative or +personal pronoun.</div> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XLVIII"> +LESSON XLVIII</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">THE FIFTH OR Ē-DECLENSION · THE ABLATIVE OF +TIME</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec272"><b>272.</b></a> +<b>Gender.</b> Nouns of the fifth declension are feminine except +<b>diēs</b>, <i>day</i>, and <b>merīdiēs</b>, <i>midday</i>, which are +usually masculine.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec273"><b>273.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">PARADIGMS</span></p> + +<div class = "mynote"> +The “Stems” are missing in the printed book. They have been supplied +from the inflectional table in the Appendix. +</div> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td><b>diēs</b>, m., <i>day</i></td> +<td><b>rēs</b>, f. <i>thing</i></td> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<th class = "smaller">Stems</th> +<td><b>diē-</b></td> +<td><b>rē-</b> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<th class = "smaller">Bases</th> +<td><b>di-</b></td> +<td><b>r-</b> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "2">Singular</th> +<td class = "smallest">TERMINATIONS</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>di<b>ēs</b></td> +<td>r<b>ēs</b></td> +<td><b>-ēs</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>di<b>ēī</b></td> +<td>re<b>ī</b></td> +<td><b>-ē̆ī</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>di<b>ēī</b></td> +<td>re<b>ī</b></td> +<td><b>-ē̆ī</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>di<b>em</b></td> +<td>r<b>em</b></td> +<td><b>-em</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>di<b>ē</b></td> +<td>r<b>ē</b></td> +<td><b>-ē</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "2">Plural</th> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>di<b>ēs</b></td> +<td>r<b>ēs</b></td> +<td><b>-ēs</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>di<b>ērum</b></td> +<td>r<b>ērum</b></td> +<td><b>-ērum</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>di<b>ēbus</b></td> +<td>r<b>ēbus</b></td> +<td><b>-ēbus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>di<b>ēs</b></td> +<td>r<b>ēs</b></td> +<td><b>-ēs</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>di<b>ēbus</b></td> +<td>r<b>ēbus</b></td> +<td><b>-ēbus</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p><span class = "pagenum">122</span> +<a name = "page122"> </a> +1. The vowel <b>e</b> which appears in every form is regularly long. It +is shortened in the ending <b>-eī</b> after a consonant, as in +<b>r-ĕī</b>; and before <b>-m</b> in the accusative singular, as in +<b>di-em</b>. (Cf. <a href = "#sec12">§ 12. 2</a>.)</p> + +<p>2. Only <b>diēs</b> and <b>rēs</b> are complete in the plural. Most +other nouns of this declension lack the plural. <b>Aciēs</b>, <i>line of +battle</i>, and <b>spēs</b>, <i>hope</i>, have the nominative and +accusative plural.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec274"><b>274.</b></a> +The ablative relation (<a href = "#sec50">§ 50</a>) which is +expressed by the prepositions <i>at, in</i>, or <i>on</i> may refer not +only to place, but also to time, as <i>at noon, in summer, on the first +day</i>. The ablative which is used to express this relation is called +the <i>ablative of time</i>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec275"><b>275.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>The Ablative of Time.</b> +<i>The time <b>when</b> or <b>within which</b> anything happens is +expressed by the ablative without a preposition.</i></p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Occasionally the preposition <b><i>in</i></b> is found. +Compare the English <i>Next day we started</i> and <i><b>On</b> the next +day we started</i>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec276"><b>276.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec276vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 294.</p> + +<p>I. <i>Galba the Farmer.</i> Galba agricola rūrī vīvit. Cotīdiē prīmā +lūce labōrāre incipit, nec ante noctem in studiō suō cessat. Merīdiē +Iūlia fīlia eum ad cēnam vocat. Nocte pedēs dēfessōs domum vertit. +Aestāte fīliī agricolae auxilium patrī dant. Hieme agricola eōs in lūdum +mittit. Ibi magister pueris multās fābulās dē rēbus gestīs Caesaris +nārrat. Aestāte fīliī agricolae perpetuīs labōribus exercentur nec grave +agrī opus est iīs molestum. Galba sine ūllā cūrā vivit nec rēs adversās +timet.</p> + +<p>II. 1. In that month there were many battles in Gaul. 2. The +cavalry of the enemy made an attack upon Cæsar’s line of battle. +3. In the first hour of the night the ship was overcome by the +billows. 4. On the second day the savages were eager to come under +Cæsar’s protection. 5. The king had joined battle, moved by the +hope of victory. 6. That year a fire destroyed many birds and other +animals. 7. We saw blood on the wild beast’s teeth.</p> + +<span class = "pagenum">123</span> +<a name = "page123"> </a> +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec277"><b>277.</b></a> +<span class = "midcaps">Daed´alus and Ic´arus</span> +(<i>Continued</i>)</p> + +<p>Tum Daedalus gravibus cūrīs commōtus fīliō suō Īcarō ita dixit: +“Animus meus, Īcare, est plēnus trīstitiae nec oculī lacrimīs egent. +Discēdere ex Crētā, Athēnās properāre, maximē studeō; sed rēx recūsat +audīre verba mea et omnem reditūs spem ēripit. Sed numquam rēbus +adversīs vincar. Terra et mare sunt inimīca, sed aliam fugae viam +reperiam.” Tum in artīs ignōtās animum dīmittit et mīrum capit +cōnsilium. Nam pennās in ōrdine pōnit et vērās ālās facit.</p> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_XLIX"> +LESSON XLIX</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">PRONOUNS CLASSIFIED · PERSONAL AND REFLEXIVE +PRONOUNS</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec278"><b>278.</b></a> +We have the same kinds of pronouns in Latin as in English. They are +divided into the following eight classes:</p> + +<p>1. <b>Personal pronouns</b>, which show the person speaking, spoken +to, or spoken of; as, <b>ego</b>, <i>I</i>; <b>tū</b>, <i>you</i>; +<b>is</b>, <i>he</i>. (Cf. <a href = "#sec279">§ 279</a>. etc.)</p> + +<p>2. <b>Possessive pronouns</b>, which denote possession; as, +<b>meus</b>, <b>tuus</b>, <b>suus</b>, etc. (Cf. <a href = +"#sec98">§ 98</a>.)</p> + +<p>3. <b>Reflexive pronouns</b>, used in the predicate to refer back to +the subject; as, <i>he saw himself</i>. (Cf. <a href = +"#sec281">§ 281</a>.)</p> + +<p>4. <b>Intensive pronouns</b>, used to emphasize a noun or pronoun; +as, <i>I myself saw it</i>. (Cf. <a href = +"#sec285">§ 285</a>.)</p> + +<p>5. <b>Demonstrative pronouns</b>, which point out persons or things; +as, <b>is</b>, <i>this, that</i>. (Cf. <a href = +"#sec112">§ 112</a>.)</p> + +<p>6. <b>Relative pronouns</b>, which connect a subordinate adjective +clause with an antecedent; as, <b>quī</b>, <i>who</i>. (Cf. <a href = +"#sec220">§ 220</a>.)</p> + +<p>7. <b>Interrogative pronouns</b>, which ask a question; as, +<b>quis</b>, <i>who?</i> (Cf. <a href = "#sec225">§ 225</a>.)</p> + +<p>8. <b>Indefinite pronouns</b>, which point out indefinitely; as, +<i>some one, any one, some, certain ones</i>, etc. (Cf. <a href = +"#sec296">§ 296</a>.)</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec279"><b>279.</b></a> +The demonstrative pronoun <b>is</b>, <b>ea</b>, <b>id</b>, as we learned +in <a href = "#sec115">§ 115</a>, is regularly used as the personal +pronoun of the third person (<i>he</i>, <i>she</i>, <i>it</i>, +<i>they</i>, etc.).</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">124</span> +<a name = "page124"> </a> +<a name = "sec280"><b>280.</b></a> +The personal pronouns of the first person are <b>ego</b>, <i>I</i>; +<b>nōs</b>, <i>we</i>; of the second person, <b>tū</b>, <i>thou</i> or +<i>you</i>; <b>vōs</b>, <i>ye</i> or <i>you</i>. They are declined as +follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th colspan = "3">Singular</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "smallhead">FIRST PERSON</td> +<td class = "smallhead">SECOND PERSON</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td><b>ego</b>, <i>I</i></td> +<td><b>tū</b>, <i>you</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td><b>meī</b>, <i>of me</i></td> +<td><b>tuī</b>, <i>of you</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td><b>mihi</b>, <i>to</i> or <i>for me</i></td> +<td><b>tibi</b>, <i>to</i> or <i>for you</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td><b>mē</b>, <i>me</i></td> +<td><b>tē</b>, <i>you</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td><b>mē</b>, <i>with, from</i>, etc., <i>me</i></td> +<td><b>tē</b>, <i>with, from</i>, etc., +<i>you</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<th colspan = "3">Plural</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td><b>nōs</b>, <i>we</i></td> +<td><b>vōs</b>, <i>you</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td><b>nostrum</b> or <b>nostrī</b>, <i>of us</i></td> +<td><b>vestrum</b> or <b>vestrī</b>, <i>of you</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td><b>nōbīs</b>, <i>to</i> or <i>for us</i></td> +<td><b>vōbīs</b>, <i>to</i> or <i>for you</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td><b>nōs</b>, <i>us</i></td> +<td><b>vōs</b>, <i>you</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td class = "rightpad"><b>nōbīs</b>, <i>with, from</i>, etc., +<i>us</i></td> +<td><b>vōbīs</b>, <i>with, from</i>, etc., <i>you</i></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>1. The personal pronouns are not used in the nominative excepting for +emphasis or contrast.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec281"><b>281.</b></a> +<b>The Reflexive Pronouns.</b> 1. The personal pronouns <b>ego</b> and +<b>tū</b> may be used in the predicate as reflexives; as,</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td><b>videō mē</b>, <i>I see myself</i></td> +<td><b>vidēmus nōs</b>, <i>we see ourselves</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>vidēs tē</b>, <i>you see yourself</i></td> +<td><b>vidētis vōs</b>, <i>you see yourselves</i></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>2. The reflexive pronoun of the third person (<i>himself, herself, +itself, themselves</i>) has a special form, used only in these senses, +and declined alike in the singular and plural.</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "2">Singular and Plural</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td><b>suī</b></td> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td><b>sē</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td class = "rightpad"><b>sibi</b></td> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td><b>sē</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<table> +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead">Examples</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Puer sē videt</b>, <i>the boy sees himself</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Puella sē videt</b>, <i>the girl sees herself</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Animal sē videt</b>, <i>the animal sees itself</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Iī sē vident</b>, <i>they see themselves</i></p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> The form <b>sē</b> is sometimes doubled, <b>sēsē</b>, for +emphasis.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">125</span> +<a name = "page125"> </a> +3. Give the Latin for</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<td><i>I teach myself</i></td> +<td><i>We teach ourselves</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>You teach yourself</i></td> +<td><i>You teach yourselves</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>He teaches himself</i></td> +<td><i>They teach themselves</i></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec282"><b>282.</b></a> +The preposition <b>cum</b>, when used with the ablative of <b>ego</b>, +<b>tū</b>, or <b>suī</b>, is appended to the form, as, <b>mēcum</b>, +<i>with me</i>; <b>tēcum</b>, <i>with you</i>; <b>nōbīscum</b>, <i>with +us</i>; etc.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec283"><b>283.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec283vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 294.</p> + +<p>I. 1. Mea māter est cāra mihi et tua māter est cāra tibi. +2. Vestrae litterae erant grātae nōbis et nostrae litterae erant +grātae vōbīs. 3. Nūntius rēgis quī nōbīscum est nihil respondēbit. +4. Nūntiī pācem amīcitiamque sibi et suīs sociīs postulāvērunt. +5. Sī tū arma sūmēs, ego rēgnum occupābō. 6. Uter vestrum est +cīvis Rōmānus? Neuter nostrum. 7. Eō tempore multī supplicium +dedērunt quia rēgnum petierant. 8. Sūme supplicium, Caesar, dē +hostibus patriae ācribus. 9. Prīmā lūce aliī metū commōtī sēsē +fugae mandāvērunt; aliī autem magnā virtūte impetum exercitūs nostrī +sustinuērunt. 10. Soror rēgis, ubi dē adversō proeliō audīvit, sēsē +Pompēiīs interfēcit.</p> + +<p>II. 1. Whom do you teach? I teach myself. 2. The soldier wounded +himself with his sword. 3. The master praises us, but you he does +not praise. 4. Therefore he will inflict punishment on you, but we +shall not suffer punishment. 5. Who will march (i.e. make a march) +with me to Rome? 6. I will march with you to the gates of the city. +7. Who will show us<span class = "tag">1</span> the way? The gods +will show you<span class = "tag">1</span> the way.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. Not accusative.</div> + +<h5><span class = "smallcaps">Daed´alus and Ic´arus</span> +(<i>Concluded</i>)</h5> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec284"><b>284.</b></a> +Puer Īcarus ūnā<span class = "tag">2</span> stābat et mīrum patris opus +vidēbat. Postquam manus ultima<span class = "tag">3</span> ālīs imposita +est, Daedalus eās temptāvit et similis avī in aurās volāvit. Tum ālās +umerīs fīlī adligāvit et docuit eum volāre et dīxit, “Tē vetō, mī fīlī, +adpropinquāre aut sōlī aut marī. Sī fluctibus adpropinquāveris,<span +class = "tag">4</span> aqua ālīs tuīs nocēbit, et sī sōlī +adpropinquāveris,<span class = "tag">4</span> +<span class = "pagenum">126</span> +<a name = "page126"> </a> +ignis eās cremābit.” Tum pater et filius iter difficile incipiunt. Ālās +movent et aurae sēsē committunt. Sed stultus puer verbīs patris nōn +pāret. Sōlī adpropinquat. Ālae cremantur et Īcarus in mare dēcidit et +vitam āmittit. Daedalus autem sine ūllō perīculō trāns fluctūs ad +īnsulam Siciliam volāvit.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. Adverb, see vocabulary.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. <b>manus ultima</b>, <i>the finishing touch</i>. What +literally?</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +4. Future perfect. Translate by the present.</div> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_L"> +LESSON L</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">THE INTENSIVE PRONOUN <i>IPSE</i> AND THE +DEMONSTRATIVE <i>ĪDEM</i></h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec285"><b>285.</b></a> +<b>Ipse</b> means <i>-self</i> (<i>him-self, her-self</i>, etc.) or is +translated by <i>even</i> or <i>very</i>. It is used to emphasize a noun +or pronoun, expressed or understood, with which it agrees like an +adjective.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> <b>Ipse</b> must be carefully distinguished from the reflexive +<b>suī</b>. The latter is always used as a pronoun, while <b>ipse</b> is +regularly adjective. Compare</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Homō sē videt</b>, <i>the man sees himself</i> (reflexive)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Homō ipse perīculum videt</b>, <i>the man himself</i> (intensive) +<i>sees the danger</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Homō ipsum perīculum videt</b>, <i>the man sees the danger itself</i> +(intensive)</p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec286"><b>286.</b></a> +Except for the one form <b>ipse</b>, the intensive pronoun is declined +exactly like the nine irregular adjectives (cf. <a href = +"#sec108">§§ 108</a>, <a href = "#sec109">109</a>). Learn the +declension (<a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec481">§ 481</a>).</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec287"><b>287.</b></a> +The demonstrative <b>īdem</b>, meaning <i>the same</i>, is a compound of +<b>is</b>. It is declined as follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "3">Singular</th> +<th colspan = "3">Plural</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "smaller">MASC.</td> +<td class = "smaller">FEM.</td> +<td class = "smaller">NEUT.</td> +<td class = "smaller">MASC.</td> +<td class = "smaller">FEM.</td> +<td class = "smaller">NEUT.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "middle"><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td class = "middle"><b>īdem</b></td> +<td class = "middle"><b>e´adem</b></td> +<td class = "middle"><b>idem</b></td> +<td class = "middle group"><b>iī´dem</b><br> +<b>eī´dem</b></td> +<td class = "middle"><b>eae´dem</b></td> +<td class = "middle"><b>e´adem</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td><b>eius´dem</b></td> +<td><b>eius´dem</b></td> +<td class = "rightpad"><b>eius´dem</b></td> +<td><b>eōrun´dem</b></td> +<td><b>eārun´dem</b></td> +<td><b>eōrun´dem</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "middle"><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td class = "middle"><b>eī´dem</b></td> +<td class = "middle"><b>eī´dem</b></td> +<td class = "middle"><b>eī´dem</b></td> +<td class = "middle group"><b>iīs´dem</b><br> +<b>eīs´dem</b></td> +<td class = "middle group"><b>iīs´dem</b><br> +<b>eīs´dem</b></td> +<td class = "middle group"><b>iīs´dem</b><br> +<b>eīs´dem</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td><b>eun´dem</b></td> +<td><b>ean´dem</b></td> +<td><b>idem</b></td> +<td><b>eōs´dem</b></td> +<td><b>eās´dem</b></td> +<td><b>e´adem</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "middle"><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td class = "middle"><b>eī´dem</b></td> +<td class = "middle"><b>eī´dem</b></td> +<td class = "middle"><b>eī´dem</b></td> +<td class = "middle group"><b>iīs´dem</b><br> +<b>eīs´dem</b></td> +<td class = "middle group"><b>iīs´dem</b><br> +<b>eīs´dem</b></td> +<td class = "middle group"><b>iīs´dem</b><br> +<b>eīs´dem</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> From forms like <b>eundem</b> (<b>eum</b> + <b>-dem</b>), +<b>eōrundem</b> (<b>eōrum</b> + <b>-dem</b>), we learn the rule that +<b>m</b> before <b>d</b> is changed to <b>n</b>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> The forms <b>iīdem</b>, <b>iīsdem</b> are often spelled and +pronounced with one <b>ī</b>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">127</span> +<a name = "page127"> </a> +<a name = "sec288"><b>288.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec288vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 295.</p> + +<p>I. 1. Ego et tū<span class = "tag">1</span> in eādem urbe vīvimus. +2. Iter ipsum nōn timēmus sed ferās saevās quae in silvā dēnsā esse +dīcuntur. 3. Ōlim nōs ipsī idem iter fēcimus. 4. Eō tempore +multās ferās vīdimus. 5. Sed nōbīs nōn nocuērunt. 6. Caesar +ipse scūtum dē manibus mīlitis ēripuit et in ipsam aciem properāvit. +7. Itaque mīlitēs summā virtūte tēla in hostium corpora iēcērunt. +8. Rōmānī quoque gravia vulnera accēpērunt. 9. Dēnique hostēs +terga vertērunt et ommīs in partīs<span class = "tag">2</span> fūgērunt. +10. Eādem hōrā litterae Rōmam ab imperātōre ipsō missae sunt. +11. Eōdem mēnse captīvī quoque in Italiam missī sunt. 12. Sed +multī propter vulnera iter difficile trāns montīs facere recūsābant et +Genāvae esse dīcēbantur.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. Observe that in Latin we say <i>I and you</i>, not <i>you and +I</i>.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. Not <i>parts</i>, but <i>directions</i>.</div> + +<p>II. 1. At Pompeii there is a wonderful mountain. 2. When I was +in that place, I myself saw that mountain. 3. On the same day many +cities were destroyed by fire and stones from that very mountain. +4. You have not heard the true story of that calamity, have +you?<span class = "tag">3</span> 5. On that day the very sun could +not give light to men. 6. You yourself ought to tell (to) us that +story.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. Cf. <a href = "#sec210">§ 210</a>.</div> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec289"><b>289.</b></a> +<span class = "midcaps">How Horatius held the Bridge<span class = +"tag">4</span></span></p> + +<p>Tarquinius Superbus, septimus et ultimus rēx Rōmānōrum, ubi in +exsilium ab īrātīs Rōmānīs ēiectus est, ā Porsenā, rēge Etrūscōrum, +auxilium petiit. Mox Porsena magnīs cum cōpiīs Rōmam vēnit, et ipsa urbs +summō in perīculō erat. Omnibus in partibus exercitus Rōmānus victus +erat. Iam rēx montem Iāniculum<span class = "tag">5</span> occupāverat. +Numquam anteā Rōmānī tantō metū tenēbantur. Ex agrīs in urbem +properabānt et summō studiō urbem ipsam mūniēbant.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +4. The story of Horatius has been made familiar by Macaulay’s well-known +poem “Horatius” in his <i>Lays of Ancient Rome</i>. Read the poem in +connection with this selection.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +5. The Janiculum is a high hill across the Tiber from Rome.</div> + +<span class = "pagenum">128</span> +<a name = "page128"> </a> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_LI"> +LESSON LI</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS <i>HIC, ISTE, +ILLE</i></h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec290"><b>290.</b></a> +We have already learned the declension of the demonstrative pronoun +<b>is</b> and its use. (Cf. Lesson XVII.) That pronoun refers to persons +or things either far or near, and makes no definite reference to place +or time. If we wish to point out an object definitely in place or time, +we must use <b>hic</b>, <b>iste</b>, or <b>ille.</b> These +demonstratives, like <b>is</b>, are used both as pronouns and as +adjectives, and their relation to the speaker may be represented +graphically thus:</p> + +<p class = "illustration"> +<img src = "../images/chart128.png" width = "458" height = "57" +alt = "(see end of file for text diagram)"></p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> In dialogue <b>hic</b> refers to a person or thing near the +speaker; <b>iste</b>, to a person or thing near the person addressed; +<b>ille</b>, to a person or thing remote from both. These distinctions +are illustrated in the model sentences, <a href = +"#sec293">§ 293</a>, which should be carefully studied and +imitated.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec291"><b>291.</b></a> +<b>Hic</b> is declined as follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "3">Singular</th> +<th colspan = "3">Plural</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "smaller">MASC.</td> +<td class = "smaller">FEM.</td> +<td class = "smaller">NEUT.</td> +<td class = "smaller">MASC.</td> +<td class = "smaller">FEM.</td> +<td class = "smaller">NEUT.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td><b>hic</b></td> +<td><b>haec</b></td> +<td><b>hoc</b></td> +<td><b>hī</b></td> +<td><b>hae</b></td> +<td><b>haec</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td><b>huius</b></td> +<td><b>huius</b></td> +<td class = "rightpad"><b>huius</b></td> +<td><b>hōrum</b></td> +<td><b>hārum</b></td> +<td><b>hōrum</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td><b>huic</b></td> +<td><b>huic</b></td> +<td><b>huic</b></td> +<td><b>hīs</b></td> +<td><b>hīs</b></td> +<td><b>hīs</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td><b>hunc</b></td> +<td><b>hanc</b></td> +<td><b>hoc</b></td> +<td><b>hōs</b></td> +<td><b>hās</b></td> +<td><b>haec</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td><b>hōc</b></td> +<td><b>hāc</b></td> +<td><b>hōc</b></td> +<td><b>hīs</b></td> +<td><b>hīs</b></td> +<td><b>hīs</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> <b>Huius</b> is pronounced <i>ho͝o´yo͝os</i>, and <b>huic</b> +is pronounced <i>ho͝oic</i> (one syllable).</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec292"><b>292.</b></a> +The demonstrative pronouns <b>iste</b>, <b>ista</b>, <b>istud</b>, and +<b>ille</b>, <b>illa</b>, <b>illud</b>, except for the nominative and +accusative singular neuter forms <b>istud</b> and <b>illud</b>, are +declined exactly like <b>ipse</b>, <b>ipsa</b>, <b>ipsum.</b> (See <a +href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec481">§ 481</a>.)</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">129</span> +<a name = "page129"> </a> +<a name = "sec293"><b>293.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">MODEL SENTENCES</span></p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<i>Is this horse</i> (of mine) <i>strong?</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>Estne hic equus valīdus?</b> +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<i>That horse</i> (of yours) <i>is strong, but that one</i> (yonder) +<i>is weak</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>Iste equus est validus, sed ille est īnfīrmus</b> +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<i>Are these</i> (men by me) <i>your friends?</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>Suntne hī amīcī tuī?</b> +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<i>Those</i> (men by you) <i>are my friends, but those</i> (men yonder) +<i>are enemies</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>Istī sunt amīcī meī, sed illī sunt inimīcī</b> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec294"><b>294.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec294vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 295.</p> + +<p>I. <i>A German Chieftain addresses his Followers.</i> Ille fortis +Germānōrum dux suōs convocāvit et hōc modō animōs eōrum cōnfirmāvit. +“Vōs, quī in hīs fīnibus vīvitis, in hunc locum convocāvī<span class = +"tag">1</span> quia mēcum dēbētis istōs agrōs et istās domōs ab iniūriīs +Rōmānōrum liberāre. Hoc nōbīs nōn difficile erit, quod illī hostēs hās +silvās dēnsās, ferās saevās quārum vestīgia vident, montēs altōs timent. +Sī fortēs erimus, deī ipsī nōbīs viam salūtis dēmonstrābunt. Ille sōl, +istī oculī calamītātēs nostrās vīdērunt.<span class = "tag">1</span> +Itaque nōmen illīus reī pūblicae Rōmānae nōn sōlum nōbis, sed etiam +omnibus hominibus quī lībertātem amant, est invīsum. Ad arma vōs vocō. +Exercēte istam prīstinam virtūtem et vincētis.”</p> + +<p>II. 1. Does that bird (of yours)<span class = "tag">2</span> sing? +2. This bird (of mine)<span class = "tag">2</span> sings both<span +class = "tag">3</span> in summer and in winter and has a beautiful +voice. 3. Those birds (yonder)<span class = "tag">2</span> in the +country don´t sing in winter. 4. Snatch a spear from the hands of +that soldier (near you)<span class = "tag">2</span> and come home with +me. 5. With those very eyes (of yours)<span class = "tag">2</span> +you will see the tracks of the hateful enemy who burned my dwelling and +made an attack on my brother. 6. For (<b>propter</b>) these deeds +(<b>rēs</b>) we ought to inflict punishment on him without delay. +7. The enemies of the republic do not always suffer punishment.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. The perfect definite. (Cf. <a href = "#sec190">§ 190</a>.)</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. English words in parentheses are not to be translated. They are +inserted to show what demonstratives should be used. (Cf. <a href = +"#sec290">§ 290</a>.)</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. <i>both ... and</i>, <b>et ... et</b>.</div> + +<p class = "illustration"> +<span class = "pagenum">130</span> +<a name = "page130"> </a> +<img src = "../images/pic130.png" width = "439" height = "299" +alt = "Horatius at the bridge"><br> +<span class = "caption"> +HORATIUS PONTEM DEFENDIT</span></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec295"><b>295.</b></a> +<span class = "midcaps">How Horatius held the Bridge</span> +(<i>Continued</i>)</p> + +<p>Altera urbis pars mūrīs, altera flūmine satis mūnīrī vidēbātur. Sed +erat pōns in flūmine quī hostibus iter paene dedit. Tum Horātius Cocles, +fortis vir, magnā vōce dīxit, “Rescindite pontem, Rōmānī! Brevī tempore +Porsena in urbem cōpiās suās trādūcet.” Iam hostēs in ponte erant, sed +Horātius cum duōbus (cf. <a href = +"LatinBegin2.html#sec479">§ 479</a>) comitibus ad extrēmam pontis +partem properāvit, et hi sōli aciem hostium sustinuērunt. Tum vērō cīvēs +Rōmānī pontem ā tergō rescindere incipiunt, et hostēs frūstrā Horātium +superāre temptant.</p> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_LII"> +LESSON LII</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec296"><b>296.</b></a> +The indefinite pronouns are used to refer to <i>some person</i> or +<i>some thing</i>, without indicating which particular one is meant. The +pronouns <b>quis</b> and <b>quī</b>, which we have learned in their +interrogative and relative uses, may also be indefinite; and nearly all +the other indefinite pronouns are compounds of <b>quis</b> or <b>quī</b> +and declined almost like them. Review the declension of these words, <a +href = "#sec221">§§ 221</a>, <a href = "#sec227">227</a>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">131</span> +<a name = "page131"> </a> +<a name = "sec297"><b>297.</b></a> +Learn the declension and meaning of the following indefinites:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th>Masc.</th> +<th>Fem.</th> +<th>Neut.</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "center" colspan = "2"><b>quis</b></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>quid</b>, <i>some one, any one</i> (substantive) +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>quī</b></td> +<td><b>qua</b> or <b>quae</b></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>quod</b>, <i>some, any</i> (adjective), <a href = +"LatinBegin2.html#sec483">§ 483</a> +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "center" colspan = "2"> +<b>aliquis</b> +</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>aliquid</b>, <i>some one, any one</i> (substantive), <a href = +"LatinBegin2.html#sec487">§ 487</a> +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>aliquī</b></td> +<td><b>aliqua</b></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>aliquod</b>, <i>some, any</i> (adjective), <a href = +"LatinBegin2.html#sec487">§ 487</a> +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>quīdam</b></td> +<td><b>quaedam</b></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>quoddam, quiddam</b>, <i>a certain, a certain one</i>, <a href = +"LatinBegin2.html#sec485">§ 485</a> +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "center" colspan = "2"> +<b>quisquam</b> +</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>quicquam</b> or <b>quidquam</b> (no plural), <i>any one</i> (at all) +(substantive), <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec486">§ 486</a> +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "center" colspan = "2"> +<b>quisque</b> +</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>quidque</b>, <i>each one, every one</i> (substantive), <a href = +"LatinBegin2.html#sec484">§ 484</a> +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>quisque</b></td> +<td><b>quaeque</b></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>quodque</b>, <i>each, every</i> (adjective), <a href = +"LatinBegin2.html#sec484">§ 484</a> +</p></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<div class = "mynote"> +Transcriber’s Note:<br> +In the original text, the combined forms (masculine/feminine) were +printed in the “masculine” column.</div> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Note.</span> The meanings of the neuters, +<i>something</i>, etc., are easily inferred from the masculine and +feminine.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> In the masculine and neuter singular of the indefinites, +<b>quis-</b>forms and <b>quid-</b>forms are mostly used as substantives, +<b>quī-</b>forms and <b>quod-</b>forms as adjectives.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> The indefinites <b>quis</b> and <b>quī</b> never stand first +in a clause, and are rare excepting after <b>sī</b>, <b>nisi</b>, +<b>nē</b>, <b>num</b> (as, <b>sī quis</b>, <i>if any one</i>; <b>sī +quid</b>, <i>if anything</i>; <b>nisi quis</b>, <i>unless some one</i>). +Generally <b>aliquis</b> and <b>aliquī</b> are used instead.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>c.</i> The forms <b>qua</b> and <b>aliqua</b> are both feminine +nominative singular and neuter nominative plural of the indefinite +adjectives <b>quī</b> and <b>aliquī</b> respectively. How do these +differ from the corresponding forms of the relative <b>quī?</b></p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>d.</i> Observe that <b>quīdam</b> (<b>quī</b> + <b>-dam</b>) is +declined like <b>quī</b>, except that in the accusative singular and +genitive plural <b>m</b> of <b>quī</b> becomes <b>n</b> (cf. <a href = +"#sec287">§ 287. <i>a</i></a>): <b>quendam</b>, +<b>quandam</b>, <b>quōrundam</b>, <b>quārundam;</b> also that the neuter +has <b>quiddam</b> (substantive) and <b>quoddam</b> (adjective) in the +nominative and accusative singular. <b>Quīdam</b> is the least +indefinite of the indefinite pronouns, and implies that you could name +the person or thing referred to if you cared to do so.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>e.</i> <b>Quisquam</b> and <b>quisque</b> (substantive) are declined +like <b>quis.</b></p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>f.</i> <b>Quisquam</b>, <i>any one</i> (<b>quicquam</b> or +<b>quidquam</b>, <i>anything</i>), is always used substantively and +chiefly in negative sentences. The corresponding adjective <i>any</i> is +<b>ūllus, -a, -um</b> (<a href = "#sec108">§ 108</a>).</p> + +<p><span class = "pagenum">132</span> +<a name = "page132"> </a> +<a name = "sec298"><b>298.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec298vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 295.</p> + +<p>I. 1. Aliquis dē ponte in flūmen dēcidit sed sine ūllō perīculō +servātus est. 2. Est vērō in vītā cuiusque hominis aliqua bona +fortūna. 3. Nē mīlitum quidem<span class = "tag">1</span> quisquam +in castrīs mānsit. 4. Sī quem meae domī vidēs, iubē eum discēdere. +5. Sī quis pontem tenet, nē tantus quidem exercitus capere urbem +potest. 6. Urbs nōn satis mūnīta erat et merīdiē rēx quīdam paene +cōpiās suās trāns pontem trādūxerat. 7. Dēnique mīles quīdam +armātus in fluctūs dēsiluit et incolumis ad alteram rīpam oculōs vertit. +8. Quisque illī fortī mīlitī aliquid dare dēbet. 9. Tanta vērō +virtūs Rōmānus semper placuit. 10. Ōlim Corinthus erat urbs satis +magna et paene par Rōmae ipsī; nunc vērō moenia dēcidērunt et pauca +vestīgia urbis illīus reperīrī possunt. 11. Quisque lībertātem +amat, et aliquibus vērō nōmen rēgis est invīsum.</p> + +<p>II. 1. If you see a certain Cornelius at Corinth, send him to me. +2. Almost all the soldiers who fell down into the waves were +unharmed. 3. Not even at Pompeii did I see so great a fire. +4. I myself was eager to tell something to some one. 5. Each +one was praising his own work. 6. Did you see some one in the +country? I did not see any one. 7. Unless some one will remain on +the bridge with Horatius, the commonwealth will be in the greatest +danger.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. Observe that <b>quīdam</b> and <b>quidem</b> are different +words.</div> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec299"><b>299.</b></a> +<span class = "midcaps">How Horatius held the Bridge</span> +(<i>Concluded</i>)</p> + +<p>Mox, ubi parva pars pontis mānsit, Horātius iussit comitēs discēdere +et sōlus mīrā cōnstantiā impetum illius tōtius exercitūs sustinēbat. +Dēnique magnō fragōre pōns in flūmen dēcīdit. Tum vērō Horātius tergum +vertit et armātus in aquās dēsiluit. In eum hostēs multa tēla iēcērunt; +incolumis autem per fiuctūs ad alteram rīpam trānāvit. Eī propter tantās +rēs gestās populus Rōmānus nōn sōlum alia magna praemia dedit sed etiam +statuam Horāti in locō pūblicō posuit.</p> + + +<hr class = "tiny"> + +<h5 class = "boldf"> +<a class = "page" href = "LatinBegin2.html#review_VI"> +Sixth Review, Lessons XLV-LII, §§ 521-523</a></h5> + +<hr class = "tiny"> + + +<span class = "pagenum">133</span> +<a name = "page133"> </a> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_LIII"> +LESSON LIII</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">REGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec300"><b>300.</b></a> +The quality denoted by an adjective may exist in either a higher or a +lower degree, and this is expressed by a form of inflection called +comparison. The mere presence of the quality is expressed by the +positive degree, its presence in a higher or lower degree by the +comparative, and in the highest or lowest of all by the superlative. In +English the usual way of comparing an adjective is by using the suffix +<i>-er</i> for the comparative and <i>-est</i> for the superlative; as, +positive <i>high</i>, comparative <i>higher</i>, superlative +<i>highest</i>. Less frequently we use the adverbs <i>more</i> and +<i>most</i>; as, positive <i>beautiful</i>, comparative <i>more +beautiful</i>, superlative <i>most beautiful.</i></p> + +<p>In Latin, as in English, adjectives are compared by adding suffixes +or by using adverbs.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec301"><b>301.</b></a> +Adjectives are compared by using suffixes as follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th>Positive</th> +<th>Comparative</th> +<th>Superlative</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>clārus, -a, -um</b> (<i>bright</i>)<br> +(<span class = "smallcaps">Base</span> <b>clār-</b>) +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>clārior, clārīus</b> (<i>brighter</i>) +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>clārissimus, -a, -um</b> (<i>brightest</i>) +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>brevis, breve</b> (<i>short</i>)<br> +(<span class = "smallcaps">Base</span> <b>brev-</b>) +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>brevior, brevius</b> (<i>shorter</i>) +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>brevissimus, -a, -um</b> (<i>shortest</i>) +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>vēlōx</b> (<i>swift</i>)<br> +(<span class = "smallcaps">Base</span> <b>veloc-</b>) +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>vēlōcior, vēlōcius</b> (<i>swifter</i>) +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>vēlōcissimus, -a, -um</b> (<i>swiftest</i>) +</p></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> The comparative is formed from the base of the positive by +adding <b>-ior</b> masc. and fem., and <b>-ius</b> neut.; the +superlative by adding <b>-issimus, -issima, -issimum</b>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec302"><b>302.</b></a> +Less frequently adjectives are compared by using the adverbs +<b>magis</b>, <i>more</i>; <b>maximē</b>, <i>most</i>; as, +<b>idōneus</b>, <i>suitable</i>; <b>magis idōneus</b>, <i>more +suitable</i>; <b>maximē idōneus</b>, <i>most suitable.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec303"><b>303.</b></a> +<b>Declension of the Comparative.</b> Adjectives of the comparative +degree are declined as follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "2">Singular</th> +<th colspan = "2">Plural</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "smaller">MASC. AND FEM.</td> +<td class = "smaller">NEUT.</td> +<td class = "smaller">MASC. AND FEM.</td> +<td class = "smaller">NEUT.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i>.</td> +<td><b>clārior</b></td> +<td><b>clārīus</b></td> +<td><b>clārīōrēs</b></td> +<td><b>clāriōra</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td><b>clāriōris</b></td> +<td class = "rightpad"><b>clāriōris</b></td> +<td><b>clāriōrum</b></td> +<td><b>clāriōrum</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td><b>clāriōrī</b></td> +<td><b>clāriōrī</b></td> +<td><b>clāriōribus</b></td> +<td><b>clāriōribus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td><b>clāriōrem</b></td> +<td><b>clārius</b></td> +<td><b>clāriōrēs</b></td> +<td><b>clāriōra</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td><b>clāriōre</b></td> +<td><b>clāriōre</b></td> +<td><b>clāriōribus</b></td> +<td><b>clāriōribus</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "pagenum">134</span> +<a name = "page134"> </a> +<i>a.</i> Observe that the endings are those of the consonant stems of +the third declension.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> Compare <b>longus</b>, <i>long</i>; <b>fortis</b>, +<i>brave</i>; <b>recēns</b> (base, <b>recent-</b>), <i>recent</i>; and +decline the comparative of each.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec304"><b>304.</b></a> +Adjectives in <b>-er</b> form the comparative regularly, but the +superlative is formed by adding <b>-rimus, -a, -um</b> to the nominative +masculine of the positive; as,</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th>Positive</th> +<th>Comparative</th> +<th>Superlative</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>ācer, ācris, ācre</b><br> +(Base <b>acr-</b>) +</p></td> +<td><b>ācrior, ācrius</b></td> +<td><b>ācerrimus, -a, -um</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>pulcher, pulchra, pulchrum</b><br> +(Base <b>pulchr-</b>) +</p></td> +<td><b>pulchrior, pulchrius</b></td> +<td><b>pulcherrimus, -a, -um</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>līber, lībera, līberum</b><br> +(Base <b>līber-</b>) +</p></td> +<td><b>līberior, līberius</b></td> +<td><b>līberrimus, -a, -um</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> In a similar manner compare <b>miser</b>, <b>aeger</b>, +<b>crēber</b>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec305"><b>305.</b></a> +The comparative is often translated by <i>quite, too</i>, or +<i>somewhat</i>, and the superlative by <i>very</i>; as, <b>altior</b>, +<i>quite</i> (<i>too, somewhat</i>) <i>high</i>; <b>altissimus</b>, +<i>very high.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec306"><b>306.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec306vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 296.</p> + +<p>I. 1. Quid explōrātōrēs quaerēbant? Explōrātōrēs tempus +opportfūissimum itinerī quaerēbant. 2. Mediā in silvā ignīs quam +crēberrimōs fēcimus, quod ferās tam audācis numquam anteā vīderāmus. +3. Antīquīs temporibus Germānī erant fortiōrēs quam Gallī. +4. Caesar erat clārior quam inimīcī<span class = "tag">1</span> quī +eum necāvērunt. 5. Quisque scūtum ingēns et pīlum longius gerēbat. +6. Apud barbarōs Germānī erant audācissimī et fortissimī. +7. Mēns hominum est celerior quam corpus. 8. Virī aliquārum +terrārum sunt miserrimī. 9. Corpora Germānōrum erant ingentiōra +quam Rōmānōrum. 10. Ācerrimī Gallōrum prīncipēs sine ūllā morā +trāns flūmen quoddam equōs vēlōcissimōs trādūxērunt. 11. Aestāte +diēs sunt longiōrēs quam hieme. 12. Imperātor quīdam ab +explōrātōribus dē recentī adventū nāvium longārum quaesīvit.</p> + +<p>II. 1. Of all birds the eagle is the swiftest. 2. Certain +animals are swifter than the swiftest horse. 3. The Roman name was +most +<span class = "pagenum">135</span> +<a name = "page135"> </a> +hateful to the enemies of the commonwealth. 4. The Romans always +inflicted the severest<span class = "tag">2</span> punishment on +faithless allies. 5. I was quite ill, and so I hastened from the +city to the country. 6. Marcus had some friends dearer than +Cæsar.<span class = "tag">3</span> 7. Did you not seek a more +recent report concerning the battle? 8. Not even after a victory so +opportune did he seek the general’s friendship.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. Why is this word used instead of <b>hostēs</b>?</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. Use the superlative of <b>gravis</b>.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. Accusative. In a comparison the noun after <b>quam</b> is in the same +case as the one before it.</div> + +<p class = "note"> +N.B. Beginning at this point, the +<a href = "LatinBegin2.html#reading_LIII">selections for reading</a> +will be found near the end of the volume. (See <a href = +"LatinBegin2.html#page197">p. 197</a>.)</p> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_LIV"> +LESSON LIV</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES · THE ABLATIVE +WITH COMPARATIVES WITHOUT <i>QUAM</i></h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec307"><b>307.</b></a> +The following six adjectives in <b>-lis</b> form the comparative +regularly; but the superlative is formed by adding <b>-limus</b> to the +base of the positive. Learn the meanings and comparison.</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th>Positive</th> +<th>Comparative</th> +<th>Superlative</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>facilis, -e</b>, <i>easy</i></td> +<td><b>facilior, -ius</b></td> +<td><b>facillimus, -a, -um</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>difficilis, -e</b>, <i>hard</i></td> +<td><b>difficilior, -ius</b></td> +<td><b>difficillimus, -a, -um</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>similis, -e</b>, <i>like</i></td> +<td><b>similior, -ius</b></td> +<td><b>simillimus, -a, -um</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>dissimilis, -e</b>, <i>unlike</i></td> +<td><b>dissimilior, -ius</b></td> +<td><b>dissimillimus, -a, -um</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>gracilis, -e</b>, <i>slender</i></td> +<td><b>gracilior, -ius</b></td> +<td><b>gracillimus, -a, -um</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>humilis, -e</b>, <i>low</i></td> +<td><b>humilior, -ius</b></td> +<td><b>humillimus, -a, -um</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec308"><b>308.</b></a> +From the knowledge gained in the preceding lesson we should translate +the sentence <i>Nothing is brighter than the sun</i></p> + +<p class = "center"> +<b>Nihil est clārius quam sōl</b> +</p> + +<p>But the Romans, especially in negative sentences, often expressed the +comparison in this way,</p> + +<p class = "center"> +<b>Nihil est clārius sōle</b> +</p> + +<p>which, literally translated, is <i>Nothing is brighter away from the +sun</i>; that is, <i>starting from the sun as a standard, nothing is +brighter</i>. This relation is expressed by the separative ablative +<b>sōle</b>. Hence the rule</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">136</span> +<a name = "page136"> </a> +<a name = "sec309"><b>309.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Ablative with +Comparatives.</b> <i>The comparative degree, if <b>quam</b> is omitted, +is followed by the separative ablative.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec310"><b>310.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec310vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 296.</p> + +<p>I. 1. Nēmō mīlitēs alacriōrēs Rōmānīs vīdit. 2. Statim imperātor +iussit nūntiōs quam celerrimōs litterās Rōmam portāre. 3. Multa +flūmina sunt lēniōra Rhēnō. 4. Apud Rōmanōs quis erat clārior +Caesare? 5. Nihil pulchrius urbe Rōmā vīdī. 6. Subitō +multitūdo audacissima magnō clamōre proelium ācrius commīsit. +7. Num est equus tuus tardus? Nōn vērō tardus, sed celerior aquilā. +8. Ubi Romae fuī, nēmō erat mihi amicior Sextō. 9. Quaedam +mulierēs cibum mīlitibus dare cupīvērunt. 10. Rēx vetuit cīvis ex +urbe noctū discēdere. 11. Ille puer est gracilior hāc muliere. +12. Explōrātor duās (<i>two</i>) viās, alteram facilem, alteram +difficiliōrem, dēmōnstrāvit.</p> + +<p>II. 1. What city have you seen more beautiful than Rome? 2. The +Gauls were not more eager than the Germans. 3. The eagle is not +slower than the horse. 4. The spirited woman did not fear to make +the journey by night. 5. The mind of the multitude was quite gentle +and friendly. 6. But the king’s mind was very different. +7. The king was not like (similar to) his noble father. +8. These hills are lower than the huge mountains of our +territory.</p> + +<div class = "plainnote"><a href = "LatinBegin2.html#reading_LIV"> +Reading Selection</a></div> + +<p class = "illustration"> +<img src = "../images/pic136.png" width = "334" height = "265" +alt = "Roman weapons and armor"><br> +<span class = "caption"> +ARMA ROMANA</span></p> + + +<span class = "pagenum">137</span> +<a name = "page137"> </a> + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_LV"> +LESSON LV</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES +(<i>Continued</i>)</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec311"><b>311.</b></a> +Some adjectives in English have irregular comparison, as <i>good, +better, best</i>; <i>many, more, most.</i> So Latin comparison presents +some irregularities. Among the adjectives that are compared irregularly +are</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th>Positive</th> +<th>Comparative</th> +<th>Superlative</th> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td><b>bonus, -a, -um</b>, <i>good</i></td> +<td><b>melior, melius</b></td> +<td><b>optimus, -a, -um</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>magnus, -a, -um</b>, <i>great</i></td> +<td><b>maior, maius</b></td> +<td><b>maximus, -a, -um</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>malus, -a, -um</b>, <i>bad</i></td> +<td><b>peior, peius</b></td> +<td><b>pessimus, -a, -um</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>multus, -a, -um</b>, <i>much</i></td> +<td>——, <b>plūs</b></td> +<td><b>plūrimus, -a, -um</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>multī, -ae, -a</b>, <i>many</i></td> +<td><b>plūrēs, plūra</b></td> +<td><b>plūrimī, -ae, -a</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>parvus, -a, -um</b>, <i>small</i></td> +<td><b>minor, minus</b></td> +<td><b>minimus, -a, -um</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec312"><b>312.</b></a> +The following four adjectives have two superlatives. Unusual forms are +placed in parentheses.</p> + +<table class = "lines"> +<tr> +<td class = "middle"><p class = "hanging"> +<b>exterus, -a, -um</b>, <i>outward</i> +</p></td> +<td class = "middle"><p class = "hanging"> +(<b>exterior, -ius</b>, <i>outer</i>) +</p></td> +<td class = "middle left rightline"> +<b>extrēmus, -a, -um</b><br> +(<b>extimus, -a, -um</b>) +</td> +<td class = "middle"><p class = "hanging"> +<i>outermost, last</i> +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "middle"><p class = "hanging"> +<b>īnferus, -a, -um</b>, <i>low</i> +</p></td> +<td class = "middle"><p class = "hanging"> +<b>īnferior, -ius</b>, <i>lower</i> +</p></td> +<td class = "middle left rightline"> +<b>īnfimus, -a, -um</b><br> +<b>īmus, -a, -um</b> +</td> +<td class = "middle"> +<i>lowest</i> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "middle"><p class = "hanging"> +<b>posterus, -a, -um</b>, <i>next</i> +</p></td> +<td class = "middle"><p class = "hanging"> +(<b>posterior, -ius</b>, <i>later</i>) +</p></td> +<td class = "middle left rightline"> +<b>postrēmus, -a, -um</b><br> +(<b>postumus, -a, -um</b>) +</td> +<td class = "middle"> +<i>last</i> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "middle"><p class = "hanging"> +<b>superus, -a, -um</b>, <i>above</i> +</p></td> +<td class = "middle"><p class = "hanging"> +<b>superior, -ius</b>, <i>higher</i> +</p></td> +<td class = "middle left rightline"> +<b>suprēmus, -a, -um</b><br> +<b>summus, -a, -um</b> +</td> +<td class = "middle"> +<i>highest</i> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec313"><b>313.</b></a> +<b>Plūs</b>, <i>more</i> (plural <i>more, many, several</i>), is +declined as follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "2">Singular</th> +<th colspan = "2">Plural</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "smaller">MASC. AND FEM.</td> +<td class = "smaller">NEUT.</td> +<td class = "smaller">MASC. AND FEM.</td> +<td class = "smaller">NEUT.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>——</td> +<td>plūs</td> +<td>plūr<b>ēs</b></td> +<td>plūr<b>a</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>——</td> +<td class = "rightpad">plūr<b>is</b></td> +<td>plūr<b>ium</b></td> +<td>plūr<b>ium</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>——</td> +<td>——</td> +<td>plūr<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>plūr<b>ibus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>——</td> +<td>plūs</td> +<td>plūr<b>īs, -ēs</b></td> +<td>plūr<b>a</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>——</td> +<td>plūr<b>e</b></td> +<td>plūr<b>ibus</b></td> +<td>plūr<b>ibus</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> In the singular <b>plūs</b> is used only as a neuter +substantive.</p> + +<p><span class = "pagenum">138</span> +<a name = "page138"> </a> +<a name = "sec314"><b>314.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec314vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 296.</p> + +<p>I. 1. Reliquī hostēs, quī ā dextrō cornū proelium commīserant, dē +superiōre locō fūgērunt et sēsē in silvam maximam recēpērunt. 2. In +extrēmā parte silvae castra hostium posita erant. 3. Plūrimī +captīvī ab equitibus ad Caesarem ductī sunt. 4. Caesar vērō iussit +eōs in servitūtem trādī. 5. Posterō diē magna multitūdō mulierum ab +Rōmānīs in valle īmā reperta est. 6. Hae mulierēs maximē +perterritae adventū Caesaris sēsē occīdere studēbant. 7. Eae quoque +plūrīs fābulās dē exercitūs Rōmānī sceleribus audīverant. 8. Fāma +illōrum mīlitum optima nōn erat. 9. In barbarōrum aedificiīs maior +cōpia frūmentī reperta est. 10. Nēmō crēbrīs proeliīs contendere +sine aliquō perīculō potest.</p> + +<p>II. 1. The remaining women fled from their dwellings and hid +themselves. 2. They were terrified and did not wish to be captured +and given over into slavery. 3. Nothing can be worse than slavery. +4. Slavery is worse than death. 5. In the Roman empire a great +many were killed because they refused to be slaves. 6. To surrender +the fatherland is the worst crime.</p> + +<div class = "plainnote"><a href = "LatinBegin2.html#reading_LV"> +Reading Selection</a></div> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_LVI"> +LESSON LVI</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES +(<i>Concluded</i>) · ABLATIVE OF THE MEASURE OF DIFFERENCE</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec315"><b>315.</b></a> +The following adjectives are irregular in the formation of the +superlative and have no positive. Forms rarely used are in +parentheses.</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th>Comparative</th> +<th>Superlative</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>citerior</b>, <i>hither</i></td> +<td>(<b>citimus</b>, <i>hithermost</i>)</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>interior</b>, <i>inner</i></td> +<td>(<b>intimus</b>, <i>inmost</i>)</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>prior</b>, <i>former</i></td> +<td><b>prīmus</b>, <i>first</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>propior</b>, <i>nearer</i></td> +<td><b>proximus</b>, <i>next, nearest</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "rightpad"><b>ulterior</b>, <i>further</i></td> +<td><b>ultimus</b>, <i>furthest</i></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec316"><b>316.</b></a> +In the sentence <i>Galba is a head taller than Sextus</i>, the phrase +<i>a head taller</i> expresses the <b>measure of difference</b> in +height between +<span class = "pagenum">139</span> +<a name = "page139"> </a> +Galba and Sextus. The Latin form of expression would be <i>Galba is +taller than Sextus <b>by a head</b></i>. This is clearly an ablative +relation, and the construction is called the <b>ablative of the measure +of difference</b>.</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead"> +Examples +</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Galba est altior capite quam Sextus</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>Galba is a head taller</i> (taller by a head) <i>than Sextus</i>.</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Illud iter ad Italiam est multō brevius</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>That route to Italy is much shorter</i> (shorter by much)</p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec317"><b>317.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Ablative of the Measure of +Difference.</b> <i>With comparatives and words implying comparison the +ablative is used to denote the measure of difference.</i></p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Especially common in this construction are the neuter +ablatives</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<td> +<b>eō</b>, <i>by this, by that</i><br> +<b>hōc</b>, <i>by this</i><br> +<b>multō</b>, <i>by much</i><br> +<b>nihilō</b>,<span class = "tag">1</span> <i>by nothing</i><br> +<b>paulō</b>, <i>by a little</i> +</td> +</tr></table> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. <b>nihil</b> was originally <b>nihilum</b> and declined like +<b>pīlum</b>. There is no plural.</div> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec318"><b>318.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec318vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 297.</p> + +<p>I. 1. Barbarī proelium committere statuērunt eō magis quod Rōmānī +īnfīrmī esse vidēbantur. 2. Meum cōnsilium est multō melius quam +tuum quia multō facilius est. 3. Haec via est multō lātior quam +illa. 4. Barbarī erant nihilō tardiōrēs quam Rōmānī. 5. Tuus +equus est paulō celerior quam meus. 6. Iī quī paulō fortiōrēs erant +prohibuērunt reliquōs aditum relinquere. 7. Inter illās cīvitātēs +Germānia mīlitēs habet optimōs. 8. Propior via quae per hanc vallem +dūcit est inter portum et lacum. 9. Servī, quī agrōs citeriōrēs +incolēbant, priōrēs dominōs relinquere nōn cupīvērunt, quod eōs amābant. +10. Ultimae Germāniae partēs numquam in fidem Rōmānōrum vēnērunt. +11. Nam trāns Rhēnum aditus erat multō difficilior exercituī +Rōmānō.</p> + +<p>II. 1. Another way much more difficult (more difficult by much) was +left through hither Gaul. 2. In ancient times no state was stronger +than the Roman empire. 3. The states of further Gaul did not wish +to give hostages to Cæsar. 4. Slavery is no better (better by +nothing) than death. 5. The best citizens are not loved by the +worst. 6. The active enemy immediately withdrew into the nearest +forest, for they were terrified by Cæsar’s recent victories.</p> + +<div class = "plainnote"><a href = "LatinBegin2.html#reading_LVI"> +Reading Selection</a></div> + + +<span class = "pagenum">140</span> +<a name = "page140"> </a> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_LVII"> +LESSON LVII</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">FORMATION AND COMPARISON OF ADVERBS</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec319"><b>319.</b></a> +Adverbs are generally derived from adjectives, as in English (e.g. adj. +<i>sweet</i>, adv. <i>sweetly</i>). Like adjectives, they can be +compared; but they have no declension.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec320"><b>320.</b></a> +Adverbs derived from adjectives of the first and second declensions are +formed and compared as follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th>Positive</th> +<th>Comparative</th> +<th>Superlative</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Adj.</i><br> +<i>Adv.</i></td> +<td><b>cārus</b>, <i>dear</i><br> +<b>cārē</b>, <i>dearly</i></td> +<td><b>cārior</b><br> +<b>cārius</b></td> +<td><b>cārissimus</b><br> +<b>cārissimē</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Adj.</i><br> +<i>Adv.</i></td> +<td><b>pulcher</b>, <i>beautiful</i><br> +<b>pulchrē</b>, <i>beautifully</i></td> +<td><b>pulchrior</b><br> +<b>pulchrius</b></td> +<td><b>pulcherrimus</b><br> +<b>pulcherrimē</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Adj.</i><br> +<i>Adv.</i></td> +<td><b>līber</b>, <i>free</i><br> +<b>līberē</b>, <i>freely</i></td> +<td><b>līberior</b><br> +<b>līberius</b></td> +<td><b>līberrimus</b><br> +<b>līberrimē</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> The positive of the adverb is formed by adding <b>-ē</b> to +the base of the positive of the adjective. The superlative of the adverb +is formed from the superlative of the adjective in the same way.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> The comparative of any adverb is the neuter accusative +singular of the comparative of the adjective.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec321"><b>321.</b></a> +Adverbs derived from adjectives of the third declension are formed like +those described above in the comparative and superlative. The positive +is usually formed by adding <b>-iter</b> to the base of adjectives of +three endings or of two endings, and <b>-ter</b> to the base of those of +one ending;<span class = "tag">1</span> as,</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th>Positive</th> +<th>Comparative</th> +<th>Superlative</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Adj.</i><br> +<i>Adv.</i></td> +<td><b>fortis</b>, <i>brave</i><br> +<b>fortiter</b>, <i>bravely</i></td> +<td><b>fortior</b><br> +<b>fortius</b></td> +<td><b>fortissimus</b><br> +<b>fortissimē</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Adj.</i><br> +<i>Adv.</i></td> +<td><b>audāx</b>, <i>bold</i><br> +<b>audācter</b>, <i>boldly</i></td> +<td><b>audācior</b><br> +<b>audācius</b></td> +<td><b>audācissimus</b><br> +<b>audācissimē</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. This is a good working rule, though there are some exceptions to +it.</div> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">141</span> +<a name = "page141"> </a> +<a name = "sec322"><b>322.</b></a> +<b>Case Forms as Adverbs.</b> As we learned above, the neuter accusative +of comparatives is used adverbially. So in the positive or superlative +some adjectives, instead of following the usual formation, use the +accusative or the ablative singular neuter adverbially; as,</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td> +<i>Adj.</i><br> +<i>Adv.</i> +</td> +<td> +<b>facilis</b>, <i>easy</i><br> +<b>facile</b> (acc.), <i>easily</i> +</td> +<td> +<b>prīmus</b>, <i>first</i><br> +<b>prīmum</b> (acc.), <i>first</i><br> +<b>prīmō</b> (abl.), <i>at first</i> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +<i>Adj.</i><br> +<i>Adv.</i> +</td> +<td> +<b>multus</b>, <i>many</i><br> +<b>multum</b> (acc.), <i>much</i><br> +<b>multō</b> (abl.), <i>by much</i> +</td> +<td> +<b>plūrimus</b>, <i>most</i><br> +<b>plūrimum</b> (acc.), <i>most</i> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec323"><b>323.</b></a> +Learn the following irregular comparisons:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td><b>bene</b>, <i>well</i></td> +<td><b>melius</b>, <i>better</i></td> +<td><b>optimē</b>, <i>best</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>diū</b>, <i>long</i> (time)</td> +<td><b>diūtius</b>, <i>longer</i></td> +<td><b>diūtissimē</b>, <i>longest</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>magnopere</b>, <i>greatly</i></td> +<td><b>magis</b>, <i>more</i></td> +<td><b>maximē</b>, <i>most</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>parum</b>, <i>little</i></td> +<td><b>minus</b>, <i>less</i></td> +<td><b>minimē</b>, <i>least</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>prope</b>, <i>nearly, near</i></td> +<td><b>propius</b>, <i>nearer</i></td> +<td><b>proximē</b>, <i>nearest</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>saepe</b>, <i>often</i></td> +<td><b>saepius</b>, <i>oftener</i></td> +<td><b>saepissimē</b>, <i>oftenest</i></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec324"><b>324.</b></a> +Form adverbs from the following adjectives, using the regular rules, and +compare them: <b>laetus</b>, <b>superbus</b>, <b>molestus</b>, +<b>amīcus</b>, <b>ācer</b>, <b>brevis</b>, <b>gravis</b>, +<b>recēns.</b></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec325"><b>325.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Adverbs.</b> <i>Adverbs modify +verbs, adjectives, and other adverbs.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec326"><b>326.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec326vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 297.</p> + +<p>I. 1. Nūlla rēs melius gesta est quam proelium illud<span class = +"tag">2</span> ubi Marius multō minōre exercitū multō maiōrēs cōpiās +Germānōrum in fugam dedit. 2. Audācter in Rōmānōrum cohortīs hostēs +impetūs fēcērunt 3. Marius autem omnēs hōs fortissimē sustinuit. +4. Barbarī nihilō fortiōrēs erant quam Rōmānī. 5. Prīmō +barbarī esse superiōrēs vidēbantur, tum Rōmānī ācrius contendērunt. +6. Dēnique, ubi iam diūtissimē paene aequō proeliō pugnātum est, +barbarī fugam petiērunt. 7. Quaedam Germānōrum gentēs, simul atque +rūmōrem illīus calamitātis audīvērunt, sēsē in ultimīs regiōnibus fīnium +suōrum abdidērunt. +<span class = "pagenum">142</span> +<a name = "page142"> </a> +8. Rōmānī saepius quam hostēs vīcērunt, quod meliōra arma habēbant. +9. Inter omnīs gentīs Rōmānī plūrimum valēbant. 10. Hae +cohortēs simul atque in aequiōrem regiōnem sē recēpērunt, castra sine +ūllā difficultāte posuērunt.</p> + +<p>II. 1. Some nations are easily overcome by their enemies. +2. Germany is much larger than Gaul. 3. Were not the Romans +the most powerful among the tribes of Italy? 4. On account of (his) +wounds the soldier dragged his body from the ditch with the greatest +difficulty. 5. He was able neither to run nor to fight. 6. Who +saved him? A certain horseman boldly undertook the matter. 7. The +rumors concerning the soldier’s death were not true.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. <b>ille</b> standing after its noun means <i>that well-known, that +famous</i>.</div> + +<div class = "plainnote"><a href = "LatinBegin2.html#reading_LVII"> +Reading Selection</a></div> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_LVIII"> +LESSON LVIII</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">NUMERALS · THE PARTITIVE GENITIVE</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec327"><b>327.</b></a> +The Latin numeral adjectives may be classified as follows:</p> + +<p>1. <b>Cardinal Numerals</b>, answering the question <i>how many?</i> +as, <b>ūnus</b>, <i>one</i>; <b>duo</b>, <i>two</i>; etc.</p> + +<p>2. <b>Ordinal Numerals</b>, derived in most cases from the cardinals +and answering the question <i>in what order?</i> as, <b>prīmus</b>, +<i>first</i>; <b>secundus</b>, <i>second</i>; etc.</p> + +<p>3. <b>Distributive Numerals</b>, answering the question <i>how many +at a time?</i> as, <b>singulī</b>, <i>one at a time</i>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec328"><b>328.</b></a> +<b>The Cardinal Numerals.</b> The first twenty of the cardinals are as +follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td>1, <b>ūnus</b></td> +<td class = "number close">6,</td> +<td><b>sex</b></td> +<td>11, <b>ūndecim</b></td> +<td>16, <b>sēdecim</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2, <b>duo</b></td> +<td class = "number close">7,</td> +<td><b>septem</b></td> +<td>12, <b>duodecim</b></td> +<td>17, <b>septendecim</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3, <b>trēs</b></td> +<td class = "number close">8,</td> +<td><b>octō</b></td> +<td>13, <b>tredecim</b></td> +<td>18, <b>duodēvīgintī</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "rightpad">4, <b>quattuor</b></td> +<td class = "number close">9,</td> +<td class = "rightpad"><b>novem</b></td> +<td class = "rightpad">14, <b>quattuordecim</b></td> +<td>19, <b>ūndēvīgintī</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>5, <b>quīnque</b></td> +<td class = "number close">10,</td> +<td><b>decem</b></td> +<td>15, <b>quīndecim</b></td> +<td>20, <b>vīgintī</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Learn also <b>centum</b> = 100, <b>ducentī</b> = 200, +<b>mīlle</b> = 1000.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec329"><b>329.</b></a> +<b>Declension of the Cardinals.</b> Of the cardinals only <b>ūnus</b>, +<b>duo</b>, <b>trēs</b>, the hundreds above one hundred, and +<b>mīlle</b> used as a noun, are declinable.</p> + +<span class = "pagenum">143</span> +<a name = "page143"> </a> +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> <b>ūnus</b> is one of the nine irregular adjectives, and is +declined like <b>nūllus</b> (cf. <a href = "#sec109">§§ 109</a>, <a +href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec470">470</a>). The plural of <b>ūnus</b> is +used to agree with a plural noun of a singular meaning, as, <b>ūna +castra</b>, <i>one camp</i>; and with other nouns in the sense of +<i>only</i>, as, <b>Gallī ūnī</b>, <i>only the Gauls</i>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> Learn the declension of <b>duo</b>, <i>two</i>; <b>trēs</b>, +<i>three</i>; and <b>mīlle</b>, <i>a thousand</i>. (<a href = +"LatinBegin2.html#sec479">§ 479</a>.)</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>c.</i> The hundreds above one hundred are declined like the plural of +<b>bonus</b>; as,</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<td> +ducent<b>ī, -ae, -a</b><br> +ducent<b>ōrum, -ārum, -ōrum</b><br> +etc. etc. etc. +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec330"><b>330.</b></a> +We have already become familiar with sentences like the following:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Omnium avium aquila est vēlōcissima</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>Of all birds the eagle is the swiftest</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Hoc ōrāculum erat omnium clārissimum</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>This oracle was the most famous of all</i> +</p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>In such sentences the genitive denotes the whole, and the word it +modifies denotes a part of that whole. Such a genitive, denoting the +whole of which a part is taken, is called a <b>partitive +genitive</b>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec331"><b>331.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Partitive Genitive.</b> +<i>Words denoting a part are often used with the genitive of the whole, +known as the <b>partitive genitive</b>.</i></p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Words denoting a part are especially pronouns, numerals, and +other adjectives. But cardinal numbers excepting <b>mīlle</b> regularly +take the ablative with <b>ex</b> or <b>dē</b> instead of the partitive +genitive.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> <b>Mīlle</b>, <i>a thousand</i>, in the singular is usually an +indeclinable adjective (as, <b>mīlle mīlitēs</b>, <i>a thousand +soldiers</i>), but in the plural it is a declinable noun and takes the +partitive genitive (as, <b>decem mīlia mīlitum</b>, <i>ten thousand +soldiers</i>).</p> + +<p><span class = "smallcaps">Examples:</span></p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Fortissimī hōrum sunt Germānī</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>The bravest of these are the Germans</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Decem mīlia hostium interfecta sunt</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>Ten thousand</i> (lit. <i>thousands</i>) <i>of the enemy were +slain</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Ūna ex captīvīs erat soror rēgis</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>One of the captives was the king’s sister</i> +</p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p><span class = "pagenum">144</span> +<a name = "page144"> </a> +<a name = "sec332"><b>332.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec332vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 297.</p> + +<p>I. 1. Caesar maximam partem aedificiōrum incendit. 2. Magna pars +mūnītiōnis aquā flūminis dēlēta est. 3. Gallī huius regiōnis +quīnque mīlia hominum coēgerant. 4. Duo ex meīs frātribus eundem +rūmōrem audīvērunt. 5. Quis Rōmānōrum erat clarior Caesare? +6. Quīnque cohortēs ex illā legiōne castra quam fortissimē +dēfendēbant. 7. Hic locus aberat aequō spatiō<span class = +"tag">1</span> ab castrīs Caesaris et castrīs Germānōrum. 8. Caesar +simul atque pervēnit, plūs commeātūs ab sociīs postulāvit. 9. Nōnne +mercātōrēs magnitūdinem īnsulae cognōverant? Longitūdinem sed nōn +lātitūdinem cognōverant. 10. Paucī hostium obtinēbant collem quem +explōrātōrēs nostrī vīdērunt.</p> + +<p>II. 1. I have two brothers, and one of them lives at Rome. +2. Cæsar stormed that very town with three legions. 3. In one +hour he destroyed a great part of the fortification. 4. When the +enemy could no longer<span class = "tag">2</span> defend the gates, they +retreated to a hill which was not far distant.<span class = +"tag">3</span> 5. There three thousand of them bravely resisted the +Romans.<span class = "tag">4</span></p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. Ablative of the measure of difference.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. Not <b>longius</b>. Why?</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. Latin, <i>was distant by a small space.</i></div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +4. Not the accusative.</div> + +<div class = "plainnote"><a href = "LatinBegin2.html#reading_LVIII"> +Reading Selection</a></div> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_LIX"> +LESSON LIX</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">NUMERALS (<i>Continued</i>) · THE ACCUSATIVE OF +EXTENT</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec333"><b>333.</b></a> +Learn the first twenty of the ordinal numerals (<a href = +"LatinBegin2.html#sec478">§ 478</a>). The ordinals are all declined +like <b>bonus</b>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec334"><b>334.</b></a> +The distributive numerals are declined like the plural of <b>bonus</b>. +The first three are</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>singulī, -ae, -a</b>, <i>one each, one by one</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>bīnī, -ae, -a</b>, <i>two each, two by two</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>ternī, -ae, -a</b>, <i>three each, three by three</i></p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec335"><b>335.</b></a> +We have learned that, besides its use as object, the accusative is used +to express space relations not covered by the ablative. We have had such +expressions as <b>per plūrimōs annōs</b>, <i>for a great many</i> +<span class = "pagenum">145</span> +<a name = "page145"> </a> +<i>years</i>; <b>per tōtum diem</b>, <i>for a whole day</i>. Here the +space relation is one of <i>extent of time</i>. We could also say <b>per +decem pedēs</b>, <i>for ten feet</i>, where the space relation is one of +<i>extent of space</i>. While this is correct Latin, the usual form is +to use the accusative with no preposition, as,</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Vir tōtum diem cucurrit</b>, <i>the man ran for a whole day</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Caesar mūrum decem pedēs mōvit</b>, +<i>Cæsar moved the wall ten feet</i> +</p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec336"><b>336.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Accusative of Extent.</b> +<i>Duration of time and extent of space are expressed by the +accusative.</i></p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> This accusative answers the questions <i>how long? how +far?</i></p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> Distinguish carefully between the accusative of time <i>how +long</i> and the ablative of time <i>when</i>, or <i>within +which.</i></p> + +<p>Select the accusatives of time and space and the ablatives of time in +the following:</p> + +<p>When did the general arrive? He arrived at two o’clock. How long had +he been marching? For four days. How far did he march? He marched +sixty-five miles. Where has he pitched his camp? Three miles from the +river, and he will remain there several days. The wall around the camp +is ten feet high. When did the war begin? In the first year after the +king’s death.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec337"><b>337.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec337vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 298.</p> + +<p>I. <i>Cæsar in Gaul</i>. Caesar bellum in Gallia septem annōs gessit. +Prīmō annō Helvētiōs vīcit, et eōdem annō multae Germanōrum gentēs eī +sēsē dēdidērunt. Multōs iam annōs Germānī Gallōs vexabant<span class = +"tag">1</span> et ducēs Germānī cōpiās suās trāns Rhēnum saepe +trādūcēbant.<span class = "tag">1</span> Nōn singulī veniēbant, sed +multa milia hominum in Galliam contendēbant. Quā dē causā prīncipēs +Galliae concilium convocāvērunt atque statuērunt legates ad Caesarem +mittere. Caesar, simul atque hunc rūmōrem audīvit, cōpiās suās sine morā +coēgit. Primā lūce fortiter cum Germanīs proelium commīsit. Tōtum diem +ācriter pugnātum est. Caesar ipse ā dextrō cornū acicm dūxit. Magna pars +exercitūs Germānī cecidit. Post magnam caedem paucī multa milia passuum +ad flūmen fūgērunt.</p> + +<p> +<span class = "pagenum">146</span> +<a name = "page146"> </a> +II. 1. Cæsar pitched camp two miles from the river. 2. He fortified +the camp with a ditch fifteen feet wide and a rampart nine feet high. +3. The camp of the enemy was a great way off (was distant by a +great space). 4. On the next day he hastened ten miles in three +hours. 5. Suddenly the enemy with all their forces made an attack +upon (<b>in</b> <i>with acc.</i>) the rear. 6. For two hours the +Romans were hard pressed by the barbarians. 7. In three hours the +barbarians were fleeing.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. Translate as if pluperfect.</div> + +<div class = "plainnote"><a href = "LatinBegin2.html#reading_LIX"> +Reading Selection</a></div> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_LX"> +LESSON LX</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">DEPONENT VERBS</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec338"><b>338.</b></a> +A number of verbs are passive in form but active in meaning; as, +<b>hortor</b>, <i>I encourage</i>; <b>vereor</b>, <i>I fear</i>. Such +verbs are called <b>deponent</b> because they have laid aside +(<b>dē-pōnere</b>, <i>to lay aside</i>) the active forms.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Besides having all the forms of the passive, deponent verbs +have also the future active infinitive and a few other active forms +which will be noted later. (Sec<a href = "#sec375">§§ 375</a>, <a +href = "#sec403">403.<i>b</i></a>.)</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec339"><b>339.</b></a> +The principal parts of deponents are of course passive in form, as,</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td><i>Conj. I</i></td> +<td></td> +<td> +<b>hortor, hortārī, hortātus sum</b>, <i>encourage</i> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Conj. II</i></td> +<td></td> +<td> +<b>vereor, verērī, veritus sum</b>, <i>fear</i> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Conj. III</i></td> +<td>(<i>a</i>)</td> +<td> +<b>sequor, sequī, secūtus sum</b>, <i>follow</i> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td>(<i>b</i>)</td> +<td> +<b>patior, patī, passus sum</b>, <i>suffer, allow</i> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Conj. IV</i></td> +<td></td> +<td> +<b>partior, partīrī, partītus sum</b>, <i>share, divide</i> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>Learn the synopses of these verbs. (See <a href = +"LatinBegin2.html#sec493">§ 493</a>.) <b>Patior</b> is conjugated +like the passive of <b>capiō</b> (<a href = +"LatinBegin2.html#sec492">§ 492</a>).</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec340"><b>340.</b></a> +PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE</p> + +<p>The prepositions with the accusative that occur most frequently +are</p> + +<table class = "vocab"> +<tr> +<td class = "half"> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>ante</b>, <i>before</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>apud</b>, <i>among</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>circum</b>, <i>around</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>contrā</b>, <i>against, contrary to</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>extrā</b>, <i>outside of</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>in</b>, <i>into, in, against, upon</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>inter</b>, <i>between, among</i></p> +</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>intrā</b>, <i>within</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>ob</b>, <i>on account of</i> (<b>quam ob rem</b>, <i>wherefore, +therefore</i>)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>per</b>, <i>through, by means of</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>post</b>, <i>after, behind</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>propter</b>, <i>on account of, because of</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>trāns</b>, <i>across, over</i></p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Most of these you have had before. Review the old ones and +learn the new ones. Review the list of prepositions governing the +ablative, <a href = "#sec209">§ 209</a>.</p> + +<p><span class = "pagenum">147</span> +<a name = "page147"> </a> +<a name = "sec341"><b>341.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>First learn the <a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec341vocab">special +vocabulary</a>, p. 298.</p> + +<p>I. 1. Trēs ex lēgātīs, contrā Caesaris opīniōnem, iter facere per +hostium fīnīs verēbantur. 2. Quis eōs hortātus est? Imperātor eōs +hortātus est et iīs persuādēre cōnātus est, sed nōn potuit. 3. Quid +lēgātōs perterruit? Aut timor hostium, quī undique premēbant, aut +longitūdō viae eōs perterruit. 4. Tamen omnēs ferē Caesarem multō +magis quam hostīs veritī sunt. 5. Fortissimae gentēs Galliae ex +Germānīs oriēbantur. 6. Quam ob rem tam fortēs erant? Quia nec +vīnum nec alia quae virtūtem dēlent ad sē portārī patiēbantur. +7. Caesar ex mercātōribus dē īnsulā Britanniā quaesīvit, sed nihil +cognōscere potuit. 8. Itaque ipse statuit hanc terram petere, et +mediā ferē aestāte cum multīs nāvibus longīs profectus est. +9. Magnā celeritāte iter confēcit et in opportūnissimō locō +ēgressus est. 10. Barbarī summīs vīribus eum ab īnsulā prohibēre +cōnātī sunt. 11. Ille autem barbarōs multa mīlia passuum īnsecūtus +est; tamen sine equitātū eōs cōnsequī nōn potuit.</p> + +<p>II. 1. Contrary to our expectation, the enemy fled and the cavalry +followed close after them. 2. From all parts of the multitude the +shouts arose of those who were being wounded. 3. Cæsar did not +allow the cavalry to pursue too far.<span class = "tag">1</span> +4. The cavalry set out at the first hour and was returning<span +class = "tag">2</span> to camp at the fourth hour. 5. Around the +Roman camp was a rampart twelve feet high. 6. Cæsar will delay +three days because of the grain supply. 7. Nearly all the +lieutenants feared the enemy and attempted to delay the march.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. Comparative of <b>longē</b>.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. Will this be a deponent or an active form?</div> + + +<hr class = "tiny"> + +<h5 class = "boldf"> +<a class = "page" href = "LatinBegin2.html#review_VII"> +Seventh Review, Lessons LIII-LX, §§ 524-526</a></h5> + +<hr class = "tiny"> + + +<p class = "illustration"> +<span class = "pagenum">148</span> +<a name = "page148"> </a> +<img src = "../images/pic148.png" width = "250" height = "303" +alt = "man reading scrolls"></p> + + + +<h3>PART III</h3> + +<h4>CONSTRUCTIONS</h4> + + +<h5>INTRODUCTORY NOTE</h5> + +<p>The preceding part of this book has been concerned chiefly with forms +and vocabulary. There remain still to be learned the forms of the +Subjunctive Mood, the Participles, and the Gerund of the regular verb, +and the conjugation of the commoner irregular verbs. These will be taken +up in connection with the study of constructions, which will be the +chief subject of our future work. The special vocabularies of the +preceding lessons contain, exclusive of proper names, about six hundred +words. As these are among the commonest words in the language, <i>they +must be mastered</i>. They properly form the basis of the study of +words, and will be reviewed and used with but few additions in the +remaining lessons.</p> + +<p>For practice in reading and to illustrate the constructions +presented, a continued story has been prepared and may be begun at this +point (see p. 204). It has been divided into chapters of convenient +length to accompany progress through the lessons, but may be read with +equal profit after the lessons are finished. The story gives an account +of the life and adventures of Publius Cornelius Lentulus, a Roman boy, +who fought in Cæsar’s campaigns and shared in his triumph. The colored +plates illustrating the story are faithful representations of ancient +life and are deserving of careful study.</p> + +<div class = "plainnote"><a href = "LatinBegin2.html#reading_LX"> +Reading Selection</a></div> + + +<span class = "pagenum">149</span> +<a name = "page149"> </a> +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_LXI"> +LESSON LXI</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec342"><b>342.</b></a> +In addition to the indicative, imperative, and infinitive moods, which +you have learned, Latin has a fourth mood called the subjunctive. The +tenses of the subjunctive are</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td class = "middle smallcaps rightline"> +Present<br> +Imperfect<br> +Perfect<br> +Pluperfect +</td> +<td class = "middle smallcaps"> +Active and Passive +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec343"><b>343.</b></a> +The tenses of the subjunctive have the same time values as the +corresponding tenses of the indicative, and, in addition, <i>each of +them may refer to future time</i>. No meanings of the tenses will be +given in the paradigms, as the translation varies with the construction +used.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec344"><b>344.</b></a> +The present subjunctive is inflected as follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th>Conj. I</th> +<th>Conj. II</th> +<th colspan = "2">Conj. III</th> +<th>Conj. IV</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<th colspan = "5">Active Voice</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallhead" colspan = "5">SINGULAR</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1. a´m<b>em</b></td> +<td>mo´ne<b>am</b></td> +<td>re´g<b>am</b></td> +<td>ca´pi<b>am</b></td> +<td>au´di<b>am</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. a´m<b>ēs</b></td> +<td>mo´ne<b>ās</b></td> +<td>re´g<b>ās</b></td> +<td>ca´pi<b>ās</b></td> +<td>au´di<b>ās</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. a´m<b>et</b></td> +<td>mo´ne<b>at</b></td> +<td>re´g<b>at</b></td> +<td>ca´pi<b>at</b></td> +<td>au´di<b>at</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallhead" colspan = "5">PLURAL</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1. am<b>ē´mus</b></td> +<td>mone<b>ā´mus</b></td> +<td>reg<b>ā´mus</b></td> +<td>capi<b>ā´mus</b></td> +<td>audi<b>ā´mus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. am<b>ē´tis</b></td> +<td>mone<b>ā´tis</b></td> +<td>reg<b>ā´tis</b></td> +<td>capi<b>ā´tis</b></td> +<td>audi<b>ā´tis</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. a´m<b>ent</b></td> +<td>mo´ne<b>ant</b></td> +<td>re´g<b>ant</b></td> +<td>ca´pi<b>ant</b></td> +<td>au´di<b>ant</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan = "5"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<th colspan = "5">Passive Voice</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallhead" colspan = "5">SINGULAR</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1. a´m<b>er</b></td> +<td>mo´ne<b>ar</b></td> +<td>re´g<b>ar</b></td> +<td>ca´pi<b>ar</b></td> +<td>au´di<b>ar</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. am<b>ē´ris</b> (<b>-re</b>)</td> +<td>mone<b>ā´ris</b> (<b>-re</b>)</td> +<td>reg<b>ā´ris</b> (<b>-re</b>)</td> +<td>capi<b>ā´ris</b> (<b>-re</b>)</td> +<td>audi<b>ā´ris</b> (<b>-re</b>)</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. am<b>ē´tur</b></td> +<td>mone<b>ā´tur</b></td> +<td>reg<b>ā´tur</b></td> +<td>capi<b>ā´tur</b></td> +<td>audi<b>ā´tur</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallhead" colspan = "5"> +<span class = "pagenum">150</span> +<a name = "page150"> </a> +PLURAL</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1. am<b>ē´mur</b></td> +<td>mone<b>ā´mur</b></td> +<td>reg<b>ā´mur</b></td> +<td>capi<b>ā´mur</b></td> +<td>audi<b>ā´mur</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. am<b>ē´minī</b></td> +<td>mone<b>ā´minī</b></td> +<td>reg<b>ā´minī</b></td> +<td>capi<b>ā´minī</b></td> +<td>audi<b>ā´minī</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. am<b>en´tur</b></td> +<td>mone<b>an´tur</b></td> +<td>reg<b>an´tur</b></td> +<td>capi<b>an´tur</b></td> +<td>audi<b>an´tur</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> The present subjunctive is formed from the present stem.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> The mood sign of the present subjunctive is <b>-ē-</b> in the +first conjugation and <b>-ā-</b> in the others. It is shortened in the +usual places (cf. <a href = "#sec12">§ 12</a>), and takes the place +of the final vowel of the stem in the first and third conjugations, but +not in the second and fourth.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>c.</i> The personal endings are the same as in the indicative.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>d.</i> In a similar way inflect the present subjunctive of +<b>cūrō</b>, <b>iubeō</b>, <b>sūmō</b>, <b>iaciō</b>, <b>mūniō</b>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec345"><b>345.</b></a> +The present subjunctive of the irregular verb <b>sum</b> is inflected as +follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead"> +Sing. +</td> +<td> +1. <b>sim</b><br> +2. <b>sīs</b><br> +3. <b>sit</b> +</td> +<td class = "sidehead"> +Plur. +</td> +<td> +1. <b>sīmus</b><br> +2. <b>sītis</b><br> +3. <b>sint</b> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec346"><b>346.</b></a> +<b>The Indicative and Subjunctive Compared.</b> 1. The two most +important of the finite moods are the indicative and the subjunctive. +The indicative deals with facts either real or assumed. If, then, we +wish to assert something as a fact or to inquire after a fact, we use +the indicative.</p> + +<p> +2. On the other hand, if we wish to express a <i>desire</i> or +<i>wish</i>, a <i>purpose</i>, a <i>possibility</i>, an +<i>expectation</i>, or some such notion, we must use the subjunctive. +The following sentences illustrate the difference between the indicative +and the subjunctive ideas.</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th>Indicative Ideas</th> +<td></td> +<th>Subjunctive Ideas</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1.</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>He is brave</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Fortis est</b></p> +</td> +<td>1.</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>May he be brave</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Fortis sit</b> (idea of wishing)</p> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2.</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>We set out at once</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Statim proficīscimur</b></p> +</td> +<td>2.</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>Let us set out at once</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Statim proficīscāmur</b> (idea of willing)</p> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3.</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>You hear him every day</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Cotīdiē eum audīs</b></p> +</td> +<td>3.</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>You can hear him every day</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Cotīdiē eum audiās</b> (idea of possibility)</p> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +<span class = "pagenum">151</span> +<a name = "page151"> </a> +4.</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>He remained until the ship arrived</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Mānsit dum nāvis pervēnit</b></p> +</td> +<td>4.</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>He waited until the ship should arrive</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Exspectāvit dum nāvis pervenīret</b><span class = "tag">1</span> +(idea of expectation)</p> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>5.</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>Cæsar sends men who find the bridge</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Caesar mittit hominēs quī pontem reperiunt</b></p> +</td> +<td>5.</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>Cæsar sends men who are to find</i> (or <i>to find</i>) <i>the +bridge</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Caesar hominēs mittit quī pontem reperiant</b> (idea of purpose)</p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. <b>pervenīret</b>, imperfect subjunctive.</div> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Note.</span> From the sentences above we +observe that the subjunctive may be used in either independent or +dependent clauses; but it is far more common in the latter than in the +former.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec347"><b>347.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISE</span></p> + +<p>Which verbs in the following paragraph would be in the indicative and +which in the subjunctive in a Latin translation?</p> + +<p>There have been times in the history of our country when you might be +proud of being an American citizen. Do you remember the day when Dewey +sailed into Manila Bay to capture or destroy the enemy’s fleet? You +might have seen the admiral standing on the bridge calmly giving his +orders. He did not even wait until the mines should be removed from the +harbor’s mouth, but sailed in at once. Let us not despair of our country +while such valor exists, and may the future add new glories to the +past.</p> + +<div class = "plainnote"><a href = "LatinBegin2.html#reading_LXI"> +Reading Selection</a></div> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_LXII"> +LESSON LXII</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">THE SUBJUNCTIVE OF PURPOSE</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec348"><b>348.</b></a> +Observe the sentence</p> + +<p class = "center"> +<b>Caesar hominēs mittit quī pontem reperiant</b>,<br> +<i>Cæsar sends men to find the bridge</i> +</p> + +<p>The verb <b>reperiant</b> in the dependent clause is in the +subjunctive because it tells us what Cæsar wants the men to do; in other +words, it expresses his will and the purpose in his mind. Such a use of +the subjunctive is called the subjunctive of purpose.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">152</span> +<a name = "page152"> </a> +<a name = "sec349"><b>349.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Subjunctive of Purpose.</b> +<i>The subjunctive is used in a dependent clause to express the purpose +of the action in the principal clause.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec350"><b>350.</b></a> +A clause of purpose is introduced as follows:</p> + +<p>I. If something is wanted, by</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr><td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>quī</b>, the relative pronoun (as above)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>ut</b>, conj., <i>in order that, that</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>quō</b> (abl. of <b>quī</b>, <i>by which</i>), <i>in order that, +that</i>, used when the purpose clause contains a comparative. The +ablative <b>quō</b> expresses the measure of difference. (Cf. <a href = +"#sec317">§ 317</a>.)</p> +</td></tr> +</table> + +<p>II. If something is not wanted, by</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr><td> +<b>nē</b>, conj., <i>in order that not, that not, lest</i> +</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec351"><b>351.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXAMPLES</span></p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<td>1.</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Caesar cōpiās cōgit quibus hostīs īnsequātur</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>Cæsar collects troops with which to pursue the foe</i> +</p> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2.</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Pācem petunt ut domum revertantur</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>They ask for peace in order that they may return home</i> +</p> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3.</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Pontem faciunt quō facilius oppidum capiant</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>They build a bridge that they may take the town more easily</i> (lit. +<i>by which the more easily</i>) +</p> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>4.</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Fugiunt nē vulnerentur</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>They flee that they may not</i> (or <i>lest they</i>) <i>be +wounded</i></p> +</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec352"><b>352.</b></a> +<b>Expression of Purpose in English.</b> In English, purpose clauses are +sometimes introduced by <i>that</i> or <i>in order that</i>, but much +more frequently purpose is expressed in English by the infinitive, as +<i>We eat to live</i>, <i>She stoops to conquer</i>. In Latin prose, on +the other hand, <b>purpose is never expressed by the infinitive</b>. Be +on your guard and do not let the English idiom betray you into this +error.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec353"><b>353.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>I.</p> + +<table class = "lines"> +<tr> +<td class = "middle rightline"><p class = "hanging"> +1. Veniunt ut</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +dūcant, mittant, videant, audiant, dūcantur, mittantur, videantur, +audiantur. +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "middle rightline"><p class = "hanging"> +2. Fugimus nē</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +capiāmur, trādāmur, videāmus, necēmur, rapiāmur, resistāmus. +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "middle rightline"><p class = "hanging"> +<span class = "pagenum">153</span> +<a name = "page153"> </a> +3. Mittit nūntiōs quī</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +dicant, audiant, veniant, nārrent, audiantur, in conciliō sedeant. +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "middle rightline"><p class = "hanging"> +4. Castra mūniunt quō facilius</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +sēsē dēfendant, impetum sustineant, hostīs vincant, salūtem petant. +</p></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>II. 1. The Helvetii send ambassadors to seek<span class = +"tag">1</span> peace. 2. They are setting out at daybreak in order +that they may make a longer march before night. 3. They will hide +the women in the forest (<i>acc. with</i> <b>in</b>) that they may not +be captured. 4. The Gauls wage many wars to free<span class = +"tag">1</span> their fatherland from slavery. 5. They will resist +the Romans<span class = "tag">2</span> bravely lest they be +destroyed.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. Not infinitive.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. Not accusative.</div> + +<div class = "plainnote"><a href = "LatinBegin2.html#reading_LXII"> +Reading Selection</a></div> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_LXIII"> +LESSON LXIII</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">INFLECTION OF THE IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE THE SEQUENCE +OF TENSES</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec354"><b>354.</b></a> +The imperfect subjunctive may be formed by adding the personal endings +to the present active infinitive.</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th>Conj. I</th> +<th>Conj. II</th> +<th colspan = "2">Conj. III</th> +<th>Conj. IV</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallhead" colspan = "5">ACTIVE</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1. amā´<b>rem</b></td> +<td>monē´<b>rem</b></td> +<td>re´ge<b>rem</b></td> +<td>ca´pe<b>rem</b></td> +<td>audī´<b>rem</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. amā´<b>rēs</b></td> +<td>monē´<b>rēs</b></td> +<td>re´ge<b>rēs</b></td> +<td>ca´pe<b>rēs</b></td> +<td>audī´<b>rēs</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. amā´<b>ret</b></td> +<td>monē´<b>ret</b></td> +<td>re´ge<b>ret</b></td> +<td>ca´pe<b>ret</b></td> +<td>audī´<b>ret</b></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td>1. amā<b>rē´mus</b></td> +<td>monē<b>rē´mus</b></td> +<td>rege<b>rē´mus</b></td> +<td>cape<b>rē´mus</b></td> +<td>audī<b>rē´mus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. amā<b>rē´tis</b></td> +<td>monē<b>rē´tis</b></td> +<td>rege<b>rē´tis</b></td> +<td>cape<b>rē´tis</b></td> +<td>audī<b>rē´tis</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. amā´<b>rent</b></td> +<td>monē´<b>rent</b></td> +<td>re´ge<b>rent</b></td> +<td>ca´pe<b>rent</b></td> +<td>audī´<b>rent</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan = "5"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallhead" colspan = "5">PASSIVE</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1. amā´<b>rer</b></td> +<td>monē´<b>rer</b></td> +<td>re´ge<b>rer</b></td> +<td>ca´pe<b>rer</b></td> +<td>audī´<b>rer</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. amā<b>rē´ris(-re)</b></td> +<td>monē<b>rē´ris(-re)</b></td> +<td>rege<b>rē´ris(-re)</b></td> +<td>cape<b>rē´ris(-re)</b></td> +<td>audī<b>rē´ris(-re)</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. amā<b>rē´tur</b></td> +<td>monē<b>rē´tur</b></td> +<td>rege<b>rē´tur</b></td> +<td>cape<b>rē´tur</b></td> +<td>audī<b>rē´tur</b></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td>1. amā<b>rē´mur</b></td> +<td>monē<b>rē´mur</b></td> +<td>rege<b>rē´mur</b></td> +<td>cape<b>rē´mur</b></td> +<td>audī<b>rē´mur</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. amā<b>rē´minī</b></td> +<td>monē<b>rē´minī</b></td> +<td>rege<b>rē´minī</b></td> +<td>cape<b>rē´minī</b></td> +<td>audī<b>re´minī</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. amā<b>ren´tur</b></td> +<td>monē<b>ren´tur</b></td> +<td>rege<b>ren´tur</b></td> +<td>cape<b>ren´tur</b></td> +<td>audī<b>ren´tur</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> In a similar way inflect the imperfect subjunctive, active and +passive, of <b>cūrō</b>, <b>iubeō</b>, <b>sūmō</b>, <b>iaciō</b>, +<b>mūniō</b>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">154</span> +<a name = "page154"> </a> +<a name = "sec355"><b>355.</b></a> +The imperfect subjunctive of the irregular verb <b>sum</b> is inflected +as follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead" rowspan = "3">Sing.</td> +<td>1. es´<b>sem</b></td> +<td class = "sidehead" rowspan = "3">Plur.</td> +<td>1. es<b>sē´mus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. es´<b>sēs</b></td> +<td>2. es<b>sē´tis</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. es´<b>set</b></td> +<td>3. es´<b>sent</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec356"><b>356.</b></a> +The three great distinctions of time are <i>present</i>, <i>past</i>, +and <i>future</i>. All tenses referring to present or future time are +called <b>primary tenses</b>, and those referring to past time are +called <b>secondary tenses</b>. Now it is a very common law of language +that in a complex sentence the tense in the dependent clause should be +of the same kind as the tense in the principal clause. In the sentence +<i>He <b>says</b> that he <b>is</b> coming</i>, the principal verb, +<i>says</i>, is present, that is, is in a primary tense; and <i>is +coming</i>, in the dependent clause, is naturally also primary. If I +change <i>he says</i> to <i>he said</i>,—in other words, if I make +the principal verb secondary in character,—I feel it natural to +change the verb in the dependent clause also, and I say, <i>He +<b>said</b> that he <b>was</b> coming</i>. This following of a tense by +another of the same kind is called <i>tense sequence</i>, from +<i>sequī</i>, “to follow.”</p> + +<p>In Latin the law of tense sequence is obeyed with considerable +regularity, especially when an indicative in the principal clause is +followed by a subjunctive in the dependent clause. Then a primary tense +of the indicative is followed by a primary tense of the subjunctive, and +a secondary tense of the indicative is followed by a secondary tense of +the subjunctive. Learn the following table:</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec357"><b>357.</b></a> +<span class = "midcaps">Table for Sequence of Tenses</span></p> + +<table class = "boxes"> +<tr> +<td class = "box upper" rowspan = "2"></td> +<td class = "middle center box all smallcaps" rowspan = "2"> +Principal Verb in the<br> +Indicative</td> +<td class = "center box all smallcaps" colspan = "2"> +Dependent Verbs in the Subjunctive</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "middle center box all"><i>Incomplete or<br> +Continuing Action</i></td> +<td class = "middle center box all"><i>Completed Action</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead box smaller"> +P<br> +r<br> +i<br> +m<br> +a<br> +r<br> +y</td> +<td class = "middle center box all"> +Present<br> +Future<br> +Future perfect +</td> +<td class = "middle center box all">Present</td> +<td class = "middle center box all">Perfect</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead box lower smaller"> +S<br> +e<br> +c<br> +o<br> +n<br> +d<br> +a<br> +r<br> +y</td> +<td class = "middle center box all"> +Imperfect<br> +Perfect<br> +Pluperfect +</td> +<td class = "middle center box all">Imperfect</td> +<td class = "middle center box all">Pluperfect</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">155</span> +<a name = "page155"> </a> +<a name = "sec358"><b>358.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Sequence of Tenses.</b> +<i>Primary tenses are followed by primary tenses and secondary by +secondary.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec359"><b>359.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXAMPLES</span></p> + +<p>I. Primary tenses in principal and dependent clauses:</p> + +<table class = "lines"> +<tr> +<td></td><td></td> +<td class = "rightline"> +<b>Mittit</b><br> +<b>Mittet</b><br> +<b>Mīserit</b> +</td> +<td class = "middle" colspan = "3"> +<b>hominēs ut agrōs vāstent</b> +</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class = "middle"><i>He</i></td> +<td class = "leftline" colspan = "2"> +<i>sends</i><br> +<i>will send</i><br> +<i>will have sent</i> +</td> +<td class = "middle"> +<i>men</i> +</td> +<td class = "leftline rightline"> +<i>that they may</i><br> +<i>in order to</i><br> +<i>to</i> +</td> +<td class = "middle"> +<i>lay waste the fields</i> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>II. Secondary tenses in principal and dependent clauses:</p> + +<table class = "lines"> +<tr> +<td></td><td></td> +<td class = "rightline"> +<b>Mittēbat</b><br> +<b>Mīsit</b><br> +<b>Mīserat</b> +</td> +<td class = "middle" colspan = "3"> +<b>hominēs ut agrōs vāstārent</b> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "middle"><i>He</i></td> +<td class = "leftline" colspan = "2"> +<i>was sending</i><br> +<i>sent or has sent</i><br> +<i>had sent</i> +</td> +<td class = "middle"> +<i>men</i> +</td> +<td class = "rightline leftline"> +<i>that they might</i><br> +<i>in order to</i><br> +<i>to</i> +</td> +<td class = "middle"> +<i>lay waste the fields</i> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec360"><b>360.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>I.</p> + +<table class = "lines"> +<tr> +<td class = "middle"> +<p class = "hanging"> +1. Vēnerant ut</p></td> +<td class = "leftline"> +dūcerent, mitterent, vidērent, audīrent, dūcerentur, mitterentur, +vidērentur, audirentur</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "middle"> +<p class = "hanging"> +2. Fugiēbat nē</p></td> +<td class = "leftline"> +caperētur, trāderētur, vidērētur, necārētur, raperētur, +resiteret.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "middle"> +<p class = "hanging"> +3. Misit nūntiōs quī</p></td> +<td class = "leftline"> +dīcerent, audīrent, venīrent, nārrārent, audīrentur, in conciliō +sedērent.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "middle"> +<p class = "hanging"> +4. Castra mūnīvērunt quō facilius</p></td> +<td class = "leftline"> +sēsē dēfenderent, impetum sustinērent, hostīs vincerent, +salūtem peterent.</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>II. 1. Cæsar encouraged the soldiers in order that they might fight +more bravely. 2. The Helvetii left their homes to wage war. +3. The scouts set out at once lest they should be captured by the +Germans. 4. Cæsar inflicted punishment on them in order that the +others might be more terrified. 5. He sent messengers to Rome to +announce the victory.</p> + +<div class = "plainnote"><a href = "LatinBegin2.html#reading_LXIII"> +Reading Selection</a></div> + + +<span class = "pagenum">156</span> +<a name = "page156"> </a> + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_LXIV"> +LESSON LXIV</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">THE PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE SUBSTANTIVE +CLAUSES OF PURPOSE</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec361"><b>361.</b></a> +The perfect and the pluperfect subjunctive active are inflected as +follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th>Conj. I</th> +<th>Conj. II</th> +<th colspan = "2">Conj. III</th> +<th>Conj. IV</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<th colspan = "5">Perfect Subjunctive Active</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallhead" colspan = "5">SINGULAR</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1. amā´v<b>erim</b></td> +<td>monu´<b>erim</b></td> +<td>rē´x<b>erim</b></td> +<td>cē´p<b>erim</b></td> +<td>audī´v<b>erim</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. amā´v<b>eris</b></td> +<td>monu´<b>eris</b></td> +<td>rē´x<b>eris</b></td> +<td>cē´p<b>eris</b></td> +<td>audī´v<b>eris</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. amā´v<b>erit</b></td> +<td>monu´<b>erit</b></td> +<td>rē´x<b>erit</b></td> +<td>cē´p<b>erit</b></td> +<td>audī´v<b>erit</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallhead" colspan = "5">PLURAL</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1. amāv<b>e´rimus</b></td> +<td>monu<b>e´rimus</b></td> +<td>rēx<b>e´rimus</b></td> +<td>cēp<b>e´rimus</b></td> +<td>audīv<b>e´rimus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. amāv<b>e´ritis</b></td> +<td>monu<b>e´ritis</b></td> +<td>rēx<b>e´ritis</b></td> +<td>cēp<b>e´ritis</b></td> +<td>audīv<b>e´ritis</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. amā´v<b>erint</b></td> +<td>monu´<b>erint</b></td> +<td>rē´x<b>erint</b></td> +<td>cē´p<b>erint</b></td> +<td>audī´v<b>erint</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan = "5"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<th colspan = "5">Pluperfect Subjunctive Active</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallhead" colspan = "5">SINGULAR</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1. amāv<b>is´sem</b></td> +<td>monu<b>is´sem</b></td> +<td>rēx<b>is´sem</b></td> +<td>cēp<b>is´sem</b></td> +<td>audīv<b>is´sem</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. amāv<b>is´sēs</b></td> +<td>monu<b>is´sēs</b></td> +<td>rēx<b>is´sēs</b></td> +<td>cēp<b>is´sēs</b></td> +<td>audīv<b>is´sēm</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. amāv<b>is´set</b></td> +<td>monu<b>is´set</b></td> +<td>rēx<b>is´set</b></td> +<td>cēp<b>is´set</b></td> +<td>audīv<b>is´set</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallhead" colspan = "5">PLURAL</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1. amāv<b>issē´mus</b></td> +<td>monu<b>issē´mus</b></td> +<td>rēx<b>issē´mus</b></td> +<td>cēp<b>issē´mus</b></td> +<td>audīv<b>issē´mus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. amāv<b>issē´tis</b></td> +<td>monu<b>issē´tis</b></td> +<td>rēx<b>issē´tis</b></td> +<td>cēp<b>issē´tis</b></td> +<td>audīv<b>issē´tis</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. amāv<b>is´sent</b></td> +<td>monu<b>is´sent</b></td> +<td>rēx<b>is´sent</b></td> +<td>cēp<b>is´sent</b></td> +<td>audīv<b>is´sent</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Observe that these two tenses, like the corresponding ones in +the indicative, are formed from the perfect stem.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> Observe that the perfect subjunctive active is like the future +perfect indicative active, excepting that the first person singular ends +in <b>-m</b> and not in <b>-ō</b>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>c.</i> Observe that the pluperfect subjunctive active may be formed +by adding <b>-issem, -issēs</b>, etc. to the perfect stem.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>d.</i> In a similar way inflect the perfect and pluperfect +subjunctive active of <b>cūrō</b>, <b>iubeō</b>, <b>sūmō</b>, +<b>iaciō</b>, <b>mūniō</b>.</p> + +<span class = "pagenum">157</span> +<a name = "page157"> </a> +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec362"><b>362.</b></a> +The passive of the perfect subjunctive is formed by combining the +perfect passive participle with <b>sim</b>, the present subjunctive of +<b>sum.</b></p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th>Conj. I</th> +<th>Conj. II</th> +<th colspan = "2">Conj. III</th> +<th>Conj. IV</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<th colspan = "5">Perfect Subjunctive Passive</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallhead" colspan = "5">SINGULAR</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1. amā´t<b>us sim</b></td> +<td>mo´nit<b>us sim</b></td> +<td>rēc´t<b>us sim</b></td> +<td>cap´t<b>us sim</b></td> +<td>audī´t<b>us sim</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. amā´t<b>us sīs</b></td> +<td>mo´nit<b>us sīs</b></td> +<td>rēc´t<b>us sīs</b></td> +<td>cap´t<b>us sīs</b></td> +<td>audī´t<b>us sīs</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. amā´t<b>us sit</b></td> +<td>mo´nit<b>us sit</b></td> +<td>rēc´t<b>us sit</b></td> +<td>cap´t<b>us sit</b></td> +<td>audī´t<b>us sit</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallhead" colspan = "5">PLURAL</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1. amā´t<b>ī sīmus</b></td> +<td>mo´nit<b>ī sīmus</b></td> +<td>rēc´t<b>ī sīmus</b></td> +<td>cap´t<b>ī sīmus</b></td> +<td>audī´t<b>ī sīmus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. amā´t<b>ī sītis</b></td> +<td>mo´nit<b>ī sītis</b></td> +<td>rēc´t<b>ī sītis</b></td> +<td>cap´t<b>ī sītis</b></td> +<td>audī´t<b>ī sītis</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. amā´t<b>ī sint</b></td> +<td>mo´nit<b>ī sint</b></td> +<td>rēc´t<b>ī sint</b></td> +<td>cap´t<b>ī sint</b></td> +<td>audī´t<b>ī sint</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec363"><b>363.</b></a> +The passive of the pluperfect subjunctive is formed by combining the +perfect passive participle with <b>essem</b>, the imperfect subjunctive +of <b>sum</b>.</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th>Conj. I</th> +<th>Conj. II</th> +<th colspan = "2">Conj. III</th> +<th>Conj. IV</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<th colspan = "5">Pluperfect Subjunctive Passive</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallhead" colspan = "5">SINGULAR</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1. amāt<b>us essem</b></td> +<td>monit<b>us essem</b></td> +<td>rēct<b>us essem</b></td> +<td>capt<b>us essem</b></td> +<td>audīt<b>us essem</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. amāt<b>us essēs</b></td> +<td>monit<b>us essēs</b></td> +<td>rēct<b>us essēs</b></td> +<td>capt<b>us essēs</b></td> +<td>audīt<b>us essēs</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. amāt<b>us esset</b></td> +<td>monit<b>us esset</b></td> +<td>rēct<b>us esset</b></td> +<td>capt<b>us esset</b></td> +<td>audīt<b>us esset</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "smallhead" colspan = "5">PLURAL</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1. amāt<b>ī essēmus</b></td> +<td>monit<b>ī essēmus</b></td> +<td>rēct<b>ī essēmus</b></td> +<td>capt<b>ī essēmus</b></td> +<td>audīt<b>ī essēmus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2. amāt<b>ī essētis</b></td> +<td>monit<b>ī essētis</b></td> +<td>rēct<b>ī essētis</b></td> +<td>capt<b>ī essētis</b></td> +<td>audīt<b>ī essētis</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3. amāt<b>ī essent</b></td> +<td>monit<b>ī essent</b></td> +<td>rēct<b>ī essent</b></td> +<td>capt<b>ī essent</b></td> +<td>audīt<b>ī essent</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> In a similar way inflect the perfect and pluperfect +subjunctive passive of <b>cūrō</b>, <b>iubeō</b>, <b>sūmō</b>, +<b>iaciō</b>, <b>mūniō.</b></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec364"><b>364.</b></a> +The perfect and pluperfect subjunctive of the irregular verb <b>sum</b> +are inflected as follows:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th colspan = "2">Perfect</th> +<th colspan = "2">Pluperfect</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>fu<b>´erim</b></td> +<td class = "rightpad">fu<b>e´rimus</b></td> +<td>fu<b>is´sem</b></td> +<td>fu<b>issē´mus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>fu<b>´eris</b></td> +<td>fu<b>e´ritis</b></td> +<td>fu<b>is´sēs</b></td> +<td>fu<b>issē´tis</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>fu<b>´erit</b></td> +<td>fu<b>´erint</b></td> +<td>fu<b>is´set</b></td> +<td>fu<b>is´sent</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<span class = "pagenum">158</span> +<a name = "page158"> </a> +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec365"><b>365.</b></a> +A substantive clause is a clause used like a noun, as,</p> + +<table> +<tr><td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>That the men are afraid</i> is clear enough (clause as subject)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +He ordered <i>them to call on him</i> (clause as object)</p> +</td></tr> +</table> + +<p>We have already had many instances of infinitive clauses used in this +way (cf. <a href = "#sec213">§ 213</a>), and have noted the +similarity between Latin and English usage in this respect. But the +Latin often uses the <i>subjunctive</i> in substantive clauses, and this +marks an important difference between the two languages.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec366"><b>366.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Substantive Clauses of +Purpose.</b> <i>A substantive clause of purpose with the subjunctive is +used as the object of verbs of <b>commanding</b>, <b>urging</b>, +<b>asking</b>, <b>persuading</b>, or <b>advising</b>, where in English +we should usually have the infinitive.</i></p> + +<h6 class = "boldf">EXAMPLES</h6> + +<table> +<tr> +<td>1.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<i>The general ordered the soldiers to run</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>Imperātor mīlitibus imperāvit ut currerent</b> +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<i>He urged them to resist bravely</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>Hortātus est ut fortiter resisterent</b> +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<i>He asked them to give the children food</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>Petīvit ut līberīs cibum darent</b> +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>4.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<i>He will persuade us not to set out</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>Nōbīs persuādēbit nē proficīscāmur</b> +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>5.</td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<i>He advises us to remain at home</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>Monet ut domī maneāmus</b> +</p></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> The object clauses following these verbs all express the +purpose or will of the principal subject that something be done or not +done. (Cf. <a href = "#sec348">§ 348</a>.)</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec367"><b>367.</b></a> +The following verbs are used with object clauses of purpose. Learn the +list and the principal parts of the new ones.</p> + +<table class = "vocab"> +<tr> +<td class = "half"> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>hortor</b>, <i>urge</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>imperō</b>, <i>order</i> (with the <i>dative</i> of the <i>person</i> +ordered and a <i>subjunctive clause</i> of the <i>thing</i> ordered +done)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>moneō</b>, <i>advise</i></p> +</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>petō</b>, <b>quaerō</b>, <b>rogō</b>, <i>ask, seek</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>persuādeō</b>, <i>persuade</i> (with the same construction as +imperō)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>postulō</b>, <i>demand, require</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>suādeō</b>, <i>advise</i> (cf. <b>persuādeō</b>) +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +N.B. Remember that <b>iubeō</b>, <i>order</i>, takes the infinitive as +in English. (Cf. <a href = "#sec213">§ 213. 1</a>.) Compare +the sentences</p> + +<table> +<tr><td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Iubeō eum venīre</b>, <i>I order him to come</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Imperō eī ut veniat</b>, <i>I give orders to him that he is to +come</i></p> +</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "pagenum">159</span> +<a name = "page159"> </a> +We ordinarily translate both of these sentences like the first, but the +difference in meaning between iubeō and imperō in the Latin requires the +<i>infinitive</i> in the one case and the <i>subjunctive</i> in the +other.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec368"><b>368.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>I. 1. Petit atque hortātur ut ipse dīcat. 2. Caesar Helvētiīs +imperrāvit nē per prōvinciam iter facerent. 3. Caesar nōn iussit +Helvētiōs per prōvinciam iter facere. 4. Ille cīvibus persuāsit ut +dē fīnibus suīs discēderent. 5. Caesar prīncipēs monēbit nē +proelium committant. 6. Postulāvit nē cum Helvētiīs aut cum eōrum +sociīs bellum gererent. 7. Ab iīs quaesīvī nē proficīscerentur. +8. Iīs persuādēre nōn potuī ut domī manērent.</p> + +<p>II. 1. Who ordered Cæsar to make the march? (<i>Write this sentence +both with</i> <b>imperō</b> <i>and with</i> <b>iubeō</b>.) 2. The +faithless scouts persuaded him to set out at daybreak. 3. They will +ask him not to inflict punishment. 4. He demanded that they come to +the camp. 5. He advised them to tell everything (<b>omnia</b>).</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Note.</span> Do not forget that the English +infinitive expressing purpose must be rendered by a Latin subjunctive. +Review <a href = "#sec352">§ 352</a>.</p> + +<div class = "plainnote"><a href = "LatinBegin2.html#reading_LXIV"> +Reading Selection</a></div> + +<p class = "illustration"> +<img src = "../images/pic159.png" width = "435" height = "304" +alt = "legion on the march"><br> +<span class = "caption"> +LEGIO ITER FACIT</span></p> + + +<span class = "pagenum">160</span> +<a name = "page160"> </a> + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_LXV"> +LESSON LXV</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">THE SUBJUNCTIVE OF <i>POSSUM</i> · VERBS OF +FEARING</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec369"><b>369.</b></a> +Learn the subjunctive of <b>possum</b> (<a href = +"LatinBegin2.html#sec495">§ 495</a>), and note especially the +position of the accent.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec370"><b>370.</b></a> +<b>Subjunctive after Verbs of Fearing.</b> We have learned that what we +want done or not done is expressed in Latin by a subjunctive clause of +purpose. In this class belong also <i>clauses after verbs of +fearing</i>, for we fear either that something will happen or that it +will not, and we either want it to happen or we do not. If we want a +thing to happen and fear that it will not, the purpose clause is +introduced by <b>ut</b>. If we do not want it to happen and fear that it +will, <b>nē</b> is used. Owing to a difference between the English and +Latin idiom we translate <b>ut</b> after a verb of fearing by <i>that +not</i>, and <b>nē</b> by <i>that</i> or <i>lest</i>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec371"><b>371.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXAMPLES</span></p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td> +<b>timeō</b><br> +<b>timēbō</b><br> +<b>timuerō</b><br> +</td> +<td class = "middle"> +<b>ut</b> +</td> +<td class = "leftline"> +<b>veniat</b><br> + <br> +<b>vēnerit</b> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "center"> +<i>I fear, shall fear, shall have feared, that he will not come, has not +come</i></p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td> +<b>timēbam</b><br> +<b>timuī</b><br> +<b>timueram</b><br> +</td> +<td class = "middle"> +<b>ut</b> +</td> +<td class = "leftline"> +<b>venīret</b><br> + <br> +<b>vēnisset</b> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "center"> +<i>I was fearing</i>, <i>feared</i>, <i>had feared</i>, <i>that he would +not come</i>, <i>had not come</i></p> + +<p>The same examples with <b>nē</b> instead of <b>ut</b> would be +translated <i>I fear that</i> or <i>lest he will come</i>, <i>has +come</i>, etc.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec372"><b>372.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Subjunctive after Verbs of +Fearing.</b> <i>Verbs of fearing are followed by a substantive clause of +purpose introduced by <b>ut</b> (<b>that not</b>) or <b>nē</b> +(<b>that</b> or <b>lest</b>).</i></p> + +<p> +<span class = "pagenum">161</span> +<a name = "page161"> </a> +<a name = "sec373"><b>373.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>I. 1. Caesar verēbātur ut supplicium captīvōrum Gallīs placēret. +2. Rōmānī ipsī magnopere verēbantur nē Helvētiī iter per prōvinciam +facerent. 3. Timēbant ut satis reī frūmentāriae mittī posset. +4. Vereor ut hostium impetum sustinēre possim. 5. Timuit nē +impedīmenta ab hostibus capta essent. 6. Caesar numquam timuit nē +legiōnēs vincerentur. 7. Legiōnēs pugnāre nōn timuērunt.<span class += "tag">1</span></p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. Distinguish between what one is afraid <i>to do</i> (complementary +infinitive as here) and what one is afraid <i>will take place</i> or +<i>has taken place</i> (substantive clause with the subjunctive).</div> + +<p>II. 1. We fear that they are not coming. 2. We fear lest they +are coming. 3. We feared that they had come. 4. We feared that +they had not come. 5. They feared greatly that the camp could not +be defended. 6. Almost all feared<span class = "tag">1</span> to +leave the camp.</p> + +<div class = "plainnote"><a href = "LatinBegin2.html#reading_LXV"> +Reading Selection</a></div> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_LXVI"> +LESSON LXVI</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">THE PARTICIPLES</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec374"><b>374.</b></a> +The Latin verb has the following Participles:<span class = +"tag">1</span></p> + +<table class = "lines"> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th>Conj. I</th> +<th>Conj. II</th> +<th colspan = "2">Conj. III</th> +<th>Conj. IV</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "smallhead" colspan = "5">ACTIVE</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead smaller">Present</td> +<td>amā<b>ns</b><br> +<i>loving</i></td> +<td>monē<b>ns</b><br> +<i>advising</i></td> +<td>regē<b>ns</b><br> +<i>ruling</i></td> +<td>capiē<b>ns</b><br> +<i>taking</i></td> +<td>audiē<b>ns</b><br> +<i>hearing</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead smaller">Future</td> +<td>amāt<b>ūrus</b><br> +<i>about to love</i></td> +<td>monit<b>ūrus</b><br> +<i>about to advise</i></td> +<td>rēct<b>ūrus</b><br> +<i>about to rule</i></td> +<td>capt<b>ūrus</b><br> +<i>about to take</i></td> +<td>audīt<b>ūrus</b><br> +<i>about to hear</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "smallhead" colspan = "5">PASSIVE</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead smaller">Perfect</td> +<td>amāt<b>us</b><br> +<i>loved, having been loved</i></td> +<td>monit<b>us</b><br> +<i>advised, having been advised</i></td> +<td>rēct<b>us</b><br> +<i>ruled, having been ruled</i></td> +<td>capt<b>us</b><br> +<i>taken, having been taken</i></td> +<td>audīt<b>us</b><br> +<i>heard, having been heard</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "sidehead smaller">Future<span class = "tag">2</span></td> +<td>ama<b>ndus</b><br> +<i>to be loved</i></td> +<td>mone<b>ndus</b><br> +<i>to be advised</i></td> +<td>rege<b>ndus</b><br> +<i>to be ruled</i></td> +<td>capie<b>ndus</b><br> +<i>to be taken</i></td> +<td>audie<b>ndus</b><br> +<i>to be heard</i></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. Review <a href = "#sec203">§ 203</a>.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. The future passive participle is often called the +<i>gerundive</i>.</div> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "pagenum">162</span> +<a name = "page162"> </a> +<i>a.</i> The present active and future passive participles are formed +from the present stem, and the future active and perfect passive +participles are formed from the participial stem.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> The present active participle is formed by adding <b>-ns</b> +to the present stem. In <b>-iō</b> verbs of the third conjugation, and +in the fourth conjugation, the stem is modified by the addition of +<b>-ē-</b>, as <b>capi-ē-ns</b>, <b>audi-ē-ns</b>. It is declined like +an adjective of one ending of the third declension. (Cf. <a href = +"#sec256">§ 256</a>.)</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "center" colspan = "4"><b>amāns</b>, <i>loving</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "center" colspan = "2"><span class = "smallcaps">Base</span> +<b>amant-</b> +</td> +<td class = "center" colspan = "2"><span class = "smallcaps">Stem</span> +<b>amanti-</b> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "2">Singular</th> +<th colspan = "2">Plural</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "smaller">MASC. AND FEM.</td> +<td class = "smaller">NEUT.</td> +<td class = "smaller">MASC. AND FEM.</td> +<td class = "smaller">NEUT.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td>amā<b>ns</b></td> +<td>amā<b>ns</b></td> +<td>ama<b>ntēs</b></td> +<td>ama<b>ntia</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>ama<b>ntis</b></td> +<td class = "rightpad">ama<b>ntis</b></td> +<td>ama<b>ntium</b></td> +<td>ama<b>ntium</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>ama<b>ntī</b></td> +<td>ama<b>ntī</b></td> +<td>ama<b>ntibus</b></td> +<td>ama<b>ntibus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>ama<b>ntem</b></td> +<td>amā<b>ns</b></td> +<td>ama<b>ntīs</b> <i>or</i> <b>-ēs</b></td> +<td>ama<b>ntia</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>ama<b>ntī</b> <i>or</i> <b>-e</b></td> +<td class = "rightpad">ama<b>ntī</b> <i>or</i> <b>-e</b></td> +<td>ama<b>ntibus</b></td> +<td>ama<b>ntibus</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>(1) When used as an adjective the ablative singular ends in +<b>-ī</b>; when used as a participle or as a substantive, in +<b>-e</b>.</p> + +<p>(2) In a similar way decline <b>monēns</b>, <b>regēns</b>, +<b>capiēns</b>, <b>audiēns</b>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>c.</i> The future active participle is formed by adding <b>-ūrus</b> +to the base of the participial stem. We have already met this form +combined with <b>esse</b> to produce the future active infinitive. (Cf. +<a href = "#sec206">§ 206</a>.)</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>d.</i> For the perfect passive participle see <a href = +"#sec201">§ 201</a>. The future passive participle or gerundive is +formed by adding <b>-ndus</b> to the present stem.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>e.</i> All participles in <b>-us</b> are declined like +<b>bonus</b>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>f.</i> Participles agree with nouns or pronouns like adjectives.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>g.</i> Give all the participles of the following verbs: <b>cūrō</b>, +<b>iubeō</b>, <b>sūmō</b>, <b>iaciō</b>, <b>mūniō</b>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec375"><b>375.</b></a> +<b>Participles of Deponent Verbs.</b> Deponent verbs have the +participles of the active voice as well as of the passive; consequently +every deponent verb has four participles, as,</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td class = "number"><i>Pres. Act.</i></td> +<td><b>hortāns</b>, <i>urging</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number"><i>Fut. Act.</i></td> +<td><b>hortātūrus</b>, <i>about to urge</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number"><i>Perf. Pass.</i> (in form)</td> +<td><b>hortātus</b>, <i>having urged</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "number"><i>Fut. Pass.</i> (<i>Gerundive</i>)</td> +<td><b>hortandus</b>, <i>to be urged</i> +</table> + +<span class = "pagenum">163</span> +<a name = "page163"> </a> +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Observe that the perfect participle of deponent verbs is +passive in form but <i>active</i> in meaning. <i>No other verbs have a +perfect active participle.</i> On the other hand, the future passive +participle of deponent verbs is passive in meaning as in other +verbs.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> Give the participles of <b>cōnor</b>, <b>vereor</b>, +<b>sequor</b>, <b>patior</b>, <b>partior</b>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec376"><b>376.</b></a> +<b>Tenses of the Participle.</b> The tenses express time as follows:</p> + +<p>1. The present active participle corresponds to the English present +active participle in <i>-ing</i>, but can be used only of an action +occurring at the same time as the action of the main verb; as, +<b>mīlitēs īnsequentēs cēpērunt multōs</b>, <i>the soldiers, while +pursuing, captured many.</i> Here the pursuing and the capturing are +going on together.</p> + +<p>2. The perfect participle (excepting of deponents) is regularly +passive and corresponds to the English past participle with or without +the auxiliary <i>having been</i>; as, <b>audītus</b>, <i>heard</i> or +<i>having been heard</i>.</p> + +<p>3. The future active participle, translated <i>about to</i>, etc., +denotes time after the action of the main verb.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec377"><b>377.</b></a> +Review <a href = "#sec203">§§ 203</a>, <a href = "#sec204">204</a>, +and, note the following model sentences:</p> + +<p>1. <b>Mīlitēs currentēs erant dēfessī</b>, <i>the soldiers who were +running</i> (lit. <i>running</i>) <i>were weary</i>.</p> + +<p>2. <b>Caesar profectūrus Rōmam nōn exspectāvit</b>, <i>Cæsar, when +about to set out</i> (lit. <i>about to set out</i>) <i>for Rome, did not +wait</i>.</p> + +<p>3. <b>Oppidum captum vīdimus</b>, <i>we saw the town which had been +captured</i> (lit. <i>captured town</i>).</p> + +<p>4. <b>Imperātor trīduum morātus profectus est</b>, <i>the general, +since</i> (<i>when</i>, or <i>after</i>) <i>he had delayed</i> (lit. +<i>the general, having delayed</i>) <i>three days, set out</i>.</p> + +<p>5. <b>Mīlitēs vīctī terga nōn vertērunt</b>, <i>the soldiers, though +they were conquered</i> (lit. <i>the soldiers conquered</i>), <i>did not +retreat</i>.</p> + +<p>In each of these sentences the literal translation of the participle +is given in parentheses. We note, however, that its proper translation +usually requires a clause beginning with some conjunction (<i>when, +since, after, though</i>, etc.), or a relative clause. Consider, in each +case, what translation will best bring out the thought, and do not, as a +rule, translate the participle literally.</p> + +<p> +<span class = "pagenum">164</span> +<a name = "page164"> </a> +<a name = "sec378"><b>378.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>I. 1. Puer timēns nē capiātur fugit. 2. Aquila īrā commōta avīs +reliquās interficere cōnāta erat. 3. Mīlitēs ab hostibus pressī +tēla iacere nōn potuērunt. 4. Caesar decimam legiōnem laudātūrus ad +prīmum agmen prōgressus est. 5. Imperātor hortātus equitēs ut +fortiter pugnārent signum proeliō dedit. 6. Mīlitēs hostīs octō +milia passuum īnsecūtī multīs cum captīvīs ad castra revertērunt. +7. Sōl oriēns multōs interfectōs vīdit. 8. Rōmānī cōnsilium +audāx suspicātī barbaris sēsē nōn commīsērunt. 9. Nāvis ē portū +ēgressa nūllō in perīculō erat.</p> + +<p>II.<span class = "tag">3</span> 1. The army was in very great danger +while marching through the enemy’s country. 2. Frightened by the +length of the way, they longed for home. 3. When the scouts were +about to set out, they heard the shouts of victory. 4. When we had +delayed many days, we set fire to the buildings and departed. +5. While living at Rome I heard orators much better than these. +6. The soldiers who are fighting across the river are no braver +than we.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. In this exercise use participles for the subordinate clauses.</div> + +<div class = "plainnote"><a href = "LatinBegin2.html#reading_LXVI"> +Reading Selection</a></div> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_LXVII"> +LESSON LXVII</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">THE IRREGULAR VERBS <i>VOLŌ</i>, <i>NŌLŌ</i>, +<i>MĀLŌ</i> · THE ABLATIVE WITH A PARTICIPLE, OR ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec379"><b>379.</b></a> +Learn the principal parts and conjugation of <b>volō</b>, <i>wish</i>; +<b>nōlō</b> (<b>ne</b> + <b>volō</b>), <i>be unwilling</i>; <b>mālō</b> +(<b>magis</b> + <b>volō</b>), <i>be more willing, prefer</i> (<a href = +"LatinBegin2.html#sec497">§ 497</a>). Note the irregularities in +the present indicative, subjunctive, and infinitive, and in the +imperfect subjunctive. (Cf. <a href = "#sec354">§ 354</a>.)</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> These verbs are usually followed by the infinitive with or +without a subject accusative; as, <b>volunt venīre</b>, <i>they wish to +come</i>; <b>volunt amīcōs venīre</b>, <i>they wish their friends to +come</i>. The English usage is the same.<span class = "tag">1</span></p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. Sometimes the subjunctive of purpose is used after these verbs. (See +<a href = "#sec366">§ 366</a>.)</div> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec380"><b>380.</b></a> +Observe the following sentences:</p> + +<p>1. <b>Magistrō laudante omnēs puerī dīligenter labōrant</b>, <i>with +the teacher praising</i>, or <i>since the teacher praises</i>, or <i>the +teacher praising, all the boys labor diligently.</i></p> + +<p> +<span class = "pagenum">165</span> +<a name = "page165"> </a> +2. <b>Caesare dūcente nēmō prōgredī timet</b>, <i>with Cæsar +leading</i>, or <i>when Cæsar leads</i>, or <i>if Cæsar leads</i>, or +<i>Cæsar leading, no one fears to advance.</i></p> + +<p>3. <b>His rēbus cognitīs mīlitēs fūgērunt</b>, <i>when this was +known</i>, or <i>since this was known</i>, or <i>these things having +been learned, the soldiers fled.</i></p> + +<p>4. <b>Proeliō commissō multī vulnerātī sunt</b>, <i>after the battle +had begun</i>, or <i>when the battle had begun</i>, or <i>the battle +having been joined, many were wounded.</i></p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> One of the fundamental ablative relations is expressed in +English by the preposition <i>with</i> (cf. <a href = +"#sec50">§ 50</a>). In each of the sentences above we have a noun +and a participle in agreement in the ablative, and the translation shows +that in each instance the ablative expresses <i>attendant +circumstance</i>. For example, in the first sentence the circumstance +attending or accompanying the diligent labor of the boys is the praise +of the teacher. This is clearly a <i>with</i> relation, and the ablative +is the case to use.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> We observe, further, that the ablative and its participle are +absolutely independent grammatically of the rest of the sentence. If we +were to express the thought in English in a similar way, we should use +the nominative independent or absolute. In Latin the construction is +called the Ablative Absolute, or the Ablative with a Participle. This +form of expression is exceedingly common in Latin, but rather rare in +English, so we must not, as a rule, employ the English absolute +construction to translate the ablative abolute. The attendant +circumstance may be one of <i>time</i> (when or after), or one of +<i>cause</i> (since), or one of <i>concession</i> (though), or one of +<i>condition</i> (if). In each case try to discover the precise +relation, and tranlate the ablative and its participle by a clause which +will best express the thought.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec381"><b>381.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Ablative Absolute.</b> <i>The +ablative of a noun or pronoun with a present or perfect participle in +agreement is used to express attendant circumstance.</i></p> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Note 1.</span> The verb <b>sum</b> has no +present participle. In consequence we often find two nouns or a noun and +an adjective in the ablative absolute with no participle expressed; as, +<b>tē duce</b>, <i>you</i> (being) <i>leader</i>, <i>with you as +leader</i>; <b>patre īnfirmō</b>, <i>my father</i> (being) +<i>weak</i>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Note 2.</span> Be very careful not to put in +the ablative absolute a noun and participle that form the subject or +object of a sentence. Compare</p> + +<table> +<tr><td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>a</i>. <i>The Gauls, having been conquered by Cæsar, returned +home</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>b</i>. <i>The Gauls having been conquered by Cæsar, the army returned +home</i></p> +</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +In <i>a</i> the subject is <i>The Gauls having been conquered by +Cæsar</i>, and we translate,</p> + +<p class = "center"> +<b>Gallī ā Caesare victi domum revertērunt</b> +</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "pagenum">166</span> +<a name = "page166"> </a> +In <i>b</i> the subject is <i>the army</i>. <i>The Gauls having been +conquered by Cæsar</i> is nominative absolute in English, which requires +the ablative absolute in Latin, and we translate, + +<p class = "center"> +<b>Gallīs ā Caesare victīs exercitus domum revertit</b> +</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Note 3.</span> The fact that only deponent +verbs have a perfect active participle (cf. <a href = +"#sec375">§ 375. <i>a</i></a>) often compels a change of voice +when translating from one language to the other. For example, we can +translate <i>Cæsar having encouraged the legions</i> just as it stands, +because <b>hortor</b> is a deponent verb. But if we wish to say <i>Cæsar +having conquered the Gauls</i>, we have to change the voice of the +participle to the passive because <b>vincō</b> is not deponent, and say, +<i>the Gauls having been conquered by Cæsar</i> (see translation +above).</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec382"><b>382.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>I. 1. Māvīs, nōn vīs, vultis, nōlumus. 2. Ut nōlit, ut vellēmus, ut +mālit. 3. Nōlī, velle, nōluisse, mālle. 4. Vult, māvultis, ut +nōllet, nōlīte. 5. Sōle oriente, avēs cantāre incēpērunt. +6. Clāmōribus audītīs, barbarī prōgredī recūsābant. 7. Caesare +legiōnēs hortātō, mīlitēs paulō fortius pugnāvērunt. 8. Hīs rēbus +cognitīs, Helvētiī fīnitimīs persuāsērunt ut sēcum iter facerent. +9. Labōribus cōnfectīs, mīlitēs ā Caesare quaerēbant ut sibi +praemia daret. 10. Conciliō convocātō, prīncipēs ita respondērunt. +11. Dux plūrīs diēs in Helvētiōrum fīnibus morāns multōs vīcōs +incendit. 12. Magnitūdine Germānōrum cognitā, quīdam ex Rōmānis +timēbant. 13. Mercātōribus rogātīs, Caesar nihilō plūs reperīre +potuit.</p> + +<p>II. 1. He was unwilling, lest they prefer, they have wished. +2. You prefer, that they might be unwilling, they wish. 3. We +wish, they had preferred, that he may prefer. 4. Cæsar, when he +heard the rumor (<i>the rumor having been heard</i>), commanded +(<b>imperāre</b>) the legions to advance more quickly. 5. Since +Cæsar was leader, the men were willing to make the journey. 6. A +few, terrified<span class = "tag">2</span> by the reports which they had +heard, preferred to remain at home. 7. After these had been left +behind, the rest hastened as quickly as possible. 8. After Cæsar +had undertaken the business (<i>Cæsar, the business having been +undertaken</i>), he was unwilling to delay longer.<span class = +"tag">3</span></p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. Would the ablative absolute be correct here?</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. Not <b>longius</b>. Why?</div> + +<div class = "plainnote"><a href = "LatinBegin2.html#reading_LXVII"> +Reading Selection</a></div> + + +<span class = "pagenum">167</span> +<a name = "page167"> </a> + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_LXVIII"> +LESSON LXVIII</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">THE IRREGULAR VERB <i>FĪŌ</i> · THE SUBJUNCTIVE OF +RESULT</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec383"><b>383.</b></a> +The verb <b>fīō</b>, <i>be made, happen</i>, serves as the passive of +<b>faciō</b>, <i>make</i>, in the present system. The rest of the verb +is formed regularly from <b>faciō</b>. Learn the principal parts and +conjugation (<a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec500">§ 500</a>). +Observe that the <b>i</b> is long except before <b>-er</b> and in +<b>fit</b>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> The compounds of <b>facio</b> with prepositions usually form +the passive regularly, as,</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<td><i>Active</i></td> +<td><b>cōnficiō, cōnficere, cōnfēcī, cōnfectus</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Passive</i></td> +<td><b>cōnficior, cōnficī, cōnfectus sum</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec384"><b>384.</b></a> +Observe the following sentences:</p> + +<p>1. <b>Terror erat tantus ut omnēs fugerent</b>, <i>the terror was so +great that all fled.</i></p> + +<p>2. <b>Terror erat tantus ut nōn facile mīlitēs sēsē reciperent</b>, +<i>the terror was so great that the soldiers did not easily recover +themselves.</i></p> + +<p>3. <b>Terror fēcit ut omnēs fugerent</b>, <i>terror caused all to +flee</i> (lit. <i>made that all fled</i>).</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Each of these sentences is complex, containing a principal +clause and a subordinate clause.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> The principal clause names a cause and the subordinate clause +states the <i>consequence</i> or <i>result</i> of this cause.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>c.</i> The subordinate clause has its verb in the subjunctive, though +it is translated like an indicative. The construction is called the +<i>subjunctive of consequence or result</i>, and the clause is called a +consecutive or result clause.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>d.</i> In the last example the clause of result is the object of the +verb <b>fēcit</b>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>e.</i> The conjunction introducing the consecutive or result clause +is <b>ut</b> = <i>so that</i>; negative, <b>ut nōn</b> = <i>so that +not</i>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec385"><b>385.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Subjunctive of Result.</b> +<i>Consecutive clauses of result are introduced by <b>ut</b> or <b>ut +nōn</b> and have the verb in the subjunctive.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec386"><b>386.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <i>Object clauses of result with +<b>ut</b> or <b>ut nōn</b> are found after verbs of <b>effecting</b> or +<b>bringing about</b>.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec387"><b>387.</b></a> +<b>Purpose and Result Clauses Compared.</b> There is great similarity in +the expression of purpose and of result in Latin. If +<span class = "pagenum">168</span> +<a name = "page168"> </a> +the sentence is affirmative, both purpose and result clauses may be +introduced by <b>ut</b>; but if the sentence is negative, the purpose +clause has <b>nē</b> and the result clause <b>ut nōn</b>. Result clauses +are often preceded in the main clause by such words as <b>tam</b>, +<b>ita</b>, <b>sic</b> (<i>so</i>), and these serve to point them out. +Compare</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td><i>a.</i></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>Tam graviter vulnerātus est ut caperētur</b> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<i>He was so severely wounded that he was captured</i> +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>b.</i></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>Graviter vulnerātus est ut caperētur</b> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<i>He was severely wounded in order that he might be captured</i> +</p></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>Which sentence contains a result clause, and how is it pointed +out?</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec388"><b>388.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>I. 1. Fit, fīet, ut fīat, fīēbāmus. 2. Fīō, fīēs, ut fierent, fierī, +fīunt. 3. Fīētis, ut fīāmus, fīs, fīemus. 4. Mīlitēs erant tam +tardī ut ante noctem in castra nōn pervenīrent. 5. Sōl facit ut +omnia sint pulchra. 6. Eius modī perīcula erant ut nēmō proficīscī +vellet. 7. Equitēs hostium cum equitātū nostrō in itinere +contendērunt, ita tamen<span class = "tag">1</span> ut nostrī omnibus in +partibus superiōrēs essent. 8. Virtūs mīlitum nostrōrum fēcit ut +hostēs nē ūnum quidem<span class = "tag">2</span> impetum sustinērent. +9. Hominēs erant tam audācēs ut nūllō modō continērī possent. +10. Spatium erat tam parvum ut mīlitēs tēla iacere nōn facile +possent. 11. Hōc proeliō factō barbarī ita perterritī sunt ut ab +ultimīs gentibus lēgātī ad Caesarem mitterentur. 12. Hoc proelium +factum est nē lēgātī ad Caesarem mitterentur.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. <b>ita tamen</b>, <i>with such a result however</i>.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. <b>nē ... quidem</b>, <i>not even</i>. The emphatic word is placed +between.</div> + +<p>II. 1. It will happen, they were being made, that it may happen. +2. It happens, he will be made, to happen. 3. They are made, +we were being made, lest it happen. 4. The soldiers are so brave +that they conquer. 5. The soldiers are brave in order that they may +conquer. 6. The fortification was made so strong that it could not +be taken. 7. The fortification was made strong in order that it +might not be taken. 8. After the town was taken,<span class = +"tag">3</span> the townsmen feared that they would be made slaves. +9. What state is so weak that it is unwilling to defend itself?</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. Ablative absolute.</div> + +<div class = "plainnote"><a href = "LatinBegin2.html#reading_LXVIII"> +Reading Selection</a></div> + + +<span class = "pagenum">169</span> +<a name = "page169"> </a> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_LXIX"> +LESSON LXIX</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">THE SUBJUNCTIVE OF CHARACTERISTIC OR DESCRIPTION · +THE PREDICATE ACCUSATIVE</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec389"><b>389.</b></a> +Akin to the subjunctive of consequence or result is the use of the +subjunctive in clauses of characteristic or description.</p> + +<p>This construction is illustrated in the following sentences:</p> + +<p>1. <b>Quis est quī suam domum nōn amet?</b> <i>who is there who does +not love his own home?</i></p> + +<p>2. <b>Erant quī hoc facere nōllent</b>, <i>there were (some) who were +unwilling to do this.</i></p> + +<p>3. <b>Tū nōn is es quī amīcōs trādās</b>, <i>you are not such a one +as to</i>, or <i>you are not the man to, betray your friends.</i></p> + +<p>4. <b>Nihil videō quod timeam</b>, <i>I see nothing to fear</i> +(nothing of such as character as to fear it).</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Each of these examples contains a descriptive relative clause +which tells what kind of a person or thing the antecedent is. To express +this thought the subjunctive is used. A relative clause that merely +states a fact and does not describe the antecedent uses the indicative. +Compare the sentences</p> + +<table> +<tr><td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>Cæsar is the man who is leading us</i>, <b>Caesar est is quī nōs +dūcit</b><br> +(mere statement of fact, no description, with the indicative) +</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>Cæsar is the man to lead us</i>, <b>Caesar est is quī nōs +dūcat</b><br> +(descriptive relative clause with the subjunctive) +</p> +</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> Observe that in this construction a demonstrative pronoun and +a relative, as is <b>quī</b>, are translated <i>such a one as to, the +man to</i>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>c.</i> In which of the following sentences would you use the +indicative and in which the subjunctive?</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr><td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>These are not the men who did this</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>These are not the men to do this</i></p> +</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec390"><b>390.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Subjunctive of +Characteristic.</b> <i>A relative clause with the subjunctive is often +used to describe an antecedent. This is called the <b>subjunctive of +characteristic or description</b>.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">170</span> +<a name = "page170"> </a> +<a name = "sec391"><b>391.</b></a> +Observe the sentences</p> + +<table> +<tr><td> +<p class = "hanging"> +1. Rōmānī <b>Caesarem cōnsulem</b> fēcērunt, <i>the Romans made <b>Cæsar +consul</b></i>.</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +2. <b>Caesar cōnsul</b> ā Rōmānīs factus est, <i><b>Cæsar</b> was made +<b>consul</b> by the Romans</i>.</p> +</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Observe in 1 that the transitive verb <b>fēcērunt</b>, +<i>made</i>, has two objects: (1) the direct object, <b>Caesarem</b>; +(2) a second object, <b>cōnsulem</b>, referring to the same person as +the direct object and completing the predicate. The second accusative is +called a Predicate Accusative.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> Observe in 2 that when the verb is changed to the passive both +of the accusatives become nominatives, the <i>direct object</i> becoming +the <i>subject</i> and the <i>predicate accusative</i> the <i>predicate +nominative</i>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec392"><b>392.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Two Accusatives.</b> <i>Verbs +of <b>making</b>, <b>choosing</b>, <b>calling</b>, <b>showing</b>, and +the like, may take a predicate accusative along with the direct object. +With the passive voice the two accusatives become nominatives.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec393"><b>393.</b></a> +The verbs commonly found with two accusatives are</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>creo, creāre, creāvī, creātus</b>, <i>choose</i></p> +</td> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>appellō, appellāre, appellāvī, appellātus</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>nōminō, nōmināre, nōmināvī, nōminātus</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>vocō, vocāre, vocāvī, vocātus</b></p> +</td> +<td class = "middle leftline"> +<i>call</i> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>faciō, facere, fēcī, factus</b>, <i>make</i></p> +</td> +<td></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec394"><b>394.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>I. 1. In Germāniae silvis sunt<span class = "tag">1</span> multa +genera ferārum quae reliquīs in locīs nōn vīsa sint. 2. Erant<span +class = "tag">1</span> itinera duo quibus Helvētiī domō discēdere +possent. 3. Erat<span class = "tag">1</span> manus nūlla, nūllum +oppidum, nūllum praesidium quod sē armīs dēfenderet. 4. Tōtō +frūmentō raptō, domī nihil erat quō mortem prohibēre possent. +5. Rōmānī Galbam ducem creāvērunt et summā celeritāte profectī +sunt. 6. Neque erat<span class = "tag">1</span> tantae multitūdinis +quisquam quī morārī vellet. 7. Germānī nōn iī sunt quī adventum +Caesaris vereantur. 8. Cōnsulibus occīsīs erant quī<span class = +"tag">2</span> vellent +<span class = "pagenum">171</span> +<a name = "page171"> </a> +cum rēgem creāre. 9. Pāce factā erat nēmō quī arma trādere nōllet. +10. Inter Helvētiōs quis erat quī nōbilior illō esset?</p> + +<p>II. 1. The Romans called the city Rome. 2. The city was called +Rome by the Romans. 3. The better citizens wished to choose him +king. 4. The brave soldier was not the man to run. 5. There +was no one <span class = "tag">3</span>to call me friend. 6. These +are not the men to<span class = "tag">4</span> betray their friends. +7. There were (some) who called him the bravest of all.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. Remember that when the verb <b>sum</b> precedes its subject it is +translated <i>there is</i>, <i>there are</i>, <i>there were</i>, etc.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. <b>erant quī</b>, <i>there were</i> (some) <i>who</i>. A wholly +indefinite antecedent of <b>quī</b> does not need to be expressed.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. A relative clause of characteristic or description.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +4. See <a href = "#sec389">§ 389.b</a>.</div> + +<div class = "plainnote"><a href = "LatinBegin2.html#reading_LXIX"> +Reading Selection</a></div> + + +<hr class = "tiny"> + +<h5 class = "boldf"> +<a class = "page" href = "LatinBegin2.html#review_VIII"> +Eighth Review, Lessons LXI-LXIX, §§ 527-528</a></h5> + +<hr class = "tiny"> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_LXX"> +LESSON LXX</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">THE CONSTRUCTIONS WITH THE CONJUNCTION <i>CUM</i> · +THE ABLATIVE OF SPECIFICATION</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec395"><b>395.</b></a> +The conjunction <b>cum</b> has the following meanings and +constructions:</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr><td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>cum</b> <span class = "smallcaps">temporal</span> = <i>when</i>, +followed by the indicative or the subjunctive</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>cum</b> <span class = "smallcaps">causal</span> = <i>since</i>, +followed by the subjunctive</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>cum</b> <span class = "smallcaps">concessive</span> = +<i>although</i>, followed by the subjunctive</p> +</td></tr> +</table> + +<p>As you observe, the mood after <b>cum</b> is sometimes indicative and +sometimes subjunctive. The reason for this will be made clear by a study +of the following sentences:</p> + +<p>1. <b>Caesarem vīdī tum cum in Galliā eram</b>, <i>I saw Cæsar at the +time when I was in Gaul</i>.</p> + +<p>2. <b>Caesar in eōs impetum fēcit cum pācem peterent</b>, <i>Cæsar +made an attack upon them when they were seeking peace</i>.</p> + +<p>3. <b>Hoc erat difficile cum paucī sine vulneribus essent</b>, +<i>this was difficult, since only a few were without wounds</i>.</p> + +<p>4. <b>Cum prīmī ōrdinēs fūgissent, tamen reliquī fortiter +cōnsistēbant</b>, <i>though the front ranks had fled, yet the rest +bravely stood their ground</i>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> The underlying principle is one already familiar to you (cf. +<a href = "#sec389">§ 389.a</a>). When the <b>cum</b> clause states +a fact and simply <i>fixes the time</i> at which the main action took +place, the indicative mood is used. So, in the first example, <b>cum in +Galliā eram</b> fixes the time when I saw Cæsar.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "pagenum">172</span> +<a name = "page172"> </a> +<i>b.</i> On the other hand, when the <b>cum</b> clause <i>describes the +circumstances</i> under which the main act took place, the subjunctive +mood is used. So, in the second example, the principal clause states +that Cæsar made an attack, and the <b>cum</b> clause describes the +circumstances under which this act occurred. The idea of <i>time</i> is +also present, but it is subordinate to the idea of <i>description</i>. +Sometimes the descriptive clause is one of <i>cause</i> and we translate +<b>cum</b> by <i>since</i>; sometimes it denotes <i>concession</i> and +<b>cum</b> is translated <i>although</i>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec396"><b>396.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Constructions with +<i>Cum</i></b>. <i>The conjunction <b>cum</b> means <b>when</b>, +<b>since</b>, or <b>although</b>. It is followed by the subjunctive +unless it means <b>when</b> and its clause fixes the time at which the +main action took place.</i></p> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Note.</span> <b>Cum</b> in clauses of +description with the subjunctive is much more common than its use with +the indicative.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec397"><b>397.</b></a> +Note the following sentences:</p> + +<p>1. <b>Oppidum erat parvum magnitūdine sed magnum multitūdine +hominum</b>, <i>the town was small in size but great in +population</i>.</p> + +<p>2. <b>Homō erat corpore īnfīrmus sed validus animō</b>, <i>the man +was weak in body but strong in courage</i>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Observe that <b>magnitūdine</b>, <b>multitūdine</b>, +<b>corpore</b>, and <b>animō</b> tell <i>in what respect</i> something +is true. The relation is one covered by the ablative case, and the +construction is called the <i>ablative of specification</i>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec398"><b>398.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Ablative of Specification.</b> +<i>The ablative is used to denote <b>in what respect</b> something is +true.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec399"><b>399.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">IDIOMS</span></p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr><td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>aliquem certiōrem facere</b>, <i>to inform some one</i> (lit. <i>to +make some one more certain</i>)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>certior fierī</b>, <i>to be informed</i> (lit. <i>to be made more +certain</i>)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>iter dare</b>, <i>to give a right of way, allow to pass</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>obsidēs inter sē dare</b>, <i>to give hostages to each other</i> +</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec400"><b>400.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>I. 1. Helvētiī cum patrum nostrōrum tempore domō prefectī essent, +cōnsulis exercitum in fugam dederant. 2. Cum Caesar in Galliam +vēnit, Helvētiī aliōs agrōs petēbant. 3. Caesar cum in citeriōre +Gallia esset, tamen dē Helvētiōrum cōnsiliīs certior fīēbat. +<span class = "pagenum">173</span> +<a name = "page173"> </a> +4. Cum Helvētiī bellō clārissimī essent, Caesar iter per prōvinciam dare +recūsāvit. 5. Lēgātus cum haec audīvisset, Caesarem certiōrem +fecit. 6. Cum principēs inter sē obsidēs darent, Rōmānī bellum +parāvērunt. 7. Caesar, cum id nūntiātum esset, mātūrat ab urbe +proficīscī. 8. Nē virtūte quidem Gallī erant parēs Germānis. +9. Caesar neque corpore neque animō īnfīrmus erat. 10. Illud +bellum tum incēpit cum Caesar fuit cōnsul.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +Observe in each case what mood follows <b>cum</b>, and try to give the +reasons for its use. In the third sentence the <b>cum</b> clause is +concessive, in the fourth and sixth causal.</p> + +<p>II. 1. That battle was fought at the time when (<b>tum cum</b>) I was +at Rome. 2. Though the horsemen were few in number, nevertheless +they did not retreat. 3. When the camp had been sufficiently +fortified, the enemy returned home. 4. Since the tribes are giving +hostages to each other, we shall inform Cæsar. 5. The Gauls and the +Germans are very unlike in language and laws.</p> + +<div class = "plainnote"><a href = "LatinBegin2.html#reading_LXX"> +Reading Selection</a></div> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_LXXI"> +LESSON LXXI</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">VOCABULARY REVIEW · THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE · THE +PREDICATE GENITIVE</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec401"><b>401.</b></a> +Review the word lists in <a href = +"LatinBegin2.html#sec510">§§ 510</a>, <a href = +"LatinBegin2.html#sec511">511</a>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec402"><b>402.</b></a> +<b>The Gerund.</b> Suppose we had to translate the sentence</p> + +<p class = "center"> +<i>By overcoming the Gauls Cæsar won great glory</i> +</p> + +<p>We can see that <i>overcoming</i> here is a verbal noun corresponding +to the English infinitive in <i>-ing</i>, and that the thought calls for +the ablative of means. To translate this by the Latin infinitive would +be impossible, because the infinitive is indeclinable and therefore has +no ablative case form. Latin, however, has another verbal noun of +corresponding meaning, called the <b>gerund</b>, declined as a neuter of +the second declension in the <i>genitive</i>, <i>dative</i>, +<i>accusative</i>, and <i>ablative singular</i>, and thus supplying the +cases that the infinitive lacks.<span class = "tag">1</span> Hence, to +<span class = "pagenum">174</span> +<a name = "page174"> </a> +decline in Latin the verbal noun <i>overcoming</i>, we should use the +infinitive for the nominative and the gerund for the other cases, as +follows:</p> + +<table class = "lines"> +<tr> +<td class = "middle"><i>Nom.</i></td> +<td class = "middle rightline"><b>superāre</b></td> +<td><i>overcoming</i><br> +<i>to overcome</i></td> +<td class = "middle left smallcaps">Infinitive</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<i>Gen.</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>Dat.</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>Acc.</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>Abl.</i> +</p></td> +<td colspan = "2"><p class = "hanging"> +<b>superandī</b>, <i>of overcoming</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>superandō</b>, <i>for overcoming</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>superandum</b>, <i>overcoming</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>superandō</b>, <i>by overcoming</i></td> +<td class = "middle left smallcaps">Gerund</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>Like the infinitive, the gerund governs the same case as the verb +from which it is derived. So the sentence given above becomes in +Latin</p> + +<p class = "center"> +<b>Superandō Gallōs Caesar magnam glōriam reportāvit</b> +</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. Sometimes, however, the infinitive is used as an accusative.</div> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec403"><b>403.</b></a> +The gerund<span class = "tag">2</span> is formed by adding <b>-ndī, +-ndō, -ndum, -ndō</b>, to the present stem, which is shortened or +otherwise changed, as shown below:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th colspan = "5"> +Paradigm of the Gerund +</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "smallhead">CONJ. I</td> +<td class = "smallhead">CONJ. II</td> +<td class = "smallhead" colspan = "2">CONJ. III</td> +<td class = "smallhead">CONJ. IV</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td>ama<b>ndī</b></td> +<td>mone<b>ndī</b></td> +<td>rege<b>ndī</b></td> +<td>capie<b>ndī</b></td> +<td>audie<b>ndī</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td>ama<b>ndō</b></td> +<td>mone<b>ndō</b></td> +<td>rege<b>ndō</b></td> +<td>capie<b>ndō</b></td> +<td>audie<b>ndō</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td>ama<b>ndum</b></td> +<td>mone<b>ndum</b></td> +<td>rege<b>ndum</b></td> +<td>capie<b>ndum</b></td> +<td>audie<b>ndum</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td>ama<b>ndō</b></td> +<td>mone<b>ndō</b></td> +<td>rege<b>ndō</b></td> +<td>capie<b>ndō</b></td> +<td>audie<b>ndō</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Give the gerund of <b>cūrō</b>, <b>dēleō</b>, <b>sūmō</b>, +<b>iaciō</b>, <b>veniō</b>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> Deponent verbs have the gerund of the active voice (see <a +href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec493">§ 493</a>). Give the gerund of +<b>cōnor</b>, <b>vereor</b>, <b>sequor</b>, <b>patior</b>, +<b>partior</b>.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. The gerund is the neuter singular of the future passive participle +used as a noun, and has the same formation. (Cf. <a href = +"#sec374">§ 374. <i>d</i></a>.)</div> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec404"><b>404.</b></a> +<b>The Gerundive.</b> The gerundive is the name given to the future +passive participle (<a href = "#sec374">§ 374. <i>d</i></a>) +when the participle approaches the meaning of a verbal noun and is +translated like a gerund. It is the adjective corresponding to the +gerund. For example, to translate <i>the plan of waging war</i>, we may +use the gerund with its direct object and say <b>cōnsilium gerendī +bellum</b>; or we may use the gerundive and say <b>cōnsilium bellī +gerendī</b>, which means, literally, <i>the plan of the war to be +waged</i>, but which came to have the same force as the gerund with its +object, and was even preferred to it.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">175</span> +<a name = "page175"> </a> +<a name = "sec405"><b>405.</b></a> +Compare the following parallel uses of the gerund and gerundive:</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td></td> +<th>Gerund</th> +<th>Gerundive</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Gen.</i></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>Spēs faciendī pācem</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>The hope of making peace</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>Spēs faciendae pācis</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>The hope of making peace</i> +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Dat.</i></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>Locus idōneus pugnandō</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>A place suitable for fighting</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>Locus idōneus castrīs pōnendīs</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>A place suitable for pitching camp</i> +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Acc.</i></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>Mīsit equitēs ad īnsequendum</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>He sent horsemen to pursue</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>Mīsit equitēs ad īnsequendōs hostīs</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>He sent horsemen to pursue the enemy</i> +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>Abl.</i></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>Nārrandō fābulās magister puerīs placuit</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>The teacher pleased the boys by telling stories</i> +</p></td> +<td><p class = "hanging"> +<b>Nārrandīs fābulīs magister puerīs placuit</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>The teacher pleased the boys by telling stories</i> +</p></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> We observe</p> + +<p class = "note"> +(1) That the gerund is a noun and the gerundive an adjective.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +(2) That the gerund, being a noun, may stand alone or with an +object.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +(3) That the gerundive, being an adjective, is used only in agreement +with a noun.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec406"><b>406.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Gerund and Gerundive.</b> +1. <i>The Gerund is a verbal noun and is used only in the genitive, +dative, accusative, and ablative singular. The constructions of these +cases are in general the same as those of other nouns.</i></p> + +<p>2. <i>The Gerundive is a verbal adjective and must be used instead of +gerund + object excepting in the genitive and in the ablative without a +preposition. Even in these instances the gerundive construction is more +usual.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec407"><b>407.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Gerund or Gerundive of +Purpose.</b> <i>The accusative of the gerund or gerundive with</i> +<b>ad</b>, <i>or the genitive with <b>causā</b><span class = +"tag">3</span> (= for the sake of), is used to express purpose.</i></p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th>Gerund</th> +<th>Gerundive</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Ad audiendum vēnērunt</b> or</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Audiendī causā vēnērunt</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>They came to hear</i></p> +</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Ad urbem videndam vēnērunt</b> or</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Urbis videndae causā vēnērunt</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>They came to see the city</i> +</p></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. <b>causā</b> always <i>follows</i> the genitive.</div> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "pagenum">176</span> +<a name = "page176"> </a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Note.</span> These sentences might, of course, +be written with the subjunctive of purpose,—<b>vēnērunt ut +audīrent</b>; <b>vēnērunt ut urbem vidērent.</b> In short expressions, +however, the gerund and gerundive of purpose are rather more common.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec408"><b>408.</b></a> +We have learned that the word denoting the owner or possessor of +something is in the genitive, as, <b>equus Galbae</b>, <i>Galba’s +horse.</i> If, now, we wish to express the idea <i>the horse is +Galba’s</i>, Galba remains the possessor, and hence in the genitive as +before, but now stands in the predicate, as, <b>equus est Galbae</b>. +Hence this is called the predicate genitive.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec409"><b>409.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Predicate Genitive.</b> <i>The +possessive genitive often stands in the predicate, especially after the +forms of <b>sum</b>, and is then called the predicate genitive.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec410"><b>410.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">IDIOMS</span></p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr><td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>alīcui negōtium dare</b>, <i>to employ someone</i> (lit. <i>to give +business to some one</i>)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>novīs rēbus studēre</b>, <i>to be eager for a revolution</i> (lit. +<i>to be eager for new things</i>)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>reī mīlitāris perītissimus</b>, <i>very skillful in the art of +war</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>sē suaque omnia</b>, <i>themselves and all their possessions</i></p> +</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec411"><b>411.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>I. 1. Caesar cum in Galliā bellum gereret, militibus decimae legiōnis +maximē fāvit quia reī mīlitāris perītissimī erant. 2. Sociīs +negōtium dedit reī frumentāriae cūrandae. 3. Lēgāti nōn sōlum +audiendī causā sed etiam dicendī causā vēnērunt. 4. Imperātor +iussit explōrātōres locum idōneum mūnindō reperīre. 5. Nuper hae +gentēs novīs rēbus studēbant; mox iīs persuādēbō ut Caesarī sē suaque +omnia dēdant. 6. Iubēre est regīnae<span class = "tag">1</span> et +pārēre est multitūdinis.<span class = "tag">4</span> 7. Hōc proeliō +factō quīdam ex hostibus ad pācem petendam venērunt. 8. Erant quī +arma trādere nōllent. 9. Hostēs tam celeriter prōgressī sunt ut +spatium pīla in hostīs iaciendī non darētur. 10. Spatium neque arma +capiendī<span class = "tag">5</span> neque auxilī petendī<span class = +"tag">2</span> datum est.</p> + +<p> +<span class = "pagenum">177</span> +<a name = "page177"> </a> +II. 1. These ornaments <span class = "tag">6</span>belong to Cornelia. +2. Men very skillful in the art of war were sent <span class = +"tag">7</span>to capture the town. 3. The scouts found a hill +suitable for fortifying very near to the river. 4. Soon the cavalry +will come <span class = "tag">8</span>to seek supplies. 5. The mind +of the Gauls is eager for revolution and for undertaking wars. +6. To lead the line of battle <span class = "tag">8</span>belongs +to the general. 7. <span class = "tag">10</span>Whom shall we +employ to look after the grain supply?</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +4. Predicate genitive.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +5. Which of these expressions is gerund and which gerundive?</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +6. <i>belong to</i> = <i>are of</i>.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +7. Use the gerundive with <b>ad</b>.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +8. Use the genitive with <b>causā</b>. Where should <b>causā</b> +stand?</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +9. Compare the first sentence.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +10. Compare the second sentence in the Latin above.</div> + +<div class = "plainnote"><a href = "LatinBegin2.html#reading_LXXI"> +Reading Selection</a></div> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_LXXII"> +LESSON LXXII</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">THE IRREGULAR VERB <i>EŌ</i> · INDIRECT +STATEMENTS</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec412"><b>412.</b></a> +Learn the principal parts and the conjugation of <b>eō</b>, <i>go</i> +(<a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec499">§ 499</a>).</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Notice that <b>ī-</b>, the root of <b>eō</b>, is changed to +<b>e-</b> before a vowel, excepting in <b>iēns</b>, the nominative of +the present participle. In the perfect system <b>-v-</b> is regularly +dropped.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec413"><b>413.</b></a> +Learn the meaning and principal parts of the following compounds of +<b>eō</b> with prepositions:</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr><td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>ad´eō, adī´re, ad´iī, ad´itus</b>, <i>go to, visit</i>, with the +accusative</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>ex´eō, exī´re, ex´iī, ex´itus</b>, <i>go forth</i>, with <b>ex</b> or +<b>dē</b> and the ablative of the place from which</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>in´eō, inī´re, in´iī, in´itus</b>, <i>begin, enter upon</i>, with the +accusative</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>red´eō, redī´re, red´iī, red´itus</b>, <i>return</i>, with <b>ad</b> +or <b>in</b> and the accusative of the place to which</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>trāns´eō, trānsī´re, trāns´iī, trāns´itus</b>, <i>cross</i>, with the +accusative</p> +</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec414"><b>414.</b></a> +<b>Indirect Statements in English.</b> Direct statements are those which +the speaker or writer makes himself or which are quoted in his exact +language. Indirect statements are those reported in a different form of +words from that used by the speaker or writer. Compare the following +direct and indirect statements:</p> + +<table class = "fixed lines"> +<tr> +<td class = "middle rightline" width = "33%"> +Direct statements +</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +1. The Gauls are brave</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +2. The Gauls were brave</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +3. The Gauls will be brave</p> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "middle rightline"> +<span class = "pagenum">178</span> +<a name = "page178"> </a> +<p class = "hanging"> +Indirect statements after a verb in the present tense</p> +</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +1. <i>He says</i> that the Gauls <i>are</i> brave</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +2. <i>He says</i> that the Gauls <i>were</i> brave</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +3. <i>He says</i> that the Gauls <i>will be</i> brave</p> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "middle rightline"> +<p class = "hanging"> +Indirect statements after a verb in a past tense</p> +</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +1. <i>He said</i> that the Gauls <i>were</i> brave</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +2. <i>He said</i> that the Gauls <i>had been</i> brave</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +3. <i>He said</i> that the Gauls <i>would be</i> brave</p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + + +<p>We see that in English</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> The indirect statement forms a clause introduced by the +conjunction <i>that</i>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> The verb is finite (cf. <a href = "#sec173">§ 173</a>) +and its subject is in the nominative.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>c.</i> The tenses of the verbs originally used are changed after the +past tense, <i>He said.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec415"><b>415.</b></a> +<b>Indirect Statements in Latin.</b> In Latin the direct and indirect +statements above would be as follows:</p> + +<table class = "lines"> +<tr> +<td class = "middle right smallcaps"> +Direct<br> +Statements +</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +1. <b>Gallī sunt fortēs</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +2. <b>Gallī erant fortēs</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +3. <b>Gallī erunt fortēs</b> +</p> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "middle right smallcaps"> +Indirect<br> +Statements +</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +1. <b>Dīcit</b> or <b>Dīxit Gallōs esse fortīs</b> (<i>He says</i> or +<i>He said the Gauls to be brave</i>)<span class = "tag">1</span></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +2. <b>Dīcit</b> or <b>Dīxit Gallōs fuisse fortīs</b> (<i>He says</i> or +<i>He said the Gauls to have been brave</i>)<span class = +"tag">1</span></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +3. <b>Dīcit</b> or <b>Dīxit Gallōs futūrōs esse fortīs</b> (<i>He +says</i> or <i>He said the Gauls to be about to be brave</i>)<span class += "tag">1</span></p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. These parenthetical renderings are not inserted as translations, but +merely to show the literal meaning of the Latin.</div> + +<p>Comparing these Latin indirect statements with the English in the +preceding section, we observe three marked differences:</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> There is no conjunction corresponding to <i>that</i>.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> The verb is in the infinitive and its subject is in the +accusative.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>c.</i> The tenses of the infinitive are not changed after a past +tense of the principal verb.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec416"><b>416.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Indirect Statements.</b> +<i>When a direct statement becomes indirect, the principal verb is +changed to the infinitive and its subject nominative becomes subject +accusative of the infinitive.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">179</span> +<a name = "page179"> </a> +<a name = "sec417"><b>417.</b></a> +<b>Tenses of the Infinitive.</b> When the sentences in <a href = +"#sec415">§ 415</a> were changed from the direct to the indirect +form of statement, <b>sunt</b> became <b>esse</b>, <b>erant</b> became +<b>fuisse</b>, and <b>erunt</b> became <b>futūrōs esse</b>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec418"><b>418.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Infinitive Tenses in Indirect +Statements.</b> <i>A present indicative of a direct statement becomes +present infinitive of the indirect, a past indicative becomes perfect +infinitive, and a future indicative becomes future infinitive.</i></p> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Note.</span> When translating into Latin an +English indirect statement, first decide what tense of the indicative +would have been used in the direct form. That will show you what tense +of the infinitive to use in the indirect.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec419"><b>419.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Verbs followed by Indirect +Statements.</b> <i>The accusative-with-infinitive construction in +indirect statements is found after verbs of <b>saying</b>, +<b>telling</b>, <b>knowing</b>, <b>thinking</b>, and +<b>perceiving</b>.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec420"><b>420.</b></a> +Verbs regularly followed by indirect statements are:</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<td><i>a</i>.</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +Verbs of saying and telling:</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>dīcō, dīcere, dīxī, dictus</b>, <i>say</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>negō, negāre, negāvī, negātus</b>, <i>deny, say not</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>nūntiō, nūntiāre, nūntiāvī, nūntiātus</b>, <i>announce</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>respondeō, respondēre, respondī, respōnsus</b>, <i>reply</i> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>b</i>.</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +Verbs of knowing:</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>cognōscō, cognōscere, cognōvī, cognitus</b>, <i>learn</i>, (in the +perf.) <i>know</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>sciō, scīre, scīvī, scītus</b>, <i>know</i> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>c</i>.</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +Verbs of thinking:</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>arbitror, arbitrārī, arbitrātus sum</b>, <i>think, consider</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>exīstimō, exīstimāre, exīstimāvī, exīstimātus</b>, <i>think, +believe</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>iūdicō, iūdicāre, iūdicāvi, iūdicātus</b>, <i>judge, decide</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>putō, putāre, putāvī, putātus</b>, <i>reckon, think</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>spērō, spērāre, spērāvi, spērātus</b>, <i>hope</i> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>d</i>.</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +Verbs of perceiving:</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>audiō, audīre, audīvī, audītus</b>, <i>hear</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>sentiō, sentīre, sēnsī, sēnsus</b>, <i>feel, perceive</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>videō, vidēre, vīdī, vīsus</b>, <i>see</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>intellegō, intellegere, intellēxī, intellēctus</b>, <i>understand, +perceive</i></p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>Learn such of these verbs as are new to you.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<span class = "pagenum">180</span> +<a name = "page180"> </a> +<a name = "sec421"><b>421.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">IDIOMS</span></p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr><td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>postrīdiē eius diēī</b>, <i>on the next day</i> (lit. <i>on the next +day of that day</i>)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>initā aestāte</b>, <i>at the beginning of summer</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>memoriā tenēre</b>, <i>to remember</i> (lit. <i>to hold by +memory</i>)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>per explōrātōrēs cognōscere</b>, <i>to learn through scouts</i></p> +</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec422"><b>422.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>I. 1. It, īmus, īte, īre. 2. Euntī, iisse <i>or</i> īsse, ībunt, +eunt. 3. Eundi, ut eant, ībitis, īs. 4. Nē īrent, ī, ībant, +ierat. 5. Caesar per explorātores cognōvit Gallōs flūmen trānsīsse. +6. Rōmānī audīvērunt Helvētiōs initā aestāte dē fīnibus suīs +exitūrōs esse. 7. Legātī respondērunt nēminem ante Caesarem illam +īnsulam adīsse. 8. Prīncipēs Gallōrum dīcunt sē nūllum cōnsilium +contrā Caesaris imperium initūrōs esse. 9. Arbitrāmur potentiam +rēgīnae esse maiōrem quam cīvium. 10. Rōmānī negant se lībertātem +Gallīs ēreptūrōs esse. 11. Hīs rēbus cognitīs sēnsimus lēgātōs non +vēnisse ad pācem petendam. 12. Helvētii sciunt Rōmānōs priōrēs +victōriās memoriā tenēre. 13. Sociī cum intellegerent multōs +vulnerārī, statuērunt in suōs fīnīs redīre. 14. Aliquis nūntiāvit +Mārcum cōnsulem creātum esse.</p> + +<p>II. 1. The boy is slow. He says that the boy is, was, (and) will be +slow. 2. The horse is, has been, (and) will be strong. He judged +that the horse was, had been, (and) would be strong. 3. We think +that the army will go forth from the camp at the beginning of summer. +4. The next day we learned through scouts that the enemy’s town was +ten miles off.<span class = "tag">2</span> 5. The king replied that +the ornaments belonged to<span class = "tag">3</span> the queen.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. <i>to be off, to be distant</i>, <b>abesse</b>.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. Latin, <i>were of</i> (<a href = "#sec409">§ 409</a>).</div> + +<div class = "plainnote"><a href = "LatinBegin2.html#reading_LXXII"> +Reading Selection</a></div> + +<p class = "illustration"> +<img src = "../images/pic180.png" width = "248" height = "54" +alt = "trumpet"><br> +<span class = "caption"> +TUBA</span></p> + + +<span class = "pagenum">181</span> +<a name = "page181"> </a> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_LXXIII"> +LESSON LXXIII</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">VOCABULARY REVIEW · THE IRREGULAR VERB <i>FERŌ</i> · +THE DATIVE WITH COMPOUNDS</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec423"><b>423.</b></a> +Review the word lists in <a href = +"LatinBegin2.html#sec513">§§ 513</a>, <a href = +"LatinBegin2.html#sec514">514</a>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec424"><b>424.</b></a> +Learn the principal parts and conjugation of the verb <b>ferō</b>, +<i>bear</i> (<a href = "LatinBegin2.html#sec498">§ 498</a>).</p> + +<p>1. Learn the principal parts and meanings of the following compounds +of ferō, <i>bear</i>:</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr><td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>ad´ferō, adfer´re, at´tulī, adlā´tus</b>, <i>bring to; report</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>cōn´ferō, cōnfer´re, con´tulī, conlā´tus</b>, <i>bring together, +collect</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>dē´ferō, dēfer´re, dē´tulī, dēlā´tus</b>, <i>bring to; report; grant, +confer</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>īn´ferō, īnfer´re, in´tulī, inlā´tus</b>, <i>bring in, bring +against</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>re´ferō, refer´re, ret´tulī, relā´tus</b>, <i>bear back, +report</i></p> +</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec425"><b>425.</b></a> +The dative is the case of the indirect object. Many intransitive verbs +take an indirect object and are therefore used with the dative (cf. <a +href = "#sec153">§ 153</a>). Transitive verbs take a direct object +in the accusative; but sometimes they have an indirect object or dative +as well. <i>The whole question, then, as to whether or not a verb takes +the dative, defends upon its capacity for governing an indirect +object.</i> A number of verbs, some transitive and some intransitive, +which in their simple form would not take an indirect object, when +compounded with certain prepositions, have a meaning which calls for an +indirect object. Observe the following sentences:</p> + +<table> +<tr><td> +<p class = "hanging"> +1. <b>Haec rēs exercituī magnam calamitātem attulit</b>, <i>this +circumstance brought great disaster to the army.</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +2. <b>Germānī Gallīs bellum īnferunt</b>, <i>the Germans make war upon +the Gauls.</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +3. <b>Hae cōpiae proeliō nōn intererant</b>, <i>these troops did not +take part in the battle.</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +4. <b>Equitēs fugientibus hostibus occurrunt</b>, <i>the horsemen meet +the fleeing enemy.</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +5. <b>Galba cōpiīs fīlium praefēcit</b>, <i>Galba put his son in command +of the troops.</i></p> +</td></tr> +</table> + +<p> +<span class = "pagenum">182</span> +<a name = "page182"> </a> +In each sentence there is a dative, and in each a verb combined with a +preposition. In no case would the simple verb take the dative.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec426"><b>426.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Dative with Compounds.</b> +<i>Some verbs compounded with <b>ad</b>, <b>ante</b>, <b>con</b>, +<b>dē</b>, <b>in</b>, <b>inter</b>, <b>ob</b>, <b>post</b>, <b>prae</b>, +<b>prō</b>, <b>sub</b>, <b>super</b>, admit the dative of the indirect +object. Transitive compounds may take both an accusative and a +dative.</i></p> + +<p class = "note"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Note 1.</span> Among such verbs are<span class += "tag">1</span></p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr><td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>ad´ferō, adfer´re, at´tulī, adlā´tus</b>, <i>bring to; report</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>ad´sum, ades´se, ad´fuī, adfutū´rus</b>, <i>assist; be +present</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>dē´ferō, dēfer´re, dē´tulī, dēlātus</b>, <i>report; grant, +confer</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>dē´sum, dees´se, dē´fuī</b>, ——, <i>be wanting, be +lacking</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>īn´ferō, īnfer´re, in´tulī, inlā´tus</b>, <i>bring against, bring +upon</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>inter´sum, interes´se, inter´fuī, interfutū´rus</b>, <i>take part +in</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>occur´rō, occur´rere, occur´rī, occur´sus</b>, <i>run against, +meet</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>praefi´ciō, praefi´cere, praefē´cī, praefec´tus</b>, <i>appoint over, +place in command of</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>prae´sum, praees´se, prae´fuī</b>, ——, <i>be over, be in +command</i></p> +</td></tr> +</table> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. But the accusative with <b>ad</b> or <b>in</b> is used with some of +these, when the idea of <i>motion to</i> or <i>against</i> is +strong.</div> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec427"><b>427.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">IDIOMS</span></p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr><td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>graviter</b> or <b>molestē ferre</b>, <i>to be annoyed at, to be +indignant at</i>, followed by the accusative and infinitive</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>sē cōnferre ad</b> or <b>in</b>, with the accusative, <i>to betake +one’s self to</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>alicui bellum īnferre</b>, <i>to make war upon some one</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>pedem referre</b>, <i>to retreat</i> (lit. <i>to bear back the +foot</i>)</p> +</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec428"><b>428.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>I. 1. Fer, ferent, ut ferant, ferunt. 2. Ferte, ut ferrent, +tulisse, tulerant. 3. Tulimus, ferēns, lātus esse, ferre. +4. Cum nāvigia insulae adpropinquārent, barbarī terrōre commōtī +pedem referre cōnātī sunt. 5. Gallī molestē ferēbant Rōmānōs agrōs +vastāre. 6. Caesar sociīs imperāvit nē fīnitimis suīs bellum +īnferrent. 7. Explorātōrēs, qui Caesarī occurrērunt, dīxērunt +exercitum hostium vulneribus dēfessum sēsē in alium locum contulisse. +8. Hostes sciēbant Rōmānōs frūmentō egēre et hanc rem Caesarī +summum perīculum adlātūram esse. 9. Impedīmentīs in ūnum locum +conlātis, aliquī mīlitum flūmen quod nōn longē +<span class = "pagenum">183</span> +<a name = "page183"> </a> +aberat trānsiērunt. 10. Hōs rēx hortātus est ut ōrāculum adīrent et rēs +audītās ad sē referrent. 11. Quem imperātor illī legiōnī praefēcit? +Pūblius illī legiōnī pracerat. 12. Cum esset Caesar in citeriōre +Galliā, crēbrī ad eum<span class = "tag">2</span> rūmōrēs adferēbantur +litterīsque quoque certior fīēbat Gallōs obsidēs inter sē dare.</p> + +<p>II. 1. The Gauls will make war upon Cæsar’s allies. 2. We heard +that the Gauls would make war upon Cæsar’s allies. 3. Publius did +not take part in that battle. 4. We have been informed that Publius +did not take part in that battle. 5. The man who was in command of +the cavalry was wounded and began to retreat. 6. Cæsar did not +place you in command of the cohort to bring<span class = "tag">3</span> +disaster upon the army.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. Observe that when <b>adferō</b> denotes <i>motion to</i>, it is not +followed by the dative; cf. <ins class = "explanation" title = +"previous footnote, accusative with ‘ad’ or ‘in’">footnote, p. +182</ins>.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. Not the infinitive. (Cf. <a href = "#sec352">§ 352</a>.)</div> + +<div class = "plainnote"><a href = "LatinBegin2.html#reading_LXXIII"> +Reading Selection</a></div> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_LXXIV"> +LESSON LXXIV</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">VOCABULARY REVIEW · THE SUBJUNCTIVE IN INDIRECT +QUESTIONS</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec429"><b>429.</b></a> +Review the word lists in <a href = +"LatinBegin2.html#sec517">§§ 517</a>, <a href = +"LatinBegin2.html#sec518">518</a>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec430"><b>430.</b></a> +When we report a statement instead of giving it directly, we have an +indirect statement. (Cf. <a href = "#sec414">§ 414</a>.) So, if we +report a question instead of asking it directly, we have an indirect +question.</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<th>Direct Question</th> +<th>Indirect Question</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "center"> +<i>Who conquered the Gauls?</i></td> +<td class = "center"> +<i>He asked who conquered the Gauls</i></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> An indirect question depends, usually as object, upon a verb +of asking (as <b>petō</b>, <b>postulō</b>, <b>quaerō</b>, <b>rogō</b>) +or upon some verb or expression of saying or mental action. (Cf. <a href += "#sec420">§ 420</a>.)</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec431"><b>431.</b></a> +Compare the following direct and indirect questions:</p> + +<table class = "lines"> +<tr> +<th>Direct</th> +<th colspan = "2">Indirect</th> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "middle rightline" rowspan = "2"> +<b>Quis Gallōs vincit?</b><br> +<i>Who is conquering the Gauls?</i> +</td> +<td><i>a.</i></td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Rogat quis Gallōs vincat</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>He asks who is conquering the Gauls</i></p> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>b.</i></td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Rogavit quis Gallōs vinceret</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>He asked who was conquering the Gauls</i></p> +</td> +</tr> + + +<tr> +<td class = "middle rightline" rowspan = "2"> +<span class = "pagenum">184</span> +<a name = "page184"> </a> +<b>Ubī est Rōma?</b><br> +<i>Where is Rome?</i> +</td> +<td><i>a.</i></td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Rogat ubi sit Rōma</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>He asks where Rome is</i></p> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>b.</i></td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Rogāvit ubi esset Rōma</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>He asked where Rome was</i></p> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "middle rightline" rowspan = "2"> +<b>Caesarne Gallōs vīcit?</b><br> +<i>Did Cæsar conquer the Gauls?</i> +</td> +<td><i>a.</i></td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Rogat num Caesar Gallōs vīcerit</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>He asks whether Cæsar conquered the Gauls</i></p> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><i>b.</i></td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Rogāvit num Caesar Gallōs vīcisset</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>He asked whether Cæsar had conquered the Gauls</i></p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> The verb in a direct question is in the indicative mood, but +the mood is subjunctive in an indirect question.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> The tense of the subjunctive follows the rules for tense +sequence.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>c.</i> Indirect questions are introduced by the same interrogative +words as introduce direct questions, excepting +that<i>yes</i>-or-<i>no</i> direct questions (cf. <a href = +"#sec210">§ 210</a>) on becoming indirect are usually introduced by +<b>num</b>, <i>whether</i>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec432"><b>432.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Indirect Questions.</b> <i>In +an indirect question the verb is in the subjunctive and its tense is +determined by the law for tense sequence.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec433"><b>433.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">IDIOMS</span></p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr><td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>dē tertiā vigiliā</b>, <i>about the third watch</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>iniūriās alicui īnferre</b>, <i>to inflict injuries upon some one +</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>facere verba prō</b>, with the ablative, <i>to speak in behalf of +</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>in reliquum tempus</b>, <i>for the future</i></p> +</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec434"><b>434.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>I. 1. Rēx rogāvit quid lēgātī postulārent et cūr ad sē vēnissent. +2. Quaesīvit quoque num nec recentīs iniūriās nec dubiam Rōmānōrum +amīcitiam memoriā tenērent. 3. Vidētisne quae oppida hostēs +oppugnāverint? 4. Nōnne scītis cūr Gallī sub montem sēse +contulerint? 5. Audīvimus quās iniūrias tibi Germānī intulissent. +6. Dē tertiā vigiliā imperātor mīsit hominēs quī cognōscerent quae +esset nātūra montis. 7. Prō hīs ōrātor verba fēcit et rogāvit cūr +cōnsulēs nāvīs ad plēnem summī perīculī locum mittere vellent. +8. Lēgātīs convocātīs dēmōnstrāvit quid fierī vellet. +9. Nūntius referēbat quid +<span class = "pagenum">185</span> +<a name = "page185"> </a> +in Gallōrum conciliō dē armīs trādendīs dictum esset. 10. Moneō nē +in reliquum tempus peditēs et equitēs trāns flūmen dūcās.</p> + +<p>II. 1. What hill did they seize? I see what hill they seized. +2. Who has inflicted these injuries upon our dependents? +3. They asked who had inflicted those injuries upon their +dependents. 4. Whither did you go about the third watch? You know +whither I went. 5. At what time did the boys return home? I will +ask at what time the boys returned home.</p> + +<div class = "plainnote"><a href = "LatinBegin2.html#reading_LXXIV"> +Reading Selection</a></div> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_LXXV"> +LESSON LXXV</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">VOCABULARY REVIEW · THE DATIVE OF PURPOSE, OR END +FOR WHICH</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec435"><b>435.</b></a> +Review the word lists in <a href = +"LatinBegin2.html#sec521">§§ 521</a>, <a href = +"LatinBegin2.html#sec522">522</a>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec436"><b>436.</b></a> +Observe the following sentences:</p> + +<table> +<tr><td> +<p class = "hanging"> +1. <b>Explōrātōrēs locum castrīs dēlēgērunt</b>, <i>the scouts chose a +place for a camp.</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +2. <b>Hoc erat magnō impedīmentō Gallīs</b>, <i>this was</i> (for) <i>a +great hindrance to the Gauls.</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +3. <b>Duās legiōnēs praesidiō castrīs relīquit</b>, <i>he left two +legions as</i> (lit. <i>for</i>) <i>a guard to the camp.</i></p> +</td></tr> +</table> + +<p> +In each of these sentences we find a dative expressing the <i>purpose or +end for which</i> something is intended or for which it serves. These +datives are <b>castrīs</b>, <b>impedīmentō</b>, and <b>praesidiō</b>. In +the second and third sentences we find a second dative expressing the +<i>person or thing affected</i> (<b>Gallīs</b> and <b>castrīs</b>). As +you notice, these are true datives, covering the relations of <i>for +which</i> and <i>to which</i>. (Cf. <a href = +"#sec43">§ 43</a>.)</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec437"><b>437.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Dative of Purpose or End.</b> +<i>The dative is used to denote the <b>purpose or end for which</b>, +often with another dative denoting the <b>person or thing +affected</b>.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec438"><b>438.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">IDIOMS</span></p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr><td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>cōnsilium omittere</b>, <i>to give up a plan</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>locum castrīs dēligere</b>, <i>to choose a place for a camp</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>alicui magnō ūsuī esse</b>, <i>to be of great advantage to some +one</i> (lit. <i>for great advantage to some one</i>)</p> +</td></tr> +</table> + +<p> +<span class = "pagenum">186</span> +<a name = "page186"> </a> +<a name = "sec439"><b>439.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>I. 1. Rogāvit cūr illae cōpiae relictae essent. Respondērunt illās +cōpiās esse praesidiō castrīs. 2. Caesar mīsit explōrātōrēs ad +locum dēligendum castrīs. 3. Quisque exīstimāvit ipsum nōmen +Caesaris magnō terrōrī barbarīs futūrum esse. 4. Prīmā lūce īdem +exercitus proelium ācre commīsit, sed gravia suōrum vulnera magnae cūrae +imperātōrī erant. 5. Rēx respondit amīcitiam populī Rōmānī sibi +ōrnāmentō et praesidiō dēbēre esse. 6. Quis praeerat equitātuī quem +auxiliō Caesarī sociī mīserant? 7. Aliquibus rēs secundae sunt +summae calamitātī et rēs adversae sunt mīrō ūsuī. 8. Gallīs magnō +ad pugnam erat impedīmentō quod equitātus ā dextrō cornū premēbat. +9. Memoria prīstinae virtūtis nōn minus quam metus hostium erat +nostrīs magnō ūsuī. 10. Tam dēnsa erat silva ut prōgredī nōn +possent.</p> + +<p>II. 1. I advise you <span class = "tag">1</span>to give up the plan +<span class = "tag">2</span>of making war upon the brave Gauls. +2. Do you know <span class = "tag">3</span>where the cavalry has +chosen a place for a camp? 3. The fear of the enemy will be of +great advantage to you. 4. Cæsar left three cohorts as (for) a +guard to the baggage. 5. In winter the waves of the lake are so +great <span class = "tag">4</span>that they are (for) a great hindrance +to ships. 6. Cæsar inflicted severe<span class = "tag">5</span> +punishment on those who burned the public buildings.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. Subjunctive of purpose. (Cf. <a href = +"#sec366">§ 366</a>.)</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. Express by the genitive of the gerundive.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. Indirect question.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +4. A clause of result.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +5. <b>gravis, -e.</b></div> + +<div class = "plainnote"><a href = "LatinBegin2.html#reading_LXXV"> +Reading Selection</a></div> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_LXXVI"> +LESSON LXXVI</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">VOCABULARY REVIEW · THE GENITIVE AND ABLATIVE OF +QUALITY OR DESCRIPTION</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec440"><b>440.</b></a> +Review the word lists in <a href = +"LatinBegin2.html#sec524">§§ 524</a>, <a href = +"LatinBegin2.html#sec525">525</a>.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec441"><b>441.</b></a> +Observe the English sentences</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr><td> +<p class = "hanging"> +(1) <i>A man <b>of</b> great courage</i>, or (2) <i>A man <b>with</b> +great courage</i> +</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +(3) <i>A forest <b>of</b> tall trees</i>, or (4) <i>A forest <b>with</b> +tall trees</i></p> +</td></tr> +</table> + +<p>Each of these sentences contains a phrase of quality or description. +In the first two a man is described; in the last two a forest. The +descriptive phrases are introduced by the prepositions <i>of</i> and +<i>with</i>.</p> + +<p> +<span class = "pagenum">187</span> +<a name = "page187"> </a> +In Latin the expression of quality or description is very similar.</p> + +<p>The prepositions <i>of</i> and <i>with</i> suggest the genitive and +the ablative respectively, and we translate the sentences above</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr><td> +<p class = "hanging"> +(1) <b>Vir magnae virtūtis</b>, or (2) <b>Vir magnā virtūte</b></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +(3) <b>Silva altārum arborum</b>, or (4) <b>Silva altīs +arboribus</b></p> +</td></tr> +</table> + +<p>There is, however, one important difference between the Latin and the +English. In English we may say, for example, <i>a man of courage</i>, +using the descriptive phrase without an adjective modifier. <i>In Latin, +however, an adjective modifier must always be used</i>, as above.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> Latin makes a distinction between the use of the two cases in +that <i>numerical descriptions of measure are in the genitive</i> and +<i>descriptions of physical characteristics are in the ablative.</i> +Other descriptive phrases may be in either case.</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec442"><b>442.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXAMPLES</span></p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr><td> +<p class = "hanging"> +1. <b>Fossa duodecim pedum</b>, <i>a ditch of twelve feet</i>.</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +2. <b>Homō magnīs pedibus et parvō capite</b>, <i>a man with big feet +and a small head</i>.</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +3. <b>Rēx erat vir summā audāciā</b> or <b>rēx erat vir summae +audāciae</b>, <i>the king was a man of the greatest boldness</i>.</p> +</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec443"><b>443.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Genitive of Description.</b> +<i>Numerical descriptions of measure are expressed by the genitive with +a modifying adjective.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec444"><b>444.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Ablative of Description.</b> +<i>Descriptions of physical characteristics are expressed by the +ablative with a modifying adjective.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec445"><b>445.</b></a> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rule.</span> <b>Genitive or Ablative of +Description.</b> <i>Descriptions involving neither numerical statements +nor physical characteristics may be expressed by either the genitive or +the ablative with a modifying adjective.</i></p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec446"><b>446.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">IDIOMS</span></p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr><td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>Helvētiīs in animō est</b>, <i>the Helvetii intend</i>, (lit. <i>it +is in mind to the Helvetians</i>)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>in mātrimōnium dare</b>, <i>to give in marriage</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>nihil posse</b>, <i>to have no power</i></p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<b>fossam perdūcere</b>, <i>to construct a ditch</i> (lit. <i>to lead a +ditch through</i>)</p> +</td></tr> +</table> + +<p><span class = "pagenum">188</span> +<a name = "page188"> </a> +<a name = "sec447"><b>447.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>I. 1. Mīlitēs fossam decem pedum per eōrum fīnīs perdūxērunt. +2. Prīnceps Helvētiōrum, vir summae audāciae, prīncipibus gentium +fīnitimārum sorōrēs in mātrimōnium dedit. 3. Eōrum amīcitiam +cōnfīrmāre voluit quō facilius Rōmānīs bellum īnferret. 4. Germanī +et Gallī nōn erant eiusdem gentis. 5. Omnēs ferē Germānī erant +magnīs corporum vīribus.<span class = "tag">1</span> 6. Gallī qui +oppidum fortiter dēfendēbant saxa ingentis magnitūdinis dē mūrō +iaciēbant. 7. Cum Caesar ab explōrātōribus quaereret quī illud +oppidum incolerent, explōrātōrēs respondērunt eōs esse homines summā +virtūte et magnō cōnsiliō. 8. Moenia vīgintī pedum ā sinistrā +parte, et ā dextrā parte flūmen magnae altitūdinis oppidum dēfendēbant. +9. Cum Caesar in Galliam pervēnisset, erat rūmor Helvētiīs in animō +esse iter per prōvinciam Rōmānam facere. 10. Caesar, ut eōs ab +fīnibus Rōmānis prohibēret, mūnītiōnem <span class = "tag">2</span>multa +mīlia passuum longam fēcit.</p> + +<p>II. 1. Cæsar was a general of much wisdom and great boldness, and +very skillful in the art of war. 2. The Germans were of great size, +and thought that the Romans had no power. 3. Men of the highest +courage were left in the camp as (for) a guard to the baggage. +4. The king’s daughter, who was given in marriage to the chief of a +neighboring state, was a woman of very beautiful appearance. 5. The +soldiers will construct a ditch of nine feet around the camp. 6. A +river of great width was between us and the enemy.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. From <b>vīs</b>. (Cf. <a href = +"LatinBegin2.html#sec468">§ 468</a>.)</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. Genitives and ablatives of description are adjective phrases. When we +use an <i>adverbial</i> phrase to tell <i>how long</i> or <i>how +high</i> or <i>how deep</i> anything is, we must use the accusative of +extent. (Cf. <a href = "#sec336">§ 336</a>.) For example, in the +sentence above <b>multa mīlia passuum</b> is an adverbial phrase +(accusative of extent) modifying <b>longam</b>. If we should omit +<b>longam</b> and say <i>a fortification of many miles</i>, the genitive +of description (an adjective phrase) modifying <b>mūnītiōnem</b> would +be used, as <b>mūnītiōnem multōrum mīlium passuum</b>.</div> + +<div class = "plainnote"><a href = "LatinBegin2.html#reading_LXXVI"> +Reading Selection</a></div> + +<p class = "illustration"> +<img src = "../images/pic188.png" width = "177" height = "61" +alt = "swords"><br> +<span class = "caption"> +GLADII</span></p> + + +<span class = "pagenum">189</span> +<a name = "page189"> </a> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_LXXVII"> +LESSON LXXVII</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">REVIEW OF AGREEMENT, AND OF THE GENITIVE, DATIVE, +AND ACCUSATIVE</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec448"><b>448.</b></a> +There are four agreements:</p> + +<p>1. That of the predicate noun or of the appositive with the noun to +which it belongs (<a href = "#sec76">§§ 76</a>, <a href = +"#sec81">81</a>).</p> + +<p>2. That of the adjective, adjective pronoun, or participle with its +noun (<a href = "#sec65">§ 65</a>).</p> + +<p>3. That of a verb with its subject (<a href = +"#sec28">§ 28</a>).</p> + +<p>4. That of a relative pronoun with its antecedent (<a href = +"#sec224">§ 224</a>).</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec449"><b>449.</b></a> +The relation expressed by the <b>genitive</b> is, in general, denoted in +English by the preposition <i>of</i>. It is used to express</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td class = "middle rightline"> +1. Possession +</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>a.</i> As attributive (<a href = "#sec38">§ 38</a>).</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>b.</i> In the predicate (<a href = "#sec409">§ 409</a>).</p> +</td></tr> +<tr> +<td colspan = "2"> +<p class = "hanging"> +2. The whole of which a part is taken (partitive genitive) (<a href = +"#sec331">§ 331</a>).</p> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan = "2"> +<p class = "hanging"> +3. Quality or description (<a href = "#sec443">§§ 443</a>, <a href += "#sec445">445</a>).</p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec450"><b>450.</b></a> +The relation expressed by the <b>dative</b> is, in general, denoted in +English by the prepositions <i>to</i> or <i>for</i> when they do not +imply motion through space. It is used to express</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td class = "middle rightline"> +1. The indirect object +</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>a.</i> With intransitive verbs and with transitive verbs in +connection with a direct object in the accusative (<a href = +"#sec45">§ 45</a>).</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>b</i>. With special intransitive verbs (<a href = +"#sec154">§ 154</a>).</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +<i>c</i>. With verbs compounded with <b>ad</b>, <b>ante</b>, <b>con</b>, +<b>dē</b>, <b>in</b>, <b>inter</b>, <b>ob</b>, <b>post</b>, <b>prae</b>, +<b>prō</b>, <b>sub</b>, <b>super</b> (<a href = +"#sec426">§ 426</a>).</p> +</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td colspan = "2"> +<p class = "hanging"> +2. The object to which the quality of an adjective is directed (<a href += "#sec143">§ 143</a>).</p> +</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td colspan = "2"> +<p class = "hanging"> +3. The purpose, or end for which, often with a second dative denoting +the person or thing affected (<a href = "#sec437">§ 437</a>).</p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<span class = "pagenum">190</span> +<a name = "page190"> </a> +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec451"><b>451.</b></a> +The <b>accusative</b> case corresponds, in general, to the English +objective. It is used to express</p> + +<p>1. The direct object of a transitive verb (<a href = +"#sec37">§ 37</a>).</p> + +<p>2. The predicate accusative together with the direct object after +verbs of <i>making, choosing, falling, showing</i>, and the like (<a +href = "#sec392">§ 392</a>).</p> + +<p>3. The subject of the infinitive (<a href = +"#sec214">§ 214</a>).</p> + +<p>4. The object of prepositions that do not govern the ablative (<a +href = "#sec340">§ 340</a>).</p> + +<p>5. The duration of time and the extent of space (<a href = +"#sec336">§ 336</a>).</p> + +<p>6. The place to which (<a href = "#sec263">§§ 263</a>, <a href = +"#sec266">266</a>).</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec452"><b>452.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>I. 1. Mīlitēs quōs vīdimus dīxērunt imperium bellī esse Caesaris +imperātōris. 2. Helvētiī statuērunt quam<span class = +"tag">1</span> maximum numerum equōrum et carrōrum cōgere. +3. Tōtīus Galliae Helvētiī plūrimum valuērunt. 4. Multās hōrās +ācriter pugnātum est neque quisquam poterat vidēre hostem fugientem. +5. Virī summae virtūtis hostīs decem mīlia passuum īnsecūtī sunt. +6. Caesar populō Rōmānō persuāsit ut sē cōnsulem creāret. +7. Victōria exercitūs erat semper imperātōrī grātissima. +8. Trīduum iter fēcērunt et Genāvam, in oppidum<span class = +"tag">2</span> hostium, pervēnērunt. 9. Caesar audīvit Germānōs +bellum Gallīs intulisse. 10. Magnō ūsuī mīlitibus Caesaris erat +quod priōribus proeliīs sēsē exercuerant.</p> + +<p>II. 1. One<span class = "tag">3</span> of the king’s sons and many of +his men were captured. 2. There was no one who wished<span class = +"tag">4</span> to appoint her queen. 3. The grain supply was always +a care (for a care) to Cæsar, the general. 4. I think that the camp +is ten miles distant. 5. We marched for three hours through a very +dense forest. 6. The plan <span class = "tag">5</span>of making war +upon the allies was not pleasing to the king. 7. When he came to +the hill he fortified it <span class = "tag">6</span>by a twelve-foot +wall.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. What is the force of <b>quam</b> with superlatives?</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. <b>urbs</b> or <b>oppidum</b>, appositive to a name of a town, takes +a preposition.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. What construction is used with numerals in preference to the +partitive genitive?</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +4. What mood? (Cf. <a href = "#sec390">§ 390</a>.)</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +5. Use the gerund or gerundive.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +6. Latin, <i>by a wall of twelve feet.</i></div> + + +<span class = "pagenum">191</span> +<a name = "page191"> </a> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_LXXVIII"> +LESSON LXXVIII</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">REVIEW OF THE ABLATIVE</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec453"><b>453.</b></a> +The relations of the ablative are, in general, expressed in English by +the prepositions <i>with</i> (or <i>by</i>), <i>from</i> (or <i>by</i>), +and <i>in</i> (or <i>at</i>). The constructions growing out of these +meanings are</p> + +<table class = "fixed"> +<tr> +<td colspan = "2"> +<b>I. Ablative rendered <i>with</i> (or <i>by</i>):</b> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +<span class = "inset"> </span> +</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +1. Cause (<a href = "#sec102">§ 102</a>)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +2. Means (<a href = "#sec103">§ 103</a>)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +3. Accompaniment (<a href = "#sec104">§ 104</a>)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +4. Manner (<a href = "#sec105">§ 105</a>)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +5. Measure of difference (<a href = "#sec317">§ 317</a>)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +6. With a participle (ablative absolute) (<a href = +"#sec381">§ 381</a>)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +7. Description or quality (<a href = "#sec444">§§ 444</a>, <a href += "#sec445">445</a>)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +8. Specification (<a href = "#sec398">§ 398</a>)</p> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan = "2"> +<b>II. Ablative rendered <i>from</i> (or <i>by</i>):</b> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +<span class = "inset"> </span> +</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +1. Place from which (<a href = "#sec179">§§ 179</a>, <a href = +"#sec264">264</a>)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +2. Ablative of separation (<a href = "#sec180">§ 180</a>)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +3. Personal agent with a passive verb (<a href = +"#sec181">§ 181</a>)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +4. Comparison without <b>quam</b> (<a href = "#sec309">§ 309</a>) +</p> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan = "2"> +<b>III. Ablative rendered <i>in</i> (or <i>at</i>):</b> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +<span class = "inset"> </span> +</td> +<td> +<p class = "hanging"> +1. Place at or in which (<a href = "#sec265">§§ 265</a>, <a href = +"#sec266">266</a>)</p> +<p class = "hanging"> +2. Time when or within which (<a href = "#sec275">§ 275</a>)</p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec454"><b>454.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>I. 1. Gallī locīs superiōribus occupātīs itinere exercitum prohibēre +cōnantur. 2. Omnēs oppidānī ex oppidō ēgressī salūtem fugā petere +incēpērunt. 3. Caesar docet sē mīlitum vītam suā salūte habēre +multō cāriōrem. 4. Cum celerius omnium opīniōne pervēnisset, hostēs +ad eum obsidēs mīsērunt 5. Vīcus in valle positus montibus +altissimīs undique continētur. 6. Plūrimum inter Gallōs haec gēns +et virtūte et hominum numerō valēbat. 7. Secundā vigiliā nūllō +certō ōrdine neque imperiō ē castrīs ēgressī sunt. 8. Duābus +legiōnibus Genāvae relictīs, +<span class = "pagenum">192</span> +<a name = "page192"> </a> +proximō diē cum reliquīs domum profectus est. 9. Erant itinera duo +quibus itineribus Helvētiī domō exīre possent. 10. Rēx erat summā +audāciā et magnā apud populum potentiā. 11. Gallī timōre servitūtis +commōtī bellum parābant. 12. Caesar monet lēgātōs ut contineant +militēs, nē studiō pugnandī aut spē praedae longius<span class = +"tag">1</span> prōgrediantur. 13. Bellum ācerrimum ā Caesare in +Gallōs gestum est.</p> + +<p>II. 1. The lieutenant after having seized the mountain restrained his +(men) from battle. 2. All the Gauls differ from each other in laws. +3. This tribe is much braver than the rest. 4. This road is +<span class = "tag">2</span>ten miles shorter than that. 5. In +summer Cæsar carried on war in Gaul, in winter he returned to Italy. +6. At midnight the general set out from the camp with three +legions. 7. I fear that you cannot protect<span class = +"tag">3</span> yourself from these enemies. 8. <span class = +"tag">4</span>After this battle was finished peace was made by all the +Gauls.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. <b>longius</b>, <i>too far</i>. (Cf. <a href = +"#sec305">§ 305</a>.)</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. Latin, <i>by ten thousands of paces</i>.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. <b>dēfendere</b>.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +4. Ablative absolute.</div> + + +<h5 class = "chapter"><a name = "lesson_LXXIX"> +LESSON LXXIX</a></h5> + +<h6 class = "boldf">REVIEW OF THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE, THE INFINITIVE, +AND THE SUBJUNCTIVE</h6> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec455"><b>455.</b></a> +The gerund is a verbal noun and is used only in the genitive, dative, +accusative, and ablative singular. The constructions of these cases are +in general the same as those of other nouns (<a href = +"#sec402">§§ 402</a>; <a href = "#sec406">406.1</a>).</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec456"><b>456.</b></a> +The gerundive is a verbal adjective and must be used instead of gerund + +object, excepting in the genitive and in the ablative without a +preposition. Even in these instances the gerundive construction is more +usual (<a href = "#sec406">§ 406.2</a>).</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec457"><b>457.</b></a> +The infinitive is used:</p> + +<p>I. As in English.</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>a.</i> As subject or predicate nominative (<a href = +"#sec216">§ 216</a>).</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>b.</i> To complete the predicate with verbs of incomplete predication +(complementary infinitive) (<a href = "#sec215">§ 215</a>).</p> + +<p class = "note"> +<i>c.</i> As object with subject accusative after verbs of <i>wishing, +commanding, forbidding</i>, and the like (<a href = +"#sec213">§ 213</a>).</p> + +<p> +<span class = "pagenum">193</span> +<a name = "page193"> </a> +II. In the principal sentence of an indirect statement after verbs of +<i>saying </i>and <i>mental action</i>. The subject is in the accusative +(<a href = "#sec416">§§ 416</a>, <a href = "#sec418">418</a>, <a +href = "#sec419">419</a>).</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec458"><b>458.</b></a> +The subjunctive is used:</p> + +<p>1. To denote purpose (<a href = "#sec349">§§ 349</a>, <a href = +"#sec366">366</a>, <a href = "#sec372">372</a>).</p> + +<p>2. To denote consequence or result (<a href = +"#sec385">§§ 385</a>, <a href = "#sec386">386</a>).</p> + +<p>3. In relative clauses of characteristic or description (<a href = +"#sec390">§ 390</a>).</p> + +<p>4. In <b>cum</b> clauses of time, cause, and concession (<a href = +"#sec396">§ 396</a>).</p> + +<p>5. In indirect questions (<a href = "#sec432">§ 432</a>).</p> + +<p class = "section"> +<a name = "sec459"><b>459.</b></a> +<span class = "midfat">EXERCISES</span></p> + +<p>I. 1. Caesar, cum pervēnisset, militēs hortābātur nē cōnsilium oppidī +capiendi omitterent. 2. Rēx, castrīs prope oppidum positīs, mīsit +explōrātōrēs quī cognōscerent ubi exercitus Rōmanus esset. 3. Nēmo +relinquēbātur quī arma ferre posset. 4. Nūntiī vīdērunt ingentem +armōrum multitudinem dē mūrō in fossani iactam esse. 5. Dux suōs +trānsīre flūmen iussit. Trānsīre autem hoc flūmen erat difficillimum. +6. Rōmānī cum hanc calamitātem molestē ferrant, tamen terga vertere +recūsāvērunt. 7. Hōc rūmōre audītō, tantus terror omnium animōs +occupāvit ut nē fortissimī quidem proelium committere vellent. +8. Erant quī putārent tempus annī idōneum nōn esse itinerī +faciendō. 9. Tam ācriter ab utraque parte pugnābātur ut multa mīlia +hominum occīderentur. 10. Quid timēs? Timeō nē Rōmānīs in animō sit +tōtam Galliam superāre et nōbīs iniūriās inferre.</p> + +<p>II. 1. Do you not see who is standing on the wall? 2. We hear +that the plan of taking the town has been given up. 3. Since the +Germans thought that the Romans could not cross the Rhine, Cæsar ordered +a bridge to be made. 4. When the bridge was finished, the savages +were so terrified that they hid themselves. 5. They feared that +Cæsar would pursue them. 6. Cæsar <span class = "tag">1</span>asked +the traders what the size of the island was. 7. The traders advised +him not <span class = "tag">2</span>to cross the sea. 8. He sent +scouts <span class = "tag">3</span>to choose a place for a camp.</p> + +<div class = "footnote"> +1. <b>quaerere ab</b>.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +2. Not infinitive.</div> + +<div class = "footnote"> +3. Use the gerundive with <b>ad</b>.</div> + +</body> +</html> |